ia 

I 


BRARY 

VERSITY  OF 
^UKORNIA 

<H  DIEGO 


Digitized  by  tine  Intern-et  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcli  ive.org/details/connectedpassageOOmatliiala 


Moxxie  mti  ifflorsan's  Eatiu  Series 

ED/TED  FOR   USE  IN  SCHOOLS   AND   COLLEGES 
UNDER   THE   SUPERVISION    OF 

EDWARD   P.  MORRIS.  L.H.D., 

PROFESSOR   OF  LATIN   IN   YALE   UNIVERSITY 
AND 

MORRIS    H.    MORGAN,   Ph.D., 

PROFESSOR  OF  CLASSICAL   PHILOLOGY   IN   HARVARD   UNIVERSITY 


VOLUMES   OF  THE   SERIES 

Essentials  of  Latin  for  Beginners.  Henry  C.  Pearson,  Teachers 
College,  New  York.      90  cents. 

A  School  Latin  Grammar.  Morris  H.  Morgan,  Harvard  University. 
$1.00. 

A  First  Latin  Writer.     M.  A.  Abbott,  Groton  School.     60  cents. 

Connected  Passages  for  Latin  Prose  Writing.  Maurice  W. 
Mather,  formerly  of  Harvard  University,  and  Arthur  L.  Wheeler,  Bryn 
Mawr  College.      ;^  1 .  00 . 

Caesar.  Episodes  from  the  Gallic  and  Civil  Wars.  Maurice 
W.  Mather,  formerly  of  Harvard   University.      $1.25. 

Cicero.     Ten  Orations  and   Selected  Letters.     J.  Remsen  Bishop, 

Eastern   High  School,  Detroit,   Frederick  A.  King,  Hughes  High  School, 

Cincinnati,  and  Nathan  W.  Helm,   Evanston  Academy  of  Northwestern 

University.      $1.25. 

Six  Orations.     |i.oo. 
Selections  from  Latin  Prose  Authors  for  Sight  Reading.     Susan 

Braley  Franklin  and  Ella  Catherine  Greene,  Miss  Baldwin's  School,  Bryn 

Mawr.      40  cents. 
Cicero.     Cato  Maior.      P'rank  G.  Moore,   Columbia  University.   80  cents. 
Cicero.      Laelius  de  Amicitia.      Clifton  Price,  University  of  California. 

75  cents. 

Selections  from  Livy.     Harry  E.  Burton,  Dartmouth  College.     $1.50. 
Horace.      Odes  and  Epodes.      Clifford  H.  Moore,  Harvard  University. 

Horace.      Satires.       Edward   P.   Morris,   Yale   University,     ^i.oo. 

Horace.      Satires  and  Epistles.      Edward  P    Morris,  Yale  University. 

^1.25. 
Horace.     Odes,  Epodes,  and  Carmen  Saeculare,  Moore.    Satires 

and  Epistles,  Morris.      In  one  volume.     ^2.00. 
Pliny's  Letters.      Albert  A.  Howard,  Harvard  University. 
Tibullus.      Kirby  F.  Smith,  Johns  Hopkins  University. 
Lucretius.      William  A.  Merrill,  University  of  California.     $2.25. 
Latin    Literature    of  the    Empire.     Alfred   Gudeman,    University  of 

Pennsylvania. 

Vol.  I.      Prose:   Velleius  to  Boethius $1.80 

Vol.  II.    Poetry:   Pseudo-Vergiliana  to  Claudianus $1.80 

Selections  from  the  Public  and  Private  Law  of  the  Romans. 

James  J.  Robinson,  Hotchkiss  School.     $1.25. 

Others  to  be  announced  later. 


CONNECTED    PASSAGES 

FOR 

LATIN    PROSE    WRITING 


FULL   INTRODUCTORY  NOTES    ON  IDIOM 


BV 


MAURICE  W.j  MATHER.  Ph.D. 

FORMERLY   INSTRUC'IOR  IN  CXTIN  IN  HARVARD  UNIVERSITY 
AND 

ARTHUR.  L.  WHEELER,  Ph.D. 

i-ROFESSOR   OF   LATIN   IN   BRYN   MAWR  COLLEGE 


NEW  YORK  .!•  CINCINNATI  .:•  CHICAGO 
AMERICAN    BOOK    COMPANY 


Copyright,  1899,  by  Harper  &  Brothers. 

All  rights  reserved. 
W.  P.     8 


PREFACE 

In  planning  the  present  book  it  has  been  the  aim  of  the  authors 
to  present  within  two  covers  all  the  essential  apparatus  for  the  writ- 
ing of  average  passages  in  Latin  prose.  By  including  in  the  Notes 
on  Idiom  the  requisite  body  of  syntax,  stated  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  student  who  is  to  write  Latin,  they  have  dispensed  with  the 
ordinary  system  of  reference  to  three  or  four  Latin  grammars. 
They  believe  that  in  this  way  not  only  much  time  will  be  saved, 
but  that  the  added  convenience  will  produce  more  accurate  res^llt•^. 
since  both  student  and  teacher  may  refer  instantly  to  the  st;ite- 
ment  of  any  of  the  ordinary  principles  involved.  The  addition  of 
the  Latin  text  tends  to  the  same  end,  and  it  is  hoped  that  for  the 
exercises  contained  in  this  volume  the  student  will  rarely  find 
it  necessary  to  refer  to  anything  not  included  in  the  volume 
itself. 

The  book  i§  not  intended  to  teach  how  to  write  isolated  sentences 
illustrative  of  given  constructions,  but  it  assumes  that  the  pupil, 
after  a  year  or  more  of  such  practice  (the  time  varying  in  differ- 
ent schools),  is  ready  to  learn  the  art  of  writing  connected  narra- 
tive in  Latin.  Recognizing  that,  in  order  to  attain  perfection  in 
writing  any  language,  good  models  must  be  studied,  the  authors 
have  based  their  exercises  on  Caesar,  Nepos,  and  Cicero,  such 
selections  from  these  writers  being  taken  as  are  usually  read  in 
schools.  About  a  page  of  Latin  text  serves  as  a  model  for  each 
exercise. 

As  the  book  is  not  for  beginners,  the  individual  exercises  have 
not  been  made  vehicles  for  teaching  any  one  or  two  constructions, 
such  as  the  ablative  absolute,  purpose,  etc.;  but  the  authors  have 
felt  at  liberty  to  introduce  at  any  time  even  the  more  difficult  con- 


VI  I'KI'IWCIC 

structions.  Indirect  discourse,  for  instance,  is  taken  up  at  the  verv 
beginning.  But  this  will  not  be  found  to  occasion  too  much  diffi- 
culty, for  constant  reference  is  made  to  the  notes  on  Latin  idiom 
(pp.  1-69),  where  the  construction  needed  is  briefly  explained  from 
the  point  of  view  of  a  writer,  not  a  reader  or  translator,  of  Latin. 
At  the  same  time,  the  principle  of  gradation  has  been  followed  to 
some  extent,  especially  in  the  exercises  based  on  the  third  book  of 
the  Gallic  War,  the  Alcibiades,  and  the  Manilian  Law.  While,  in 
general,  the  vocabulary  and  the  constructions  for  any  exercise  will 
be  supplied  in  the  Latin  text  on  which  the  given  exercise  is  based, 
yet  enough  variation  from  the  language  of  the  model  is  required  to 
give  the  pupil  abundant  practice  in  handling  forms  and  construc- 
tions. Where  tlie  vocabulary  of  the  model  is  not  sufficient,  occa- 
sionally the  Latin  word  is  given  in  a  footnote;  more  frequently, 
however,  a  synonym  or  hint  is  given  in  English,  or,  when  possible, 
the  pupil  is  referred  to  a  preceding  section  in  the  Latin  text  where 
the  word  is  found  or  at  least  suggested.  By  this  means  the  pupil's 
power  of  observation  is  increased,  his  interest  is  quickened  by  the 
pleasure  of  discovery,  and  he  will  remember  the  word  much  better 
than  if  he  found  it  ready  at  hand  in  a  dictionary.  It  will  be  seen, 
therefore,  that  for  work  of  this  grade  an  English-Latin  dictionary  is 
quite  unnecessary.  Indeed,  the  use  of  such  a  book  would  mean  the 
loss  of  no  inconsiderable  part  of  the  training  which  is  supplied  by 
the  study  of  Latin  writing. 

In  the  Notes  on  Idiom  no  constructions  have  been  explained  ex- 
cept such  as  are  common  in  prose.  The  illustrative  examples  are 
almost  all,  with  the  exception  of  the  very  simplest,  taken  from  the 
authors  who  serve  as  models  for  the  exercises.  It  did  not  seem 
worth  while  to  cite  the  references,  as  doubtless  the  larger  number 
of  the  examples  will  be  familiar  to  most  teachers. 

A  number  of  recent  examination  papers  from  various  colleges 
have  been  inserted,  in  the  belief  that  they  will  be  found  useful  for 
sight  tests  and  occasional  examinations.  The  notes  accompanying 
some  of  the  papers  belong  to  the  original  examinations.  For  the 
text  of  the  Latin  models  the  small  Teubner  series  has  been  fol- 
lowed.    The  punctuation  has   been  changed,  however,  to  conform 


PREFACE  vii 

to  the  custom  in  English,  and  one  /  has  been  written  in  the  genitive 
of  nouns  in  -ius  and  -///;«. 

In  conclusion,  the  authors  wish  to  express  their  hearty  thanks  to 
the  teachers  who  have  kindly  furnished  them  with  the  examination 
papers  used  in  the  book.  Especial  gratitude  is  due  the  editors  of 
this  series,  Professors  Morris  and  Morgan,  whose  many  kind  criti- 
cisms and  helpful  suggestions  have  been  invaluable.  The  authors 
will  be  glad  to  receive  from  teachers  who  use  the  book  any  correc 
tions  or  suggestions  whereby  its  usefulness  may  be  increased. 

M.  W.  M. 
A.  L.  W. 
Cambridge  and  New  Haven,  March,  1899 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE  BOOK 

Before  attempting  to  write  out  an  exercise  the  pupil  should  read 
carefully,  aloud  if  possible,  the  Latin  text  which  serves  as  a  model 
for  the  exercise.  Noting  in  every  sentence  the  way  the  Latin  writer 
states  his  thought,  let  him  consider  how  in  English  the  same  idea 
would  be  expressed  idiomatically  and  naturally.  The  use  of  so- 
called  "translation  English"  is  to  be  avoided.  The  teacher  may 
point  out,  in  assigning  each  lesson,  certain  sentences  in  the  Latin 
model  in  which  the  Latin  and  the  English  idioms  are  peculiarly 
unlike.'  The  ablative  absolute,  for  instance,  can  only  rarely  be 
translated  literally  (see  the  examples  in  §§  125  f.  of  the_  Notes  on 
Idiom).  Frequently  a  relative  pronoun  is  employed  in  Latin  where 
a  demonstrative  or  a  personal  pronoun  is  demanded  in  English  (see 
§  288).  Again,  two  or  three  English  sentences  may  become  a  sin- 
gle sentence  in  Latin  (see  §  296),  etc.  When  a  thorough  familiarity 
has  thus  been  acquired  with  the  given  passage  of  Latin,  the  pupil 
should  drop  the  model  entirely  for  the  time  being,  and  read  over 
the  English  exercise  from  beginning  to  end.  Then  before  he  writes 
a  single  word,  let  him  rapidly  translate  the  exercise  mentally  and 
without  any  assistance,  even  from  the  footnotes.  If  a  word  or  a 
phrase  cannot  be  recalled,  it  may  be  disregarded  for  the  moment. 
After  running  through  the  exercise  in  this  way,  the  pupil  may  get 
such  help  as  he  can  from  the  notes,  the  Latin  text,  or  a  Latin-Eng- 
lish {itot  English-Latin)  dictionary. 


'  Sometimes  a  chapter  of  the  Latin  text  will  be  found  to  epitomize 
very  well  a  group  of  constructions, — e.  g.,  Alcibiades  \  illustrates  several 
different  constructions  of  place.  Attention  is  occasionally  called  to 
this  in  the  notes  to  the  exercises  (see  Exercise  35),  and  the  teacher  is 
advised  to  do  all  he  can  in  this  direction.  By  use  of  the  indexes  the 
teacher  can  easily  supplement  the  grammatical  references  of  any  less<jii. 


X  SUGGESTIONS  FOR   THE    USE   OF   THE    BOOK 

At  last,  when  he  has  gained  all  the  information  possible  about 
the  exercise,  he  is  ready  to  write  out  his  Latin  version.  He  should 
never  forget  that  he  is  to  produce  one  continuous  piece  of  Latin, 
not  merely  disconnected  sentences.  Let  him  observe  with  great 
care,  therefore,  the  ways  in  which  his  Latin  model  begins  each  new 
sentence  so  as  to  make  the  thought  follow  on  naturally  and  easily 
from  the  preceding  sentence.  Let  him  also  remember  that  the  im- 
portant word  of  each  phrase,  clause,  or  sentence,  should  stand  at, 
or  near,  the  beginning;  and  that,  furthermore,  the  sentence  should 
be  so  arranged  that,  when  read  aloud,  it  presents  a  pleasing  succes- 
sion of  sounds  to  the  ear.  At  the  same  time,  due  attention  should 
be  given  to  the  periodic  structure  of  sentences,  an  arrangement 
much  more  characteristic  of  Latin  than  of  English.  Especial  em- 
phasis is  to  be  laid  on  the  mastery  of  §§  284-297,  in  which  the 
arrangement  of  the  Latin  sentence  is  treatedr 


PART  I 

NOTES    ON    IDIOM 

I.  Adjectives 

1.  Agreement.  An  attributive  adjective  belonging  to 
two  or  more  nouns  regularly  agrees  with  the  nearest.  Non 
eadem  alacritate  et  studio,  not  with  the  same  energy  and 
seal. 

2.  A  predicate  adjective  is  regularly  plural  if  it  modifies  two  or 
mo  e  singular  subjects,  and  masculine  if  the  subjects  are  living  beings 
of  different  genders;  neuter  if  the  subjects  are  things.  Pater  sororque 
occisi  sunt,  father  and  sister  were  killed.  Ira  et  avaritia  imperio  poten- 
tiora  erant,  wra/^  and  greed  were  more  powerful  than  authority. 

Note. — If  the  nouns  represent  both  things  and  living  beings,  there  is  no  fixed 
usage. 

Predicate  adjectives  often  agree  with  the  natural  gender  of  the  subject.  Ho- 
minum  millia  sex  perterriti,  six  thousand  men  badly  frightened. 

3.  Adjectives  as  Substantives.  To  denote  a  class,  adjectives 
may  be  used  in  the  masculine  plural:  omnes,  all  men,  everybody;  ma- 
iores,  ancestors;  minores,  descendants ;  divites,  the  rich;  pauperes,  the 
poor  ;  boni,  the  good :  docti,  the  learned,  etc.  In  the  singular  a  substan- 
tive is  usually  expressed :  docti,  the  learned,  but  vir  doctus,  the  learned 
man. 

4.  The  use  of  neuter  plural  adjectives  as  substantives  is  common 
only  in  the  nominative  and  accusative.  In  the  other  cases  the  form  is 
ambiguous  —  i.  e.,  omnibus  may  be  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter.  In 
such  cases  it  is  better  to  use  the  proper  form  of  res :  omnium  rerum, 
not  omnium,  as  genitive  of  omnia.  These  neuter  plurals  often  repre- 
sent English  abstract  singulars:  vtvA,  truth;  iaXsa.,  falsehood,  ttc. 


2  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

5.  Comparatives  and  Superlatives.  Such  phrases  as 
too  severe,  rather  too  talkative,  etc.,  may  be  rendered  by  the 
simple  comparative :  gravior,  loquacior,  etc. 

6.  If  two  qualities  belonging  to  the  same  object  are  compared,  Latin 
generally  expresses  both  by  the  comparativ^e.  Fortior  est  quam  pru- 
dentior,  he  is  tnore  brave  tha)t  prudent. 

7.  The  most  common  way  of  strengthening  the  compara- 
tive is  by  multo.  With  the  superlative,  longe  is  a  common 
word,  Multo  nobilior,  much  nobler,  but  longe  nobilissimus 
fuit  Orgetorix,  Orgetorix  zvas  by  far  the  noblest. 

8.  Phrases  like  as  great  as  possible,  as  many  as  possible,  etc., 
are  rendered  by  quam  (with  or  without  a  form  of  possum) 
and  a  superlative.  Quam  plurimi,  as  many  as  possible.  Quam 
maxime  or  quam  maxima  potest,  as  greatly  as  possible. 

9.  The  English  7>ery  is  rendered  by  the  simple  superlative  or  the 
superlative  with  vel.    Virtus  summa,  or  vel  summa,  very  great  valor. 

10.  Some  Latin  adjectives  are  used  in  direct  agreement  with  a  noun 
to  denote  part  of  an  object,  where  the  English  employs  a  noun  with  oj. 
Sumtnus  mons,  the  top  of  the  mountain.  Per  mediam  urbem,  through 
the  midst  of  the  city.  So  multus,  much  {of);  extremus,  etid  {of) ;  nullus, 
none  {of);  totus,  imus,  infimus,  intimus,  postremus,  ultimus,  reliquus, 
primus. 

2.  Pronouns 

11.  Personal  Pronouns.  These  are  not  expressed  ex- 
cept for  emphasis  or  to  avoid  ambiguity.  Lego,  legimus,  / 
read,  we  read,  but  ego  tibi  ignoGcam?  am  I  to  pardon  you  f 

12.  The  genitive  forms  mei,  tui,  sui,  (plural)  vestri,  nostri,  are  chiefly 

used  as  objective  genitives.  Habetis  ducem  memorem  vestri,  you  have 
a  teader  mindful  of  you.  But  the  genitive  plural  forms  in  -um  (nostrum 
and  vestrum)  are  generally  used  as  partitive  genitives.  Designat  oculis 
ad  caedem  unum  guemgue  nostrum,  he  marks  each  one  of  us  for  slaughter. 


PRONOUNS  3 

13.  The  genitive  of  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  does  not 
express  possession  (12).     For  this  purpose  possessives  are  used.    Amor 

mei,  lave  for  me  (objective),  but  meus  amor,  tny  love  (for  some  one  else). 

* 
Note. — Latin  has  no  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  except  se  (used 

only  as  a  reflexive).     Where  necessary,  this  want  is  supplied  by  a  demonstrative  or 

relative  pronoun  (22). 

14.  Where  several  persons  are  represented  by  pronouns  in  Latin  the 
pronoun  of  the  first  person  stands  first,  reversing  the  English  order. 
Ego  et  tu  et  tuus  ixsXex,  you,  your  brother,  and  I. 

15.  Demonstratives.  Hie,  this,  refers  to  what  is  near  the 
speaker,  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  first  person. 
It  often  refers  to  the  present  as  contrasted  with  the  past. 
Haec  tempera,  modern  times,  the  present  times.  Ad  banc 
aetatem,  to  the  present  time. 

Closely  allied  is  the  use  of  ille  .  .  .  hie,  the  former  (more 
distant)  .  .  .  the  latter  (nearer).  Curio  dieebat  bos  tur- 
pissimae  fugae  rationem  habere,  illos  etiam  iniquo  loco 
dimicandum  putare.  Curio  said  that  the  latter  (bos)  ivcre 
planning  a  most  disgraceful  flight,  the  former  (illos)  thought 
they  ought  to  give  battle  even  in  an  unfavorable  position. 

16.  Hie  often  refers  to  what  follows,  the  following.  Eius 
belli  baee  fuit  eausa,  the  cause  of  the  war  was  as  follows. 

Hie  may  also  refer  to  what  precedes,  the  above,  the  preced- 
ing. Huie  legioni  Caesar  indulserat  praeeipue,  Caesar  had 
favored  this  (the  before-mentioned)  legion  especially. 

17.  Iste,  that  (of  yours),  generally  refers  to  that  which  con- 
cerns the  second  person,  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of 
the  second  person.  Extra  istam  zo\\\\sv2X\ox\^vs\^  outside  that 
conspiracy  of  yours. 

18.  Iste  often  has  a  contemptuous  or  sneering  tone.  Iste 
Manlius,  that  {fellow)  Manlius  of  yours.  This  tone  is  apt  to 
remain  where  iste  refers  to  the  third  person.     Istae  copiae, 

those  forces  of  his.     Compare  the  English  "such." 


4  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

19.  Ille,  that,  represents  what  is  at  a  distance  from  the 
speaker.  It  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  person, 
that  of  his,  hers,  theirs.  Dux  mei  reditus,  illius  hostis,  a 
leader  in  effecting  my  return,  an  enemy  of  that  man. 

20.  Ille  often  refers  to  that  which  is  well  known  or  has  been 
mentioned.  Ille  Romulus,  the  zvcll-known  Romulus.  Aquila 
ilia  argentea,  that  notorious  silver  eagle. 

21.  The  corresponding  adverbs  hie,  illic,  istic,  hue,  illinc,  etc.,  often 

maintain  the  same  personal  relations.     Hue,  to  this  place  (where  /  am). 
Illinc,  from  that  place  (where  he  is).     Istie,  there  (where  you  are),  etc. 

22.  Is,  that,  not  so  strong  as  hie  or  ille,  is  used  as  a  pronoun  of  the 
third  person  where  one  needs  to  be  expressed  (13  N.)  and  as  an  antece- 
dent of  the  relative  qui :  is  qui,  he  who,  etc. 

23.  Is  has  often  the  force  of  talis,  such.  Est  enim  nobis  is  animus, 
Quirites,  ut,  etc.,  we  have  such  spirit  that,  etc.  This  use  is  frequent 
when  a  relative  or  ut  follows. 

24.  "  That  of"  is  not  to  be  expressed  by  is  and  a  genitive,  but  by  a 
genitive  alone  or  by  repeating  the  noun  to  which  "■that"  refers.  Con- 
sidius,  qui  et  in  exercitu  L.  Sullae  et  postea  in  M.  Crassi  fuerat,  Coft' 
sidius,  who  had  been  in  the  army  of  Lucius  Sulla  and  later  in  that  of  {not. 
in  eo)  Marcus  Crassus. 

25.  Reflexives.  The  reflexives  of  the  first  and  second 
persons  are  the  ordinary  personal  pronouns.  Me  consoler,  / 
comfort  myself.  Vobis  persuadetis,  you  convince  yourselves. 
But  for  the  third  person  is  (22)  is  not  used  refiexively.  In- 
stead there  is  a  special  reflexive,  sui,  sibi,  se,  self,  together 
with  its  corresponding  possessive  suus,  his,  hers,  theirs,  its. 

26.  When  the  reflexive  se  refers  to  the  subject  of  its  own 
clause,  its  use  is  simple.  Patria  vobis  se  commendat,  your 
country  commends  herself  to  you. 

27.  The  reflexive  may  stand  in  a  subordinate  clause  and 
refer  to  the  subject  of  the  principal  clause  (indirect  reflexive). 


PRONOUNS  5 

Ariovistus  respondit  neminem  secum  sine  sua  pernicie 
contendisse,  Ariovistus  answered  that  tio  one  had  fou^^ht  with 
him  (Ariovistus,  secum)  without  his  own  (sua  refers  to  nemi- 
nem) destruction.  Here  secum  is  indirect  reflexive  referring 
back  to  the  subject  of  the  main  clause,  Ariovistus,  while  sua 
is  direct  reflexive,  referring  to  the  subject  of  its  own  clause, 
neminem. 

The  indirect  reflexive  can  be  used  only  in  subordinate 
clauses  representing  the  words  or  thought  of  the  subject  of  the 
7nain  clause;  e.  g.,  the  infinitive  clause  above  represents  the 
words  of  Ariovistus*  Nemo  mecum  contendit,  no  one  has 
fought  with  me,  etc. 

28.  Reciprocals.  Latin  has  no  exclusively  reciprocal 
pronoun  like  the  Greek  aXK'qKwv,  of  one  another.  The  re- 
ciprocal relation  is  expressed  most  commonly  by  inter  nos, 
inter  vos,  inter  se.  Hi  omnes  inter  se  differunt,  «//  these 
differ  from  one  another.  Nos  amamus  inter  nos,  we  love  one 
another.  Note  that  no  object  is  expressed  with  these  phrases. 
(For  alius  .  .  .  alius,  and  alter  .  .  ,  alter,  see  45). 

29.  Ipse,  self,  separates  with  emphasis  the  substantive  to 
which  it  belongs  from  all  others.  But  ipse  often  emphasizes 
the  reflexive,  standing  in  the  nominative  rather  than  in  agree- 
ment with  the  reflexive.  Neque  abest  suspicio  quin  ipse 
sibi  mortem  consciverit,  and  the  suspicion  is  not  lacking  that 
he  contrived  his  own  death.  So  ipse  me  laudo,  /  praise  my- 
self {vioX.  me  ipsum). 

30.  Ipse  may  represent  various  English  idioms.  Ipse  aderat,  he  was 
present  in  person.  Ipso  tempore,  at  the  very  time.  Ipsa  audacia,  by 
mere  audacity.  Valvae  se  ipsae  aperuerunt,  the  doors  opened  of  their  own 
accord. 

31.  Idem,  same,  often  renders  the  English  at  the  same  time ;  like- 
7uise,  also  ;  however,  nevertheless,  etc.  Quidquid  honestum  est,  idem  est 
utile,  'd'hatever  is  honorable  is  at  the  same  time  advantageous.     Inventi 


6  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

multi  sunt  qui  vitam  profundcrc  pro  patria  parati  essent,  iidem  gloriac 
iacturam  ne  minimam  quidem  facere  vellent,  tliere  have  been  found  many 
who  were  prepared  to  give  their  lives  for  their  country,  who  nevertheless 
(iidem)  were  tinwil/ing  to  suffer  er>en  the  least  loss  of  renown. 

32.  English  the  same  as  is  rendered  by  idem  qui,  ac  (or  atque,  cf.  266), 
ut,  or  cum.     De  his  eandem  fere  quam  reliquae  gentes  habent  opinionem, 

in  regard  to  these  they  have  about  the  same  belief  as  other  peoples. 

33.  POSSESSIVES.  These  are  to  be  omitted  unless  they  are 
necessary  for  clearness.  Pater  filiam  amat,  a  father  loves  his 
daughter  (suam  unnecessary).  Fratrem  vidi,  /  saw  (my) 
brother,  but  tuum  fratrem  vidi,  I  saw  your  brother. 

34.  Possessives  are  regularly  used  instead  of  a  subjective  genitive  of 
a  personal  pronoun.  The  love  I  feel,  my  love,  is  meus  amor,  not  amor  mei, 
which  means  love  for  me  (objective  genitive,  cf.  12). 

35.  Suus,  the  only  possessive  of  the  third  person,  is  always  used  re- 
flexively.  The  genitive  of  a  demonstrative,  therefore,  is  necessary  to 
render  his,  her,  their,  its,  where  these  are  not  reflexive.  Suam  matrem 
vidit, //^  saw  his  own  jnother  (reflexive),  but  matrem  eius  (or  huius,  etc.) 
vidi,  I  saw  his  mother.    The  English  his,  etc.,  has  both  uses. 

36.  Indefinite  Pronouns.    The  more  common  indefinites  are t 
aliquis  (aliqui,  37),  someone,  any  one        qmdam,  a,  a  certain 

quis  (qui,  37),  any  one  quivis,  a7iy  one  you  please 

quisquam,  any  one  quilibet,  any  one  you  please 

quispiam,  some  one,  any  one  quisque,  each 

37.  Of  the  two  forms  aliquis,  aliqui,  and  quis,  qui,  that  in  -s  is  gener- 
ally used  as  a  substantive  ;  that  in  -i  adjectively.  Aliquis  eorum,  some 
one  of  them,  but  deus  aliqui,  some  god.  So  of  the  two  neuter  forms, 
aliquid  and  quid  are  substantive,  aliquod  and  quod  adjective. 

38.  General  differences  between  quis  and  aliquis : 

a.  Quis  is  less  definite  than  aliquis  (cf.  English  any  and  some). 

b.  Quis  is  used,  with  few  exceptions,  only  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num,  and 
in  relative  sentences;  while  aliquis  is  not  often  so  used.  Uti  aliquem 
locum  colloquio  deligeret,  (they  asked  him)  to  select  some  place  for  a  con- 
ference, lure  iurando  ne  quis  enuntiaret  inter  se  sanxerunt,  they  bound 
each  other  by  an  oath  that  no  one  should  divulge  it. 


PRONOUNS  7 

39.  Quisquam  and  its  adjective  uUus  are  used  chiefly  in 
negative  sentences  or  sentences  implying  a  negative.  Nc  eo 
quidem  tempore  quisquam  loco  cessit,  7iot  even  then  did  any 
one  leave  his  place.  Et  quisquam  dubitabit  ?  and  will  any- 
body doubt  ?  (This  implies,  no  one  will  doubt))  Sine  ullo 
maleficio,  ivithout  any  injury. 

40.  Quidam,  one,  a  certain ;  ( plural)  certain,  some,  is  the 
most  definite  of  the  indefinites.  Sese  habere  quasdam  res 
quas  ab  eo  petere  vellent,  (they  said)  they  had  certain  tilings 
which  they  zvished  to  ask  of  him.  Quidam  ex  militibus,  07ie 
of  the  soldiers  (cf.  71). 

41.  Quisque  means  each  as  contrasted  with  omnis,  every. 

It  is  not  often  used  in  the  plural.     Quisque  regularly  follows 

the  word  to  which  it  belongs. 

Note. — ^^\Si:^t,each  of  several,  and  uterque,  each  of  two  only,  are  not  to 
be  confused. 

42.  Quisque  is  often  used  after  a  reflexive.  Suum  quemque  scelus 
agitat,  each  man's  own  crime  troubles  him  (his  own  crime  troubles  each). 

43.  Quisque  is  common  with  ordinals.  Quinto  quoque  anno,  every 
five  years.  Cog^oscit  non  decimum  quemque  esse  reliquum  militem  sine 
▼ulnere,  he  learns  that  not  one  7nan  in  ten  {each  tenth  man)  is  univounded. 

44.  Quisque  is  often  used  with  the  superlative.  Optimus  quisque,  every 
(rood  man,  or  all  the  best  men.     But  with  the  positive  write  omnes  boni. 

45.  Alius,  other  (of  more  than  two),  and  alter,  other  (of  two  only), 
represent  various  English  phrases.  Alter  amat,  alter  odit,  one  (of  the 
two)  loves,  the  other  hates.  Alter  alterum  odit,  one  hates  the  other  (two 
only).  Quorum  alius  alia  causa  inlata  petebat,  of  whom  one  alleging  one 
pretext,  another  another,  etc.  (more  than  two).  Alios  alii  excipiebant, 
they  relieved  each  other  {one  another),    Cf.  28. 


8  rJOTES   ON    IDIOM 

3.  Nouns 

46.  Apposition.  A  noun  in  apposition  agrees  with  the 
noun  described  in  case,  and  (so  far  as  possible)  in  gender  and 
number.  Caesari  imperatori,  to  Caesar  the  general.  Volup- 
tates,  blandissimae  dominae,  pleasures,  most  alluring  mis- 
tresses (agreement  in  gender). 

47.  An  appositive  to  two  or  more  nouns  is  in  the  plural.  M. 
Antonius,  Q.  Cassius,  tribuni  plebis,  Marcus  Antonius  and  Quintus  Cas- 
sms,  tribunes  of  the  people. 

48.  An  appositive  to  a  possessive  pronoun  is  in  the  genitive,  because 
the  possessive  implies  a  genitive.  Moleste  fero  me  tuum  studium  adules- 
centis  perspexisse,  /  am  sorry  that  I  have  tested  your  zeal  as  a  youth, 
i.  e.,  the  zeal  of  you  a  youth  (of.  34). 

49.  The  Latin  often  employs  an  appositive  where  the  English  pre- 
fers a  clause  of  time,  cause,  etc.  This  usage  is  common  with  puer,  vir, 
adulescens,  senex,  dux,  and  official  titles,  consul,  praetor,  etc.  Ego 
Q.  Maximum  senem  adulescens  ita  dilexi,  etc.,  when  a  youth  I  so  laved 
Quintus  Maximus,  who  was  then  an  old  man,  etc. 

50.  With  nomen  est  and  the  like  the  name  is  often  attracted  into  a 
sort  of  apposition  to  the  person.  Ei  nomen  erat  Marco,  his  name  was 
Marcus.  The  simple  predicate  nominative  is,  however,  not  uncommon. 
Ei  nomen  erat  Marcus.    (For  the  appositive  to  a  locative,  cf.  140.) 

51.  Predicate  Nouns.  A  predicate'  noun  is  one  con- 
nected with  the  subject  by  means  of  a  copulative  verb.  The 
most  common  copulative  verb  is  sum.'  A  predicate  noun 
agrees  with  the  subject  in  case  and,  where  possible,  in  gender. 
Caesar  est  imperator,  Caesar  is  general.  Galli  perfugae  vide- 
bantur,  the  Gauls  seemed  deserters.  Cicero  consul  creatus 
est,  Cicero  was  elected  consul. 


'  Others  are  :  fio,  become  ;  maneo,  remain  ;  videor,  seem.  Also  some 
passives  :  appellor,  be  called ;  habeor,  be  held,  regarded ;  creor,  be  elected, 
etc. 


NOUNS:   ACCUSATIVE  9 

52.  Vocative.  A  vocative  generally  follows  one  or  more 
words  of  the  address  in  which  it  stands.  Quo  usque  tandem 
abutere,  Catilina,  patientia  nostra?  how  long, pray,  Catiline, 
will  yoii  abuse  our  patience  ?  Ifi  solemn  appeals  or  in  excla- 
mations the  interjection  O  may  precede.     O  di  immortales  ! 

Accusative 
53'.   Neuter  pronouns  or  adjectives  are  frequently  used  in 
the  accusative  with  verbs  which  would  take  a  different  con- 
struction of  a  substantive.     Idte  moneo,  I  give  you  this  ivarn- 
ing  ;  but  de  officio  te  moneo,  /  warn  you  of  your  duty  {ci.  78). 

54.  Double  Accusative.  Two  accusatives  referring  to 
the  same  person  or  thing  are  frequently  used  with  verbs  of 
naming,  making,  showing,  and  the  like.  Eum  consulem 
creare,  to  elect  him  consul.  One  of  the  accusatives  may  be  an 
adjective.  Se  fortem  praebere,  to  show  himself  a  brave  man. 
In  the  passive  both  accusatives  become  nominative.  Is  con- 
sul creatur,  he  is  elected  consul. 

Common  words  admitting  this  construction  are : 
appello,  call,  name  facio,  make 

dico,  call,  appoint  reddo,'  make,  render 

noniino,  name,  nominate  praebeo,  show,  present 

creo,  elect,  create 

55.  Doceo,  teach;  rogo,  ask ;  posco,  request ;  ore,  beg; 
celo,  conceal,  often  take  an  accusative  of  the  person  and 
another  of  the  thing.  Docet  te  litteras  Latinas,  he  teaches 
you  Latin.     Te  rogo  librum,  I  ask  you  for  a  book. 

56.  Peto,  ask,  and  postulo,  demand,  take  the  ablative  of  the  person 
with  ab,  quaero  the  ablative  with  ab,  ex,  or  de.  Auxilium  a  Caesare 
petere,  to  ask  aid  from  Caesar. 

57.  To  ask  about  a  thing  is  rog^re  or  interrogare  de  aliqua  re. 


*  For  the  passive  of  reddo  use  fio.     Castra  tuta  reddere,  to  make  the 

camp  safe,  but  castra  tuta  fiunt,  the  camp  is  being  made  safe. 


lO  NOTES  ON   IDIOM 

58.  Exclamations.  An  exclamation,  if  limited  by  an 
adjective  or  genitive,  may  be  expressed  by  the  accusative. 
Me  miserum,  dear^  dear  me  ! 

Genitive 

59.  Genitive  with  Nouns.  The  dependence  of  one  noun 
upon  another  is  ordinarily  expressed  by  the  genitive.  This 
dependence  is  often,  but  not  always,  expressed  in  English  by 
of.  Eorum  dierum  consuetudine  itineris  nostri  exercitus 
perspecta,  having  noticed  our  armys  way  of  marching  in  those 
days. 

60.  If  a  noun  denoting  an  action  or  feeling  is  limited  by 
another  noun,  we  may  put  the  dependent  noun  in  the  geni- 
tive, whether  it  be  subject  or  object  of  the  action  or  feeling. 
MotJiers  love  (subjective)  or  love  for  mother  (objective)  may 
both  be  rendered  by  amor  matris. 

61.  The  objective  idea  may  be  clearly  expressed  by  means  of  a  prep- 
ositional phrase  with  in  or  erga.     Noster  in  te  amor,  our  love  for  you. 

62.  Such  expressions  as  city  of  Rome,  island  of  Paras,  etc.,  are  usu- 
ally rendered  by  an  appositive  :  urbs  Roma,  Parus  insula.  With  flumen 
the  Latin  construction  is  like  the  English.  Garumna  flumen,  the  Garonne 
river.    Flumen  Rhenus,  the  river  Rhine. 

63.  Names  of  wars  are  expressed  by  an  adjective,  as  in  English. 
Bellum  Punicum,  the  Punic  war.  Names  of  battles  by  an  adjective  or 
a  prepositional  phrase.  Pug^a  Marathonia,  the  battle  of  Marathon. 
Proelium  apud  Salamina  factum,  the  battle  of  Salamis. 

64.  Phrases  like  Cato  of  Rome  cannot  be  expressed  by  a  genitive 
in  Latin ;  an  adjective  is  required,  Cato  Romanus.  Lysander  Lace- 
daemonius,  Lysander  of  Sparta. 

65.  Genitive  of  Quality.  The  genitive  is  frequently 
used  to  express  character  or  measure.  C.  Volusenus,  vir  et 
consili  magni  et  virtutis,  Gaius  Volusciius,  a  man  of  great 


NOUNS:  GENITIVE  II 

discretion  and  merit.     Fossa  pedum  viginti,   a  trench  of 

twenty  feet  (in  width).     Tridui  via,  three  days  march. 

This  genitive  of  quality  or  description  may  be  used  only  when  it  is 
modified  by  an  adjective.  Hence,  a  man  of  dtscreiioti  is  not  to  be  ren- 
dered vir  consili,  but  vir  prudens.  Tridui  via  is  allowable  because  tridui 
is  a  compound  word,  equivalent  to  trium  dierum. 

Note. — Quality  may  often  be  expressed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative 
(cf.  117) ;  but  measure  is  to  be  expressed  by  the  genitive,  while  bodily  character- 
istics generally  require  the  ablative.  Tridui  via,  three  days'  march,  but  capillo 
sunt  promisso,  they  are  long-haired. 

66.  The  genitive  of  measure  may  not  be  used  in  dependence  upon  an 
adjective  expressing  high,  broad,  etc.;  an  accusative  of  extent  (135)  is 
required.     Fossa  xv  pedes  lata,  a  ditch  fifteen  feet  broad. 

67.  The  genitive  of  quality  does  not  often  limit  a  proper  name,  but 
depends  upon  a  common  noun  in  apposition  with  the  name.  Volusenus, 
vir  magni  consili,  Volusenus,  a  man  of  great  prudence,  is  better  than 
Volusenus  magni  consili  (cf.  118). 

68.  Note  that  Volusenus,  a  prudent  7nan  ■=.  Volusenus  prudens  or  Volu- 
senus, vir  prudens ;  Volusemts,  a  man  of  great  prudence  =  Volusenus,  vir 
magni  consili  or  vir  prudentissimus  ;  the  prudent  Volusenus  =  Volusenus 
ille  prudens  (cf.  20). 

69.  Predicate  Genitive.  The  possessive  genitive  is 
often  used  in  the  predicate.  It  is  common  with  esse  and 
facere.  Eiusdem  civitatis  fuit,  he  belonged  to  the  same  state. 
Omnem  oram  Romanae  dicionis  fecit,  he  brought  the  ivhole 
coast  under  Roman  rule. 

70.  Partitive  Genitive.  Any  whole  of  which  a  part  is 
taken  is  expressed  by  the  genitive.  This  partitive  genitive 
occurs  frequently  in  dependence  upon  neuter  adjectives  and 
pronouns,  but  only  when  they  are  in  the  nominative  or  accu- 
sative singular.  Minus  dubitationis, /^j.r//^j//«//V>«.  Tantum 
periculi,  so  much  danger.  With  adverbs.  Satis  praesidi,  de- 
fence enough 


12  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

Common  words  followed  by  this  constructfon  arc  : 

multum,  much  satis,  enough 

plus,  more  parum,  not  enough 

plurimum,  most  nihil,  nothing 

tantum,  so  much  hoc,  this 

quantum,  how  much  id,  illud,  istud,  that 

paulum,  little  quod,  quid,  which,  what 

minus,  less  aliquid,  something 
minimum,  least 

71.  More  common  than  the  partitive  genitive  with  numerals  and 
quidam  is  the  ablative  with  ex  or  de.  Unum  se  esse  ex  omni  civitate, 
(he  says)  he  is  the  only  man  of  the  whole  state.  Pauci  de  nostris  cadunt,  a 
few  of  our  men  fall.     Quidam  ex  his,  some  of  them. 

72.  If  not  a  part  merely,  but  the  whole  of  a  thing,  be  taken,  there  is 
evidently  no  occasion  for  a  partitive  genitive.    Hi  omnes,  all  of  these 

men. 

73.  Mille,  a  thousand,  is  an  indeclinable  adjective,  but  the  plural 
millia  is  a  neuter  substantive  requiring  the  genitive.  Mille  homines,  a 
thousand  men.     Duo  millia  hominum,  two  thousand  men. 

74.  Genitive  with  Adjectives.  Adjectives  of  desire, 
knoivledge,  memory,  fulness,  power,  sharing,  and  their  oppo- 
sites,  take  the  genitive  of  the  complement.  Cupidus  rerum 
novarum,  eager  for  revolution.  Rei  militaris  peritissimus, 
expert  in  the  science  of  warfare.  Plenus  spei  bonae,  full  of 
good  hope.     Praemiorum  participes,  sharers  in  the  prizes. 

Common  adjectives  of  this  class  are  : 

.avidus,  desirous,  eager  insuetus,    unaccustomed,    inexperi' 
cupidus,  desirous,  eager  enced 

conscius,  conscious,  aware  ip\tnxxs,  full 

peritus,  experienced,  skilled  inops,  destitute 

imperitus,  inexperienced,  unskilled  potens,  ruling,  controlling 

prudens,  knowing,  skilful  impotens,  unable  to  control 

imprudens,  U77suspecting,  ignorant  particeps,  sharing 

memor,  mindful,  remembering  expers,  having  no  part ,  free  from 

immemor,  nnniiudfnl.  forgetful  similis,  like,  similar 


NOUNS:  GENITIVE  1 3 

75.  Genitive  with  Verbs.  Usually  with  memini,  re- 
member, and  reminiscor,  recollect,  always  with  obliviscor, 
forget,  the  object,  if  it  denotes  persons,  is  expressed  by  the 
genitive.  Vivorum  memini,  I  remember  the  living.  Epicuri 
oblivisci,  to  forget  Epicurus. 

76.  Memini,  reminiscor,  obliviscor,  take  either  genitive  or 
accusative  of  things,  but  with  neuter  pronouns  the  accusative 
is  regularly  used  (cf.  53).  Veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci,  to 
forget  the  old  affront .  Si  id  memineritis  quod  oblivisci  non 
potestis,  if  you  bear  in  mind  that  fact  which  you  cannot  forget. 

77.  Recorder,  recall,  takes  de  and  the  ablative  of  persons,  the  accusa- 
tive (rarely  genitive)  of  things.  Velim  scire  ecquid  de  te  recordere,  / 
should  like  to  know  if  yoic  recollect  your  own  case  at  all.  Pueritiae  memo- 
riam  recordari,  to  recall  the  memory  of  childhood. 

78.  Of  verbs  meaning  to  remind,  moneo  takes  the  ablative 
with  de,  while  admoneo,  commoneo,  commonefacio  take 
either  the  ablative  with  de  or  the  genitive  ;  neuter  pronouns, 
however,  are  always  in  the  accusative  (cf.  53).  Monent  de  dis- 
cordia,  they  warn  us  in  regard  to  strife.  Nemo  est  quin  tui 
sceleris  commonefiat,  there  is  nobody  who  is  fiot  reminded  of 
your  guilt.     Eos  hoc  moneo,  I  give  them  this  warning. 

79.  Misereor,  pity,^  takes  the  genitive.  Misereri  mei,  to 
pity  me. 

80.  With  the  following  impersonal  expressions  the  object 
of  the  feeling  is  in  the  genitive  :  me  miseret,  /  pity  ;  me 
paenitet,  /  repent  of ;  me  piget,  /  am  disgusted  ivith  ;  me 
pudet,  I  am  ashamed  of ;  me  taedet,  T  am  tired  of.  Eorum 
nos  miseret,  ive  pity  them.  Quorum  eos  paenitere  necesse 
est,  of  which  they  are  obliged  to  repent. 

81.  Miseror  and  commiseror,  lament,  bewail,  take  the  accusative. 
Commiserari  fortunam  Graeciae,  to  lament  the  fortune  of  Greece. 


Miseresco  is  poetical. 


14  NOTES   ON   IDIOM 

82.  Verbs  meaning  to  accuse,  condemn,  convict^  or  acquit, 
may  take  the  genitive  of  the  charge  or  penalty.  Accusatus 
proditionis,  accused  of  treason.  Capitis  damnare  or  con- 
demnare,  to  condemn  to  death.  Levitatis  convincere,  to  con- 
vict of  inconstancy.  Capitis  absolutus,  released  from  the  peji- 
alty  of  death. 

83.  Interest,  it  is  for  the  interest  of,  it  makes  a  difference 
/tf,  takes  the  genitive  of  the  person  concerned  ;  but  in  the  case 
of  the  personal  pronouns  the  ablative  singular  feminine  of  the 
possessive  is  required.  Magis  rei  publicae  interest  quam 
mea,  it  concerns  the  public  zvelfare  more  than  me. 

The  object  of  concern,  if  an  action,  is  most  frequently  expressed  by 
an  infinitive  or  an  accusative  and  infinitive ;  if  a  thing,  by  the  accusa- 
tive with  ad.  Magni  interesse  etiam  ad  opinionem  Galliae  existimans 
tantas  videri  Italiae  facultates  ut,  etc.,  thinking  that  it  was  of  great  im- 
portance, too,  for  preserving  the  respect  of  Gaul  {the  opinion  which  Gaul 
had  of  Rome)  that  the  resources  of  Italy  should  appear  so  great  that,  etc. 

Note. — Remember  that  sua  can  be  used  only  as  a  reflexive. 

Note. — Refert,  it  is  of  advantage,  it  concents,  should  as  a  rule  be  used  only 
when  an  indirect  question  follows.  Quid  refert  qua  me  ratione  cogatis  ?  what 
matters  it  liow  you  compel  me  ? 

84.  Indefinite  value  is  expressed  by  the  genitive  of  certain 
adjectives  of  quantity  and  of  a  few  nouns;  as,  magni,  pluris, 
plurimi  or  maximi,  parvi,  minoris,  minimi,  tanti,  quanti, 
nihili,  flocci,  and  a  few  others.  Magni  opera  eiusexistimata 
est,  his  services  ivere  highly  valued.  Frumentum  tanti  fuit 
quanti  iste  aestimavit,  corii  was  as  high  as  that  felloiv  rated 
it,     Non  fiocci  facie,  I dont  care  a  straw.     Cf.  120. 

Dative 

85.  Indirect  Object.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  in- 
direct object  represented  in  English  by  to,  less  commonly  by 
for  ox  from.     The  indirect  object  may  be  used  with  transitive 


NOUNS:   DATIVE  15 

verbs  having  a  direct  object.     His  Caesar  libertatem  con- 
cessit, Caesar  granted  them  permission. 

In  the  passive  the  dative  is  retained,  the  accusative  be- 
coming the  subject.  His  libertas  conceditur,  permission  is 
granted  to  them. 

86.  Some  verbs  take  either  the  accusative  of  the  person  and  abla- 
tive of  the  thing,  or  dative  of  the  person  and  accusative  of  the  thing. 
Praeda  milites  donat,  he  presents  the  soldiers  with  booty,  or  praedam 
militibus  donat,  he  gives  booty  to  the  soldiers.  So  also  circumdo,  surround, 
and  some  other  verbs. 

87.  The  dative  of  indirect  object  is  also  used  with  many  in- 
transitive verbs  meaning  favor,  help,  please,  trust  (and  their 
opposites),  believe,  persuade,  command,  obey,  serve,  resist,  envy, 
threaten,  pardon,  indulge,  spare,  etc.     The  commoner  are : 

accidit,  it  happens  Hbet,  it  pleases 

adverser,  oppose  licet,  //  is  permitted 

cedo,  conz^^o,  yield  minor,  threaten 

confido,  trust  noceo,  harm 

consulo,  consult  for  obtempero,  submit  to 

credo,  believe,  trust  parco,  spare 

diffido,  distrust  pareo,  obey 

ia.vto,  favor  persua.deo,  persuade 

gratulor,  congratulate  placeo,  please 

ignosco,  pardon  provide©,  provide  for 

impero,  order  resisto,  resist 

invideo,  envy  servio,  serve 

irascor,  be  angry  with  ■  studeo,  be  zealous  for 

Huic  imperat,  he  orders  him.  Huic  legioni  Caesar  et  indulserat 
praecipue  et  propter  virtutem  confidebat  maxime,  Caesar  had  especially 
favored  this  legion  and  because  of  its  bravery  had  the  greatest  confidence 
in  it. 

Many  kindred  phrases  take  a  dative  —  e. g.,  fidem  habere,  trust; 
gratias  agere,  ///rr///' ;  gratiam  \\a.hire,  feel  gratr/iil ;  iniuriam  facere, 
-turong,  etc. 


l6  NOTES  ON   IDIOM 

88.  Some  verbs  of  apparently  the  same  meaning  as  those  in  87  take 
an  accusative.  So  adiuvo,  aid ;  A&X^zto,  delight,  please ;  iubeo,  order, 
laedo,  injure  ;  veto,  forbid,  etc. 

89.  If  the  verbs  of  87  are  used  in  the  passive,  the  dative  is  retained 
and  the  verbs  are  impersonal.  Mihi  persuadeo,  /  persuade  myself,  but 
mihi  persuadetur,  /  am  persuaded. 

90.  Some  verbs  take  both  accusative  and  dative,  generally  with  a 
different  meaning:  consulere  aliquem,  to  consult  some  one,  but  consulere 
alicui,  to  consult  for  some  one's  interest ;  cavere  aliquid,  to  be^vare  of 
something,  but  cavere  alicui,  to  look  out  for  some  one ;  moderari  aliquid, 
to  control  something,  but  moderari  alicui  rei,  to  moderate,  allay,  etc. 

91.  The  dative  is  used  after  many  verbs  compounded  with  the  prep- 
ositions ad,  ante,  con-,  in,  inter,  ob,  prae,  sub,  and  super.  If  transitive, 
such  verbs  may  take  an  accusative  besides.  Successit  tibi  L.  Metellus, 
Lucius  Metellus  succeeded  you.  Vos  sequor,  vobis  obtempero,  vobis  as- 
s&ni.\or, you  I  follow,  to  you  I  yield,  with  you  I  agree.  Brutum  classi  prae- 
fecit,  he  put  Brutus  in  cotnmand  of  the  fleet  (ace.  and  dat.). 

92.  Dative  WITH  Adjectives.  Many  adjectives  of/rz>;/^j?- 
liness,  likeness,  nearness,  fitness,  acquaintance,  and  their  oppo- 
sites  take  the  dative.  Castris  idoneum  locum  delegit,  he 
chose  a  place  suitable  for  a  camp.  Helvetiis  erat  amicus,  he 
was  friendly  to  the  Helvetians.  Collis  nascebatur  adversus 
huic  et  contrarius,  a  hill  rose  facing  this  and  opposite  to  it. 

The  more  common  adjectives  are  : 

Friendliness,  etc. :  Nearness : 
SkVOAcViS,  frie7tdly  proximus,  next  to 

adversus,  opposed,  opposite  finitimus,  neighboring  to 

contrarius,  opposed,  opposite  Service,  etc. : 
cams,  dear  to  utilis,  useful  to 

{&milia.ns,  friendly  to  pemiciosus,  destructive  to 

infestus,  hostile  to  Fitness : 
%Ta.tyxs,grateful,  agreeable  to  ^ptus,  suitable  for 

Likeness,  etc. :  idoneus,  suitable  for 

similis  (dissimilis),  like  (unlike)  Acquaintance,  etc. : 
par,  equal  to  notus  (ignotus),  known   to  (un- 

aequus,  equal  to  known) 

iniquus,  not  equal  to  communis,  common  to 


NOUNS:  DATIVE  I  7 

Note. — Many  of  these  adjectives  take  also  other  construction^  ;  thus,  those  ol 
likeness,  together  with  their  adverbs,  take  also  atque  (or  ac,  cf.  266) ;  those  of 
service  usually  take  ad  with  tlie  accusative  to  denote  purpose;  those  oi  fitneas 
have  often  ad  with  the  accusative. 

93.  Many  of  the  adjectives  of  92  are  used  as  substantives  also,  and  as 
such  may  take  a  genitive.  Amicus  t.\,  friendly  to  ^/w,  buteius  amicus, 
his  friend.     So  similis  (cf.  74),  par,  etc. 

94.  Dative  oy  Possessor.  The  dative  is  used  with  esse 
to  denote  possession  where  in  EngUsh  we  employ  have.  Mihi 
autem  cum  Murena  amicitia  est,  /  have  a  friendship  with 
Murena. 

95.  Dative  of  Agent.  The  dative  is  used  regularly  with 
the  gerundive  to  denote  the  person  on  whom  the  obligation 
rests.  Caesar  statuit  sibi  Rhenum  esse  transeundum, 
Caesar  thought  he  ought  to  cross  the  Rhine. 

96.  To  denote  agent  with  all  other  forms  of  the  passive,  a  (or  ab,  cf. 
264)  with  the  ablative  is  regularly  used  (cf.  108).  Se  a  Themistocle  con- 
servatum  iudicavit,  he  considered  that  he  had  been  saved  by  Thcniistocles. 
This  construction  must  sometimes  be  employed  even  with  the  gerundive 
(cf.  95),  when  necessary  to  avoid  ambiguity.  Quibus  est  a  vobis  consulen- 
dum.yi^r  whom  you  must  look  out  (the  omission  of  a  would  cause  ambi- 
guity between  quibus  and  vobis). 

97.  Dative  of  Interest.  The  dative  is  used  to  denote 
the  person  interested  in  the  action  of  the  verb.  It  corresponds 
to  various  English  expressions  which  may  be  roughly  repre- 
sented by  for.  Praeterita  se  fratri  condonare  dicit,  lie  says 
that  he  pardofis  the  past  {put  of  regard)  for  his  brother.  Ut 
aliqua  in  vita  formido  improbis  esset  posita,  that  some 
dread  might  be  placed  before  the  eyes  of  the  wicked  during  their 
lifetime. 

98.  The  dative  of  interest  may  express  advantage  or  dis- 
advantage.    Non   solum  nobis  divites  esse  volumus,  sed 


l8.  NOTES  ON   IDIOM 

liberis,  we  desire  to  be  rich  not  only  for  ourselves,  but  for  our 
children. 

99.  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End.  The  dative  may  de- 
note the  purpose,  use,  or  result  of  a  thing,  and  is  often  ac- 
companied by  another  dative  of  the  person /ijr  whom.  Dies 
colloquio  dictus  est,  n  day  was  set  for  the  conference.  Amici- 
tiam  populi  Romani  sibi  ornamento  et  praesidio,  non 
detrimento  esse  oportere,  (Ariovistus  said  that)  the  friend- 
ship of  the  Roman  people  ought  to  be  an  honor  and  protection  to 
him,  not  a  source  of  harm. 

Note. — The  verbs  most  common  with  this  dative  are  esse,  venire,  duccre, 
and  habere  (consider).  Laudi  ducitur  adulescentulis,  it  is  considered  praise- 
ivorthy  in  the  young  men.  Tliis  double  dative,  in  which  that  of  the  person  is  a 
dative  of  advantage  or  disadvantage,  occurs  most  frequently  with  esse. 

Th^ plural  of  nouns  is  not  used  in  this  construction.  A  modifying  adjective  is 
rare. 

100.  The  dative  of  purpose  may  often  be  replaced  by  a  simple  predi- 
cate nominative.  Maximo  laudi  est,  //  is  a(source  of)  glory  to  Maxinms, 
but  also  Maximi  laus  est,  it  is  Maximus's  glory. 

Ablative ' 

loi.  Ablative  of  Separation.  The  ablative  of  separa- 
tion is  used  witli  verbs  meaning  to  separate,  abstain,  remove, 
deprive,  etc.,  and  with  kindred  adjectives.  Agricultura  pro- 
hibebantur,  they  were  prevented  from  tilling  the  soil.  Proelio 
abstinebat,  he  refrained  from  battle.  A  preposition  may  also 
be  used  with  nearly  all  the  verbs  of  this  class,  and  should  be 
used  where  there  is  a  clear  idea  of  motion.  Ex  castris  ex- 
ercitum  educit,  he  leads  his  army  from  the  camp,  but  castris 
egressi,  leaving  their  camp.  Thus  no  definite  rule  can  be 
laid  down,  but  a  preposition  must,  of  course,  be  used  with 
persons.  Sua  ab  Helvetiis  defendere,  to  protect  their  posses- 
sions from  the  Helvetians. 

'  For  the  ablative  in  constructions  of  time  and  place,  see  128  ff. 


NOUNS:   ABLATIVE  I9 

The  ablative  of  separation  occurs  most  frequently  with  : 

abstineo,  hold  from  moveo,  mcrve  frovi 

desisto,  desist  prohibeo,  prevent  from 

egjedior,  depart  solvo  (absolve),  release  from 

excedo,  j^^o  out  Adjectives: 

excludo,  exclude  orbus,  bereft  of 

expello,  dr/ve  out  liber,  free  from 

interdudo,  s/iut  off  vacuus,  empty  of 
libero.  free  from, 

102.  Ablative  of  Origin  or  Source.  The  participle 
natus,  bom  of,  takes  the  ablative,  sometimes  with  de  or  ex. 
Amplissimo  genere  natus,  born  of  an  influential  family. 
When  the  ancestry  is  remote,  ab  is  sometimes  used.  Ab  Ulixe 
deaque  Circa  oriundus,  descended  from  Ulysses  and  the  goddess 
Circe. 

103.  Ablative  of  Material.  This  requires  ex  in  clas- 
sical prose.  Aquila  ex  argento,  a  silver  eagle.  An  adjective 
is  often  substituted  :  Aquila  argentea. 

104.  Ablative  with  a  Comparative.  The  ablative  may 
be  used  with  the  comparative  of  adjectives  and  adverbs  in- 
stead of  quam,  than,  and  a  nominative  or  accusative.  This 
ablative  is  allowable  only  when  the  first  member  of  the  com- 
parison is  nominative  or  accusative.  With  other  cases  quam 
must  be  used  to  avoid  ambiguity.  Constat  nihil  illo  fuisse 
excellentius,  it  is  well  established  that  nothing  has  been  more- 
remarkable  than  he.  This  might  also  have  been,  nihil  quam 
ilium. 

Note. — When  the  second  member  of  comparison  is  a  relative,  the  ablative  is 
regular.  Quo  nihil  peius  erat,  than  which  nothing  was  worse.  In  all  other 
cases  quam  may  be  used. 

105.  Quam  is  often  omitted  with  plus,  minus,  amplius,  longius,  in  ex- 
pressions of  number  or  measure,  without  affecting  the  construction. 
Cum  ipsi  non  amplius  octingentos  equites  haberent,  although  they  them- 
selves had  not  more  than  eight  hundred  cavalry. 


20  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

io6.  Ablative  of  Specification.  The  ablative  is  used 
with  nouns,  verbs,  and  adjectives  to  show  in  what  respect  they 
are  applied.  It  answers  the  questions  :  wherein?  in  ivhat  re- 
spect ?  Hortensius  excellens  ingenio,  nobilitate,  existi- 
matione,  Hortensius,  superior  in  ability,  noble  birth,  reputation. 
Creverat  cum  fama  turn  opibus,  he  had  grown  )iot  only  in 
reputation  but  also  in  resources. 

107.  Ablative  of  Accompaniment.  To  denote  accom- 
paniment, the  ablative  is  used  with  cum.  Cum  omni  equita- 
tu  antecesserant,  they  had  gone  ahead  zvith  all  the  cavalry. 

The  ablative  without  cum  is  common  in  military  expressrons  where 
an  adjective  is  used ;  but  cum  should  be  used  where  no  adjective  oc- 
curs, or  if  there  is  a  numeral.  Omnibus  copiis  provolaverunt,  they  hast- 
ened forward  with  all  their  forces,  but  cum  legionibus  profectus  est,  he 
started  with  his  legions.     So  cum  legionibus  tribus. 

108.  Ablative  of  Means.  The  ablative  is  very  often 
used  to  denote  the  means  or  instrument  by  or  with  which. 
Neque  multum  frumento,  sed  lacte  atque  pecore  vivunt, 
and  they  do  not  subsist  much  on  grain,  but  upon  milk  and  the 
flesh  of  their  flocks.  The  means  by  which  and  the  agent  by 
whom  must  be  clearly  distinguished.  The  agent  by  whom  re- 
quires the  ablative  with  a  or  ab  (264).  Gladio  occisus,  slain 
by  the  sword  (means),  but  a  milite  occisus,  slain  by  a  soldier 
(agent). 

109.  The  person  through  whom  may  be  expressed  by  per  and  the  ac- 
cusative. Per  exploratores  certiores  facti,  infornud  through  the  agency 
of  scouts. 

no.  With  some  Latin  verbs  the  ablative  of  means  is  quite  at  vari- 
ance with  the  English  idiom.  Lapidibus  pluere,  to  rain  stones,  a.n(]  so 
other  verbs  of  the  acts  of  nature.  A  pueris  nullo  officio  aut  disciplina 
adsuefacti,y>'£»/;z  boyhood  accustomed  to  no  duty  or  training.  Maioribus 
hostiis  sacrificare,  to  sacrifice  larger  victims,  and  so  other  veVbs  of  sacri- 
ficing, except  immolo,  which  usually  takes  the  accusative. 


NOUNS:    Alil.ATIVr:  2  1 

iix.  The  adjectives  fretus,  relying  on;  contentus,  contented  wtth . 
dignus,  indignus,  worthy,  unworthy  of,  take  the  ablative.  Qua  fortuna 
Alcibiades  non  erat  contentus,  with  this  good  fortune  Alcibiades  was  not 
saH.<fied.     Fretus  numero  copiarum,  relying  on  the  number  of  his  troops. 

112.  Verbs  oi plenty  and  7vant  take  the  ablative  :  abundo,  abound  in ; 
careo,  lack  ;  egeo,  be  in  need  of ;  compleo,  impleo,  expleo,  yf///  redundo, 
overflow,  etc.  Omnis  hie  locus  acervis  corporum  et  civium  sanguine  redun- 
davit,  every  corner  of  this  place  was  filled  with  heaps  of  corpses  and  blood 
of  citizens.  Diem  iam  quintum  cibo  csLvaeraX,  for  five  days  no7U  he  had 
lacked  food. 

113.  The  adjectives  onustus,  laden  with,  refertus,  crowded  with,  lakt 
the  ablative.  Navis  onusta  praeda,  a  ship  laden  with  booty.  But 
filetms,  full  of  and  inops,  destitute,  usually  take  a  genitive  cf.  (74).  So 
refertus  when  used  of  persons. 

114.  Opus  est,  there  is  need  of  ,  takes  the  ablative  of  the  thing  wanted 
and  the  dative  of  the  person  wanting.  Quid  mihi  aut  vita  aut  civitate 
opus  est  ?  what  need  have  I  either  of  life  or  country  ?  The  thing  wanted 
may  be  the  subject  and  opus  the  pred  irate.  Quaecumque  opus  sunt, 
noctu  comparantur,  whatever  things  are  needed  are  prepared  by  night. 
This  latter  usage  is  chiefly  with  pronouns. 

Note. — Usus  est,  there  is  need,  is  extremely  rare  in  ^ood  prose. 

115.  Ablative  with  Deponents.  Utor,  use ;  fruor,  en- 
joy;  inngOTy  perform  ;  potior,^  gain  possession  of ;  vescor^eal; 
and  their  compounds,  take  the  ablative.  lumentis  Germani 
importatis  non  utuntur,  l/ie  Germans  do  7iot  use  imported 
horses.     lUo  munere  fungebatur,  he  performed  that  task. 

Note. — Potior  has  a  genitive  in  the  phrase  rerum  potiri,  to  become  master. 

116.  Ablative  ok  Degree  of  Difference.  Compara- 
tives and  words  implying  comparison  may  take  an  ablative  of 
the  degree  or  measure  of  difiference.  Especially  common  are 
multo,  mucJt ;  paulo,  little ;  hoc,  quo,  tanto,  quanto,  nihilo. 
Hos  Suevi  multo  humiliores  redegerunt,  the  Suevi  rendered 
them  much  more  humble.  Supra  pontem  mediocri  spatio,  a 
little  way  above  the  bridge.    (Supra  implies  comparison.) 

Note. — With  superlatives  use  longe,  not  multo  (7). 


2  2  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

117.  Ablative  of  Quality.  The  ablative,  always  ac- 
companied by  an  adjective  or  a  genitive,  is  used  to  denote  qual- 
ity or  to  describe  an  object.  The  ablative  may  depend  di- 
rectly on  a  noun  or  be  used  in  the  predicate.  Silva  ingenti 
magnitudine,  a  forest  of  great  extent,  or  silva  est  ingenti 
magnitudine,  the  forest  is  of  great  extent.  Examples  with  a 
genitive  are  comparatively  rare.  Clavi  digiti  pollicis  cras- 
situdine,  nails  of  the  thickness  of  your  thumb. 

Note. — For  the  difference  between  the  ablative  and  genitive  of  quality,  cf. 
65  N. 

118.  It  is  better  not  to  attach  the  ablative  directly  to  a  proper  noun. 
Caesar,  vir  magna  virtute,  is  more  usual  than  the  ablative  without  vir 
(cf.  67). 

119.  Ablative  of  Price.  The  definite  price  of  a  thing 
must  be  put  in  the  ablative.  Agrum  conductum  habebat 
sestertiis  sex  millibus,  he  had  an  estate  hired  for  six  thousand 

sesterces. 

120.  The  ablative  often  expresses  indefinite  value  also,  but  of  tantus, 
quantus,  plus,  and  minus,  the  genitive  is  necessary  (cf.  84).  Conduxit 
in  Palatio  non  magno  domum,  he  hired  a  house  on  the  Palatine  for  no 
large  sum,  but  signa  aut  non  minoris  aut  etiam  pluris  emit,  he  paid  either 
not  less  or  even  more  for  the  statues. 

121.  Ablative  of  Manner.  This  ablative  answers  the  ques- 
tion How  ?  When  the  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective 
or  genitive,  the  mere  ablative  is  generally  used  ;  when  the 
noun  is  unmodified,  it  is  generally  introduced  by  cum.  Non 
eadem  alacritate  et  studio  nitebantur,  they  did  not  fight 
witli  the  same  spirit  and  zeal,  but  cum  studio  nitebantur. 

122.  Some  nouns  expressing  manner  are  generally  used  in  the  abla- 
tive without  cum  (contrary  to  121).  So  casu,  by  chance  ;  consuetudine, 
more,  according  to  custom ;  consilio,  by  design  ;  iure,  rightly ;  iniuria, 
wrottgly ;  ordine,  /;/  order ;  silentio,  in  silence;  vi,  by  force,  etc.  Gena- 
benses  silentio  ex  oppido  progressi,  the  Genabenses  silently  moving  out 
from  the  totvn. 


NOUNS:   ABLATIVE  23' 

123.  AnLATlNE  OF  Cause.  The  ablative  may  denote 
cause.  Qua  spe  adducti,  led  on  by  this  hope.  Seu  ira  seu 
pdio  seu  superbia  nullam  vocem  emisit,  because  of  anger, 
hatred,  or  pride,  he  did  not  utter  a  word. 

This  ablative  is  especially  frequent  with  the  past  participles  of  verbs 
o{ feeling:  commotus,  stirred  up ;  incitatus,  roused;  perterritus,  rfi.?- 
iiiayed ;  incensus,  yfr^//,  etc. 

124.  Cause  may  also  be  expressed  by  de  or  ex  with  the  ablative,  ob  or 
propter  with  the  accusative.  His  de  ca-usis^  for  these  reasons.  Propter 
latitudinem  fluminis,  because  of  the  breadth  of  the  river. 

Note. — If  a  person  is  the  cause,  tlien  a  or  ab  with  the  ablative  must  be  used 
(cf.  108). 

125.  Ablative  Absolute.  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  the 
ablative  with  a  participle  may  be  used  to  modify  the  predicate 
of  a  sentence.  The  combination  may  express  time,  catise, 
manner,  concession,  attendant  circumstances,  etc.  Thus  the 
ablative  absolute  is  often  equivalent  to  a  subordinate  clause, 
and  many  English  subordinate  clauses  may  be  rendered  by 
this  construction. 

Quibus  rebus  cognitis  (time),  principes  Britanniae  optimum  factu  esse 
duxerunt,  rebellione  facta  (means),  frumento  nostros  prohibere  quod  his 
superatis  aut  reditu  interclusis  (condition)  neminem  postea  in  Britanniam 
transiturum  confidebant,  after  learning  (or  when  they  had  learned)  these 
things,  the  leading  men  of  Britain  considered  that  their  best  course  was  to 
renew  hostilities  and  to  keep  our  men  from  getting  grain,  because,  if  this 
enemy  should  be  conquered  or  cut  off  from  returning,  they  believed  tliat  no 
one  thereafter  %votdd  cross  into  Britain. 

126.  The  place  of  the  participle  may  be  supplied  by  a  substantive 
denoting  office,  age,  etc.,  or  by  an  adjective.  Cn.  Pompeio,  M.  Crasso 
consulibus,  in  the  considship  of  Pompcy  and  Crasstts.  Duce  Bruto  Ro- 
mam  profecti,  under  the  leadership  of  Brutus  they  set  out  for  Rome.  Exi- 
gua  parte  aestatis  reliqua,  07dy  a  small  part  of  the  summer  remaining. 

Nouns  commonly  used  in  this  way  are:  adiutor,  assistant ;  auctor, 
author,  adviser,  etc. ;  testis,  witness ;  dux,  iudex,  consul,  praetor,  puer, 
senex,  etc. 


24  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

127.  Use  the  ablative  absolute  only  when  its  substantive  denotes  a  per- 
son or  thing  not  mentioned  in  the  main  clause.  Do  not  write  :  Caesar, 
Germanis  victis,  eos  in  castra  duxit,  where  Germanis  represents  tlnj 
same  persons  as  eos,  but  write :  Caesar  Germanos  victos  in  castra  duxit. 

Time  and  Place 

128.  Constructions  of  Time.  Expressions  of  time  take 
the  ablative  to  denote  when  or  within  what  period,  the  accu- 
sative to  express  how  long  (duration).  Tertia  hora  venit,  he 
came  at  nine  (cf.  134).  Viginti  annos  natus  est,  he  is  twenty 
years  old. 

129.  English  ago  is  rendered  by  abhinc.  Abhinc  annos  decern  mor- 
tuus  est,  he  died  ten  years  ago. 

130.  Some  expressions  which  seem  to  us  locative  (137,  138)  are  tem- 
poral in  Latin.  Pugna  Marathonia,  in  the  battle  of  Marathon.  Bello 
Punico,  in  the  Punic  War.     Ludis  Romanis,  at  the  Roman  games. 

131.  Towards,  with  words  of  time,  is  expressed  by  ad  or  sub.  Ad 
hiemem,  towards  winter.  Ad  or  sub  vesperum,  towards  evening.  Sub 
noctem,/»J/  at  nightfall. 

For  is  expressed  by  in  with  the  accusative.  In  diem  certam  indicere, 
to  appoint  for  a  definite  day. 

Before  and  after,  used  adverbially  in  English  and  accompanied  by  a 
temporal  phrase  denoting  how  long  before  or  after,  are  expressed  by 
ante  and  post  either  with  the  accusative  or  with  an  ablative  of  the 
degree  of  difference  (116).  Ante  quinque  annos,  or  quinque  ante'  annis, 
profectus  erat,  he  had  gone  away  five  years  before.  Neuter  adjectives 
denoting  an  indefinite  time  are  regularly  in  the  ablative.  Paulo  post,  a 
little  later.     Non  ita  multo  post,  not  long  afterwards. 

But  when  before  and  after  are  prepositions  in  English,  ante  and  post 
take  the  accusative  in  Latin,  and  the  time  how  long  before  or  after  is 
expressed  by  the  ablative.  Una  hora  ante  solis  ortum,  one  hour  before 
sunrise.  The  accusative,  unam  horam  ante  solis  ortum,  would  mean  dur- 
ing the  hour  before  sunrise. 

'  Or  quinque  annis  ante,  but  with  the  ablative  ante  and  post  should 
not  be  placed  first. 


NOUNS:  TIME  AND   PLACE 


25 


133.  The  year  is  expressed  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  in  the  abla- 
tive absolute.  Annus  fuit  Cn.  Pompeio  M.  Crasso  consulibus,  it  was  the 
year  of  the  consulship  of  Pompey  and  Crassus.  It  may  also  be  reckoned 
from  the  assumed  date  of  the  founding  of  Rome  (753  B.C.).  Anno  urbis 
conditae  (a.  u.  c.)  sescentesimo  quinquagesimo  quarto'  (754 —  100),  100  B.C. 
Anno  urbis  conditae  septingentesimo  septuagesimo  tertio  (753  +  20),  20 
A  D.  Years  of  the  Christian  era  may  be  expressed  thus:  anno  millesimo 
nongentesimo  (or  OODCCCC)  post  Christum  natum,  igoo  A.D. 

133.  Days  of  the  inontii  were  reclconed  backward  from  the  Nones,  Ides, 
and  Calends,  the  day  of  departure  being  included  in  the  count.  Conse- 
quently the  second  day  before  would  be,  by  Roman  reckoning,  the  third 
(l;iy  before.  Ante  diem  tertium  Kalendas  Octobris  (often  abbreviated 
a.  d.  III.  Kal,  Oct.)  or  III.  Kal.  Oct.  (i.  e.,  tertio  die  ante  Kalendas),  5-?/- 
tember  2g  {September  28  before  Caesar's  reform^).  The  name  of  the  month 
is  an  adjective  limiting  Kalendas.  One  day  before  is  expressed  by  pridie 
with  the  accusative.  Pridie  Idus  lanuarias,  fanuary  12.  If  a  date 
falls  upon  the  Nones,  Ides,  or  Calends,  the  construction  is  ablative  of 
time  (128).     Idibus  Martiis,  March  75.     Kalendis  luniis,  June  i,  etc. 

Note. — To  turn  an  English,  date  into  Latin,  you  must  know  :  first,  the  number 
of  days  in  the  Roman  months,  and  on  what  days  the  Nones  and  Ides  fall '  (the  Cal- 
ends are  always  the  first) ;  secondly,  the  rule  for  reckoning  (see  above).  Given 
March  10,  first  look  ahead  to  the  nearest  reckoning  point.  It  is  the  Ides,  which  in 
March  fall  on  the  15th.  Counting  the  15th  as  the  first  day,  we  find  the  loth  to  be 
the  sixth  day  before  the  Ides.  Expressed  by  the  usual  formula,  this  is  a.d.  VI. 
Idus  Martias.  Evidently  the  simplest  method  of  finding  this  result  is  by  add- 
ing one  to  the  reckoning  point  and  subtracting  the  given  date — i.  e.,  15  +1  =  16  — 
10=6.  If  the  given  date  be  March  4,  the  method  is  the  same,  except  that  the 
reckoning  point  is  the  Nones.  7-1-1  =  8—4=4  ;  .*.  a.d.  IV.  Nonas  Martias= 
March  4.     If  the  reckoning  point  is  the  Calends,  the  method  is  also  the  same, 

'  Notice  that  the  ordinal,  not  the  cardinal,  is  used.  To  find  the  re- 
quired ordinal,  if  the  given  date  is  B.C.,  subtract  from  754;  if  it  is  A.D., 
add  to  753. 

■  Julius  Caesar,  in  46  B.C.,  reformed  the  calendar,  giving  each  month  the  num- 
ber of  days  which  it  has  at  present.     Previously,  March,  May,  Quintilis  (July), 
and  October  had  31  days,  February  28,  the  others  29. 
'"In  March,  July,  October,  May, 
The  Ides  are  on  the  fifteenth  day. 
The  Nones  the  seventh ;  but  all  besides 
Have  two  days  less  for  Nones  and  Ides." 


26  NOTES  ON   IDIOM 

except  that  in  adding  one  to  the  Calends  we  are  really  adding  two  to  the  number 
of  days  in  the  month  preceding.  Given  June  26;  30  (the  number  of  days  in  June) 
+  2=32  —  26=6;   .'.  a.d.  VI.  Kalendas  Iulias=Jnne  26. 

134.  The  day  was  divided  into  twelve  hours  from  sunrise  to  sunset, 
the  night  into  four  watches  (vigiliae).  Consequently,  the  hours  were 
longer  in  summer  than  in  winter,  while  the  watches  were  shorter.  Ap- 
proximately, we  may  express  six  o'clock  and  time  between  six  and  seven 
in  the  morning  by  prima  Hora,  eleven  o'clock  and  time  between  eleven 
and  twelve  by  sexta  hora,  etc.  In  the  night  the  statement  of  time  is 
still  less  exact.  Time  between  six  and  nine  in  the  evening  is  expressed 
by  prima  vigilia,  between  three  and  six  in  the  morning  by  quarta  vigilia, 
etc. 

135.  Constructions  of  Place.  Extent  is  expressed  by 
the  accusative.  Tridui  viam  prccedere,  to  advance  a  three 
days  journey.  Aggerem  altum  pedes  octoginta  exstruxerunt 
(cf .  66),  they  raised  an  etnbanhnent  eighty  feet  high. 

136.  Distance  from  a  place  is  expressed  by  the  accusative 
of  extent  or  by  the  ablative  of  measure  of  difference  (cf.  116). 
Murus  a  planitie  septingentos  passus  aberat,  the  wall  was 
seven  hundred  paces  distant  from  the  plain.  Hie  locus  aequo 
fere  spatio  a  castris  utriusque  aberat,  tJiis  place  was  about 
equidistant  from  the  camp  of  each  general. 

137.  Place  i7i  which  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  in, 
place  to  which  by  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in,  place  from 
which  by  the  ablative  with  ab,  de,  or  ex.  In  Italia  esse,  to  be 
in  Italy.  In  Italiam  ire,  to  go  to  Italy,  but  ad  Italiam  ire,  to 
go  to  the  border  of  Italy  (without  entering  the  country).  Ad 
Caesarem  ire,  to  go  to  Caesar.  Ex  Italia, /row  Italy,  but  ab 
Italia,  from  the  border  of  Italy. 

138.  With  the  names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  also  with 
domus  and  rus,  no  preposition  is  used,  but  place  in  which  is 
expressed  by  the  locative,  place  to  tvhich  by  the  accusative, 
and  place  from  which  by  the  ablative.  Romae,  at  Rome. 
Oelum,  to  Delos.     Rure,  from  the  country. 


NOUNS:   TIME   AND    PLACE  27 

139.  Observe,  however,  that  towns  and  small  islands  require  a  prepo- 
sition to  express  the  idea  of  neighborhood.  Ad  Romam,  near,  to  the 
vicitiity  of,  towards  Rome.  A  Roma,  from  tire  neighborhood  of  Rome. 
Apud  Tenedum,  near  Tenedos. 

140.  If  a  common  noun,  as  urbs,  oppidum,  or  insula,  accompanies  the 
name  of  a  town  or  small  island,  it  usually  takes  a  preposition.  In  in- 
sulis  Melitae  et  Sami,  in  the  islands  of  Malta  and  Samos.  Ad  oppidum 
Gergoviam,  to  the  totan  of  Gergovia. 

141.  If  a  verb  of  motion  is  accompanied  by  several  nouns  of  place  to 
which  ox  from  which,  each  noun  must  have  its  own  construction.  Ad 
Caesarem  in  castra  Genavam  in  Galliam  nuntium  mittere,  to  send  a  mes- 
sage to  Caesar  in  camp  at  Geneva  in  Gaul. 

Note. — Observe  that  in  the  last  example  the  English  in  camp  at  Geneva  in 
Gaul  implies  place  in  which,  even  though  following  a  verb  of  motion.  It  is 
equivalent  to  a  relative  clause,  who  is  in  camp,  etc.  Latin  is  more  exact  in  its 
use  of  the  preposition  in,  and  with  a  verb  of  motion  requires  the  construction  of 
place  to  which  {in=into). 

142.  Verbs  signifying  to  come  together,  call  together,  as  convenio,  con- 
70CO,  cogo,  take  the  construction  of  place  to  which.  Copias  in  unum 
locum  coactas  vidit,  he  saw  that  the  troops  had  been  assembled  in  one 
place. 

143.  Verbs  oi  placing  take  the  ablative  with  in.  Omnem  spem  in  vir- 
tute  ponere,  to  put  all  hope  in  bravery.  So  with  loco,  colloco,  put,  sta- 
tion ;  statuo,  constituo,  set,  place ;  consido,  settle  ;  imprimo,  press  upon, 
stamp ;  inscribo,  write  upon ;  and  some  others.  But  impono  takes 
either  the  accusative  with  in  or  the  dative.  Legionibus  in  naves  im- 
positis,  having  put  the  legions  on  board. 

144.  The  following  words  often  express  place  in  which  by  the  abla- 
tive without  in :  loco,  locis,  parte,  partibus ;  dextra  (sc.  parte),  on  the 
right ;  laeva,  sinistra,  on  the  left ;  terra  marique,  by  land  and  sea  ;  and 
many  other  words  when  limited  by  an  adjective  (regularly  with  totus). 
Alieno  loco,  /;/  an  tinfavorable  place.  Miles  dextra  ac  sinistra  muro 
tectus,  the  soldiers,  protected  by  a  wall  on  right  and  left.  Totis  castris, 
in  the  whole  camp. 


28  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 


4.  The  Verb 

145.  Agreement.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  per- 
son, number,  and  (so  far  as  possible)  in  gender.  The  last  is 
possible  only  in  compound  tenses.  Mulieres  progressae 
sunt,  the  women  zvent  forward. 

146.  With  two  or  more  singular  subjects  the  verb  may  be : 

(a)  Plural.     Titus  et  Arruns  profecti  sunt.     Titus  and  Arruns  set  out. 

(b)  Singular,  agreeing  with  the  nearest  subject.  Condamat  vir  pater- 
que,  her  husband  and  her  father  cry  out. 

147.  When  the  subjects  differ  in  person  the  verb  agrees  with  the  first 
person  rather  than  the  second  ;  the  second  rather  than  the  third.  Ego 
et  vos  adsumus, /<?«  and  I  are  here  (cf.  14).  Tu  et  meus  frater  adestis, 
you  and  viy  brother  are  present. 

148.  If  several  singular  subjects  are  connected  by  et  .  .  .  et,  aut  .  .  . 
aut,  vel.  .  .  vel,  etc.,  the  verb  is  regularly  singular.  Si  qui  aut  privatus 
aut  populus  eorum  decreto  non  stetit,  if  any  individual  or  people  does 
not  heed  their  decree. 

149.  A  collective  noun  usually  takes  a  singular  verb ;  but  the  plural 
maybe  used  if  individuals  are  thought  of.  Cumtanta  multitude  lapides 
ac  tela  conicerent,  since  so  large  a  crowd  were  hurling  stones  and  Javelins. 

150.  Voice.  Intransitive  verbs  must  be  used  impersonally 
in  the  passive.  Curritur,  there  is  running.  The  logical  sub- 
ject (if  any)  may  be  expressed  by  ab  (or  a)  with  the  ablative. 
A  nostris  pugnatur,  our  men  are  fighting. 

151.  The  passive  often  has  a  middle  or  reflexive  sense.  Purgor,  / 
clear  myself  (am  cleared) ;  lavor,  /  wash  myself  {am  washed) ;  delector, 
I  enjoy  myself  {am  delighted),  etc.  .  * 

152.  When  coepi,  begin,  and  desino,  cease,  are  used  with  passive  in- 
finitives, the  whole  phrase  is  usually  in  the  passive.  Vasaconici  coepta 
sunt,  the  jars  began  to  be  hurled.  (For  the  passive  use  of  verbs  of  say- 
ing, thinking,  etc.,  cf.  228.) 


THE   VERB:   TENSES 

153.  Tenses.     Table  of  ordinary  uses. 

PERIOD  OF   TIME 


29 


INDEFIMTK 

Perfect  Indefinite 
amavit,  he  loved 

Present 
amat,  lie  loves 

Future 

amabit,   he    will 

love 

PROGRESSING 

Imperfect 

amabat,  he   -vas 

loving 

Present 
amat;  he  is  loving 

Future 

amabit,  he  xvillbe 

loving 

COMPLETED 

Pluperfect 
amaverat,  he  had 

loved 

(Complete  in  past) 

Perfect  Definite 

amavit,    he    has 

loved 

(Complete  in  present) 

Future  Perfect 
amaverit,  he  will 

have  loved 

(Complete  in  future) 

Note  that  the  present  and  future  have  a  double  use,  representing 
action  both  as  indefinite  and  ?iS> progressing.  So,  too,  the  perfect,  which 
represents  action  as  completed  in  the  present  or  as  undefined  in  the 
past.i 

154.  Present.  In  addition  to  the  ordinary  uses  indicated  in 
the  table,  the  present  is  very  often  employed  to  represent  past 
acts  as  taking  place  in  the  present.  This  is  called  the  historical 
present,  and  is  employed  for  the  sake  of  liveliness  or  variety. 
Volusenum  praemittit.  Huic  mandat  ut  ad  se  quam  pri- 
mum  revertatur.  Ipse  cum  omnibus  copiis  in  Merinos 
proficiscitur,  etc.  He  sends  Volusemis  on  ahead.  He  orders 
him  to  return  as  soon  as  possible.     He  himself  sets  out,  tic. 

155.  The  use  of  a  present  for  a  future,  so  common  in  English,  is  very 
rarie  in  good  Latin  prose,  and  should  be  avoided.  /  am  going  to-mor- 
row is  eras  proficiscar,  not  proficiscor. 

156.  With  iam,  now  ;  iam  diu,  now  for  a  long  lime ;  iara  pridem,  now 
long  since,  and  other  expressions  of  duration,  the  present  is  used  of  an 


'The  former  is  often  called  the  perfect  definite  or  present  perfect,  the 
latter  the  perfect  indefinite  or  historical  perfect. 


30  NOTES    ON    IDIOM 

action  beginning  in  the  past  and  continuing  in  the  present.  This  trans- 
lates the  English  have  long  been,  etc.  (cf.  159).  lam  diu  in  his  periculis 
versamur,y(7r  a  long  time  now  we  have  been  in  the  midst  of  these  dangers. 

157.  Imperfect.  The  imperfect  is  used  to  denote  custom- 
ary past  action.  Ex  quo  quinquagena  talenta  vectigalis 
capiebat,  from  which  he  was  accustomed  to  get  fifty  talents  of 
revenue. 

158.  The  imperfect  may  denote  attempted  action  (conative  imper- 
fect). Ab  tribunis  militum  legatisque  retinebantur,  the  tribunes  of  the  sol- 
diers and  the  chief  officers  attempted  to  hold  them  back. 

But  Conor,  try,  with  an  infinitive,  may  always  be  used,  and  should  be 
used  to  avoid  ambiguity.  Partem  suarum  copiarum  traducere  conati 
sunt,  they  attempted  to  bring  part  of  their  forces  across. 

159.  With  iam,  iam  diu,  iam  pridem,  and  other  expressions  of  dura- 
tion, the  imperfect  corresponds  with  the  English  had  long  been,  had  long 
since,  etc.  (cf.  156).     Iam  diu  lecto  tenebatur,  he  had  long  been  bedridden. 

160.  By  reason  of  its  ordinary  use  to  denote  action  as  progressing, 
going  on  (see  table,  153),  the  imperfect  is  a  favorite  tense  in  descriptive 
passages,  where  it  chronicles  the  subordinate  details  and  particulars, 
while  the  historical  perfect  states  the  events  and  results.  In  omnibus 
collibus  hostium  copias  conspexit.  Cuius  loci  haec  erat  natura  atque  ita 
montibus  mare  continebatur  uti  ex  locis  superioribus  in  litus  telum  adigi 
posset,  07t  all  the  hills  he  beheld  the  forces  of  the  enemy.  The  character 
of  the  place  was  such  and  the  sea  was  so  hemmed  in  by  the  hills  that  a 
javelin  could  be  hurled  from  the  places  above  upon  the  shore.  The  im- 
perfects erat  and  continebatur  fill  in  details  of  the  picture. 

161.  Future  and  Future  Perfect.  The  Latin  is  much 
more  exact  in  its  use  of  tliese  tenses  than  is  the  EngHsh.  This 
is  especially  true  in  subordinate  clauses — e.  g.,  in  conditions, 
and  with  volo,  licet,  libet,  placet,  possum,  etc.  Veniam  si 
potero,  /  shall  come  if  I  can  {shall  be  able).  In  urbe  si  licebit 
■manebo,  I  shall  remain  in  the  city  if  I  may  {it  shall  be  alloivcd  ). 

Future  perfect.    Si  mihi  bona  re  publica  frui  non  licuerit,  at 


THE  VERB:  TENSES 


3» 


carebo  mala,  if  it  is  not  allowed  me  {shall  not  have  been  al- 
lowed) to  enjoy  an  uprigJit  state,  at  least  I  shall  be  free  from  a 
base  one. 

162.  Perfect.  The  historical  perfect  (perfect  indefinite, 
cf.  153)  is  the  great  narrative  tense  in  Latin.  For  its  relation 
to  the  imperfect,  cf.  160.      It  is  like  the  Greek  aorist. 

163.  The  perfect  definite  of  verbs  of  inceptive  meaning  is  virtually  a 
present.  Novi,  knaw  {have  become  acquainted  with),  from  nosco,  learn 
{get  acquainted  with)  \  consuevi,  am  wont  {have  become  accustomed) ;  so 
odi,  hate  ;  memini,  remember,  etc.  The  pluperfect  of  these  verbs  repre- 
sents an  English  imperfect.  Noveram,  knew  {had  become  acquainted 
with),  etc. 

164.  Pluperfect.  The  pluperfect  (153)  represents  an  ac- 
tion in  the  past  as  completed  before  another  is  begun.  Me- 
napios  oppresserunt,  qui  in  sues  vices  remigraverant, 
they  crushed  the  Menapii,  xvJio  had  (previously)  returned  to 
their  villages. 

165.  Periphrastic  Tenses.  Such  English  expressions  as 
/  am  about  to,  was  about  to,  etc.,  may  be  rendered  by  the  tenses 
of  the  first  periphrastic  conjugation.  Iturus  sum,  I  am  about 
to  go  ;  iturus  eram,  /  %vas  to  go. 

166.  The  second  periphrastic  conjugation  expresses  obligation  or 
necessity.  Amandus  sura,  /  ought  to  be,  or  must  be,  loved.  Intransitive 
verbs  can  only  be  used  impersonally  (cf.  150).  Currendum  est  mihi,  / 
ought  to,  or  tmist,  run. 

167.  Tenses  in  Letters.  In  letters  the  Romans  often 
used  tenses  from  the  standpoint  of  the  receiver  of  the  letter, 
instead  of,  as  is  usual  in  English,  from  the  standpoint  of  the 
writer.  It  is  as  though  the  writer  imagined  himself  in  the  place 
of  the  receiver  and  viewed  his  own  present  actions  as  past. 
Quae  ad  te  pertinere  arbitrabar,  quod  in  Ciliciam  proficis- 
cebar,  existimavi  me  ad  te  oportere  scribere,  what  I  think 


32  NOTES    ON    IDIOM 

concerns  you  I  regard  it  my  duty  to  write  to  you,  because  I  am 
departing  for  Cilicia ;  i.  e.,  when  you  receive  this  letter,  it 
will  be  true  that  /  thought  I  ought  to  write  what  concerned 
you,  because  I  was  departing  for  Cilicia.  Here  the  English 
present,  /  regard,  has  become  existimavi,  and  the  other  pres- 
ents have  become  imperfects.  \\\  the  same  way  a  perfect  (/ 
wrote,  have  written)  may  become  a  pluperfect  (scripseram), 
and  a  future  <  /  shall  write)  may  become  a  periphrastic  imper- 
fect (scripturus  eram). 

Note. — This  custom  was  most  common  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  letters  and 
with  expressions  of  writing  or  sending  a  letter,  scribo,  do,  etc.  The  Romans 
were  not  rigidly  consistent  in  the  matter — e.  g. ,  o  general  statement  always  re- 
quires the  regular  tense. 

i68.  Sp:quence  of  Tenses.  In  subordinate  clauses  the 
tenses  of  the  subjunctive  follow  certain  fairly  well-fixed  rules 
of  sequence.  With  reference  to  these  rules  all  tenses  are  di- 
vided into  two  classes : 

1.  Principal  tenses  (all  expressing  present  or  future  time). 

Present,  future,  future  perfect  indicative. 
Present  and  perfect  subjunctive. 
Present  and  future  imperative. 

2.  Historical  tenses  (all  expressing  past  time). 

Imperfect,  perfect,  pluperfect  indicative. 
Imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive. 
Historical  present  (cf.  170). 

General  rule:  Principal  tenses  in  the  main  clause  are  fol- 
lowed by  principal  tenses  in  the  subordinate  clause;  historical 
tenses  by  historical  tenses. 

PRINCIPAL  TENSES 

„           ,      ,  r  quid  legas,  what  you  are  reading 

Rogo,  I  ask  .             ,      ^ 

o       V      r   7    7/      /  (incomplete) 

Rog&Xio,  I  shall  ask  \       \  ^        ■         ,   ^          7              _, 

_                  ,    ,    ,  quid  leeeris,  what  you  nave  read 

RozBMtro,  I  s/inl/ /litve  askeu 

{      (completed) 


THE  VERB:   TENSES 


33 


HISTORICAL  TENSES 

quid  legeres,  what  you  were  read- 
ing (incomplete) 
quid  legisses,  what  you  had  read 
(completed) 

Note. — The  above  are  the  common  tenses.      The  student  can  easily  apply  the 
rule  to  the  others. 


Rogabam,  /  was  asking 
Rogavi,  /  asked,  have  asked 
Rogaveram,  /  had  asked 


169.  The  perfect  definite  (cf.  153)  is  usually  treated  as  a  historical 
tense ;  but  when  the  present  time  is  clear,  the  principal  sequence  is  oc- 
casionally found.  Id  ius  iurandum  ita  conservavi  ut  nemini  dubium  esse 
debeat,  that  oath  I  have  kept  in  such  a  way  that  it  should  he  doubtful  to 
nobody. 

170.  The  historical  present  (154)  is  usually  treated,  according  to 
its  meaning,  as  a  historical  tense  —  especially  when  the  subordinate 
clause  precedes  the  main  verb.  But  when  the  subordinate  clause  fol- 
lows the  principal  sequence  often  occurs.  Simul  servis  suis  Rubrius  ut 
ianuam  clauderent  imperat,  at  the  satHe  time  Rubrius  ordered  his  slaves 
to  shut  the  door  (historical  sequence);  but  dant  negotium  ut  eum  inter- 
ficiant,  they  laid  plans  to  murder  him  (principal  sequence). 

171.  If  a  subjunctive  clause  depends  upon  an  infinitive,  participle, 
gerund,  or  supine,  the  sequence  is  determined  by  the  main  finite  verb; 
but  with  the  perfect  infinitive  the  sequence  is  usually  historical.  Dico 
me  scire  quid  legas,  /  say  that  I  know  what  you  are  reading,  but  dicitur 
eum  rogavisse  cur  veniret,  he  is  said  to  have  asked  him  why  he  came. 

172.  Future  Time  in  the  Subjunctive.  The  missing  future  and 
future  perfect  of  the  subjunctive  are  usually  supplied,  where  futurity  is 
implied  in  the  context,  by  the  simple  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  follow- 
ing the  ordinary  rules  of  sequence — e.  g..  the  future  idea  is  represented 
by  the  present  subjunctive  (after  a  principal  tense)  or  by  the  imperfect 
(after  a  historical  tense) ;  the  future  perfect  by  a  perfect  (after  a  principal 
tense)  or  by  a  pluperfect  (after  a  historical  ten.se).  lam,  mox,  statim, 
often  aid  the  future  meaning.  Faciam  hoc  novum  ut  testibus  utar 
staiim,  /  shall  do  this  unusual  thing  (namely),  employ  witnesses  at  once. 
If  it  is  desired  to  emphasize  the  future  idea,  where  it  is  not  implied 
clearly  in  the  context,  the  periphrastic  tenses  may  be  used.  Et  quisquam 
dubitabit  quid  virtute  perfecturus  sit  ?  and  will  anybody  dottbt  what  he 
will  accomplish  by  valor  ? 

3 


34  NOTES  ON   IDIOM 

Modes  in  Independent  Clauses 

173.  The  indicative  is  the  mode  of  direct  statements  and 
questions.  Some  Engh'sh  phrases  of  possibility,  propriety, 
duty,  necessity,  and  the  like,  apparently  requiring  a  subjunc- 
tive, are  expressed  by  the  indicative  in  Latin.  Dicere  pos- 
sum, /  might  say.  Longum  est  omnia  enumerare  proelia, 
//  zvouM  be  a  long  story  to  recount  all  the  battles.  Aequum 
est,  //  would  be  fair  ;  so  par,  satis,  satius,  melius,  optimum, 
facile,  necesse  est;  debeo,  oportet,  convenit,  decet,  licet, 
etc.,  render  by  their  meaning  the  apparently  modal  idea  in 
English. 

174.  Hortatory  Subjunctive.  Mild  commands  and 
exhortations  may  be  expressed  by  the  subjunctive.  This  use 
is  most  common  in  the  third  persons  singular  and  plural  and 
the  first  person  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive.  The  nega- 
tive is  ne.  Cras  veniat,  let  him  come  to-morrow.  Sed  satis 
de  hoc;  reliquos  ordiamur,  but  enough  of  him  ;  let  us  pass  on 
to  the  others.     Ne  cras  veniat,  let  hi,.i  not  come  to-morrow. 

175.  Prohibition.  Negative  command  or  prohibition  is 
usually  expressed  by  noli,  be  unwilling,  with  an  infinitive. 
Noli  rogare,  do  not  ask  (be  unwilling  to  ask).  Noli  existi- 
mare,  Pompei,  hunc  esse  exercitum,  etc.,  do  not  think,  Pom- 
pey,  that  this  is  the  army,  etc. 

Note. — Other  methods  of  expressing  prohibition  are  less  common — e.  g. ,  ne, 
with  the  second  person  perfect  subjunctive  ;  cave,  cave  ne,  take  care  not,  or 
fac  ne,  sec  that  not,  with  the  second  person  present  or  perfect  subjunctive. 

176.  Subjunctive  in  Wishes.  Wishes,  prayers,  assev- 
erations, etc.,  are  expressed  by  the  subjunctive,  usually  intro- 
duced by  utinam.  The  regular  negative  is  ne.  The  present 
tense  (rarely  the  perfect)  represents  a  wish  as  possible ;  the 
imperfect  as  unaccomplished  in  present  time  ;  the  pluperfect 
as  unaccomplished  in  past  time.  Utinam  veniat,  may  he 
come  I    (possibleV     Utinam  veniret,  tvould  that  he  were  com- 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES  35 

ingf  (unaccomplished  in  present).  Utinam  venisset,  would 
that  he  had  come !  (unaccomplished  in  past),  Utinam  ille 
omnis  secum  suas  copias  eduxisset,  ivould  that  he  had  led 
all  his  forces  out  with  hiui  I  Utinam  P.  Clodius  dictator  as- 
set, ivould  that  Clodius  were  dictator  / 

177.  Deliberative  Subjunctive.  Questions  implying 
doubt,  indignation,  or  impossibility,  take  the  subjunctive. 
They  are  most  frequent  in  the  first  person.  Quid  agam,  iu- 
dices  ?  quo  me  vertam?  what  am  I  to  do,  judges?  whither  am 
I  to  turn  ? 

178.  Rhetorical  Question.  This  is  simply  a  statement  made  in 
the  form  of  a  question  to  which  the  answer  is  impHed.  It  may  take 
either  indicative  or  subjunctive  as  the  English  indicates.  Quem  enim 
Romanorum  pudet  uxorem  ducere  in  convivium  ?  who  among  t/ie  Ronans 
is  ashamed  to  take  his  wife  to  a  dinner  ?  Quid  ego  te  invitem  ?  why  should 
I  invite  you  ? 

179.  "  Potential  "  Subjunctive.  Under  this  head  are 
grouped  several  uses  in  which  the  subjunctive  expresses  a 
possibility,  polite  statement,  an  opinion,  or  the  like,  represent- 
ing the  English  should,  may,  might,  etc.    The  negative  is  non. 

a.  The  present  (rarely  the  perfect)  is  used  of  present  or  fu- 
ture time,  Roges  me  quid  sit  deus,jcM  may  ask  me  what  god 
is.     Velim,  I  should  like  (more  polite  than  volo,  /  wish). 

b.  The  imperfect  is  used  of  the  past.  Tuncdiceres:  -'Cae- 
sar, cave  credas,"  then  you  ivould  have  said :  "  Caesar,  do  not 
believe''     So  commonly  puto,  credo,  video,  cerno,  audio. 

Modes  in  Dependent  Clauses 

180.  Relative  Clauses.  Relative  clauses  are  exceeding- 
ly common  in  Latin.  The  student  should,  therefore,  note 
their  various  uses  carefully.  Their  simplest  use  is  to  state  a 
fact  about  the  antecedent  (181).  They  may  also  express  a 
characteristic  applicable  to  the  antecedent  not  as  an  Individ- 


36  NOTES  ON  IDIOM 

ual,  but  as  a  member  of  a  class  (182).    They  also  denote  cause 
(185),  concession  ^^^218),  purpose   .t88),  and  result  (196). 

181.  Clauses  introduced  by  relative  words,  as  qui,  quod, 
quisquis,  quicumque,  ubi,  unde,  etc.,  and  stating  definite 
facts  about  the  antecedent,  take  the  indicative.  Patria,  quae 
mihi  vita  mea  multo  est  carior,  my  country,  which  is  far 
dearer  to  me  than  my  life.  Quam  [i.  e.,  virtus]  qui  adeptus 
erit,  ubicumque  erit  gentium,  a  nobis  diligetur,  tlte  man 
who  shall  succeed  in  getting  this,  zaherever  he  may  be,  will  be 
beloved  by  us.     Quisquis  est,  whoever  he  may  be. 

Note. — Observe  that  English  may  be  after  an  indefinite  relative  is  equivalent 
to  is  or  shall  be.  Latin  with  characteristic  directness  uses  the  present  or  future 
indicative. 

182.  Characteristic  Clauses.  The  subjunctive  is  used 
if  the  relative  clause  states  a  characteristic  applicable  to  any 
object  in  the  same  class.  This  occurs  often  when  the  antece- 
dent is  not  a  definite  object.  Quamquam  nonnulli  sunt  in 
hoc  ordine,  qui  aut  ea  quae  imminent  non  videant,  aut 
ea  quae  vident  dissimulent,  and  yet  there  are  some  in  this 
body,  who  (i.  e.,  a  class  of  men  who)  either  do  not  see  the  dan- 
gers which  threaten,  or  hide  what  they  do  see.  So  after  phrases 
like  sunt  qui,  there  are  some  who,  multi  sunt  qui,  quis  est 
qui,  nemo  est  qui,  nihil  est  quod,  there  is  no  reason  for,  etc. 
Sunt  qui  eam  arma  petisse  dicant,  there  are  persons  who  say 
that  she  asked  for  arms.  Neque  res  ulla  quae  ad  placandos 
deos  pertineret  praetermissa  est,  and  nothing  which  was 
suitable  for  propitiating  the  gods  zuas  left  undone.  Si  umquam 
fuit  quod  dis  gratias  ageretis,  if  there  was  ever  reason  for 
you  to  give  thanks  to  the  gods. 

183.  Even  after  an  indefinite  antecedent,  if  facts  and  not  character- 
istics are  stated,  the  indicative  is  sometimes  used.  Sunt  qui  piscibus 
vivere  existimantur,  same  are  thought  to  live  on  fish. 


CAUSAL  CLAUSES  37 

184.  If  the  antecedent  is  limited  by  dignus,  indignus, 
idoneus,  unus,  or  solus,  etc.,  a  relative  clause  of  character- 
istic, commonly  follows.  line  indigni  erant  qui  impetra- 
rent  ?  were  they  umvorthy  to  obtain  their  request  f  Non  erit 
idoneus  qui  ad  bellum  mittatur,  lie  tvill  not  be  fit  to  be  scut 
fo  the  war.  Causa  est  haec  inventa  sola,  in  qua  omnes  sen- 
tirent  unum  atque  idem,  this  is  the  only  case  ever  met  with 
in  regard  to  which  all  men  had  one  and  the  same  feeling. 

185.  Causal  Clauses.  When  clauses  expressing  a  reason 
or  cause  are  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  because,  or  quoniam, 
since,  seeing  that,  the  indicative  is  used  to  give  the  speaker's 
or  writer's  own  reason  ;  if  the  reason  rests,  however,  on  the 
authority  of  another  person,  the  subjunctive  should  be  used, 
on  the  principle  of  a  quoted  dependent  clause.  Quod  metu 
cessisse  credebant  hostem,  id  morari  victoriam  rati,  quoc" 
interesset  amnis,  because  they  believed  that  the  enemy  hau 
ivithdrawn  in  fear,  they  thought  the  only  thing  which  retard- 
ed their  victory  was  the  fact  that  the  river  was  between  them. 
Livy  .states  the  quod  credebant  on  his  own  authority,  but 
the  quod  interesset  is  quoted  from  the  thought  of  the  Span- 
iards. Vos,  Quirites,  quoniam  iam  nox  est,  in  vestra  tecta 
6.isc&diitQ,  do  you,  fellow-citizens,  since  it  is  now  night,  disperse 
to  your  homes. 

186.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  cum,  since,  as,  take  the 
subjunctive.  Cum  se  suaque  defendere  non  possent,  legatos 
ad  Caesarem  mittunt,  as  they  zvere  unable  to  defend  themselves 
and  their  property,  they  sent  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  Quae 
cum  ita  sint,  this  being  tlie  case. 

187.  When  an  English  causal  clause  is  introduced  by  since  or  for,  fol- 
lowed by  a  personal  pronoun  or  a  demonstrative  word,  introduce  the 
Latin  clause  by  a  relative  pronoun  or  adverb,  not  by  cum  ;  qui=cum  ego, 
cuui  tu,  cum  nos,  cum  is,  etc. ;  ubi=cum  ibi,  etc.  The  verb  is  in  the  sub- 
junctive (cf.  186),  and  the  relative  may  be  preceded  by  ut  or  quippe,  as. 


38  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

tialurally.  Domum  suam  istum  non  fere  quisquam  vocabat ;  nee  mirum, 
qui  neque  in  urbe  viveret  neque  revocaturus  esset,  almost  nobody  used  to 
invite  him  to  /lis  home  ;  and  no  wonder,  for  he  neither  lived  in  tawn  nor  was 
likely  to  return  the  invitation.  Medio  alveo  haudquaquam  pari  certamine 
concursum,  quippe  ubi  pedes  instabilis  vel  ab  inermi  equite  perverti  posset, 
in  the  middle  of  the  channel  they  came  together  in  a  conflict  which  was 
not  at  all  equally  matched ;  naturally,  where  an  infantryman  without 
sure  footing  could  be  toppled  over  even  by  an  unarmed  horseman. 

i88.  Purpose  Clauses.  Purpose  or  design  is  expressed 
by  the  subjunctive  introduced  by  ut  (uti),  that,  in  order  to,  to  ; 
ne,  that  not,  lest,  not  to ;  qui  (  =  ut  ego,  ut  is,  etc.);  ubi  (=ut 
ibi,  etc.) ;  or  other  relative  words.  The  tense  is  present  or  im- 
perfect (tenses  of  incomplete  action,  cf.  153),  for  an  act  which 
is  only  designed  is  obviously  not  yet  complete.  Reliquas 
copias  Helvetiorum  ut  consequi  posset,  pontem  in  Arare 
faciendum  curat,  that  he  might  be  able  to  pursue  the  rest  of 
the  Helvetian  forces,  he  had  a  bridge  built  over  the  Saone. 
P.  Crassum  in  Aquitaniam  proficisci  iubet,  ne  auxilia  in 
Galliam  mittantur,  Publius  Crassus  is  ordered  to  go  to  Aqui- 
tania,  that  aid  may  not  be  sent  into  Gaul.  Interim  ad  prae- 
fectos  mittit  qui  nuntiarent,  meanwhile  he  sends  men  to  the 
officers  to  bear  word. 

Note. — For  sequence  of  tenses,  see  168  fF. 

189.  A  clause  of  purpose  which  contains  a  comparative  is  introduced 
by  quo  (degree  of  difference,  116).  Quod  quo  facilius  perspicere  possitis, 
diligenter  attendite,  that  you  may  be  able  to  see  through  '.  'lis  the  more 
easily,  give  careful  attention. 

190.  A  clause  introduced  by  ut  or  ne  is  used  as  the  object 
of  verbs  signifying  to  request,  tirge,  advise, persuade,  permit,  en- 
deavor, determine,  order,  decree. 

Homines  allegat  qui  peterent  ne  ad  Sullam  adirent,  he  deputes  men  to 
ask  them  not  to  go  to  Sulla.  Numquam  a  dis  immortalibus  optabo  ut  Ca- 
tilinam  ducere  exercitum  hostium  audiatis,  never  shall  I  pray  the  im- 
mortal gods  that  you  may  hear  of  Catiline  at  the  head  of  an  army  of  the 


PURPOSE   CLAUSES 


39 


ftiemy.  Cui  iam  persuaserat  ut  in  Italiam  proficisceretur,  whom  he  had 
already  persuaded  to  set  out  for  Italy.  Huic  permisit  uti  in  his  locis 
legionem  conlocaret,  he  ga7>e  him  permission  to  quarter  a  legion  in  this 
locality.  Suis  imperavit  ne  quod  omnino  telum  in  hostes  reicerent,  he 
ordered  his  men  not  to  throw  back  at  the  enemy  any  weapon  at  all. 

Among  verbs  taking  this  construction  are  : 

rogo,  ask  persuadeo,  persuade 

oro,  beg  concede,  permitto,  allow 

peto,  quaero,  request,  entreat  operam  do,  take  pains 

postulo,  demand  impero,  mando,  order 

hortor,  urge  praecipio,  direct,  bid 

suadeo,  ttrge,  recommend  negotium  do,  charge 

moneo,  advise  edico,  proclaim,  ordain 

censeo,  propose,  mo^e  decerno,  resolve,  decree 

A  useful  little  rule  is  expressed  by  the  old  rhyme  : 

"  With  ask,  command,  advise,  and  strive. 
By  ut  translate  th'  infinitive; 
But  not  so  after  iubeo  nor 
Veto,  nor  deponent  conor." 

191.  When  verbs  meaning  to  request,  urge,  etc.,  are  used  in  the  pas- 
sive, their  subject  may  be  a  clause  with  ut  or  ne.  His  persuaderi  ut  diu- 
tius  morarentur  non  poterat,  these  could  not  be  persuaded  to  remain  longer. 

192.  Substantives  which  are  kindred  in  meaning  to  the  verbs  of  190 
may  be  accompanied  by  a  clause  in  apposition.  Nonnullae  huius  modi 
sententiae  dicebantur,  ut  impedimentis  relictis  ad  salutem  contenderent, 
some  opinions  were  expressed  to  the  effect  that  they  should  abandon  their 
baggage  and  hasten  to  a  place  of  safety.  Decretum  fit,  ut  decern  primi 
proficiscantur  ad  Sullam,  a  resolution  is  passed  that  the  ten  leading  men 
shall  go  to  Sulla. 

Such  substantives  are : 
animus,  purpose  (especially  in  the  phrases  eo,  hoc  animo). 
consilium,  /«r/<7j^  (especially  in  the  phrases  consilium  capio,y<?rw  a  pur- 

pose,  eo,  hoc  consilio). 
condicio,  lex,  condition,  terms  (especially  ea,  hac  condicione,  lege), 
negotium,  business  (especially  negotium  do,  employ  one  for  something). 
sententia,  opinion. 
decretum,  decree. 


40  NOTES   ON   IDIOM 

193.  The  object  of  the  following  verbs  is  more  commonly 
expressed  by  an  infinitive  than  by  a  subjunctive  clause  :  volo, 
nolo,  malo,  cupio,  studeo,  patior,  sino,  cogo,  conor,  consti- 
tuo,  statue,  iubeo,  veto.  With  licet  an  infinitive  is  used  as 
subject  (235).  Si  veteris  contumeliae  oblivisci  vellet,  if  Ju- 
icer c  ivilling  to  forget  iiie  old  wrong.  Bellum  gerere  conan- 
tur,  they  try  to  ivage  zoar.  Portas  claudi  iussit,  he  ordered 
the  gates  to  be  eloscd.  Neque  remanere  uno  in  loco  licet,  and 
remainmg  in  one  plaee  is  not  allowed. 

194.  Verbs  of  Hindering.  Verbs  of  hindering  and  refusing,  if 
affirmative,  take  a  subjunctive  clause  introduced  by  ne  or  quominus.  But 
with  prohibeo  and  impediothe  infinitive  is  much  more  common.  Deter- 
rere  ne  maior  multitude  Germanorum  Rhenum  traducatur,  to  prevent  a 
greater  horde  of  Germans  from  being  led  across  the  Rhine.  Quae  (naves) 
vento  tenebantur  quominus  in  eundem  portum  venire  possent,  the  ships 
were  kept  by  the  wind  from  the  possibility  of  coming  into  the  same  har- 
bor.   Germanos  transire  prohibebant,  they  kept  the  Germans  from  crossing. 

NoTK. — For  verbs  of  Jdnderivg  and  refusing  negatived,  see  200. 

195.  Vkrbs  of  Fearing.  Verbs  oi  fearing  maj' take  a  subjunc- 
tive clause  as  object.  I  fear  (or  do  not  fear)  that  or  lest=m^t\xo,  timeo, 
vereor  (or  non  metuo,  etc.)  ne  ;  I  fear  that  not— v&rtor  (metuo  or  timeo 
rarelv)  ut ;  I  do  not  fear  that  not^non  vereor  ne  non.  Metuebat  ne  coge- 
rentur  confiteri,  he  was  afraid  that  they  might  be  forced  to  confess.  Ve- 
reri  ut  habeam  satis,  to  fear  that  I  shalt  not  have  enough.  Non  vereor 
ne  hoc  non  probem,  /  have  no  fear  that  I  shall  not  prove  this. 

NoTK. — Purpose  is  often  expressed  by  ad  and  the  gerundive  (257)1  *"^'  ^^  ^^•^ 
iiKiin  verb  denotes  motion,  by  the  supine  in  -um  (261). 

196.  Rksult  Clauses.  Clauses  denoting  a  result  of  the 
mail)  action  take  the  subjunctive.  The  particles  are  ut,  that, 
so  that,  so  as  to;  ut  non,'  that  not,  without ;  qui  (  =  ut  ego, 
ut  is,  etc.),  ubi  (r=ut  ibi),  or  other  relative  words.    Frequently 


•  Notice  the  difference  in  negative  of  result  and  of  purpose  (188). 
Similarly,  that  nobody^ut  nemo  (result),  but  ne  quis  (purpose)  ;  that  not 
ever=\it  numquam  (result),  ne  umquam  (purpose),  etc. 


RESULT  CLAUSES  4 1 

in  Latin,  as  in  English,  demonstrative  words  in  the  main  clause 
may  give  warning  that  a  result  clause  is  to  follow.  Such  are 
ita,  sic,  tam,  is,  talis,  tantus,  adeo,  eo,  etc.  Mens  altis- 
simus  impendebat,  ut  perpauci  prohibere  possent,  a  high 
mountain  towered  above,  so  that  a  very  few  men  could  prevent 
a  passage.  Erat  ea  sagacitate  ut  decipi  non  posset,  he  zvas 
{a  man)  of  such  shrewdness  that  he  could  not  be  deceived.  Quis 
potest  esse  tam  mente  captus  qui  neget  haec  omnia  deo- 
rum  potestate  administrari  ?  who  can  be  so  foolish  as  to  say 
that  all  these  things  are  not  controlled  by  the  power  of  the  gods  ? 
Note.  — For  the  sequence  of  tenses,  see  168  ff. 

197.  A  clause  introduced  by  ut  or  ut  non  is  used  as  the 
object  of  verbs  denoting  to  make,  effect,  accomplish,  etc.  Ob- 
sides  uti  inter  sese  dent,  perficit,  he  effects  an  exchange  of 
hostages  {brings  about  that  they  give  hostages  to  each  other). 
Fecerunt  ut  consimilis  fugae  profectio  videretur,  they  made 
the  departure  seem  very  much  like  a  flight  {made  that  it  seemed). 

The  most  common  verbs  admitting  this  construction  are  :  facio,  effi- 
cio,  conficio,  perficio,  and  impetro,  all  mea.x\'\ng\.o bring  about, accomplish. 

198.  A  clause  with  ut  or  ut  non  is  used  as  the  subject  of  verbs  of 
making,  effecting,  etc.,  when  they  are  passive ;  and  of  impersonal  verbs 
denoting  //  happens,  it  follows,  it  remains,  it  is  added,  etc.  Perficiendum 
est  ut  homines  te  audiant,  men  must  be  made  to  listen  to  you  {it  must  be 
brought  about  that  they  listen).  Accldit  ut  esset  luna  plena,  //  happened 
that  the  moon  was  full.  Accedebat  ut  tempestatem  ferrent  facilius,  besides 
{it  was  added  that)  they  weathered  a  storm  more  easily. 

Such  verbs  are  :  fit,  efficitur,  conficitur,  perficitur,  it  is  accomplished ; 
accldit,  contingit, -evenit,  it  happens  ;  sequitur,  it  follows  ;  restat,  it  re- 
mains ;  accedit,  //  is  added. 

199.  A  clause  with  ut  or  ut  non  may  be  in  apposition  to  a  noun  or 
pronoun.  Si  illud  fecisset,  ut  trucidaret  inimicum,  if  he  had  accomplished 
thai  act  of  murderijig  an  enemy. 

200.  Verbs  of  Hindering.  Verbs  of  hindering  and  refusing,  if 
negative  or   interrogative,   take  a  subjunctive  clause   introduced    by 


42  NOTES  ON    IDIOM 

quin,  that  not,  but  that,  or,  less  commonly,  quominus,  that  less.  Retineri 
non  potuerant  quin  tela  coicerent,  they  could  not  be  restrained  from  hurl- 
ing {but  that  they  hurled)  their  shears.  Non  recusamus  quin  Rosci  vita 
dedatur,  we  make  no  objection  to  Roscius's  life  being  yielded  up.  Quid 
obstat  quominus  sit  beatus  ?  what  hinders  his  being  happy  f 

NOTK. — For  the  construction  with  these  verbs  when  affirmative,  see  194. 

201.  Verbs  of  Doubting.  Verbs  and  other  expressions  of  doubl- 
ing, when  negative,  or  interrogative  with  negative  implied,  generally 
take  quin,  but  that,  that,  and  the  subjunctive.  Non  dubitare  quin  de 
omnibus  obsidibus  supplicium  sumat,  not  to  doubt  that  he  will  inflict  pun- 
ishment on  all  the  hostages.  Ut  nemini  dubium  esse  debeat  quin  reliquo 
tempore  eadem  mente  sim  futurus,  so  that  nobody  ought  to  doubt  that  I 
atn  going  to  be  of  the  same  mind  in  the  future.  Et  quisquam  dubitabit 
quin  huic  bellum  transmittendum  sit  ?  and  will  any  one  doubt  (implying 
that  nobody  will  doubt)  that  my  client  should  have  the  war  committed  to 
him  f  % 

202.  Non  dubitare,  7wt  to  hesitate,  commonly  takes  the  infinitive. 
Non  dubitavit  exstruere  aedificium,  he  did  not  hesitate  to  build  a  house. 

203.  Temporal  Clauses.  If  the  action  of  a  temporal 
clause  precedes  that  of  the  main  clause  (often  expressed  in 
English  by  the  auxiliary  had),  the  verb  may  be  either  in  the 
pluperfect  subjunctive  with  cum,  when,  or  in  the  perfect  in- 
dicative' with  postquam,  posteaquam,''  after ;  ubi,  when; 
ut,  as,  when  ;  ut  primum,  cum  primum,  simul  atque  (ac),  or 
simul  alone,  rt.f  soon  as.  Cum  tridui  viam  processisset,  nun- 
tiatum  est,  when  he  had  advanced  a  three  days'  journey,  word 
zvas  brought.  Posteaquam  Lucullus  venit,  plures  gentes 
concitatae  sunt,  after  Lucullus  had  come,  more  peoples  were 
stirred  up.  Ubi  de  eius  adventu  certiores  facti  sunt,  legates 
mittunt,  zvhen  they  had  been  informed  of  his  arrival,  they  sent 
envoys.  Cum  primum  potuit,  ad  exercitum  contendit,  as 
soon  as  he  could  he  hastened  to  the  army. 


'  The  historical  present  may  also  be  used,  but  is  less  common. 
*  A  favorite  form  with  Cicero. 


TEMPORAL   CLAUSES 


43 


204.  When  the  action  of  a  temporal  clause  is  past,  but  rep 
resented  as  going  on  at  the  same  time  as  that  of  the  main 
clause  (frequently  expressed  in  English  by  was,  or  a  participle 
in  -tng),  either  cum,  w/ie7t,  with  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  or 
dum,  while,  with  tlie  present  indicative,  may  be  used.  Cum 
se  finitimis  bellum  inferre  simularet,  in  Hispaniam  legates 
misit,  pretending  that  he  was  making  tvar  on  his  neighbors,  he 
sent  envoys  to  Spai',.  Dum  aediiicant  tamquam  beati,  in 
aes  alienum  inciderunt,  ivhile  they  were  building  like  million- 
aires, they  fell  into  debt. 

205.  Cum,  when,  introducing  a  clause  of  present  or  future  time,  takes 
the  present,  future,  or  future  perfect  indicative;  of  a  definite  time  in 
the  past,  if  the  temporal  clause  serves  to  date  the  main  action,  the 
past  tenses  of  the  indicative  are  used.  Ad  quos  (equos)  se,  cum  usus 
est,  recipiunt,  to  which  they  returtt  when  need  arises.  Cum  prodierit, 
audiet,  when  he  comes  (shall  have  come)  forward,  he  will  hear.  Tum, 
cum  res  permulti  amiserant,  scimus  fidem  concidisse,  at  that  time,  when 
many  had  lost  their  property,  we  kno^u  that  credit  collapsed. 

206.  Dum,  quoad,  or  quam  diu,  as  long  as,  so  long  as,  are 

used  with  all  tenses  of  the  indicative.  Dum  civitas  erit,  iudicia 

fient,  so  long  as  a  state  shall  exist,  trials  ivill  be  held.     Quoad 

fuit  in  urbe,  obstiti,  so  long  as  he  zuas  in  tow7t,  I  opposed  him. 

Note. — Donee  is  for  the  most  part  a  poetical  word.  Caesar  never  uses  it, 
Cicero  but  rarely  (  =  until).     In  the  meaning  rt.r  long  as  it  is  first  u.sed  by  Livy. 

207.  Quoad  (and  sometimes  dum)  until,  takes  the  indicative 
when  the  temporal  clause  expresses  an  actual  occurrence. 
Neque  finem  sequendi  fecerunt,  quoad  praecipites  hostes 
egerunt,  a^id  they  did  not  stop  following  until  they  drove  the 
enemy  in  headlong  flight. 

208.  Dum  and  quoad,  until,  take  the  subjunctive  when 
purpose  or  expectation  is  expressed  by  the  temporal  clause. 
Dum  hie  veniret,  locum  relinquere  noluit,  until  my  client 
should  come  (expectation),  he  was  unwilling  to  leave  the  place. 


44  NOTICS    ON    IDIOM 

Nolite  expectare  dum  ego  haec  crimina  agam,  do  not  wait 
for  me  to  enumerate  (equivalent  to  that  I  may  enumerate) 
these  charges. 

209.  Antequam  and  priusquam'  (also  written  ante  quam, 
prius  quam,  cf.  second  example),  before,  introducing  a  state- 
ment of  fact,  take  the  indicative.  The  present  tense  is  used 
of  present  time,  the  present  or  future  perfect  of  future  time, 
and  the  perfect  of  past  time.  Antequam  ad  eam  orationem 
venio,  videntur  ea  esse  refutanda,  before  I  come  to  that  part 
of  my  speech,  those  charges  appear  to  need  refutation.  Neque 
prius  fugere  destiterunt  quam  ad  flumen  pervenerunt,  and 
they  did  not  stop  in  their  flight  before  they  reached  the  river. 

210.  Antequam  and  priusquam,  before,  take  the  subjunc- 
tive when  the  action  of  the  temporal  clause  is  represented,  not 
as  an  actual  fact,  but  as  anticipated  or  prevented.  Prius- 
quam se  hostes  ex  terrore  reciperent,  in  fines  Suessionum 
exercitum  duxit,  before  the  enemy  should  recover  from  terror, 
he  led  his  army  into  the  land  of  the  Snessiones.  Priusquam 
periculum  faceret,  Volusenum  praemittit,  before  making  the 
attetnpt,  he  sent  out  Voliisenus  in  advance. 

211.  Conditions.  In  a  simple  condition  of  which  the 
apodosis  is  stated  as  a  fact — if  yon  succeed,  I  am,  glad ;  if  yon 
were  successful,  I  zvas  glad ;  if  you  '{shall)  succeed,  I  shall  be 
glad,  etc. — the  indicative  is  used  in  both  protasis  and  apodosis. 
Si  me  consulis,  suadeo,  if  you  ask  my  opinion,  I  advise  it. 
Si  umquam  de  bonis  viris  potestas  vobis  iudicandi  fuit, 
hoc  tempore  eam  potestatem  omnem  vos  habetis,  if  ever 
yon  have  had  an  opportunity  of  passing  Judgment  on  good  men, 
at  this  time  you  have  that  opportunity  in  its  completeness. 

212.  The  apodosis  may  have,  instead  of  the  indicative,  an  imperative, 
hortatory  subjunctive,  or  any  other  form  demanded  by  the  sense.    Qui  si 


'Priusquam  is  the  commoner  word. 


CONDITIONS 


45 


hie  permanent,  mementote  hos  pertimescendos,  if  they  stay  here,  remem- 
ber that  these  are  the  men  to  be  feared. 

213.  It  should  be  noted  that,  if  the  condition  -refers  to  the  future, 
Latin  usually  employs  a  future  tense.  English  generally  prefers  the  pres- 
ent. Si  iste  unus  tolietur,  videbimur  esse  relevati,  if  he,  and  he  only,  is 
removed,  we  shall  seem  to  have  been  relieved.  If  the  condition  is  thought 
of  as  completed  before  the  conclusion  begins,  the  future  perfect  is  used 
in  the  protasis.  Faciam,  si  mihi  iidem  dederis,  /  will  do  it,  if  you  will 
first  promise  me. 

214.  If  a  future  condition  is  less  distinctly  stated — if  you 
should  {ox  were  to)  succeed,  I  should  be  glad — the  present  sub- 
junctive is  used  in  both  clauses.  Si  per  te  liceat,  belli  casum 
sustineant,  if  you  ivere  to  alloiv  it,  they  would  support  the  for- 
tune of  %var. 

215.  If  the  supposition  is  represented  as  contrary  to  fact — 
if  you  were  succeeding,  I  should  be  glad  ;  if  you  had  succeeded, 
I  should  have  been  glad — the  subjunctive  is  used  in  both  clauses. 
Present  time  is  denoted  by  the  imperfect,  past  time  by  tlie 
pluperfect.  Si  te  parentes  timerent,  ab  eorum  oculis  con- 
cederes,  if  your  parents  were  afraid  of  yon,  you  would  ivith- 
draw  from  their  sight.  Nisi  Ilias  ilia  exstitisset,  tumulus 
nomen  etiam  obruisset,  unless  the  Iliad  had  been  zvritten,  the 
grave  would  have  buried  his  name  too. 

216.  In  apodoses  of  conditions  contrary  to  fact  the  past  tenses  of 
the  indicative,  instead  of  the  subjunctive,  are  used  of  verbs  signifying 
necessity,  possibility,  or  duty.  The  imperfect  is  used  of  present  (some- 
times of  past)  time,  the  perfect  of  past.  Si  privatus  esset,  tamen  erat  de- 
ligendus,  if  he  were  a  pri7)atc  citizen,  still  he  ottt^ht  to  be  chosen.  Deleri 
totus  exercitus  potuit  si  fugientis  persecuti  victores  essent,  the  whole 
army  could  have  been  destroyed  if  the  i/ictors  had  followed  up  the  fugi- 
tives. 

217.  Conditional  Clauses  of  Comparison.  Clauses 
introchiced  by  the  particles  meaning  as  if — ac  si,  quasi,  tarn- 


46  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

quam  si,  ut  si,  velut  si,  and  simple  tamquam  or  (from  Livy's 
time)  velut — take  the  subjunctive.  Although  the  English 
idiom  gives  an  implication  contrary  to  fact,  the  present  or  per- 
fect tense  is  used  unless  sequence  requires  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect.  Parvi  sic  iacent  tamquam  omnino  sine  animo 
sint,  babies  lie  there  as  if  they  had  no  wits  at  all.  Velut  si 
pariter  utrosque  murus  texisset,  utrimque  procursum  est, 
as  if  the  ivall  had  protected  both  parties  equally,  they  ran  for- 
tvard  from  each  side. 

218.  Concessive  Clauses.  Of  the  most  common  conces- 
sive particles  (meaning  <?///^^?/^//)  quamquam  usually  takes  the 
indicative ;  quamvis  and  cum  commonly  take  the  subjunctive  ; 
etsi  and  tametsi  follow  the  constructions  of  si ;  licet  (proper- 
ly a  verb,  it  is  permitted^  takes  a  subjunctive,  which,  by  the 
law  of  sequence,  is  restricted  to  the  present  or  perfect.  Rela- 
tive pronouns  (equivalent  to  cum  is,  etc.)  take  the  subjunc- 
tive (cf.  187).  Hos  cum  finibus  expellere  non  potuissent, 
tamen  vectigales  sibi  fecerunt,  although  they  had  not  been 
able  to  drive  them  from  their  territory,  they  nevertheless  made 
them  tributary  to  themselves.  Tametsi  video  quanta  tem- 
pestas  impendeat,  although  I  see  zvhat  a  mighty  storm  is 
threatening. 

219.  Clauses  of  Proviso.  Dum,  mode,  or  dum  mode 
(negative  dum  ne,  etc.),  provided,  if  only,  take  the  present 
or  imperfect  subjunctive  according  to  sequence.  Ipse  sese  in 
cruciatum  dari  cuperet,  dum  de  patris  morte  quaereretur, 
he  ivould  desire  to  be  put  to  torture  himself  ,  provided  his  father's 
death  could  be  investigated.  Est  mihi  tanti,  dum  mode  a 
vobis  periculum  depellatur,  //  is  worth  my  ivhile,  if  only  the 
danger  may  be  tvardcd  off  from  you. 

220.  Indirect  Questions.  If  a  question  is  not  asked  di- 
rectly, but  depends  upon  an  expression  of  saying  or  doubt,  it 
takes  the  subjunctive.     The  introductory  word  may  be  nam 


INDIRECT   DISCOURSE  47 

or  -ne/  ivhether,  or  an  interrogative  pronoun  or  adverb.  Quid 
senatus  censuerit  exponam,  /  will  tell  tvhat  the  senate  has 
voted.  (The  direct  question  would  be,  quid  censuit  ?  ivhai 
has  it  voted?)  Quaesivit  a  me  vellemne  secum  proficisci, 
he  asked  me  whether  I  wished  to  go  with  him. 

Note. — Double  indirect  questions  may  be  introduced  by  the  same  particles  as 
double  direct  questions,  cf .  282.      Or  not  is  necne  (less  commonly  annon). 

221.  Indirect  Discourse.  Indirect  discourse  gives  the 
thought  merely,  not  the  exact  words  of  a  quotation.  It  is  in- 
troduced by  a  verb  of  saying,  knowing,  thinking,  or  perceiving. 
The  statement,  /  am  giving  what  they  ask,  becomes,  when 
quoted  by  another  person,  he  says  that  he  is  giving  what  they 
ask ;  or  in  past  time,  he  said  that  he  was  giving  what  they 
asked.  If  a  declaratory  sentence  is  thus  indirectly  quoted, 
all  main  verbs  which  represent  an  indicative  of  the  direct  state- 
ment take  the  infinitive ;  all  dependent  verbs  take  the  sub- 
junctive. In  the  example  above,  am  giving,  the  main  verb,  is 
put  in  the  infinitive;  ask,  the  dependent  verb,  goes  into  the 
subjunctive :  dicit  se  dare  quod  petant,  or  in  past  time,  dixit 
se  dare  quod  peterent.  Observe  that  the  English  conjunc- 
tion that,  which  introduces  indirect  discourse  after  verbs  of 
saying,  etc.,  is  not  expressed  in  Latin.* 

222.  If  the  main  verb  of  the  direct  statement  is  an  imperative,  or  an 
optative  or  hortatory  subjunctive,  it  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive 
when  indirectly  quoted. 

r  (pres.)  dicit,  he  tells  him,  mit- 

mittat,  let  him  send. 


mitte,  send,  )   ,  I       tat,  to  send. 

\  become  -i 


(past)  dixit,  he  told  him,  rait- 
teret,  to  send. 


'  An,  introducing  single  indirect  questions,  occurs  most  frequently  in 
the  phrase  haud  scio  an,  /  don't  know  but,  I  am  inclined  to  think.  Haud 
scio  an  fieri  possit,  /  don't  know  but  {=perhaps)  it  is  possible. 

» It  is  necessary  to  analyze  carefully  in  each  case  the  English  thai. 
it  may  mean,  so  that,  in  order  that—\xi  ;  in  M<//=quod,  etc. ;  or  it  may 
introduce  the  indirect  discourse  as  above. 


48 


NOTES  ON    IDIOM 


223.  Questions  in  indirect  discourse,  when  exp>ecting  an  answer,  are 
expressed  by  the  subjunctive  (cf.  220).  Rhetorical  questions,  on  the 
other  hand,  not  expecting  any  answer,  are  equivalent  to  declaratory 
sentences,  and  take  the  infinitive  with  subject  accusative.  Nam  obli- 
visci  possum?  can  I  forget  f  becomes  dicit  num  oblivisci  se  posse,  he 
says,  can  he  forget? 

224.  The  infinitive*  is  not  influenced  by  the  time  of  the  verb 
of  saying,  thinking,  etc.  In  deciding  what  tense  of  the  infini- 
tive to  use,  consider  what  tense  of  the  direct,  unquoted  state- 
ment or  thought  it  is  to  represent. 

A  present  indicative  of  the  direct  statement  is  represented 
when  quoted  by  the  present  infinitive ;  a  past  tense  (imper- 
fect, perfect,  pluperfect),  by  the  perfect  infinitive  ;  a  future 
tense,  by  the  future  infinitive  or  by  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut 
with  the  present  subjunctive  (imperfect  when  the  verb  of  say- 
ing is  past,  cf.  171).  The  construction  with  fore  ut  must  be 
used  of  verbs  which  have  no  passive  participle. 


Mitto,  /  am  sending  becomes  - 


Mittebam,  /  was  sending, 
Misi,  /  have  sent  or  /  sent, 
Miseram,  /  had  sent. 


(pres.)  putat  me  mittere,  he  thinks  that  I 

am  sending. 
(past)  putavit   me  mittere,   he  thought 

that  I  ivas  sending. 

I  (pres.)  putat  me  misisse,  he 
I       thinks  that  I  sent  or  have 

sent. 
(past)  putavit  me  misisse,  he 

thought  that  I  sent,  or  had 

sent. 


become 


r  (pres.)  putat  me  missurum  or  putat  fore 
j       ut  mittam,  he  thinks  that  I  will  send. 
Mittam,  /  shall  send,  becomes  \  (past)putavit  memissunim  or  putavit  fore 

I       ut  mitterem,  he  thought  that  I  would 
I      send. 


•  Remember  that  the  subject  accusative  of  the  infinitive  should  retrn 
larly  be  expressed. 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 


49 


potero  (without  passive  parti 
ciple),  /  shall  be  able. 


(pres.)  putat  fore  ut  possim, 

he  thinks  thai  I  shall  be  able. 

becomes  \  (past)  putavit  fore  ut  possem, 

he  thought  that  I  should  he 

able. 

225.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  discourse,  un- 
like the  infinitive,  depend  upon  the  verb  of  saying,  thinking, 
etc.,  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  sequence  (cf.  168),  being 
present  or  perfect  if  the  verb  of  saying  is  principal,  imperfect 
or  pluperfect  if  it  is  historical.  The  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive,  denoting  incomplete  action,  represent  a  present, 
imperfect,'  or  future  of  the  direct  discourse  ;  the  perfect  and 
pluperfect  subjunctive,  denoting  completed  action,  represent  a 
perfect,  pluperfect,  or  future  perfect. 

(pres.)  dicit  se  dare  quod  pe- 
tant,  he  says  that  he  isgii'- 
ing  what  they  ask. 
(past)  dixit  se  dare  quod  pe- 
terent,  he  said  that  he  was 
giving  what  they  asked. 
(  (pres.)  dicit  se  dare  quod  peti- 
erint,  he  says  that  he  is  giv- 
ing what  they  have  asked. 
(past)dixit  se  dare  quod  petis- 
sent,  he  said  that  he  was 
giving  what  they  had  asked. 
(pres.)  dicit  se  daturum  quod 
petierint,  he  says  that  he 
will  give  what  they   ask 
(shall  have  asked). 
(past)  dixit  se  daturum  quod 
petissent,  he  said  that  he 
wouldgive  what  they  should 
ask  (should  have  asked). 


Do  quod  petunt,  /  am  giving  )  , 

1  .  .1         i  i  becomes 

what  they  ask,  \ 


Do  quod  petierunt,  I  am  giv- 
ing what  they  have  asked, 


becomes  \ 


Dabo  quod  petierint,  /  will  I 
give  what  they  ask  (shall  \ 
have  asked),  J 


becomes  ■ 


'  If,  however,  the  action  of  a  subordinate  imperfect  is  completed  at 
the  time  of  saying  or  thinking,  it  must  be  represented  in  quotation  by 
the  perfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

4 


50 


NOTES   ON    IDIOM 


226.  The  examples  of  225  show  that  the  present  and  future  infinitives 
do  not  influence  the  sequence  of  the  subjunctive.  But  the  perfect  in- 
finitive is  generally  accompanied  by  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive, even  though  the  verb  of  saying  is  principal.  Dicit  se  dedisse  quod 
peterent,  he  says  that  he  gave  what  they  asked  (ci.  171). 

227.  Verbs  oi  promising,  hoping,  swearing,  and  threatening,  generally 
take  the  indirect  discourse  with  the  infinitive  in  x.\\e  future,  unlike  the 
English  idiom,  which  more  frequently  has  a  complementary  present  in- 
finitive. Polliceor  me  brevi  venturum,  I  promise  to  come  soon.  Speravit 
se  adfuturum,  he  hoped  to  be  present. 

228.  If  the  verb  of  saying,  thijtking,  etc.,  is  passive,  the  personal  con- 
struction is  common.  Caesar  dicitur  pervenisse,  Caesar  is  said  to  have 
arrived.  But  with  the  compound  tenses  the  impersonal  construction  is 
preferred.  Nuntiatum  est  Caesarem  pervenisse,  //  was  reported  that 
Caesar  had  arrived. 

Note. — Videor,  seem,  is  regularly  personal  except  in  the  phrase  mihi  videtur, 
/  believe  {it  seems  to  me).  Credo,  believe,  is  impersonal  in  the  passive  (cf.  89). 
Credebat^ur  me  abisse,  /  was  believed  to  have  gone. 

229.  Simple  and  Future  Conditions  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course, When  conditions  are  indirectly  quoted,  the  protasis, 
being  a  subordinate  clause,  is  put  in  the  subjunctive,  and  the 
apodosis,  if  independent,  goes  into  the  infinitive.  In  protasis' 
the  tenses  have  the  same  distinctions  as  in  other  subordinate 
clauses  indirectly  quoted  (cf.  225).  The  tense  of  the  infinitive 
in  apodosis'  is  settled  just  as  in  any  main  clause  of  an  indirect 

quotation  (cf.  224). 

Simple  Conditions 

'  (pres.)  dicit  se,  si  petant,  dare,  he  says 
that,  if  they  ask,  he  gives. 
(past)  dixit  se,   si  peterent,  dare,  he 
said  that,  if  they  asked,  he  gave. 
'  (pres.)  dicit  se,  si  petierint  (or  petis- 
sent,  226),  dedisse,  he  says  that,  if 
they  have  asked,  he  has  given. 
(past)  dixit  se,  si  petissent,  dedisse,  he 
said  that,  if  they  had  asked,  he  had 
given. 


Si  petunt,  do,  if  they  )  , 

,    r     •  \  becomes 

ask,  I  give,  ) 


Si  petierunt,  dedi,  if  1 

they  have  asked,  I  \  becomes  -1 
have  given,  J 


'  Except  when  the  supposition  is  contrary  to  fact  (cf.  230). 


CONDITIONS   IN   INDIRECT    DISCOURSE 


51 


becomes  ^ 


becomes 


Future  Conditions 

r  (pres.)  dicit  se,  si  petant,  daturum,  he 

says  that,  if  they  ask,  he  will  give. 
becomes  \  ,      \  ..   -^         •     ^        ^  j  ^ 

(past)  dixit  se,  si  peterent,  daturum,  he 

L      said  that,  if  they  asked,  he  would  give. 

(  (pres.)  dicit  se,  si  petierint,  daturum. 
he  says  that,  if  they  shall  ask,  he  will 
give. 
(past)  dixit  se,  si  petissent,  daturum, 

I       he  said  that,  if  they  should  ask,  he 

[      would  give. 
identical  in  form  with  the  more  vivid 
future  when  quoted  (third  example 
above).     The  difference  in  meaning 
can  be  seen  only  by  the  context. 

230.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course. The  protasis  does  not  follow  the  sequence  of  the 
verb  of  saying,  but  always  remains  in  the  direct  form.  The 
verb  of  the  apodosis,  if  it  is  active  and  has  the  passive  par- 
ticiple, is  expressed  by  the  periphrastic  perfect  infinitive 
(-urum  fuisse  *) ;  if  it  has  no  passive  participle  or  is  passive, 
it  is  expressed  by  the  imperfect  subjunctive  introduced  by 
futurum  fuisse  ut.  The  only  distinction,  therefore,  between 
present  and  past  conditions  contrary  to  fact,  when  indirectly 

quoted,  is  in  the  protasis. 

dicit  \  se,  si  peterent,    da- 


Si  potent,  dabo,  if 
they  ask,  I  will 
give. 


Si  petierint,  dabo,  if  1 
they  shall  ask,    I 
will  give  (cf.  213), 


Si  petant,  dem,  if 
they  should  ask,  I 
wouldgive  (cf .  2 1 4) , 


Present.  Si  peterent,  darem, 
if  they  were  asking,  I 
should  be  giving. 


Past.  Si  petissent,  dedissem, 
if  they  had  asked,  I 
should  have  given. 


dixit  S      turum  fuisse  (esse), 

becomes-}   , [that,  if  they  were 

asking,  he  should 
be  giving. 

dicit   )  se,  si  petissent,  da- 
dixit  i      turum  fuisse, 

becomes  -j  ^e  says  {  ''^'^^'  '^  '^^''^  '^"^^ 
^  .  ,\      asked,  he  should 

ltd 

\       liarie  given. 


he  says 
he  said 


he  sat 


'  The  periphrastic />/v,sr«/  infinitive  (-urum  esse)  might  be  expected  in 
the  apodosis  of  -a  present  condition  contrary  to  fact,  but  it  rarely  occurs. 


52  NOTES   ON    lUIOM 


Ai'ODosis  Passive.     Si  id  petis- 
sent,  datum  esset,  if 
they  had  asked  for  it,  \  becomes  { 
it    would    have    been 
given,  J 


r  ..  .     r  si   id  petissent,   fu- 

..    .^  -\      turum  fuisse  ut  da- 
dixit  / 

^      retur, 

'  that,  if  they  had 
he  says  J  asked  for  it,  it 
he  said  |       would  have  been 

I     given. 

231.  Implied  Indirect  Discourse.  When  a  subordi- 
nate clause  expresses  the  thought  of  some  other  person  than 
the  speaker  or  writer,  even  though  it  is  not  introduced  by  a 
word  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  it  takes  its  verb  in  the  subjunc- 
tive (cf.  225).  Si  sese  interfici  nollent,  arma  ponere  iusse- 
runt,  they  ordered  them,  if  they  did  not  ivish  to  be  killed,  to 
lay  down  their  arms.  Nollent  is  quoted  by  Caesar  from  the 
actual  command,  si  vos  interfici  non  vultis,  arma  ponite,  if 
you  do  not  ivish  to  be  killed,  lay  doivn  your  arms. 

232.  Subjunctive  by  Attraction.  A  subordinate  clause 
which  depends  on  a  subjunctive  or  infinitive,  and  forms  an  es- 
sential part  of  the  idea  expressed  by  that  subjunctive  or  in- 
finitive, takes  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive.  Quistam  dissolute 
animo  est,  qui  haec  cum  videat  tacere  possit  ?  who  is  of 
such  a  depraved  spirit,  that  iv/ien  he  sees  these  things  he  can  be 
silent  ?  The  idea  in  cum  videat  is  an  essential  limitation  of 
tacere  possit.  A  person's  depravity  is  not  shown  by  his 
mere  ability  to  keep  silent,  but  by  his  exercise  of  that  ability 
when  he  sees  such  disgraceful  conduct. 

Imperative 

233.  The  imperative  expresses  various  shades  of  will,  from 
strong  command  to  mild  entreaty.  (For  negative  command, 
see  175.) 

234.  The  present  imperative  is  more  common  than  the  future,  and 
expects  immediate  fulfilment.  Educ  tecum  omnis  tuos  ;  purga  urbem, 
lead  out  all  your  frllows  with  you  ;  cleanse  the  city. 

The  future  imperative  is  the  regular  imperative  form  of  some  verbs: 
scito,  kncnv ;  habeto,  consider  ;  memento,  remember;  esto,  be  thou. 


INFINITIVE  53 

Note. — The  future  imperative  is  used  in  legal  formulas,  general  maxims,  and 
apodoses  of  future  conditions.  Amicitia  his  legibus  esto,  there  shall  be  amity 
on  these  terms.  Ubi  nihil  erit  quod  scribas,  id  ipsum  scribito,  when  there 
isrit  anything  for  yon  to  write,  ivrite  simply  that. 

Infinitive 

235.  The  INFIMTIVE  AS  Subject.  The  infinitive  is  a  verbal 
substantive.  It  is  used  as  the  subject  of  est  and  many  im- 
personal expressions — e.  j^.,  pudet,  it  shames ;  licet,  it  is  al- 
lowed;  oportet,  ought ;  libet,  //  delights ;  placet,  it  pleases ; 
interest,  //  matters;  necesse  est,  must ;  opus  est,  there  is 
need ;  fas  est,  it  is  right,  etc.  Neque  longius  anno  re- 
manere  licet,  nor  is  it  allowable  to  reuiain  longer  than  a  year. 
Legem  illam  appellare  fas  non  est,  to  call  that  a  law  is  not 
right.     A  predicate  noun  is  in  the  accusative. 

236.  Infinitive  as  Object.  Many  verbs  take  an  infini- 
tive to  complete  their  meaning.  These  are  especially  verbs 
meaning  to  be  able,  wish,  be  accustomed,  resolve,  begin  or  end, 
attempt,  dare,  hasten,  and  seem. 

A  brief  list : 

possum,  de  able  vereor,  be  afraid 

volo  (and  compounds),  wish  paro,  prepare 

cupio,  desire  neglego,  neglect 

incipio,  coepi,  begin  cogito,  meditate 

desino,  cease  meditor,  have  in  mind 

Conor,  attempt  statuo,  constituo,  resolve,  decide 

audeo,  dare  consuesco,  soleo,  be  wont 

contendo, 1  doceo,  teach 


maturo, 
propero, 
festino, 


-  hasten 


disco,  learn 
scio,  know  how 
debeo,  ought 


dubito,  hesitate  videor,  seem 

Nostri  tamen,  quod  neque  ordines  servare  neque  firmiter  insistere  neque 
signa  subsequi  poterant,  etc.,  but  our  men,  because  they  were  not  able  to 
keep  their  ranks  nor  to  stand  firmly  nor  to  follow  close  to  the  standards, 
etc.    In  Britanniam  proficisci  contendit,  he  hastened  to  set  out  for  Britain. 


54  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

Note. — Verbs  of  wishing  take  ut  also,  opto  regularly  so,  but  cupio  always 
has  the  infinitive.     Cf.  238  and  239. 

237.  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative.  The  infini- 
tive with  subject  accusative  is  used  as  the  subject  of  expres- 
sions made  up  of  est  followed  by  a  predicate  nominative 
(substantive  or  adjective)  and  of  some  impersonal  verbs. 

A  brief  list  of  expressions  with  est : 
aequum,  par,  iustum  est,  //  is  right    necesse,  opus,  it  is  necessary,  needful 
fas,  nefas,  //  is  right,  wrong  mirum,  //  is  wonderful 

apertum,  manifestum,  it  is  clear  verum,  //  is  true 

honestum,  it  is  honorable  falsum,  it  is  false 

turpe,  /■/  is  disgraceful  fama,  the  story  is 

I  m personals :  interest,  //  matters  ;  placet,  it  pleases  ;  constat,  //  is  es- 
tablished;  oportetf  ought ;  conducit,  it  is  expedient,  etc.  Quod  vos  igno- 
rare  non  minim  ^st^your  ignorance  of  this  is  not  strange. 

238.  The  infinitive  with  subject  accusative  is  used  as  the  object  of 
volo  (and  compounds),  when  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  difTerent 
from  that  of  volo  ;  so  of  iubeo,  order  ;  veto^ forbid ;  patior  and  sino,  al- 
lo7v.  Volo  te  hoc  facere,  /  wish  you  to  do  this.  Eos  in  continentem 
adduci  iussit,  he  ordered  thejn  to  be  brought  to  the  continent.  (For  the 
infinitive  with  subject  accusative  in  indirect  discourse  as  object  of  verbs 
of  saying,  etc.,  cf.  221.) 

239.  Volo  and  compounds  also  take  the  subjunctive  with  or  without 
ut.  With  velim,  vellem,  malim,  mallem,  Cicero  always  uses  the  co- 
ordinate subjunctive  (without  ut).     Velim  eas,  /  should  like  you  to  go. 

240.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  time  relative  to  the 

time  of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend.     Thus  the  present 

infinitive  describes  an  action  as  contemporaneous  with  the  time 

of  the  main  verb  ;  the  perfect,  an  action  z.%  prior  to  the  time  of 

the  main  verb  ;  and  the  future,  an  action  as  subsequent  to  the 

time  of  the  main  verb  : 

that  he  is  coming  (contem- 

Present    S  dicit,  he  says  >  .  poraneous) 

<  >      se  venire      < 

Infinitive  i  ^vx\\..,  he  said  S  that  he  was  coming  {contem- 

[      poraneous) 


PARTICIPLES  55 

Pkrfkc  r    <  dicit,  he  says    )  S  ^^^^  /'"?  came  (prior) 

<  /     sc  vcnissc     s 

iNFiNiriVE  (  dixit,  he  said  S  I  fhai  he  had  come  (prior) 

{  thai   he   will  come   (subse- 

FrruRFC     (  Aicit,  he  says    }  quent). 

-,  {   ,-    ■     ,       '  .  ,  r    se  venturum         ,        , 

INFINITIVK  (  aiJcit,  he  sti lit  S  fhat  he  7voitia  come  (siibse- 

l       quent). 

241.  Such  English  phrases  as  ought  to  ha7>e  done,  could  have  done, 
might  have  done,  etc.,  should  be  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  perfect  or  im- 
perfect of  possum,  oportet,  etc.,  with  the  present  infinitive:  facere  po- 
tuit,  he  might  have  done ;  facere  eum  oportuit,  he  ought  to  have  done. 
The  English  puts  the  tense  of  the  infinitive  in  the  past,  while  the  Latin 
puts  the  tense  of  the  main  verb  in  the  past. 

Participles 

242.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective.  Like  a  verb  it 
may  govern  a  case ;  like  an  adjective  it  agrees  with  a  substan- 
tive. Participles  denote  time  with  reference  to  the  finite  verb 
of  the  clause  in  which  they  stand. 

Present:  contemporaneous  action  :  moriensdixit,  (while)  ^/j'/w^^^Jc/V/,  etc. 
Perfeci  :  prior  action  :  progressus  dicit,  having  advanced,  he  speaks. 
Future  :  subsequent  action  :   venturus   scripsit,  when  intending  to  come 
(about  to  come)  he  wrote. 

243.  The  perfect  participle  of  some  deponents  is  used  practically  like 
our  present.  So  arbitratus,  ratus,  thinking  ;  solitus,  accustomed ;  ausus, 
venturing;  usus,  using,  etc. 

244.  The  missing  perfect  active  participle  is  supplied  by  the  perfect 
participles  of  the  deponent  verbs  ;  in  other  verbs  by  clauses  with  cum, 
postquam,  etc.  (203),  or  by  the  ablative  absolute.  Cum  venisset,  dixit, 
having  come  he  said.  The  missing  present  passive  participle  is  made 
good  by  clauses  with  dum  or  cum  (204).  Dum  de  condicionibus  agunt, 
while  thev  were  discussing  terms  {terms  being  discussed). 

245.  .Attributive  Participle.  The  present  and  perfect 
participles  may  be  used  like  attributive  adjectives.  Id  ille 
intuens  neque  ignorans  civium  suorum  consuetudinem, 
he,  regarding  tlti.^  niid  not  unacquainted  with  the  habit  of  his 


56  NOTES   ON   IDIOM 

felloiv-citizens.  His  de  rebus  Caesar  certior  factus  et  in- 
firmitatem  Gallorum  veritus,  Caesar,  informed  of  these  events 
/I  id  fearing  the  fickleness  of  the  Gauls. 

246.  Attributive  participles  often  express  time,  cause,  manner,  means, 
condition,  concession,  etc.,  and  are  thus  equivalent  to  clauses.  Hunc 
infamatum  a  plerisque  tres  historici  summis  laudibus  extulerunt,  him, 
though  defamed  (concession)  by  the  majority,  three  historians  have  greatly 
praised.  C.  Flaminium  cum  exercitu  insidiis  circumventum  occidit  neque 
multo  post  C.  Centeniura  saltus  occupantem,  he  slew  Gains  Flaminius 
involved  with  his  army  in  an  ambuscade  (time)  and  a  little  later  Gaitcs 
Centenius  while  he  was  holding  the  passes  (time). 

247.  The  attributive  perfect  passive  participle  often  carries  the  main 
idea.     Ab  urbe  condita.,  from  the  founding  of  the  city. 

248.  After  video,  audio,  and  the  like,  note  the  difference  in  meaning 
between  the  infinitive  and  present  participle.  Audivi  eum  vocantem,  / 
heard  him  (in  the  act  of)  calling  ;  but  audivi  eum  vocare,  I  heard  that  he 
was  calling. 

So  facio,  induco,  represent,  take  a  present  participle  to  indicate  the 
act  as  taking  place.  (Plato)  eum  induxit  commemorantem,  Plato  repre- 
sented him  saying. 

249.  The  use  of  present  participles  as  substantives  in  the  nominative 
singular  is  rare.  In  the  other  cases  it  is  common.  Thus :  amans  should 
not  be  used  to  mean  a  lover,  but  amantis,  amantem,  amantes,  etc.,  may 
be  so  used.  This  applies  also  to  the  masculine  of  the  perfect  passive 
participle  with  a  few  exceptions— e.g.,  natus,  son  ;  but  not  to  the  neuter 
— e.  g.,  dictum,  factum,  institutum,  responsum. 

250.  The  future  participle  rarely  occurs  with  a  noun  in  classical  Latin 
(except  in  the  phrase  res  futura,  the  future,  singular  and  plural).  Its 
only  common  use  is  in  the  periphrastic  conjugation. 

Gerund  and  Gerundive 

251.  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  substantive  with  active  mean- 
ing ;  the  gerundive,  a  verbal  adjective  with  passive  meaning. 
The  gerund  may,  therefore,  be  used  alone  like  a  noun,  while 
the  gerundive  must  always  accompany  a  noun  or   pronoun 


GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE  57 

with  which  it  agrees.     In  legendo,  in  the  reading  (gerund). 
Liber  legendus,  a  book  to  be  read  (gerundive). 

252.  Instead  of  the  gerund  with  an  accusative,  the  gerundive  con- 
suuction  is  generally  used.  Instead  of  pacem  petendi  causa,  write  pacis 
p  3tendae  causa, /ijr  the  sake  of  seeking  peace. 

Note. — If  the  accusative  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective,  the  gerund  is  used. 
Stadium  aliquid  agendi,  desire  of  doing  something. 

253.  Genitive.^  The  genitive  of  both  gerund  and  gerun- 
dive frequently  depends  upon  nouns  and  adjectives,  especially 
causa  (sometimes  gratia).  Summa  difHcultas  faciendi  pon- 
tis,  extreme  difficulty  of  building  a  bridge.  Cupidus  audiendi, 
desirous  of  hearing.  Praedandi  frumentandique  causa,  for 
the  sake  of  plundering  and  foraging. 

254.  When  used  with  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  the  gerundive  takes 
the  same  form  without  regard  to  gender  or  number.  Sui  conservandi 
causa, /(9r  the  sake  of  preserving  themselves  (not  conservandorum). 

255.  Dative.  The  dative  of  gerund  and  gerundive  may 
be  used  with  studeo,  be  eager  for ;  praesum,  be  in  charge  of; 
diem  dicere,  natne  a  day  for,  etc.,  also  with  official  titles  and 
comitia,  election.  Studeo  libris  legendis,  I  am  eager  to  read 
{for  reading)  the  books.  Curator  muris  reficiendis,  com- 
missioner for  repairing  the  walls. 

256.  The  dative  may  be  used  also  after  words  oi  fitness  (cf.  92),  but 
ad  with  the  accusative  is  better.  Locus  ad  egrediendum  accommodatus, 
or  locus  egrediendo  accommodatus,  a  place  suitable  for  disembarking. 

257.  Accusative.  The  accusative  of  gerund  and  gerundive 
is  chiefly  used  after  ad  (rarely  in).  N avium  magnam  copiam 
ad  transportandum  exercitum  pollicebantur,  they  promised  a 
large  number  of  ships  for  the  transportation  of  the  army. 

258.  The  accusative  of  the  gerundive  is  also  used  in  dependence  on 
euro,  care  for ;  conduco,  hire;  loco,  contract  for,  let;  trado,  give  over. 


'The  nominative  of  the  gerund  is  supplied  by  the  infinitive  (cf.  235). 


58  NOTES    ON    IDIOM 

etc..  to  denote  the  effect  sought.     Pontem  in  Arare  faciendum  curat,  he 
had  a  bridge  built  over  the  Sadne. 

259.  Ablative.  The  ablative  of  gerund  and  gerundive  is 
used  to  express  means  and  cause  (rarely  manner),  and  very 
often  with  in,  ab,  de,  ex.  Hominis  mens  discendo  alitur, 
the  human  tnind  is  quickened  by  learning.  In  illo  uno  laudan- 
do  consentiunt,  in  praising  hitn  alone  do  they  agree. 

260.  The  gerundive  alone  or  with  esse  (periphrastic)  may 

denote  necessity  or  obligation.     Oratio  legenda,  a  speech  that 

ought  to  be  read.     Dedecus  vitandum  est,  disgrace  should  be 

avoided.     The  gerundive  of  transitive  verbs  only  can  have  a 

subject  (cf.  8g).     With  intransitives  an  impersonal  construction 

is  necessary.     Nobis  currendum  est,  ive  must  run. 

Note. — But  utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  are  used  personally  in  the  oblique 
cases.     In  fungendo  munere,  in  perfonnhtg  a  duty. 

The  Supine 

261.  The  supine  is  a  verbal  substantive.  The  form  in  -um 
(accusative  supine)  expresses  purpose  after  verbs  of  motion. 
It  rarely  takes  an  object.  Cohortes  frumentatum  mittit,  he 
sends  his  cohorts  a-foraging.  Legati  veniebant  questum  quod, 
etc.,  envoys  came  to  complain  because,  etc. 

262.  The  form  in  -u  (ablative  supine)  is  used  chiefly  as  an 
ablative  of  specification  with  fas,  right ;  nefas,  wrong;  ho- 
nestus,  honorable;  turpis,  base;  incnndus,  pleasant ;  facilis, 
easy;  d\%.c\\\s,  difficult ;  mirabilis,  marvellous;  utilis, //j.r/>//, 
etc.  It  never  takes  an  object.  Incredibile  dictu,  incredible 
to  say  (as  to  the  saying). 


PREPCJSITIONS 


59 


5.  Particles 

Prepositions 

263.  Most  prepositions  in  Latin  are  used  with  the  accusa- 
tive. The  following  always  belong  with  the  ablative:  a,  ab 
(abs),  cum,  de,  e,  ex,  prae,  pro,  sine.  With  in  and  sub  the 
accusative  is  used  of  the  limit  of  motion,  the  ablative  of  the 
place  where  (cf.  137).  In  urbem  pervenire,  to  arrive  in  town, 
but  in  urbe  esse,  to  be  711  tox^nt.  Sub  iugum  mittere,  to  send 
under  the  yoke,  but  sub  monte  considere,  to  encamp  at  the 
foot  of  a  mountain. 

264.  The  forms  a  and  e  may  be  used  before  consonants  only  ;  ab  and 
ex  must  be  used  before  vowels  and  h,  and  may  be  used  before  most 
consonants.     Abs  is  allowable  only  with  te,  but  a  te  is  more  frequent. 

265.  With  two  or  more  words  in  the  same  connection  the  preposition 
is  usually  not  repeated.  Ex  Aquitania  Cantabrisque,  from  Aquitania 
avd  the  Cantabrzans.  On  the  other  hand,  the  preposition  should  be  re- 
peated if  the  individual  words  are  to  be  emphasized  or  distinguished.' 
Legati  ab  Haeduis  et  a  Treveris  veuiebant,  ambassadors  came  from  the 
Haeduans  and  {others)  from  the  Trez>eri. 

Conjunctions 

266.  Copulative  Conjunctions. 

et,  and,  connects  both  likes  and  unlikes. 

-que,  and,  is  always  appended  to  the  first  word  in  its  clause 
(unless  that  word  is  a  monosyllabic  preposition).  It  unites 
things  belonging  closely  together. 

atque,  ac,  and,  adds  a  more  important  member  to  a  less  im- 
portant. The  member  added  is  often  a  sort  of  definition 
or  afterthought.  Ac  never  stands  before  vowels  or  //,  rarely 
before  c,  g,  q. 

etiam,  evett,  still,  etc.,  emphasizes  the  word  to  which  it  be- 
longs and  which  it  usually  precedes. 


*  Repetition  of  the  preposition  is  the  rule  after  et  .  .  .  et,  nee  .  .  .  nee, 
aut  .  .  .  aut,  vel  .  .  .  vel,  non  modo  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  ut  .  .  .  ita,  etc. ;  also 
after  aut,  vel,  sed,  nisi,  quam,  quasi,  sicut,  tamquam,  etc. 


6o  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

quoque,  also,  emphasizes  the  word  to  which  it  belongs  and 
which  it  always  immediately  follows. 

267.  Instead  of  et  non,  et  numquam,  et  nullus,  etc.,  write  nee,  nee  um- 
quam,  nee  ullus,  etc. 

268.  Where  three  or  more  members  are  to  be  connected,  use  a  con- 
junction before  each  (it  is  not  necessary  before  the  first  member)  or 
omit  conjunctions  entirely  (asyndeton);  or  connect  the  last  two  by -que. 

The  general,  the  envoys,  and  the  soldiers  is  imperator,  legati,  milites,  or 
(et)  imperator  et  legati  et  milites,  or  imperator,  legati,  militesque. 

269.  Two  adjectives  belonging  to  one  noun  are  regularly  connected 
by  et.     A  long,  severe  journey,  iter  longum  et  grave. 

270.  Adversatives. 

sed,  but,  the  general  word,  both  strong  and  weak. 

verum,  but,  rare  ;  like  sed. 

tamen,  nevertheless,  really  concessive.  Usually  stands  first ; 
sometimes  after  an  emphatic  word. 

autem,  but,  however,  etc.,  weakest ;  introduces  a  contrast ; 
often  used  in  transMions  :^  moreover, /urthermore.  It  is 
always  post-positive,  generally  in  second  place. 

veto,  verily,  of  a  truth,  emphasizes  a  statement.  Generally  in 
second  place  (always  post- positive). 

at  and  atqui,  but  and  yet,  very  strong;  contradict  and  intro- 
duce objections. 

271.  Disjunctives. 

aut,  or,  excludes  one  member  or  the  other  ;  allows  no  choice. 

vel,  or,  allows  a  choice ;  adds  an  unimportant  contrast.  It 
often  introduces  a  correction,  vel  potius,  or  rather,  -ve  (en- 
clitic) is  like  it,  but  rarer. 

sive  (seu),  or,  allows  a  choice ;  often  denotes  indifference  or 
is  used  to  introduce  a  correction,  like  vel;  sive  potius,  or 
rather. 

272.  Correlatives.  Both  copulatives  and  disjunctives  are  used 
correlatively. 

Copulative  Correlatives 
et  .  .  .  et,  both.  .  .  .  and. 
eum  .  .  .  tum,  both  .  .  .  and,  not  only  .  .  .  but  also. 


ADVERBS  6t 

non  solum  (modo)  .  .  .  sed  (verum)  etiam,  not  only  .  .  .  but  also. 

neque  (nee)  .  .  .  neque  (nee),  neither  .  .  .  nor. 

et  .  .  .  VL^f^^,  and  (on  the  one  hand)  .  .  .  and  not. 

non  modo  non  .  .  .  sed  ne  quidem,  not  only  not  .  .  .  but  not  even. 

tarn  .  .  .  quam,  so  .  .  .  as. 

Disjunctive  Correlatives 
aut  .  .  .  aut,  either  .  .  .  or,  excludes  one  or  the  other  member, 
vel  .  .  .  vel, 


sive  .  .  .  sive, 


whether  .  .  .  or,  allows  a  choice. 


Additional  Correlatives 
modo  .  .  .  modo,  now  .  .  .  now,  at  one  time  .  .  .  at  another. 
ut  .  .  .  ita,  as  ...  so  (of.  also  282). 

273".  Inferential  (Illative)  Conjunctions. 

itaque,  and  so,  betokens  an  actual  result  following  a  preced- 
ing statement.     It  stands  first. 
ergo,  therefore,  points  to  a  logical  inference.     Usually  stands 

first. 
igitur,  therefore,  is  used  chiefly  of  opinions  based  on  a  pre- 
ceding statement.     It  is  usually  post-positive. 
proinde,  therefore,   is   used    in   exhortations   or  commands 
based  upon  what  precedes:  proinde  abite,  therefore  go. 
Numerous  phrases  may  replace  these  conjunctions :  qua  re,  qua  ex 
re,  quibus  ex  rebus,  qua  de  causa,  etc.     Note  that  an  illative  conjunction 
cannot  be  used  with  a  copulative — e.  g.,  et  ergo,  and  therefore.     Write 
propterque  eamcausam,  and  the  like. 

274.  Causal  Conjunctions. 

nasciyfor,  always  begins  a  sentence  or  clause. 
enim,y<?r,  is  always  post-positive. 
etenim,/<?r,  begins  the  sentence. 

Adverbs 

275.  Negatives.    Non,  the  general  negative,  may  negative 
a  whole  sentence  or  a  single  word. 

Note. — Haud  negatives  single  words.     Of  verbs  it  is  common  only  with  scio 
(cf.  p.  47,  foot-note  i). 

276.  Two  negatives  make  an  affirmative.     Non  ignoro,  /  am  not  igno- 
rant (/  know),  non  nego,  /  do  not  deny  (/  confess).     But  after  a  general 


62  NOTES   ON   IDIOM 

negative  the  distributives  neque  .  .  .  neque,  or  the  emphasizing  neg- 
atives ne  .  .  .  quidem,  non  modo,  may  follow  without  destroying  the 
negation.  Nemo  neque  deus  neque  homo  semper  vigilat,  nobody,  either 
god  or  man,  is  always  on  the  watch. 

277.  Note  the  difference  in  meaning  caused  by  the  position  of  non. 

nemo  non,  everybody,  but  non  nemo,  somebody. 
nihil  non,  everything,  but  non  nihil,  something. 
nulli  non,  all,  but  non  nulli,  some. 
numquam  non,  always,  but  non  numquam,  sometimes. 

278.  Where  a  negative  proposition  is  connected  with  the  preceding 
by  tamen,  enim,  vero,  etc.,  neque  is  to  be  used  instead  of  non. 

279.  Ne  is  used  with  the  various  forms  of  independent  subjunctive 
(cf.  174  ff.),  except  the  potential  (179),  and  with  many  subordinate 
clauses  (cf.  188  if). 

Interrogative  Sentences 

280.  Interrogative  sentences  may  be  classified  as  : 

(a)  Word-questions,  introduced  by  some  interrogative  word. 
Quid  censes  ?  ivhat  is  your  opinion  ?  Other  like  words  are  : 
qualis,  of  what  sort?  quotiens,  hotv  many  times?  quantus, 
Jioiu great ?  ubi,  where?  etc. 

(b)  Sentence- questions,  introduced  by  nonne,  num,  -ne, 
or  by  no  interrogative  particle  at  all,  the  question  being  indi- 
cated by  the  tone  of  voice,  as  in  English. 

281.  Simple  word-questions  (a)  require  no  rules  except  as  to 
mode  (cf.  177-178). 

Of  the  paiticles  introducing  sentence-questions  (b),  -ne  is 
used  in  real  questions  for  information  and  is  attached  enclit- 
ically  to  the  emphatic  word  to  which  the  question  applies. 
Nonne  expects  the  answer  Yes,  num  the  answer  No.  Adest- 
ne?  is  he  here  ?  (question  for  information,  no  answer  implied  i. 
Nonne  adest?  isnt  he  here?  or  he's  here,  isnt  lie?  (answer 
Yes  expected).  Num  adest  ?  is  he  here  ?  or  he  isnt  here,  is  he  ? 
(answer  No  expected). 


ORDER  OF   WORDS   AND   CLAUSES  63 

Note. — Questions  of  special  emphasis,  such  as  those  expressing  indignation, 
refutation  of  an  opponent,  surprise,  etc.,  may  he  introduced  by  an.  An  quod 
non  venerunt,  de  eorum  fide  dubitatis  ?  can  it  be  that,  because  they  have  not 
conic,  you  arc  liarl'oring  doubts  of  their  loyalty  ^ 

282.  Double  or  disjunctive  questions  have  in  the  first  mem- 
ber utrum,  -ne,  whether,  or  less  often  no  particle  at  all ;  ir. 
the  second  member  an,  or.  Or  not  is  annon.  Utrum  adest 
an  venit  ?  is  he  present  or  is  he  coming  /  Bonumne  an  malum 
est?  is  it  good  or  bad?    Videsne  annon  ?  do  yon  see  or  not  ? 

(For  rhetorical  questions,  cf.  178;  deliberative  177;  indirect 
questions,  220.) 

283.  Answers.  Latin  has  no  words  meaning  exclusively 
Yes  or  No.  The  most  common  form  of  answer  consists  in 
repeating  the  word  to  which  the  question  refers.  Adestne 
miles?  is  the  soldier  here?     Adest,  j/r.sy  or  non  adest,  no. 

Note. — Ves  is  further  represented  by  ita,  etiam,  vero,  sane,  etc.  Aut  etiam 
aut  non  respondere,  to  answer  yes  or  no. 

No\%  represented  by  non,  (emphatically)  by  minime,  minime  vero,  non  ita,' 
nihil,  etc.     Coges  me  ?   minime,  will  you  compel  me  ?  not  at  all  {by  no  means). 

6.  Order  of  Words  and  Arrangement 
of  Clauses 

284.  The  order  of  words  in  Latin  is  much,  more  flexible  than 
in  Knglish.  There  are  two  general  types  of  order,  the  gram- 
matical and  the  rhetorical. 

285.  Gkammaticai- Order.  The  words  belonging  togethe. 
grammatically  arc  placed  together. 

Subject.  '^^  SubWt°^  Modifiers  of  Predicate.  Predicate. 

non   tarn    magnitudine 
Iphicrates,       Atheniensis,  rerum  gestarum  quam        nobilitatus  est. 

disciplina  militari 
This  is  the  usual  order  where  no  part  of  the  sentence  is  to 
be  particularly  emphasized  or  where  it  is  not  neces.sary  to  in- 
dicate the  connection  with  preceding  or  following  sentences. 


64.  NOTES   ON    IDIOM 

286.  Rhetorical  Order.  Since,  however,  the  order  is  not 
usually  determined  within  each  sentence,  but  depends  upon 
the  relation  of  the  sentence  to  others  surrounding  it,  the 
grammatical  order  (285)  is  constantly  altered  by  numerous 
influences.  Any  such  deviation  from  the  grammatical  order, 
for  whatever  reason,  is  a  case  of  rhetorical  order.  This  order 
is  by  far  the  more  important.  The  reasons  for  it  may  be 
grouped  under  three  heads:  (i)  desire  for  emphasis  on  some 
word  or  phrase  ;  (2)  desire  to  indicate  clearly  the  connection 
between  the  sentence  and  others ;  (3)  euphony  or  rhythm. 

287.  (i)  Emphasis.  There  are  three  common  methods  of  securing 
emphasis: 

(a)  By  placing  the  words  to  be  emphasized  first*  or  very  early  in  the 
sentence.  Proelio  supersedere  statuit ;  cotidie  tamen  equestribus  proe- 
liis,  quid  hostis  virtute  posset,  periclitabatur,  he  decided  to  refrain  from 
a  pitched  battle ;  yet  daily  (the  emphatic  word),  by  cavalry  skirtnishes 
(hardly  less  emphatic,  being  contrasted  with  proelio,  which  is  the  most 
emphatic  word  of  all),  trial  was  made  of  the  enemy's  mettle.  Temporis 
tanta  fuit  exiguitas,  the  time  (the  main  thing)  was  so  short,  etc. 

(b)  By  anaphora,  the  repetition  of  a  single  word  in  the  same  position  or 
the  recurrence  of  a  series  of  words  in  the  same  order.  Sed  pleni  omnes 
sunt  libri,  plenae  sapientium  voces,  plena  exemplorum  vetustas,  but  full 
of  examples  are  all  books,  full  are  the  utterances  of  philosophers.,  full  is  an- 
tiquity. Transire  latissimum  flumen,  ascendere  altissimas  ripas,  subire 
iniquissimum  locum  (here  the  words  are  different,  but  the  order  is  the 
same),  to  cross  a  broad  stream,  mount  lofty  banks,  approach  a  very  difficult 
position,  etc. 

(c)  By  chiasmus,  contrasting  one  pair  of  words  with  another  by  ar- 

1  221 

ranging  the  second  in  the  reverse  order,     p- — "— rr  -t^tt-  '-T-t:  : — ^'^T^ 
"    "  Quam  dm  vixit,  vxxit  m  luctu, 

as  long  as  he  lived  he  lived  in  grief. 

NoTK. — Anaphora  and  cliiasmus  are  more  than  mere  rhetorical  figures;  they 

are  inherent  in  the  language.     By  these  two  figures  emphasis  may  be  secured  in 

'The  occurrence  of  an  emphatic  word  late  in  a  sentence  is  almost 
always  due  to  the  fact  that  the  word  itself  expresses  emphasis  (ipse, 
nemo,  etc.),  or  is  an  afterthought,  or  falls  under  one  of  the  principles 
of  anaphora  or  chiasmus  (287,  b  and  c). 


ORDER    OF    SINGLE   WORDS  65 

any  part  of  the  sentence.     Chiasmus  is  named  from  the  Greek  letter  Xi  the  "criss- 

foris      w  arma, 
cross  order,  ...        X   , 

consilium     domi. 

288.  (2)  Connection  Between  Sentences.  The  order  is  often 
influenced  by  the  desire  to  indicate  clearly  the  relation  of  one  sen- 
tence to  another.  It  is  well  to  place  early  in  a  sentence  any  words  re- 
ferring back  to  a  preceding  sentence.  Palus  erat  inter  nostrum  atque 
hostium  exercitum.  Hanc  si  nostri  transirent,  hostes  exspectabant, 
//tere  was  a  marsh  between  our  army  and  that  of  the  enemy.  The  enemy 
were  waiting  to  see  if  our  men  would  cross  this  (Hanc  put  first  to  recall 
palus).  To  this  principle  is  due  the  frequent  use  of  many  connecting 
words  and  phrases  in  Latin  :  qua  ex  re,  quibus  rebus  cognitis,  qua  de 
causa,  quo  facto,  etc. 

289.  (3)  Euphony  and  Rhythm.  Of  this  principle  we  know  little 
save  what  the  Romans  themselves  have  told  us.  They  avoided  succes- 
sions of  many  short  words,  of  long  words,  of  words'with  like  endings, 
and  poetic  rhythm  in  prose,  striving  to  produce  a  style  pleasant  to  the 
ear. 

Order  of  Single  W^ords 

290.  Substantives.  An  appositive  regularly  follows;  as,  Cicero 
consul. 

For  the  attributive  genitive  no  rule  can  be  laid  down. 

291.  (a)  Verbs  like  possum,  audeo,  volo  (and  compounds),  used  like 
English  auxiliary  verbs  may,  might,  would,  etc.,  regularly  follow  a  (Je- 
pendent  infinitive:  dicere  non  ausim,  /  should  not  venture  to  say;  but, 
when  these  verbs  are  not  weakened  in  meaning  they  precede :  audeo 
dicere,  /  dare  to  say. 

(b)  The  parts  of  esse  stand  first  when  they  denote  reality  or  exist- 
ence :  fuit,  fuit  ista  quondam  in  hac  re  publica  virtus,  there  did  exist,  there 
did  exist,  etc. 

Note. — In  Cicero  the  infinitive  esse  usually  follows  an  auxiliary.  Inquam, 
say,  always  follows  one  or  more  words  of  the  quotation;  credo,  believe,  and 
opinor,  suppose,  are  often  used  parenthetically  in  the  midst  of  a  direct  statement. 

292.  Adjectives,  (a)  The  common  adjectives,  bonus,  malus,  etc., 
usually  precede  their  noun.  An  adjective  becomes  emphatic  by  being 
placed  out  of  its  usual  position.  This  is  seen  in  the  figure  called  hyper- 
baton  :  magna  proponit  his  qui  occiderint  praemia,  great  are  the  rewards 
he  offers  those  who  shall  kill  (him). 

5 


66  NOTES  ON    IDIOM 

(h)  But  an  adjective  accompanied  by  a  phrase  regularly  follows.  Vir- 
tus digna  summo  honore,  virtue  worthy  of  the  greatest  honor, 

(c)  Of  numerals  the  cardinals  regularly  precede,  the  ordinals  follow. 
Sex  dies,  but  dies  sexta. 

293.  Pronouns,  (a)  Demonstrative,  relative,  and  interrogative  pro- 
nouns regularly  precede  the  word  to  which  they  belong. 

NoTK. — But  ille  often  follows — regularly  with  a  possessive. 

(b)  Possessives  regularly  follow  the  substantive  unless  they  are  em- 
phatic. 

(c)  Indefinites  regularly  follow  the  substantive. 

294.  Adverbs.  Adverbs  regularly  stand  next  to  and  before  the 
word  to  which  they  belong.  If  very  emphatic  they  may  begin  the 
clause  (cf.  287  a).  Tam  and  quam,  however,  are  often  separated  by 
some  short  word  from  the  word  they  limit.  Quam  sit  iusta  (causa) 
videamus,  let  us  see  how  justifiable  the  reason  is. 

m 

295.  Prepositions.  Prepositions,  except  tenus  and  versus,  regu- 
larly precede  their  case.  If  an  adjective  accompanies  the  noun,  it  often 
precedes  a  monosyllabic  preposition  :  quam  ob  rem,  his  de  causis,  summa 
cum  laude. 

NoTK. — The  preposition  cum  is  attached  enclitically  to  the  personal  pronouns: 
tecum,  nobiscum  ;  and  often  to  the  relative :  quocum,  quibuscum. 
(For  the  order  of  conjunctions,  see  266-274.) 

Arrangement  of  Clauses  in  a  Period 

296.  A  period  is  a  compound  sentence,  containing  one  or 
more  subordinate  clauses,  in  which  the  meaning  is  kept  sus- 
pended until  the  close.  Latin  tends  naturally  to  assume  the 
periodic  structure,  and  in  this  differs  fundamentally  from  Eng- 
lish, which  prefers  coordination.  Hence  a  series  of  coordi- 
nate clauses  or  sentences  in  English  may  often  be  fused  into 
one  Latin  period,  thus  dispensing  with  the  excessively  fre- 
quent English  "  and."     Cf.  310. 

Note. — All  Latin  periods,  however  complicated,  may  be  reduced  by  analysis 
to  one  of  three  simple  types  : 

1.  One  principal  (A)  and  one  subordinate  (a)  clause. 

2.  One  principal  (A)  and  two  subordinate  (a  and  b)  clauses,  independent  of 
each  other  and  not  connected  by  et. 


ARRANGEMENl    OF  CLAUSES  IN  A   PERIOD         67 

3.  One  principal  (A)  and  two  subordinate  (a  and  a)  clauses,  one  of  which  de- 
pends on  the  other. 

Under  i,  there  are  four  possible  arrangements  of  the  period;  under  2,  five 
simple  combinations;  under  3,  no  fewer  than  fifteen  combinations,  some  uf  which 
are  rare.  By  the  addition  of  other  clauses  almost  endless  combinations  are  possible. 
It  is  good  practice  for  the  student  to  analyze  complicated  periods  by  reference  to 
these  three  simple  types — e.  g.,  Romam  ut  ex  Sicilia  redii  (a),  cum  iste  atque 
istius  amici  sertnones  eius  modi  dissipassent  (b),  me  magna  pecunia  a  vera 
accusatione  esse  deductum  ()8),  tametsi  probabatur  nemini  (c),  tamen  us- 
que eo  timui  (A),  ne  quis  de  mea  fide  atque  integritate  dubitaret  (d)  donee 
ad  reiciundos  iudices  venimus  (e).  Here  are  no  fewer  than  five  clauses  inde- 
pendent of  each  other,  one  of  which  has  a  clause  of  the  secend  grade  (j8)  depend- 
ent on  it.     It  belongs,  therefore,  to  (3),  A :  a  :  a. 

297.  By  reason  of  this  flexibility  of  arrangement,  Latin  pos- 
ses.ses  the  power  to  produce  the  most  subtle  contrasts.  In 
practice  the  student  should  aim  first  at  perfect  clearness. 
The  use  of  many  subordinate  clauses  should  generally  be 
avoided.  If  many  are  necessary,  it  is  usually  better  to  ar- 
range them  side  by  side,  avoiding  insertion,  except  in  the 
case  of  very  short  clauses.  This  is  the  general  practice  of 
Cicero,  the  master  of  the  periodic  style. 

7.  Remarks  on  Style 

a.  Substantives 

298.  The  English,  like  other  modern  languages,  possesses 
many  more  substantives  than  the  Latin.  Hence  we  must 
carefully  analyze  English  nouns  in  order  to  find  the  best  Latin 
equivalent.     The  following  are  some  useful  principles. 

299.  A.  general  Latin  term  may  represent  a  special  English  noun. 
Taste  {^good  judgment)  is  iudicium.  Imagination  (as  thought)  is  cogita- 
tio.     Prince  is  rex,  regulus.     Etymology  is  vis  verbi. 

Note. — Mark  the  very  wide  use  of  res.  It  may  mean  any  thing  provided  thp- 
context  makes  it  clear — e.  g.,  st<Ut\  circumstance,  proposal,  experiment,  etc. 

300.  The  coficrete  \n  Latin  may  represent  an  Enj^lisii  abstract.  Arts 
tocracy=^r\Xitx^^%\  the  philosophy  0/  Socrates  =  Socta.tes',  style  0/ Caesar 


68  .  NOTES   ON   IDIOM 

=  Caesar.     So  names  of  peoples  are  often  put  for  the  country.     Alli- 
ance between  Gaul  and  Germany  =  Gallorum  et  Britannorum  foedus. 

301.  Often  the  best  way  to  render  an  English  noun  is  to  employ  a 
Latin  adjective.  By  an  equality  of  .y^rz//V:^j= paribus  officiis ;  journey  to 
Asia:=iter  Asiaticum;  war  with  t/te  slaves  =  hellum  servile. 

Note. — See  the  varied  use  of  adjectives  as  substantives,  3  and  4.  For  tlie 
substantive  use  of  participles,  see  249. 

302.  Many  English  substantives  are  best  rendered  by  a  phrase  in 
Latin.  Patriotism=3t\idium  rei  publicae.  A  relative  clause  is  very 
common.  Standard-bearer  ^is  qui  aquilam  fert.  A  sudject=is  qui  paret. 
So,  too,  other  clauses  may  be  used. 

303.  An  English  substantive  may  disappear  in  the  Latin  rendering, 
or  be  represented  by  a  pronoun.  The  latter  is  very  common  where  a 
noun  has  once  been  written.  A  pronoun  may,  in  fact,  represent  any 
thought  or  object  made  clear  by  the  context.  There  is  a  river,  the 
Saone,  which  empties  into  the  Rhone.  This  river  the  Helvetians  were 
crossing,  is  flumen  est  Arar,  quod  in  Rhodcinum  influit.  Id  Helvetii  transi- 
bant. 

304.  The  repetition  of  proper  names  is  not  so  common  in  Latin  as  in 
English.  When  once  the  persons  are  named  the  Latin  prefers  to  repre- 
sent them  by  pronouns,  is,  ille,  hie,  etc.  Caesar  demanded  hostages  of 
the  Gauls.  The  Gauls  refused  to  send  them,  etc.,  is  Caesar  a  Gallis  ob- 
sides  postulavit.     lUi  autem,  etc.,  cf.  303. 

b.  Adjectives 

305.  English  adjectives  in  -ble  are  often  to  be  rendered  by  the  perfect 
passive  participle :  invincible  =:invictus,  inviolable=inviola.tvis,  incorriipt- 
/(^/£ =incorruptus,  inunovable  =  xm.vao\.ViS.  Also  by  ad  and  a  gerund  :  ////t/- 
ligible  =  i&c{\\s  ad  intellegendum  ;  or  by  a  relative  clause  :  visible  =  (i\xoA 
cemi  potest.  Gerundives,  too,  may  be  used  in  this  way:  admirable=z 
admirandus,  tolerable  =  tolerandus. 

Note. — So  adjectives  in  -less,  where  no  exact  equivalent  exists,  may  be  ren- 
dered by  a  phrase  with  vacuus  or  sine  :  a  treeless  plain=iSiZ&T  arboribus  va- 
cuus, or  sine  arboribus. 

306.  Adjectives  which  are  not  indispensable  even  in  English  may  be 
omitted  in  Latin — e.  g.,  practical,  theoretical,  subjective.  Analyze  the  ex- 
pression carefully  to  make  sure  that  the  adjective  is  unnecessary. 


REMARKS   ON   STYLE  69 

For  adjectives  as  substantives,  see  3  and  4 ;  adjectives  instead  of  a 
genitive,  63  and  64  ;  and  in  general,  i — 10. 

c.  Verbs 

307.  The  missing  passive  of  deponent  and  many  other  verbs  is 
supplied  by  a  phrase :  to  be  admzred=&ss&  admirationi,  to  be  hated=:i 
odio  esse,  etc.  (cf.  99). 

(For  the  perfect  active  participle,  see  243-244.) 

308.  English  auxiliary  verbs  may  often  be  omitted  in  Latin.  He 
needed  to  fear  no  penalty  =zaon  metuit  poenam.  He  knew  how  to  protect 
his positionz=L6x%vii\.sXQva.  tuebatur.  But  if  the  auxiliaries  are  in  any  way 
emphasized  it  is  better  to  render  them  by  their  corresponding  Latin 
equivalents :  possum,  volo,  necesse  est,  etc. 

309.  The  English  passive  is  much  more  used  than  is  the  Latin  pas- 
sive. Hence  the  passive  in  English  is  often  to  be  rendered  in  Latin  by 
an  active  (changing  the  subject),  by  an  impersonal  expression,  etc. 
Dumnorix  is  summoned  to  his  presence  may  thus  be  translated,  Dum- 
norigem  ad  se  vocat. 

310.  Avoidance  of  et  in  Latin.  Latin  prefers  subordination,  English 
coordination.  Hence  the  excessive  use  of  and  in  English  is  not  to  be 
duplicated  by  a  like  use  of  et  in  Latin.  Avoid  this  by  using  a  relative 
clause,  participle,  ablative  absolute,  etc.  He  left  his  horse  and  hastened 
to  the  camp  is  equo  relicto  ad  castra  contendit. 


PART  II 

EXERCISES 

BASED   ON 

Caesar,  Gallic  War 

BOOK   III 

For  the  Latin  text,  see  pages  70  ff. 

In  the  text  of  the  exercises  superior  letters  refer  to  the  foot-notes;  superior 
figures,  to  the  sections  in  Notes  on  Iilioin.  A  superior  letter  or  figure  put  after 
a  word  applies  to  that  word  only  ;  preceding  a  word,  applies  to  two  or  more  words 
following. 

In  the  foot-notes  of  the  exercises  references  to  sections  (e.  g.  §  108)  apply 
to  the  Notes  on  Idiom.  Ex.  i.  b  =  exercise  I,  foot-note  b.  A  reference  like 
"  Text  3.  4,"  occurring  under  an  exercise  based,  for  instance,  on  the  third  book 
of  the  Gallic  War,  applies  to  chapter  and  section  of  that  book.  If  a  different 
book  is  referred  to,  it  is  designated  liy  abbreviations  easily  understood;  as.  Text 
B.  G.  4.  7.  3  =  Caesar's  Bellitni  Gallicuiii,  book  4,  chap.  7,  §  3.  No  reference  is 
made  to  any  portion  of  text  not  printed  in  this  book. 

CHAPTERS  1-2 

I.  When  Caesar  'had  finished  his  second  campaign  in  Gaul  and'' 
was  on  the  point  of  starting  for  Italy,  he  ordered  Galba  '''to  go  with 
one  legion  to  the  Nantuates  and  the  neighboring  peoples,  and  to 
try  "'^to  open  a  route  through  the  Alps  by  which  men  and  supplies 
•"might  be  sent  ^^''X.o  Gaul  from  Italy  without  danger.     Galba"*  fought 

"Use  abl.  abs.,  exacta  aestate.  Campaign ^Si,^%\.dk%,  as  the  season 
when  war  is  carried  on  ;  or  bellum,  of  the  war  itself.  ''Too  frequent 
use  of  et  may  be  avoided  by  means  of  a  pf.  pass,  ptc,  an  abl.  abs.,  or  a 
clause  with  cum,  postquam,  etc.  (§310).  "=  This  expresses  Caesar's  pur- 
pose in  having  a  route  opened  (§  188;  also  cf.  §  171).  ''Ille  (§  304). 


CAESAR,  GALLIC    WAR.  BOOK    III  7 1 

several  successful  engagements,  and''  established  his  culmrts  "md 
villages  of  the  eiiemy'^  for  the  purpose  of  wintering  there^  But 
'-^vithin  a  few^  days  the  Gauls  determined  for  several  reasons  "'^to 
renew  the  war,  because  they  believed  "-'that  ''by  seizing  the  heights 
in  the  night  --•'they  could  easily  crush  the  Romans. 

'The  plural  is  usual.  "^Oniit.  ^pauci.  '^  Use  abl.  abs. 

^,^,  CHAPTERS  3-4        jj^ 

2.  ""'After  Galba  bad  ^defeated  the  GaUls  "in  several  engag 
In?  reaeived  hostages  .Trorn/diom  and  ^' made  peac^./  "^Chtnkrt 
there  was  no  reason  ie-reftr^urtner '  hostilities,  oe  had  not  quite 
completed  his  fortifications  nor  laid  in  a  sii£5flient.»stock  of  pro- 
visions. Consequently',  when  the  Roman  oOTmers  saw  °-'that  the 
higher  ground'-'  was^-*  all  occupied  by  armed  men,  and  that  the 
roads  were  blocked,  many  of  them  almost  despaired''  of  escape. 
The  majority',  however,  decided  ''^to  fortify  the  camp  and  to  ^see 
wiiat  turn  events  would  take.  Seen  the  enemy  rushed  down  upoii 
them  from  all  directions,  and  fought  so  bravely  "'^that  they  almost 
captured'^  the  camp. 

*  Instrumental  (§  108),  not  local.  ''Ex.  i.  b.  *=Use  a  causal  clause 
(§  186).  ^  Render  by  iam  (iam  non  or  non  iam  =  no  longer).  '  Not .  .  . 
nor,  neque  .  .  .  neque.  ^  =  and  so  (§273).  ^Neuter  pi.;  \oci=^  pas- 
sages of  books.  ''  Caesar  uses  despero  as  a  transitive  vb.  only  in  the 
abl.  abs.  with  the  pf.  ptc.  With  the  active  he  generally  (dat.  twice) 
u.ses  de  and  the  abl.         'Two  words  in  Latin.  \    JText  3.  4. 


CHAPTERS  5-6 

3.  ""^While  our  men  were  fresh^,  they  hastened  ''to  aid  those 
parts  of  the  camp  which  were  being  stripped  of  defenders'"';  but 
when  ''the  conflict  had  been  raging  for  several  hours  "'^  both  strength 
and  weapons  failed  them,  and'',  owing  to  their  small  numbers,  they 
were  brought  into  desperate  straits.  Galba,  consequently,  deter- 
mined to  make  a  sally,  and  ordered  his   men  to  cease  fighting  a 

*  =  of  fresh  strength  (§117).  ''Text  4.  2.  "  =tt  was  being  fought. 
For  tense,  see  §  159.        ''Ex.  i.  b. 


72 


EXERCISES    BASED   ON 


little  while  and  rest  themselves.  ""When  the  signal  was  given,  they 
burst  forth  from  camp  so  quickly  ''^that  they  easily  surrounded  and** 
either^  killed  or  routed  all  '''of  the  Gauls  who  had  come  ^to  that 
place.  On  the  next  day,  with  no  enemy  to  delay  his  march,  Galba 
''set  out  for  the  province. 

•=  Use  abl.  abs.  ^Either  .  .  .  or,  aut  .  .  .  aut  (§  272).  ^  Text  3.  3. 
''Texti.i. 

CHAPTERS  7-8 

4.  '"'When  Caesar  heard  '"that  Galba  ""had  routed^  the  enemy 
in  the  Alps,  he  believed  that  there  were  no  longer''  any*^  tribes  of 
Gaul  which  ''^^^rould  try'^'  to  ''renew  hostilities  with  the  Romans. 
And  so  at  the  beginning  of  winter  he  went  to  Illyricum  ''*to  ac- 
quaint'*® himself  with  the  country  and  people.  But  ^shortly  after- 
wards war  broke  out  in  several  states  of  Gaul.  The  Veneti  began 
the  trouble '^  '"=by  holding  two  Roman  ambassadors  who  had  come 
to  ask  for  supplies.  ''By  this  proceeding  they  thought  that  they 
could  compel  Crassus,  Caesar's  lieutenant,  '''to  return  their  host- 
ages. For  the  same  reason  ambassadors  were  held  by  the  adjoin- 
ing states  too,  and  soon  all  the  peoples  on  the  seaboard  had  sworn 
through  their  leading  men  not  "^to  remain  in  subjection  to  the 
Romans. 

»Text  6.  3.  "Ex.  2.  d.  =Ullus.  ^^Text  2.  2.  "Paulo  post. 
*^=M/«^  (§299,  N.).      s  =  thus.        '•Cogo. 

CHAPTERS  9-10 

5.  ""'As  soon  as  Caesar,  who  had  gone  to  Illyricum,  had  been  in- 
formed by  Crassus  of  this  revolt  of  the  maritime  states,  he  gave 
orders  that  war-ships  should  be  built  and  everything  which  '"was 
needed  for  their  equipment  provided  ®as  soon  as  possible.  He  de- 
termined *to  carry  the  war  first  into  Venetia,  '^^because  ''that  was 
the  most  influential  state  of  this  region,  and  he  believed  that,  'if 
the  rebellion  here  should  not  be  allowed  to  pass  unnoticed,  the  re- 

»  =  /<?  make  war  upon,  text  B.  G.  4.  7.  3.  ''Text  8.  i.  ''Render 
this  clause  by  abl.  abs. 


CAESAR.   GALLIC   WAR.   BOOK  III  73 

maining  states  could"''  be  easily  pacified^.  "At  the  same  time, 
'^that  other  states  might  not'^  *^join  the  conspiracy,  he  hastened  to 
send  troops  into  all  parts  of  Gaul. 

^Text  7.  I.        "Ai  the  same  time,  one  word.  ^Join  the  conspiracy, 

one  word.     For  sequence,  see  §  168. 


CHAPTERS  11-12 

6.  Titus  Labienus,  whom  Caesar  sent  to  the  Treveri,  was  or- 
dered* to  hold  the  Belgians  in  allegiance  and  to  prevent  the  Ger- 
mans '"'from  crossing  the  Rhine.  Publius  Crassus  ""was  put  in 
command  of  the  troops  which  were  sent  to  Aquitania.  Decimus 
Brutus  with  the  fleet  and  Caesar  himself  with  the  land  forces  started 
*3as  soon  as  they  could  for  the  country  of  the  Veneti.  The 
towns  of  this  people  were  for  the  most  part  situated  on  the  ends  of 
promontories,  "*so  that  approach  to  them,  ""either  on  foot  or  with 
ships,  ''was  rendered  difficult  by  the  tide.  Owing  to  their  ad- 
vantageous locations,  they  easily  defended  themselves  during  most 
of  the  summer. 

*Use  iubeo.  "^  Was  put  in  command  of,  one  word.  '^Either  .  .  . 
or,  vel  .  .  .  vel  (§  273).        ^  IVas  rendered  difficult,  one  word. 


CHAPTER   13 

7.  The  Veneti  had  a  ""large  number  of  ships,  and  in  both  the 
*■  theoretical  and  the  practical  knowledge  of  nautical  affairs  they 
far  surpassed  their  neighbors.  Their  vessels  were  built  of  great 
strength,  '^to  enable  them  to  withstand  the  many  dangers  of  nav- 
igation in  these  waters^  The  keels  were  s rather  flat,  '^that  they 
might  more  easily  float  in  the  shallow  water  at  ebb-tide.  Skins 
were  thinly  prepared  ''to  serve  as  sails,  and,  being*  stronger'  than 
linen,  they  were  better  adapted  ^to  withstand  the  fury  of  the  ocean 
tempests.    "*In  speed  alone  our  fleet  ""was  superior. 

"Text  12.  2.  ''Text  8.  i  (§  106).  "=  places.  ^:=i for  sails. 

'Ex.  2.  c.        fportis.        »f  Ad  and  the  gerundive.       ""One  word. 


74  •      EXERCISES    BASED    ON 

CHAPTERS  14-15 
8.  "®  Although  Caesar  "captured  several  towns  of  the  enemy  by 
assault,  he  could  not  prevent'' the  townspeople"  ''■'from  escaping  by 
means  of  their  ships  ""^so  long  as  his  own  fleet  was  not  ''at  hand 
'^to  help  him.  Consequently"  he  gave  orders  for  his  ships  to  as- 
semble *as  soon  as  possible.  With  these  a  large  fleet  of  the  Ven- 
eti  hastened  to  engage*^,  '^ since  they''  thought  that  the  enemy  would 
"■'at  once  seek  safety  in  flight.  But  the  Romans,  who  surpassed  the 
barbarians  "*in  valor,  fought  all  the  more  bravely  '^^because  the 
contest  was  taking  place  under  the  eye  of  Caesar  himself;  and, 
although  the  fighting  continued  from  about  '^Hen  o'clock  until  sun- 
set, they  were  finally''  victorious. 

"^Captured  by  assault. on&word.  '' Use  prohibeo.  *=Use  is.  <*  Ad- 
sum.         "^Ex.  2.  f.         "^Congredior.  ^Statim.         ^Denique. 

CHAPTERS  16-17 
g.  "'After  this  battle  the  Veneti  were  unable  ''to  continue  the  war, 
'^^because  they  had  brought  together  all  their  men  and  all  the  ships 
they  had  in  the  world,  "^  and  .now  that  these  had  been  defeated,  they 
had  no  '''"means  of  defending  themselves  and  their  towns  against 
the  Romans.  ^^When  they  had  surrendered,  Caesar  put  the  sen 
ators  to  death,  and''  the  rest  of  the  people  he  sold  into  slavery; 
for  he  wished  all  the  Gauls  "^to  understand  that  they  '^"must  ob- 
serve the  rights"  of  ambassadors.  ^During  these  occurrences 
among  the  Veneti,  Sabinus,  who  had  been  sent  out  by  Caesar, 
arrived  in  the  country  of  the  Venelli;  but  ""* although  Viridovix, 
the  commander  of  the  Gauls,  offered  battle  every  day,  he  had  been 
unwilling  to  fight  ^until  a  'favorable  occasion  should  be  given. 

*  Text  6.  4.  ^=.  to  wage  war  longer  (diutius).  "=  Connect  by  a  rel. 
pron.  and  use  abl.  abs.  "^Ex.  i.  b.  'Singular  in  Latin.  ^Favor- 
able occasion,  one  word. 

CHAPTERS   18-19 
10.  '3' After  a  few  days  Sabinus  persuaded   one  "'of  the  Gauls 
wiiom  he  had  with  him  "'"to  gn  over  to  the  camp  of  Viridovix  "in 

•'  Pro, 


CAESAR,   GALLIC    WAR.    BOOK    III  75 

the  character  of  a  deserter  and  tell  him  that  "*on  the  next  night 
the  Roman  army  "•'was  going  away  to  aid  Caesar.  '°^Uppn  hearing 
this  the  Gauls  urged  their  officers  ''°to  lead  them"^  out  against  the 
enemy  at  once.  '^In  order  to  give  the  Romans  "^as  little  time  as 
possible  for  equipping  themselves,  they  set  off  at  full  speed.  "^The 
result  was  ''^that  they  arrived  all  out  of  breath  and  exhausted";  and 
so,  when  the  Romans  suddenly  ''burst  forth  from  two  gates 'at  once, 
they  were  not  able  to  withstand  even'  a  single  attack.  ^Most  of 
them  were  killed  in  the  rout,  and''  their  states  at  once  surrendered. 

^^  ^=  frotn  which  it  happened.  "^Easily  inferred  from  the  nonn  in 

the  text.  "^z^imade  a  sally.  "^^at  the  same  time ;  text   9.  3. 

^ Not  e7Jen  =  n&  .  .  .  quidem,  which  enclose  the  limited  word  or  words. 
"Plerique.  ''Ex.  i.  b. 

CHAPTERS   2&-21 

11.  At  about  the  same  time,  Publius  Crassus,  who  had  been  or- 
dered to  go  '^"to  Aquitania  with  a  force  of  infantry  and  cavalry  '^"^'in 
order  that  "aid  might  not  be  sent  from  'that  powerful  nation  to  the 
Veneti,  came  to  an  engagement  with  the  enemy.  '"A  few  years  be- 
fore, the  Aquitanians  had  routed  a  Roman  army,  and"  slain  the  com- 
mander; and  so  at  this  time,  confident  because  of  their  former  vic- 
tory'", they  thought  that  they  could ^^•'  easily''  defeat  ^the  young 
Crassus.  The  battle  was  long  and  fierce,  but  at  last,  exhausted 
from  their  wounds,  the  enemy  turned  in  flight.  Their  town  was 
then  attacked,  and",  -'^although  they  resisted  bravely,  they  soon' 
begged  Crassus ^^  '^to  accept  "^  their  surrender,  and  gave  up  their 
arms. 

''Text  II.  3.  ''Tantus.  ^Ex.  i.b.  <* Text  13.6.  ^Brevi 

tempore.         ^  ■=  them  into  surrender. 

CHAPTERS   22-23 

12.  In  that  town  of  the  Aquitanians.  which  Crassus  had  cap- 
tured, 'as  has  been  said,  '^within  a  few  days  after  his  arrival 
tiiither,  there  was  a  band''  of  six  hundred  men  who  had  devoted 

"Text  20.  I.         '"Text   1 1.  4. 


76  EXERCISES   BASED   ON 

themselves  to  the  friendship  of  a  certain  Adiatunnus,  taking  oath 
"^that,  "^if  any^^^harm  should  come  to  him,  the}'  would  all  bear  the 
same  fortune  together  or  would  put  themselves  to  death.  ''On  the 
other  hand,  he''  promised  ^that  they  should  enjoy  with  him^''  all 
the  good  things  in  life.  These  men  tried  to  force  a  way  out  ''^from 
the  town,  but  were  repulsed,  and^  straightway  surrendered.  Crassus 
then  "^made  war  upon  other  tribes  of  Aquitania,  which  had  called 
in  soldiers  and  officers  from  Spain  to  carry  on  the  war  with  them. 

"  Accidit,  //  happens,  often  implies  misfortune  ;  contingit,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  used  of  fortunate  events.  ''Contra.  'By  use  of  a  ptc. 

and  may  be  omitted  (§  310).  '^Ex.  5.  a. 

CHAPTERS  24-26 

13.  '** Since  the  Spanish^  officers  ''had  been  associated  "*for  sev- 
eral years  with  ^the  skilful"  general  Sertorius,  they  possessed  an 
"excellent  knowledge  of  military  science;  and  so,  '^as  the  number 
of  the  enemy  was  ''increasing  every  day,  Crassus  thought  that  he's 
**° ought  to  *come  to  an  engagement  ^as  soon  as  possible.  At  day- 
break he  led  out  all  his  forces,  and^  waited  to  see  "^what  plan^  the 
enemy  would  adopt ;  but  they  remained  in  camp,  for  they  thought 
that  they  could  win  a  victory  "^  more  easily  *^by  blockading  the 
roads  and  cutting  off  supplies.  Crassus  saw  through  this  plan, 
and'  hastened  to  attack  a  part  of  the  camp  which  he  had  learned 
was*^  not  carefully  fortified.  The  enemy,  surrounded  on  all  sides, 
sought  safety  in  flight,  but  barely  a  fourth  part  ''of  their  great 
number  escaped. 

^Hispanus.  *» Text  23.  5.  « Text  21.  3.  "* Text  23.  7.  'Text 
20.3.        ^Ex.  1.  b.        ^Useabl.  abs.        ^■=s.  from  so  great  a  multitude. 

CHAPTERS  27-29 

14.  ""Although  winter  *was  now  near  at  hand,  Caesar  determined 
to  lead  a  force  *"  against  the  Morini  and  Menapii,  for  they  were  now 

*  Was  near  at  hand,  one  word.  '^  In  with  ace 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR,    BOOK  IV  77 

the  only  peoples  of  all  Gaul  '^^ which  had  neglected  to  send  envoys 
to  him  about  peace.  ''Upon  his  arrival  they  "* withdrew  with  all 
their  possessions  into  the  woods  and  swamps,  '^^ because  they  were 
afraid  ''^that,  ""^'if  they  "^should  meet^  him  "°in  battle,  the  war  would 
be  speedily  brought  to  an  end.  Caesar,  however,  ordered  his  men ' 
to  cut  down  the  woods,  and  "* within  a  few  days  such  a  great  space 
had  been  cleared  ''^that  the  Romans  could  capture^  part  of  the 
baggage  of  the  enemy.  But  the  work  '^had  to  be  given  up,  owing 
to  long-continued  rains,  and  Caesar  led  his  army  away  into  winter- 
quarters. 

"  Text  23.  4.  **  Withdrew  with  =  betook  themselves  and.        °  =  con- 

tend with.  ^  Omit.        s  Text  24.  3  (§  1 15). 


Caesar,  Gallic  War 

BOOK   IV 

CHAPTERS  1-2 

15.  The  Suevi,  who  forced*  the  Usipetes  and  Tencteri  to  cross 
the  Rhine,  are  the  ='most  warlike  of  the  German  tr^bes^  '^^  since 
they  live  chiefly  '°*on  the  milk  and  flesh  of  their  flocks,  they  are 
"large  and  strong.  They  are  ''capable  of  great  endurance  also, 
for^*  they  allow  no  wine  nor  other  things  which  weaken  human 
strength  to  be  brought  ^into  their  country.  '^In  fact,  traders  visit 
them  rather  '*^to  buy^  what  they  have  captured  in  war  than  to  sell 
them  anything.  Their  horses,  though  small,  are  ''*so  well  trained 
that  in  time  of  battle  they  remain  ''quiet  where  they  are  left. 

Note  how  the  important  words  come  early  in  the  sentence — e.  g.,  in 
chap.  2  :  mercatoribus,  iumentis,  vinutn.     See  §  287. 

'  Use  cogo  with  infin.  (§  193).  ''Note  Caesar's  expression.  "^Text 
I.  9.  and  see  §  117.  ""Text  2.  2,  and  see  §  65.         'Omit  into  their 

country.    The  verb  is  enough.         "^Use  vero  (§  270.)        <^Emo.       ''Note 
Caesar's  expression. 


78  EXERCISES   BASED   ON 

CHAPTERS  3-4 

16.  'On  almost  every  side  the  country  about  the  Suevi  is  unin- 
habited, for^^''  they  have  driven  out  all  the  tribes  ''except  the  Ubii. 
I'he  Usipetes  and  Tencteri,  who  ""held  their  ground  against  the 
Suevi  '-^for  many  years,  were  at  last  driven  '^from  their  territories, 
and  arrived  '^'at  the  Rhine  in  ''55  b.c.  Frightened  at  their  ap- 
proach, the  Menapii,  who  had  lived  on  both  banks,  crossed  the 
river  and^. removed  all  their  boats.  By  this  means  and  by  station- 
ing pickets  along  the  shore  they  prevented  the  Ubii  ''♦from  cross- 
ing. But  the  Ubii,  pretending  to  return  to  their  own  country, 
marched  back  '^by  night,  and  *by  an  unexpected  attack  crushed  the 
Menapii,  who  had  recrossed  the  river. 

"Omnes  fere  agri.  ^'Abl.  abs. :  Ubiis  exceptis.  "Held  their 

i; round  =wim  sustinuerunt,  etc.     See  text.  ''See  text  i.  i,  and  read 

§  132.         ''Ex.  I.  b.         "^Noctu.         ^ By  an  unexpected  attack,  etc.,  note 
the  Latin  expression,  text  4.  5. 

CHAPTERS    5-7 

17.  ^3 When  Caesar  learned  ^^'that  the  Germans  had  crossed  the 
Rhine,  he  thought  ^'that  he'^  ought  not  to  trust  the  Gauls ^,  for  he 
feared  their  ''fickle  character.  They  are  in  the  habit  of  stopping 
travellers  even"  against  their  will  and  questioning  them,  and  they 
often  ''follow  the  lead  of  the  vaguest  rumors^^  As  Caesar  sus- 
pected, they  had  already  invited  the  Germans  to  leave  the  Rhine 
^5 when  he  reached  his  army.  ^^  While  he  was  on  the  march,  Ger- 
man envoys  came  to  him  ''to  ask  "^why''  he  had  determined  to 
make  war  upon  them.  ^"  "  If,"  said  they,  "  the  Romans  give  us  lands, 
we  can  be  useful  friends,  but  we  do  not  ^refuse  ^to  fight,  for  we 
yield  only  to  the  Suevi  %  for  whom  ^  not  even  the  gods  are  a  match," 

"One  word.  ^Follow  the  lead  of,  one  word.  ''Use  a  relative, 

clause  of  purpose  (§  188).         '*  ^F/y/  =  cur,  qua  re,  etc.         ^Text  7.  3. 

CHAPTERS   8-10 

18.  ^^When  the  German  envoys  asked  '  Caesar ^''  to  allow''  them 
"'^to  settle  in  Gaul,  he  refused,  but  told  them  "'that  they  might  go 

^Use  peto  (§  190).  'Patior. 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR.  "BOOK   IV  79 

among  the  Ubii,  who  were  unable  alone"  to  defend  their  country 
from  the  Suevi.  The  envoys  promised '^  to  return  in  three  days  and 
<;ive  their  reply.  Caesar  was  aware  ^^'that  they  desired  delay  be- 
cause most  of  their  cavalry  had  gone  on  a  plundering  expedition 
across  the  river  Meuse.  ^This  is  a  stream  which  rises  in  the  Vosges 
mountains  and  enters  the  Rhine  about  "^eighty  miles  from  the  sea. 
The  Rhine  itself  rises  in  the  country  of  ihe  Helvetii,  and,  after 
flowing  through  the  countries  of  many  peoples,  empties  into  the 
sea  by  many  mouths. 

'^ Solus.  ''Polliceor,  cf.  §227.         *  This  is  a  stream  which  ^^which 

stream. 

CHAPTERS  11-12 

19.  The  German  envoys  earnestly  ^s asked  Caesar  for  a  truce 
■'that  they  might  have  an  opportunity  to  send  ambassadors  to  the 
Ubii.  For  they  said  that  they  would  ''avail  themselves  of  Caesar's 
offer "-^  in  case  the  Ubii  would  ratify*^  it  for  them.  Caesar  promised 
not  to  advance  more  than  four  miles '°5,  ""^ although  he  saw  "'that 
they  were  delaying  '^^bgcause  their  cavalry  had  not  returned.  He 
likewise  sent  orders  to  his  cavalry  not  to  fight  until  he  himself  came 
up.  But  the  Germans,  ''in  spite  of  the  truce,  made  so  fierce  an  at- 
tack on  Caesar's  cavalry  "''^that  they  drove  them  back  in  confusion 
'with  a  loss  of  seventy-four  men. 

Note  the  long  period  at  the  beginning  of  chap.  12.     See  §  296. 

■Read  §  221  foot-note.  ^  Avail  themselves  of  =^  use.  *^Text  11.  3. 
^ In  spite  <?/"=:  contra.         '  With  a  loss,  etc.,  use  abl.  abs. 


CHAPTERS    13-14 

20.  ""^  After  the  Germans  had  attacked  our  cavalry  so  treacher- 
ously it  seemed  folly*'  to  "pay  any  further  attention  to  their  offers. 
Caesar  thought  he*'^  ought  to  attack  their  camp  'at  once  before'' 
their  cavalry  could  return.     Early  the  next  morning  all  the  chief 

^  I'lty  liny  further  attention,  etc.  =  listen  to  them  longer.  Cf.  §  235. 
''Ex.  8.  y.         Triusquam,  cf.  §§  209  and  210. 


8o  EXERCISES   BASED  ON 

men  of  the  Germans  came  to  him  to  excuse  the  attack  of  the  previ- 
ous day.  But  Caesar  arrested  them  and**  advanced  rapidly  against 
the  German  camp.  His  men  burst  into  the  camp  before*^  the  Ger- 
mans, confused  by  their  sudden  attack,  could  'make  up  their  minds 
^^  whether  it  was  better  to  sally  forth  against  them  or  defend  the 
camp. 

''Ex.  I.  b.         ^ Make  up  their  minds  =^ decide. 

'CHAPTERS   15-16 

21.  "® Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  he  had  defeated  the  Germans 
with  heavy  loss  and^  captured  their  camp,  it  seemed  expedient''  to 
Caesar  to  follow  the  fugitives"  across  the  Rhine.  He  was  brought 
to  this  decision  by  several  considerations ^  In  the  first*  place,  the 
Sugambri  had  refused  to  surrender  to  him  the  fugitives  who  had 
found  refuge  with  them,  saying  that  the  Romans  had  no  power 
across  the  Rhine.  Then*  the  Ubii  were  earnestly  asking  his  aid. 
'*5  because,  as  they  said,  the  Suevi  were  constantly  attacking  them. 
Finally,*  he  wished  to  inspire  the  Germans  with  fear  for'''  their  own 
country  and  thus  to  *^prevent  them  from  crossing  into  Gaul. 

*Ex.  12.  e.     Cf.  §  127.  ^Seemed  expedient  to  C.  =  C.  decided. 

"^  Fugitives  =■  those  who  had  fled,  cf.  §302.  ^Note  the  simplicity  of 

the  Latin,  text  16.  i.     Cf.  also  §  296.  ''First,  secondly,  thirdly,  etc., 

may  be  rendered  by  primum,  deinde,  turn,  postremo  or  ad  extremum. 
'See  text  4.  3. 

CHAPTER   17 

22.  '**In  order  to  ^inspire  the  Germans  with  fear  for  their  own 
country  and  respect  for  the  Romans,  who,  they  thought,  would  not 
dare"*  to  cross  the  Rhine,  Caesar  decided  to  build  a  bridge.  The 
structure  rested''  on  piles  driven  obliquely  into  the  bed  of  the  river 
in  such  a  way  '^that  they  supported  easily  the  great  strength  of  the 
current.    ''It  was  feared  that  the  Germans  might  send  down  trunks 

^  =.  in  order  that  the  Germans  might  fear  .  .  .  and  respect  (vereor),  etc. 
See  text  16.  I.  ^  Rested  =^  was  supported  by.  '^  It  was  feared  ■= 

they  feared{%  309). 


CAESAR,   GALLIC   WAR.    BOOK  IV  8 1 

of  trees  against  the  bridge,  ''and  in  order  to  prevent  these  from  in- 
juring it,  other  piles  were  driven  a  short  distance"*  above.  In  this 
way  a  bridge  fourteen  hundred  feet  long**  and  forty  feet  wide**  was 
completed  "Within  ten  days, 

^  ^  which  that  they  might,  etc. 

CHAPTERS    18-19 

23.  Having  completed  the  bridge  in  a  few  days,  Caesar  led  his 
army  across  into  Germany.  The  Germans,  dismayed  at  his  ap- 
proach, sent  envoys  ''from  all  sides  to  ask  for  peace.  The  Su- 
gambri,  however,  with  whom  the  fugitive  Germans  had  found  refuge, 
had  made  ready  for  flight  from  the  time  when  the  bridge  '^^began 
to  be  built,  and  now*"  were  safely  hidden  in  the  forests.  The  Suevi, 
as  Caesar  was  informed  by  the  Ubii,  into  whose  territory  he  had 
marched,  had  assembled  in  one  spot  in  order  to  fight  it  out  with 
the  Romans,  But  Caesar^"*,  having  now  accomplished  all  the  ob- 
jects for  which  he  had  crossed  into  Germany,  decided  to  withdraw 
into"  Gaul. 

^From  all  jzV/(?j  =  undique.  '^Now,  not  nunc,  which   is  used  of 

time  actually  present. 

CHAPTERS  20-21 

24.  Caesar  decided  to  invade  Britain  ''"before  winter  should  come 
on,  in  order  to  prevent "*  the  Britons  '''♦from  assisting  the  Gauls.  He 
thought  it  would  be  of  advantage*^  also*"  to  learn  ^how  large  the 
island  was  and  what  tribes  inhabited  it,  for'^''  it  was  almost  wholly 
unknown.  '^  Being  unable  to  gain  any  information  from  the  traders, 
he  sent  Volusenus  ahead  with  one  ship  ''on  a  reconnoitering  expe- 
dition. Meanwhile,  ""since  little  of  the  summer  remained,  he  or- 
dered his  fleet  to  assemble  as  soon  as  possible  on  the  coast  of  the 
Morini,  opposite  Britain.  This  was  in  the  autumn^  of  the  year 
55  B.C. 

*Text  4.  3,  ''Quoque,  cf.  §  266.  ''Ex.  2.  c.  ^^Ad  explo- 

randum.  °Abl.  abs.,cf.  §  126.  '^Autumnus. 

6 


82  EXKRCISES   BASliU   ON 

CHAPTERS   22-23 

25.  "°*While  Volusenus  was  reconnoitering  the  shores  of  Britain, 
Caesar  made  ready  his  ships,  and  ""^as  soon  as  Volusenus  arrived 
he  hastened  to  embark  '  upon  them  two  legions  together  with  cav- 
alry. Setting  sail  about  midnight'*  with  a  favorable  breeze,  he 
reached  Britain  about  nine '^•' o'clock  the  next  morning.  But  the 
shores  were  so  steep  and  the  enemy  so  numerous  that  he  did  not 
at  first  venture  to  land,  "^ After  waiting  several  hours  ^ until  his 
cavalry  should  come  up.  he  set  sail  at  length  to  a  more  favorable 
landing''  about  '^^ seven  miles  distant.  Even"*'  then  he  did  not'*'^  at 
first  allow  his  men  to  disembark,  because  the  cavalry  had  not  yet 
arrived. 

" A'w(Jrtr/' =  imponere  in  naves  (§  143).  ^  r=mtddle  of-{^  10)  the 

night.  =  Render  by  a  clause  with  cum.  dNote  Caesar's  expres- 

sion. 

CHAPTERS   24-25 

26.  When  the  Romans  reached  Britain,  the  natives,  occupying 
the  shore,  prevented  them  from  disembarking.  For  ''while  the  Ro- 
mans ''had  to  fight  standing  in  the  waves,  the  barbarians  were  able 
to  hurl  their  javelins  from  dry  land.  ^^As  soon  as  Caesar  noticed 
the  dismay  of  his  men  at  the  difficulties  of  landing,  he  ordered  some 
of  his  galleys  to  row  "^to  a  position  on  the  flank  of  the  enemy 
'^'' whence  they  could  worry''  them  by  arrows  and  missiles.  This 
caused  them  to  retreat  slightly,  but  even  then  the  Romans  'might 
not  have  landed  had  not  the  standard-bearer ^"^  of  the  tenth  legion 
boldly  leaped  from  his  ship  and  led  the  way  towards  the  shore. 

^  While,  not  dum.  ^=zhad  to  fight  7vhile  they  stand,  cf.  §  204. 

'^  To  a  position ,  om\t.  ^  Worry  z=  ^&rt\xrho  (text  14.  2),  or  lacesso 

(text  II.  6).  ^=zperhaps  (fortasse)  would  not,  etc.  (§  215). 


CHAPTERS  26-27 

27.  As  soon  as  the  eagle-bearer  leaped  into  the  waves,  the  soldiers 
followed,  and  a  fierce  conflict  ensued.     The  barbarians,  outnumber- 


CAESAR,   GALLIC  WAR.    BOOK   IV  83 

ing  the  Romans,  '57  would  attack  them  one  by  one,  and  thus  the 
Romans  ^were  at  a  great  disadvantage.  ,  When,  however,  the  Ro- 
mans had  obtained  firm  footing,  they  'speedily  put  the  enemy  to 
Hight.  After  the  battle  envoys  came  to  Caesar  to  seek  peace  and 
to  bring  to  him  Commius,  who  had  been  sent  to  them  as  an  ambas- 
sador, but^  had  been  thrown  into  chains.  Although  they  had  at- 
tacked him  without  provocation,  Caesar  decided  to  pardon  them 
and  ordered  them  ''to  furnish  hostages. 

"  Were  at  a  great  disadvantage  ^=  this  was  for  a  great  disadvantage  to 
the  Romans  (§  99).  ^  Ex.  12.  e.  '^  To  furnish,  omit. 


CHAPTERS  28-29 

28.  Though  Caesar  reached  Britain  safely  with  his  infantry  and 
defeated  the  enemy,  yet  he  was  unable  to  pursue  them,  because  his 
cavalry  had  been  "too^  slow  in  starting.  When  ''at  last  they  ap- 
proached the  island,  they  were  prevented  from  landing  by  a  violent 
storm  which  drove  some  back  to  the  continent  and  others  to  the 
westward  coast  of  the  island.  On  the  same  night  many  of  Caesar's 
ships  were  wrecked  by  the  storm  and  tRe  high  tide  which  occurs 
at  the  time  of  full  moon.  The  Romans  were  greatly  dismayed  at 
these  misfortunes",  for  they  had  nothing  with  which  to  repair  the 
ships,  and  not  enough  provisions^"  to  winter  in  Britain. 

*  7l3(?  slow,  etc.,  see  text  23.  2.  '^ At  /d:j/  =  tandem.  '^Res  (cf. 

§  299,  note). 

CHAPTERS   30-31 

29.  ^'^As  soon  as  the  Britons  discovered  that  Caesar's  ships  had 
been  wrecked,  they  conspired  '^^to  destroy'  the  Romans,  "^though 
peace  had  been  made.  They  thought  that  they  could  do  this  ''by 
cutting  them  off  from  provisions  and  prolonging  matters  until  win 
ter.  And  so  they  ceased  to  send  in  hostages.  This  caused  Caesar 
■'7 to  suspect  their  plans  and  make  ready  to  meet  them.     His  sol- 

"Opprimo.  "^ By  cutting,  etc.,  express  by  a  condition,  cf.  §  229. 


84  EXERCISES   BASED   ON 

diers  were  busy''  gathering  corn  into  the  camp  and  repairing  the 
ships  by  means  of  the  tackle  of  those  ships  which  had  been  wholly 
ruined.  The  soldiers  worked  so  eagerly  that  they  soon'*  made  most 
of  the  ships  suitable  for  sailing. 

•^Omit.  Render  the  idea  by  the  imperfect  (§  i6o).        "^Not  raox,  which 
is  used,  as  a  rule,  with  future  tenses. 


CHAPTERS  32-34 

30.  While  the  seventh  legion  was  engaged  in  foraging  not  far 
from  the  camp,  it  was  treacherously^  attacked  by  the  barbarians, 
who  '^'s would  have  destroyed  it  entirely  had  not  Caesar  come  to 
its  assistance  with  the  cohorts  which  ''happened  to  be  on  guard. 
When  Caesar  came  up  he  found  the  legion  in  disorder  and  surrounded 
by  *^clouds  of  cavalry  and  war-chariots.  They  drive  these  chariots 
among  the  ranks  of  the  enemy  in  order  to  throw  them  into  con- 
fusion, and  then,  descending'',  fight  on  foot.  The  soldiers  were  so 
much  in  disorder  that  Caesar  perceived  it  ""'was  not  a  good  oppor- 
tunity for  battle,  and  gradually''  withdrew  his  forces  to  the  camp. 

*Text  13.  I.  **  =  (5j  chance  (forte)  were.  "=  Do  not  render  literally. 
^  Render  by  a  clause.        ®  Text  30.  3. 


CHAPTERS  34-36 

31.  Encouraged  by  their  attack"^  on  the  seventh  legion,  the 
Britons  determined  to  assault  the  camp,  hoping^  that  they  would 
free  Britain  forever,  ^if  they  could  crush  the  few  Romans  who  had 
come  with  Caesar.  But  although  they  assembled  from  all  sides  'in 
large  numbers,  the  Romans  easily  routed  them.  "As  usual  they 
sent  envoys  immediately  to  secure  peace.  After  they  had  promised 
to  send  hostages,  Caesar  thought  that  he  ought  not  to  delay  longer 
in  Britain,  because  the  winter  was  coming  on  and  he  feared  to  trust 
his  unseaworthy  ships  to  the  storms  of  autumn. 

*  Render  by  a  clause.  ''Render  by  an  adjective.  -^ ""  As  usual = 
ex  consuetudine. 


NEPOS.   ALCIBIADES  85 

CHAPTERS  37-38 
32.  The  Morini,  to  whose  coast  Caesar  returned  from  Britain, 
'acted  with  great  treachery;  for,  when  two  transports  were  unable 
to  land  with  the  others, ''but  were  driven  several  miles  by  the  wind, 
they  surrounded  the  soldiers,  as  soon  as  they  had  disembarked, 
and  commanded  them  to  surrender  on  pain  of  death.  But  they  re- 
sisted the  attack  of  the  enemy  for  several"  hours  ^°^ until  the  cavalry 
came  to  their  assistance.  Labienus  then  marched  against  them  and 
^took  speedy  vengeance.  The  Menapii,  too"^,  who  had  ^neglected 
to  send  envoys  to  him  before^  he  set  sail  for  Britain,  were  hum- 
bled' by  two  of  his  lieutenants.  Their  territories  were  laid  waste 
and  their  buildings  burned. 

^ Acted  1011/1  =  used,  of.   §  115.         ''Use  a  participle.        " Several  =■ 
plures.        "^Use  ulciscor  (text  19.  4).         ^Text  22.  5.         '^Text  3.  4. 


Nepos,  Alcibiades 

For  the  Latin  text,  see  pages  151  ff.  For  abbreviations,  see  page  70. 

CHAPTERS    1-2 

33.  Alcibiades  was  the  most  remarkable  of  the  Athenians,  both 
as  regards  virtues"^  and  faults'"*.  He  was  a  man  ^of  great  beauty 
and  eloquence,  and  was  very  wealthy  ''as  well.  And  yet*7°  he  was 
3' at  the  same  time  ''given  to  luxury  and  ^lacked  self-control,  '^so 
that  he  seemed'**  to  be  a  man  '^of  strangely  diverse  character.  He 
^was  intrusted  by  Pericles,  whose  step-son  he  was,  to  Socrates 
'**to  be  educated.  And  Socrates  was  thought''  to  be  the  wisest  of 
men.  'In  fact,  nature  seemed  to  be  trying  in  his  case  "^how  many 
blessings  she  could"*  confer*. 

Note  how  the  adjectives  of  chapter  i  may  be  represented  by  phrases 
\n  English. 

'  Use  adjectives,  cf.  text.  ^  As  well ■=  also,  c{.\ztt.  "  =  of  char- 
acter, strange  (mirabilis)  and  diverse.  ''Text  3.  4.  «Use  vero, 
§270.         ^  How  many  =^q}iot.       See  §  220.         *  =  irive. 


86  EXERCISES    BASED   ON 

CHAPTER  3 

34. -^ While  the  Peloponnesian  war  'was  going  on,  Alcibiades 
persuaded  the  Athenians^"  "'"to  declare'^  war  on  the  Syracusans^' 
and  to  elect  him^  general  ^-t  with  two  colleagues.  The  expedition 
was  ready  ""^'to  saiP  ^"-nvhen  all''^  but  one  of  the  small  busts  of 
Hermes  which  were  in  the  city'''"  of  Athens*^  were  thrown  down 
in  a  single  night '^.  '** Since  this  could  not  have  happened  without 
the  connivance  of  many  people,  there  were  persons  '*■  who  believed  "^ 
""thai"  some  one  was  ''conspiring  against  the  state.  They  sus- 
pected Alcibiades,  because  no  one  was  equal  to  him '^  in  influence'"*, 
and  because  he  celebrated  mystic  rites  in  his  own  house.  For  this 
is  considered  impious  by  the  Athenians'"*. 

^  IVas  going  on,  use  passive  of  gero.  ^'Navigo.  'Read  221 

and  foot-note.         ^Conspire  agams/ =  coniuro  contra. 


CHAPTER   4 

35.  "*When  the  enemies  of  Alcibiades  '^^were  about  to  accuse 
him  of  sacrilege",  he  wished  the  trial  to  take  place  ''while  he  was 
present.  But  they  decided  to  wait  ^  until  he  had  set  sail,  '®*so  that 
they  might  injure'*^  him*''  in  his  absence.  And  so,  ^^ after  he  had 
reached  Sicily,  a  messenger  came  to  him  from  Athens  ""with  direc- 
tions that  he  ''must  return  ^'^^to  plead  his  case.  But  he  fled  to 
Thurii,  in  Italy.  ^^When  the  Athenians  learned  this  they  con- 
demned him  to  death*-  and  forced  the  Eumolpid  priests  to  pro- 
nounce a  curse  upon  him.  He  then  fled  to  Sparta,  and  pefsuaded 
the  Spartans  *7  "^to  make  an  alliance  with  the  Persian  king  and  to 
fortify  Decelea  in  Attica. 

Observe  in  this  chapter  the  variety  in  the  constructions  of  place,  cf. 
§§  137.  138, 141- 

"Note  that  Nepos  expresses  this  by  a  causal  clause,  cf.  §  185.  ''Con- 
dense. See  text  4.  1.  '  lV///i  directions  that, om'w..  This  is  rendered 
by  the  indirect  discourse.  ^ Must  return  =^  must  be  returned  by  him, 
cf.  §  260. 


NEPOS,    ALCIBIADKS  8y 

CHAPTER    5 

36.  -"* Although  Alcibiades  was  friendly  to  the  Spartans^,  they 
feared  him  and  planned  to  put  him  to  death.  But  he  was  so  keen 
that  he  discovered  their  purpose,  and  fled  '""to  Tissaphernes  in 
Asia.  Meanwhile  the  Athenians  were  being  defeated  '■•''on  land 
and  sea,  and  Alcibiades  perceived  that  "he  had  a  good  opportunity 
''of  being  restored  to  his  native  land.  This  was  brought  about 
'"'through  the  agency  of  Thrasybulus.  ''''^And  yet  he  did  not  at 
once''  return  to  Athens,  but  was  elected  in  his  absence 5'' one  "'of 
the  generals.  Immediately*^  the  Athenians  were  everywhere**  vic- 
torious, and  Alcibiades,  '-^ after  conquering  many  cities,  returned 
with  his  colleagues  to  Athens  laden  with  booty"^ 

^  =:  there  7uas  to  hitnself  a  good  opportunity,  of.  §  94.  ^-=.0/  return- 
ing.        '^E.x.  8.  g.         ^  Omnibus  locis  (§  144). 

CHAPTERS  6-7 

37.  ^'^As  soon  as  Alcibiades  reached  the  Piraeus  all  the  people  of 
Athens  came  down  to  meet  him*'',  ""^taking  no  notice  of  his  col- 
leagues. For  they  attributed  to  him  alone  all  their  victories,  and 
no  longer  considered  the  loss  of  their  army  in  Sicily  as  his  fault. 
When  they  heard  him  speak'"**  about  his  misfortunes  they  "could 
not  refrain  from  tears.  And  so  ''once  more  he  became  famous,  but 
his  great  reputation  "^^  injured  him,  for  the  Athenians  believed  that 
he  could  do  anything,  and,  when  he  had  attacked  Cyme  unsuccess- 
fully, they  thought  that  he  had  been  bribed  by  the  Persian  **  king. 
The  result  was  ''-that  his  office  was  taken  from  him'*',  and  he  fled 
to  Thrace. 

*  Could  not  refrain = they  could  not  but  that  they  wept  (§  200).  ''  Once 
more  =  '\\.tx\ya\.         "^Text  7.  3  (cf.  §99).         ''Text  4.  7. 

CHAPTER   8 

38.  Although  Alcibiades  was  now"  an  exile  ''for  the  second  time, 
yet  he  still  '^''continued  to  love  his  country.     When  the  fleets  of  the 

"Ex.  23.  b.        ''Ex.  37.  b. 


88  EXERCISES    BASED   ON 

Athenians  and  Spartans  were  stationed  on  the  Hellespont*^  he  '^^at- 
tempted  to  persuade  the  Athenian  admiral''  '^'to  employ  a  plan  of 
his^  against  the  Spartans  '*^by  which  they  '*®should  be  forced 
''"^either  to  fight  or  to  seek  peace.  But  the  admiral,  Philocles,  re- 
fused to  listen  to  him.  •' For/'^^i  he  said  ^^V""  if  I  follow  his  ad- 
vice I  shall  get  none  of  the  credit."  He  even  refused  to  move  his 
camp  '^^from  the  neighborhood  of  Lysander.  This  proved  the 
''ruin  of  the  Athenians,  for  Lysander,  waiting^  until  the  Athenians 
were  nearly  all  on  shore,  attacked  their  fleet  and^'"  ended  the  war. 

' Hellespontus.  '•Note  that  the  Latin  employs  a  general  term  = 

commander  or  officer  (§  299).         *  Not  a  participle  in  Latin. 

CHAPTERS  9-10 

39.  After  the  defeat  of  the  Athenians  the  Spartans  were  so  pow- 
erful that  Alcibiades  was  *not  safe  even  in  Thrace '^^  For^"^  the 
Thracians  ''robbed  him'*  of  all  his  money  and  forced"  him  to  flee 
to  Asia '37.  There''  Pharnabazus  became  so  friendly  to  him'^  '»*that 
he  began  to  hope  '^h^  could  gain  the  friendship  of  King  Darius 
also^.  He  planned"  to  go  to  him  and  reveal  the  conspiracy  of 
his 35  brother  Cyrus  against  him.  ^o^^  ^^at  very  time  the  thirty 
tyrants,  who  were  ruling'"  at  Athens '3*,  sent  word  to  Lysander  to 
kill  Alcibiades.  They  said  that  ^unless  he  were  put  out  of  the 
way  none  of  the  arrangements  of  the  Spartans  at  Athens  would 
endure. 

^Not  .  .  .  even,  cf.  Ex.  10.  f.  ^  Robbed  him  of  .  .  .  money  ^=  took  away 
for  him  .  .  .  money  (§  98).  "^Ex.  4.  h.  ^Ibi.  "Consilium  capio, 

with  gerund  or  gerundive  (§  253). 

CHAPTERS    lo-ii 

40.  *^As  soon  as  Lysander  received  the  message  of  the  thirty 
tyrants  he  persuaded  Pharnabazus  that^the  king's  power  ^ would 
be  diminished  unless  Alcibiades  should  be  killed.  And  so  the 
satrap**,  '^^pj-oving  false  to  his  friendship  with  Alcibiades,  sent  a 

*  Analyze  that  carefully,  cf.  §  221,  foot-npte.  "^  Satrap,  not  neces- 

sarily a  noun  in  Latin.     Read  §303. 


NEPOS,  HANNIBAL  89 

band  of  barbarians  '*^to  murder  him.  '^Not  daring  to  attack  him 
openly,  they  set  fire  to  the  hut  in  which  he  was  sleeping,  and, 
though  he  escaped  the  flames,  slew  him  with  missiles  from  a  dis- 
tance.    His  head**''  they  carried  to  Pharnabazus. 

At  the  time  of  his  death  Alcibiades  was  forty  years  of  age.  He 
was  a  man  of  most  ''versatile  character,  for  he  successfully  imitated 
all  peoples  at  their  own  pursuits'"^.  This  caused  him  '^''to  be  ad- 
mired and  popular  among  all  men. 

•=  Versatile  character,  cf.  text  1.4. 


Nepos,  Hannibal 

CHAPTERS   1-2 

41.  Nobody  will  deny  ^^'that  Hannibal,  ^the  famous  leader  of  the 
Carthaginians,  excelled  all  the  Roman  generals  who  ''carried  on  the 
war  against  him.  Although  he  was  in  Italy  fifteen  years,  he  was 
never  defeated  by  the  Romans  "°in  battle,  and,  *'Mf  he  had  not  been 
handicapped  **  by  the  jealousy  of  his^^  countrymen  at  home,  he 
would  perhaps"  have  been  victorious.  His  hatred  *'for  the  Romans, 
which  he  cherished  throughout  his  long  life,  "^he  had,  as  it  were,  in- 
herited from  his  father,  Hamilcar.  When  he^  was  a  mere  lad  ^^nine 
years  old,  his  father""  decided  *to  make  war  upon  Spain,  and  as  he 
was  about  to  leave  Carthage '^^  he  asked  his  son"  ^if  he  would 
like  to  go  withe's  him'^  Hannibal  did  not  hesitate  ^to  accept  the 
offer,  and  swore  always  ^  to  be  a  foe  of  the  Romans  '^'if  his  father 
would  take^  him. 

•"^^  waged  war  with  him  (§226).  ^  =z  weakened.  "^Fortasse. 

''Use  a  passive  construction  with  hatred  as  the  subject.         "Ex.  5.  a. 
^  =  lead{%  171). 

CHAPTERS  3-4 

42.  Hamilcar  had  gone  '^''to  Spain  '"for  the  sake  of  raising  an 
army  there  '''with  which  to  make  war  upon  the  Romans  in  Italy. 


90  EXERCISES    BASED   ON 

"* Within  a  few  years,  however,  he  was  killed,  and*  Hasdrubal,  his 
son-in-law^,  was  made  commander^^  in  his  place.  Forthe  next  eight 
years  Hannibal  was  at  the  head  of  all  the  cavalry '',  and  became  so 
"popular  with  the  soldiers  '^that  after  Hasdrubal's  death  the  chief 
command  was  conferred  upon  him.''  In  three  years  he  subdued 
almost  all  the  tribes  of  Spain,  and,  ^^ having  taken  Saguntum  by 
storm,  decided  to  set  out  the  next  year  '3" for  Italy.  When  he  had 
arrived  there^  he  defeated  the  Romans  twice *^  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  Po,  and  then,  crossing*-'  the  Apennines  in  the  next  year,  en- 
trapped and"  destroyed  a  large  army  near  Trasumenus  and  slew  the 
consul. 

*Ex.  I.  b.  '"Genet,  '^  =  beloved  by.         •*  Cf.  §§  22  and  27,  end. 

"  Use  quo  =  whither  ;  for  position,  cf.  §§  288  and  293.  ^  Bis.  ^  =  hav- 
ing crossed  {%  244). 

CHAPTERS   5-6 

43.  Hannibal  afterwards  marched  into  Apulia,  and  in  the  next 
year  '^at  the  battle  *^of  Cannae  he  routed  the  armies  of  both''  con- 
suls, and  killed  about  fifty  thousand  men'^  Although  the  Romans 
feared  ''^that  he  would  immediately  attack^  the  city,  they  did  not 
"despair  of  their"^'  fortunes'*,  but  "made  all  preparations  '^to  oppose 
a  strong  force  to  him  ^3' if  he  should  come.  But  Hannibal^"''  was 
unwilling  to  lead  his  army  '^^to  Rome,  for  he  knew  that  it  was  so 
strongly  *^  fortified  ''^that  he  could  not  take  it  by  storm;  and  so  at 
the  ^end  of  summer  he  went  into  winter-quarters  '^'at  Capua.  Al- 
though Hannibal  remained ''  in  Italy  several  years  and  was  uncon- 
quered  in  battle,  he  was  'at  last  recalled  to  Africa,  and,  wonderful 
^to  relate,  was  defeated  "*by  Scipio  '39near  Zama. 

^=:each  (text  4.  4).  ''Text  /?.  6^.  3.  21.  2.  "Ex.  2.  h. 

^  =  things  (§  299).  "  =  prepared  {text  />.  G.  3. 9. 3)  all  things.  '^Oniit. 
«  Text  B.  G.  3.  28.  I  (§  125).  ''  Text  B.  G.  4.  i.  5.  '  Postremo. 

CHAPTER   7 

44.  Although  Hannibal  had  been  defeated  by  Scipio  '^in  the 
battle  ''of  Zama,  he  nevertheless  gathered  ^as  large  a  force  as  pos- 
sible '^^at   Hadrumetum,  and  ^'^  would  have  engaged   with   the  Ro- 


NEPOS,    HANNIBAL  *  9I 

mans  'a  second  time  if  '^' terms  of  peace  had  not  been  agreed. upon. 
'•' Shortly  afterwards  the  Romans  'managed  to  h.ivc  him  called 
home'^^;  for,  when  ambassadors  had  come  to  Rome  from  Carthage 
■''^to  thank  the  Roman  senate^"  and  people^  '^^ior  having  made 
peace,  and  at  the  same  time  to  request  ^''of  them  "'"that  they  would 
restore  the  Carthaginians  whom  they  held  as  prisoners, '' they  were 
told  that,  '^if  they  wished  to  recover*  their  prisoners'^,  Hannibal 
'^ must  first  be  recalled  from  the  army.  ^^Upon  his  return  to  Car- 
thage he  was  elected  king^-*;  for,  as  the  Romans  annually  chose 
two  consuls,  so  the  Carthaginians  chose  two  kings. 

"Text  5.  3.  ''Text  6.  2.  '^■=i effected  that  he  (§  22)  should  be 

called  (§  197).  ^  =  it  was  replied  to  them.  "  Text  B.  G,  3.  8.  2, 

^Omit. 

CHAPTERS   8-9 

45.  '** Since  the  Romans  were  afraid  "^that,  '^'if  they  ^should 
allow  HannibaP  "Uo  remain  longer'' in  Carthage,  he  would  soon'' 
persuade  his^^  countrymen''  *to  go  to  war  again '^,  they  sent  am- 
bassadors '*^to  demand  "^'that  he ''should  be  surrendered  to  them''^ 
This  undoubtedly  ''^  would  have  been  done  if  he  had  not  fled  to 
Syria  to  King  Antiochus.  '^' After  a  few  years,  when  the  king '^  had 
been  defeated  by  the  Romans  on  land  and  sea,  Hannibal 's,  perceiv- 
ing^ that  he  was  again  in  danger,  went  away  secretly''  to  Crete.  He 
had  a  great  amount  of  money  with  him,  and,  since  he  feared  that 
the  Cretans  would  try  ""to  get  '"^it  into  their  possession,  he  'made 
a  pretence  of  depositing  it  in  the  temple  of  Diana,  which  was  there- 
afterJ  carefully'"'  watched  by  the  Cretans,  '^that  he  might  not  carry 
off  his  property  '-^  without  their  knowing  it. 

"Make  Hannibal  subject  of  the  that  clause,  substituting  a  pronoun 
(§22)  here.         ''Text  B.  G.  3.9.  5.  "^Ex.  ii.  e.         •*Omit.  '  =  to 

undertake (^ii)0).  'Ex.  44.  a.  ^Cf.  Ex.  42.  g.  ''Text  7.  6. 

'  =.  pretended  that  (§  221)  he  was  depositing.  ^  Deiiade. 

CHAPTER    10 

46.  "As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  Cretans  were  keeping  guard  over 
•"nothing  but  lead;  for  Hannibal  had  filled  several  jars  with  this 

=* Re  vera.  ''Nihil  nisi. 


92 


EXERCISES    BASED   ON 


metal',  and,  covering'"  the  tops"  with  silver  and  gold,  had  deposited 
them  in  the  temple,  while*  his  money  he  concealed'  at  home  in 
brazen  statues  which  he  '^^was  accustomed  to  carry  about  with  him, 
"''A  little  later  he  went  to  Pontus,  where  he  showed^  that  he  was 
no  less  an  enemy  of  Rome  in  Asia  than  in  Italy.  For  he  incited 
the  king  against  the  Romans,  and  persuaded  many^'  of  the  neigh- 
boring nations  ''to  come  to  his  assistance.  Eumenes  ^•'of  Perga- 
mon,  however,  being  a  warm  friend  of  the  Romans,  began '  to  wage 
war  with  the  other  kings  both  by  land  and  by  sea.  He  especially 
desired  to  capture  Hannibal  and   to  hand  him  over  to  the  Romans. 

=  Omit.  ''Cf.  Ex.  42.  g.  .  ^Autem  (§  270).  ^Text  B.  G. 

4.  18.  4.  2 Text  B.  G.  4.  II.  3.  ''  =  //m/  //ley  should  be  (§  1^0)  for 

an  aid  to  him  (§  99).  'Text  2.  4.         JTrado  (§  193). 

CHAPTER   II 

47.  When  Hannibal  saw  that  owing  to  the  alliance  of  the  Ro- 
mans Eumenes  could  not  be  crushed  *by  force  of  arms,  he  ''adopted 
the  following'*  plan.  ^^'' Having  filled  a  great  number  of  earthen 
vessels  '"'with  poisonous  serpents,  he  ordered  ^as  many  as  possible 
to  be  put  on  board  each'"  ship '^3,  in  order  that  his  men  might  de- 
fend themselves  with  these  '^'if  they  ^should  be  hard  pressed  "*by 
the  enemy.  ^'^As  soon  as  the  battle  began,  the  Bithynians,  in  ac- 
cordance with  Hannibal's  orders,  ''all  together  directed  their  attack 
upon  the  king's  ship,  and  "' would  soon**  have  captured  it  if  it  had 
not  fled  for  safety.  But  the  other  ships  of  the  royal  fleet  '^were 
getting  the  better  of  their ^^  opponents  ^" until  *at  last  the  earthen 
vessels  began '^^  to  be  hurled  upon  them.  Then,  terrified  "*by  the 
serpents,  the  king's  forces  retreated  to  their  naval  camp. 

"By  force  of  arms,  one  word.  ''Text  9.  3.  '^All  together,  one 

word.  ''Ex.  II.  e.  *Ex.  43.  i. 

CHAPTERS    12-13 

48.  ^Not  long  after  this  it  was  reported  to  the  senate  ''at  Rome 
that  Hannibal  was  living  in  Bithynia,  and  since  nobody  doubted 

"  Non  ita  multo  (§  1 16)  post.  *»  Express  by  an  adj.  (cf.  §  64). 


CICERO,    MANILIAN    LAW  9^3 

*"that  the  state  would  always  be  in  danger  "^so  long  as  he  lived, 
ambassadors  were  sent  '^to  request  Prusias^^  ''"to  surrender  him'' 
to  them''^  at  once.  Prusias^""*  "^replied  that  he  would  not  do  what 
was''^^  contrary  to  the  rights  of  hospitality,  but  that  they  ''might 
arrest  him  if  they  could  find  him.  Accordingly  they  hastened'  to 
the  strong  castle  in  which  tliey  had  heard  that  he  was  living  at 
that  time,  and  hoped  ''^''to  seize  all  the  avenues  of  escape  ^'"before 
he  should  know  that  they  were  looking  for  him.  But  he  ^was  at 
once  informed  by  a  faithful  slave  that  the  house  had  been  sur- 
rounded by  armed  men  ;  and  so,  since  he  feared  "Hhat,  ""^'if  they 
caught  him,  they  would  put  him  to  death,  he  did  not  hesitate  *^to 
end  his  own  life  with  poison. 

^  :=.  denied  that  he  would  do.  •*  Licet  (§  193)  may  be  used,  or, 

assuming  that  the  direct  discourse  contained  an  impv..  Arrest  him  if 
you  can  find  him,  the  subjv.  (§222).  'Text  B.  G.  3.  19.  i.  ^  JP'tis 

informed,  express  by  a  ptc.  (§  310).  ^Mihi  mortem  conscisco  (§  202). 


Cicero,  Manilian  Law 

For  the  Latin  text,  see  pages  164  ft. 
For  abbreviations,  see  page  70. 

In  the  exercises  based  on  Cicero,  all  references  to  the  Latin  text  (as  "  text  23  ") 
apply  to  sections,  not  to  chapters. 

CHAPTER   I 

49.  ^"'Although  Cicero  was  '^forty  years  old  '"^when  he  defended 
the  cause  of  Pompey,  he  had  not  before  attained  to  ''the  dignity  of 
speaking  from  the  Rostra ^  He  had,  however,  for  fifteen  years  "^  de- 
voted himself  so  uprightly  and  faithfully  to  private  suits  that  he 
was  elected''  praetor.  'From  this  time  he  thought  ^'that  he  ought 
to  employ  his  influence  "^  and  power  of  speaking  among  those  who 
"5 had  given  him  so  distinguished  an  honor.     He  said  that  he  was 

^:=such  (is,  §  23)  dii^nity  that  he  spoke  (§  196).  ''Neuter  pi. 

•^  Versor  in  with  al)I.  ''Creo(g54).  'Inde. 


94  EXERCISES    BASED   ON 

especially  glad  because  he  was  to  speak  about  the  unparalleled  merit 
of  Gnaeus  Pompey;  for  in  such  a  cause  language  could  not  fail  any 
man. 

CHAPTER   2 

50.  Two  powerful  monarchs,  Mithridates  and  Tigranes,  think- 
ing'^ that  an  opportunity  was  offered  them  of  getting  possession 
of  Asia,  were  making  war  upon  tributaries  and  allies  of  the  Ro- 
mans. This  war  was  "particularly  oppressive  to  ''members  of  the 
equestrian  order,  many  of  whom  had  large  properties  invested  in 
managing  the  taxes  there.  But  the  largest  and  surest  revenues  of 
the  Roman  people,  "without  which  Cicero  declares  there  would  be 
neither  the  means  of  supporting  war  nor  the  requisites  of  peace, 
were  also  at  stake,  so  that  all  the  citizens  were  fired  with  enthu- 
siasm ''for  prosecuting  the  war.  As*"  commander  for  this  war  all 
men,  both  citizens  and  allies,  desired  Gnaeus  Pompey. 

"^  Express  by  superlative.  ''One  word.  '^■=.'which  having 

been  lost.  ** Genitive.  *Omit. 

CHAPTERS   3-4 

51.  Cicero  said  in  his  ''speech  for''  Pompey  that  ''it  was  a  deep 
stain  on  the  name  of  the  Roman  people  because  Mithridates,  who 
'3' twenty-two  years  before  on  a  single  day  and  by  a  single  message 
had  ordered  so  many  citizens  of  Rome  to  be  massacred,  '"^had  as 
yet  suffered  no  punishment  worthy  of  his  crime'".  -'* Although  two 
brave  commanders  had  celebrated  triumphs  at  Rome  '"for  victories 
over  him,  he  still  'remained  on  his  throne,  and,  more '^  covetous  of 
glory  than  all  other  kings,  he  '^^had  long  been  building  fleets  and 
collecting  powerful  armies  for  the  purpose  of  contesting  the  su- 
premacy^ with  the  Romans  by  land  and  sea.  He  even  sent  envoys 
to  Spain,  where  Sertorius  ''was  conducting  a  vigorous  campaign 
against  Rome. 

^  =  •^'peech  delivered  (habita)  for  Pompey.  ^  Pro  (^  263).  *=  =  nr 

stain  was  deeply  seated.  ^  ■=:  concerning  hint.  ^  Remained  o}i 

his  throne,  one  word.  ^ More  than  =  beyond.  "^  =  about  the  suprem- 
acy. ^  =  tvas  waging  war  vigorously  (text  />'.  G.  3.  21.  l)  with  the 
Romans  (§  300) . 


CICERO.   MANILIAN    LAW  95 

CHAPTER  5 
5a.  Your  ancestors,  fellow-citizens,  '^^eighty  years  ago"*,  ""when 
they  heard  that  their  ambassadors  had  been  wrongfully  treated  '^^at 
Corinth,  wished  that  great  and  noble  city  ''to  be  utterly  destroyed. 
""What,  then,  ought  your  feelings  to  be  ^"^when  you  remember  that 
you  are  allowing  that  proud  king  to  go  unpunished  who  has,  tor- 
tured'' and  ^-=put  to  death  at  one  time  so  many  thousands  of  your 
fellow-citizens?  Moreover,  the  safety  of  your  allies  and  friends  is 
imperiled**  by  this  same  king,  who,  '"^although  he  has  "several  times 
been  defeated  by  your  generals,  is  threatening  all  Asia®''.  The  only 
man  '^''who  is  able  to  check  his  attacks  is,  they  believe,  Gnaeus 
Pompey.  To  him,  therefore,  they  ask  you  at  once  '5° to  intrust 
their  welfare. 

*  One  word.  '^r=.  of  what  viind  (§  117)  ought  you  to  be.  "^Use 

ptc.  agreeing  with  the  obj.  (cf.  §  310).         ^  =  called  into  danger.        '  AH- 
quotiens. 

CHAPTER  6 

53.  *^ After  the  Romans  had  conquered  Philip  in  Greece,  they 
sent  an  army  into  Asia  '^to  check  Antiochus.  '3' Forty  years  after- 
wards they  carried  on  war  for  three  years  with  the  Carthaginians  in 
Africa.  All  ''^of  these  wars  they  undertook''  for  the  sake  of  allies, 
although  they  had  not  themselves  been  provoked  by  any  wrongs. 
It  was  fitting,  therefore,  ""'"that  Cicero  should  ask  his  fellow-citizens 
"°with  what  feelings'-'  they  could'"'  allow  Mithridates  '^^to  be  un- 
punished, '^since  he-  had  not  only  ''made  war  upon  their  allies 
and  tributaries,  but  had  even  put  many  of  their  own  citizens  to 
death.  Their  largest  revenues  were  also  endangered',  for  Asia 
was  at  that  time  the  richest  and  most  productive  of  all  the  Roman 
proviirxces. 

"Text  B.  G.  3.  19.  6.  "Text  4.  =Ex.  52.  d. 

CHAPTER   7 

54.  Not  only  were  the  glory  of  the  conun'^ii wealth,  the  welfare  of 
the  allies,  and''^  the  greatest  public  revenues  at   stake^  '^in  the 

Text  6. 


96  EXERCISES  BASED  ON 

Asiatic  war,  but  large  properties  had  been  invested  by  many  Ro- 
mans in  Asia,  which  would  all  be  lost  ^'^if  Pompey  were  not  sent 
as  soon  as  possible  to  check  the  attacks  of  the  king,  '**  Inasmuch 
as  the  misfortunes  of  a  great  number  of  citizens  could  not  be  sep- 
arated from  the  public  cause,  it  was  ^'the  part  of  wisdom  ^^^sto  bear 
in  mind  "°what  '7' had  happened  at  the  beginning  of  the  war;  for 
at  that  time  "^^^when  upon  the  suspension  of  payments  in  Asia  credit 
fell  even  in  Rome,  all  men  had  been  taught  that  great  fortunes 
could '^  not  be  lost  in  one  state  ''without  involving '''  other  states  in 
the  same  calamity. 

^=zso  as  not  to  involve  (§  196X 


CHAPTER  8 

55.  Although  Lucullus,  who  had  been  sent  to  Asia  '3' eight  years 
before  to  conduct  the  war  with  Mithridates,  had  not  been  able  to 
destroy  the  power  of  the  king"',  he  had,  nevertheless,  accomplished 
*so  much  by  his  persistence  and  his  wise  policy  that  all  men  be- 
stowed upon  him  ''such  praise  as  is  due  to  a  brave  man  and  a  great 
commander.  The  town  of  the  Cyzicenes,  which  Mithridates  was 
besieging  '°='with  a  large  force  thoroughly  "^  equipped,  had  been  freed 
'°'from  its  extreme  danger.  Then,  ^^when  he  had  overpowered^ 
and  sunk  a  powerful  fleet  which  was  being  sent  '^^to  Italy,  he  cap- 
tured a  great  many  cities  of  Pontus  and  Cappadocia,  so  that  the 
great  ^  king,  stripped  '°'of  the  realm  of  his  fathers,  fled  as  a  sup- 
pliant to  other  nations  and  to  other  kings. 

»  =  so  great  things.  ^=so  much  of  praise  (§  70)  how  much  is, 

etc.  ''  =  with  all  things.  ^  QA.  Ex.  52.  c. 


CHAPTER   9   (TO  §24) 

56.  Once  on  a  time  from  that  same  Pontus  which  was  the  king- 
dom of  Mithridates  ^the  famous  Medea  ""^is  said  to  have  fleci 
"against  the  will  of  her  father  with  Jason.     ''Fearing  '^^that  her 

» Invitus  (§  126).  ''  Ex.  2,  c. 


CICERO,    MANILIAN    LAW  97 

father  would  pursue,  she  "^murdered  her  brother  and  scattered  his 
limbs  on  the  sea,  '**that  her  father'',  who"  she  knew  would  try"*  ''Ho 
gather  the  scattered  bones  of  his  son,  might  thus  be  delayed.  So 
Mithridates,  when  fleeing  from  his  realm,  left  behind  a  vast  quan- 
tity of  silver  and  gold  and  beautiful  things,  in  order  that,  -^'^ while 
the  Roman  soldiers  were  plundering  *this  treasure,  he  might  escape 
from  their  hands.  Despairing  of  his  fortunes  %  he  arrived  '^at  the 
court  of  Tigranes,  king  *^of  Armenia,  who  received^  him  kindly *" 
and  promised  ^^^to  protect'  him  from  the  Roman  army. 

•=  Subject  of  ind.  disc,  depending  on  knew.  ''Conor.  *  =  these 

things.         'Ad.  ^Cf.  Ex.  52.  c.  '' Hospitio  (§  122).         'Text  19. 


CHAPTER   9  (FROM  §  24) 

57.  Lucullus  pursued  Mithridates  into  Armenia,  and,  ^'^  although 
he  fought'  several  successful  engagements,  he  was  unable  to  cap- 
ture the  king",  because  the  soldiers,  affected  by  the  remoteness  of 
the  locality  and  by  longing  ^for  their  friends,  begged  an  early  re- 
turn rather  than  a  further  advance.  Mithridates,  accordingly,  was 
able  not  only  to  return  to  his  kingdom,  but  to  gather  a  large  force 
"*with  which  '^to  renew  the  war;  for  it  generally  happens  "^that 
kings,  ''when  they  are  in  distress,  easily  attract  to  their  aid  the  re- 
sources of  many  '^^who  think  that  the  name  "of  king  is  great  and 
holy.  And  so  ^^after  he  believed  that  his  army  was  sufficiently 
large,  he  made  a  successful  attack  upon  the  Romans  who  had  re- 
cently'" been  victorious. 

^Use  ntor  (text  23  ad  Jin.).       '^  Use  pass.  ptc.       *=Use  adj.        **  Nuper. 

CHAPTER   10 

58.  After  this  disaster  Lucullus  was  ordered  to  hand  over  the 
army  to  Manius  Glabrio.  But  the  Romans  soon  perceived*  that 
^^^to-carry  on  war  with  the  most  powerful  monarchs  and  the  most 
warlike  states  of  Asia,  a  general  better  versed  '*in  military  science 

"Text  26. 


98  EXERCISES   BASED    ON 

"^must  be  chosen.  'Mt  was  not  a  difficult  matter  to  decide  -'"whom 
they  should  appoint,  for  Gnaeus  I'oinpey  was  believed  by  all,  both 
citizens  and  allies,  to  be  the  only  man  '"''who  could  finish  so  great 
and  so  dangerous  a  war.  From  school  he  had  gone  off  at  once  to 
his  father's  army;  when''  a  mere  youth  he  was  himself  a  general-in- 
chief :  and  he  had  been  trained  to  a  knowledge  of  most  varied 
kinds  of  warfare,  not  under  the  orders  of  others,  but  under  his  own 
command. 

''  =  nor  was  the  deliberation  difficult  whom,  etc.         '^  Omit. 


CHAPTER   II 

59.  Cicero  said  that  language  could  ""^  not  be  found  worthy  of  the 
merit  of  Pompey,  for  all  the  ''good  qualities  of  a  general  existed "^  in 
liim  alone  "to  such  a  degree  that  all  other  commanders  who  "^had 
fought  either  for''  the  Romans  or  against  them  were^^  ^q^  his*- 
equal ;  that  not  only  many  and  powerful  foreign  nations  'bore 
testimony  "^to  this  effect,  but  Italy  herself  had  ^several  times  been 
delivered  ""from  the  dangers  of  war  "*by  his  bravery,  diligence, 
and  ""wise  counsel;  that  finally  all  seas  and  all  shores  gave  their 
testimony,  for,  although  for  many  years  a  war  had  been  carried  on 
against  the  pirates  '*^over  the  whole  sea,  'without,  however,  lessen- 
ing even^  one  peril  of  seafaring,  Pompey  in  a  single  summer  had 
brought  that  disgraceful  and  long-standing  war  to  a  close. 

*  =  merits.  ^  =  were  {§  224).  "  =so  great.  ^  Ex.  51.  b. 

"  ^=  were  witnesses.         "^Omit.        k  Use  a  comparative  adverb.         •'One 
word.        'Use  a  rel.  clause  of  characteristic.        ^ Not  even,  see  Ex.  10.  f. 


CHAPTER   12  (TO   §  34) 

60.  '^In  summer  for  many  years  the  whole  sea  had  been  so  over- 
run""^ with  pirates  that  no  Roman  army  had  set  out  from  Brun- 
disium  to  Greece  or  Asia  except  in  the  dead  of  winter.  No  tribute 
had  been  safe  for  the  Romans,  no  ally  had  been  defended,  ""al- 

^Text  31. 


CICERO,    MANILIAN   LAW  99 

though  formerly  the  Roman  armies  and  Roman  fleets  had  often 
fought  '^to  protect  not""  their  own  homes,  but  the  fortunes  of  their 
allies.  Not  only  had  ambassadors  who  were  coming  to  Rome  from 
foreign  states  'fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  pirates,  but  Roman  cit- 
izens as  well  ;  the  children  of  a  Roman  magistrate  had  been  car- 
ried off,  a  Roman  fleet  had  been  captured  near  the  mouth  of  the 
Tiber,  and  those  harbors  of  Italy  from  which  Rome''  drew  the  very 
•^ breath  of  life  had  been  plundered. 

''Although  in  a  purpose  clause,  non  should  be  used  here,  as  it  limits  a 
single  word,  not  the  whole  clause.  '^  =  come  into  power,  ^  =  Romans 
(§  300).         "Express  by  hendiadys. 

CHAPTER    12  (FROM  §  34) 

61.  ""^If  the  Romans  had  'appointed  for  this  war,  by  which  Italy 
and  all  the  allies  had  been  burdened  for  many  years,  a  general  less 
skilled'' "■'in  military  science  than  Pompey,  perhaps"  they  would  not 
have  been  able  to  conquer  the  pirates.  Indeed**,  Cicero,  when  he 
was  urging"  ''"that  Pompey  should  be  chosen*,  said  that  no  man 
had  believed  that  the  dangerous  and  long-protracted  war  could  be 
finished  by  one  commander  "*in  all  years  or  by  all  commanders  in 
one  year.  Yet  Pompey,  ^ as  soon  as  he  had  been  appointed,  'be- 
fore the  navigation  season  opened,  sent  out  ships  *-'to  strengthen 
and  defend  all  the  states  '^- which  were  "^  under  the  power  of  Rome, 
'and  then  beginning  the  war  in  the  early  spring,  brought  it  to  a 
close  in  the  middle  of  summer. 

*  Text  27.  ''Text  28.  ''Ex.41,  c.  ''Quidem,  post-positive. 

"  Suadeo.  ^  =  the  sea  not  yet  seasonable  for  navigation.  "  Use  a  rel. 
purpose  cl.  (§  188)  with  passive  vbs.        *■  Text  33.         '  Deinde  cum  (§  203). 

CHAPTER    13 

62.  Cicero  asked  his  fellow-citizens  "°to  consider  briefly  "°how 
many  "good  qualities  of  a  commander  existed  in  Gnaeus  Pompey, 
and  he  said  that  by  a  comparison  of  other  generals  who  had  been 

» Ex.  59.  a. 


lOO  EXERCISES   BASED  ON 

"Mess  faithful  he  could  most  easily  make  them  understand '""''how 
great  were  Pompey's''  justice  and  self-restraint.  He  ''mentioned 
nobody,  however,  by  name ;  "^so  that,  '^unless  a  man  was  willing  to 
admit  that  he  himself^  was  not  innocent,  he  could  not  be  angry 
with  him''.  And  so  when  he  had  bidden  them  recollect  the  mis- 
fortunes ^^  '^' which  many  towns,  not  only  of  foreign  peoples,  but 
even  of  Italy  herself,  had  suffered  on  account  of  the  avarice  of 
Roman  generals,  he  •"  asserted  that  Pompey's  armies  had  never  in- 
jured any^  people ^=' ^ which  had  once^  been  subdued. 

'^Mentioned  by  name,  one  word.  '^■=so  that  nobody  (§  196,  foot- 

note), unless  he,  etc.  ^  For  form,  cf.  §  22  and  §  27  end  ;  for  construc- 
tion, cf.  §  87.  ^Asserted  that  never  =  dented  (nego)  that  ever  (text 
34).         ^Express  by  a  ptc.        «Omit. 

CHAPTER  14 

63.  '^In  the  war*  with  the  pirates  Pompey  showed''  "'that  he 
could  restrain"  not  only  himself^,  but  also  his  soldiers.  For  when 
he  had  set  out  for  Asia,  he  arrived  in  that  distant  land  so  quickly, 
that  it  had  to  be  acknowledged  ^^by  all  that  no  greed  had  called 
him  from  his  purposed  course  for  plunder,  no  lust  for  pleasure,  no 
toil  for  rest;  and  although  Greece  was  full  of  statues''*  and  paint- 
ings and  all  other  beautiful  things,  "^even  these  did  not  delay  him 
a  single  day"*.  Finally,  in  Asia  by  his  accessibility  and  mercy  he 
made  all  men  love''''  him  no  less  than  they  had  previously  feared 
him  for  his  bravery'^. 

^•=war  waged  with,  etc.        *'Text2,  ad  fin.       "^Text  38.        ''Ex.  10.  f. 

CHAPTER   15 

64.  '"If  we  admit  that  men  are  influenced  '''to  love  or  hate  or 
fear  no  less  by  fancy  or  rumor  than  by  reasoning,  '^^who  can  doubt 
^'that  Pompey  '^^will  accomplish  more  by  his  reputation*  alone 
than  other  generals  could**  effect  by  "force  of  arms?     All  nations 

*  =  influence.  ^  A  protasis,  if  they  should  try  (214),  is  implied. 

"Use  hendiadys. 


CICERO,    MANILIAN    LAW  lOI 

know  how  much  the  '^price  of  corn  fell  "^as  soon  as  he  ''"'had  been 
appointed  to  carry  on  the  war  against  the  pirates.  And,  to  cite  but 
one  example  of  his  exploits,  when  the  Roman  army  had  met  dis- 
aster in  Pontus,  and  Tigranes  was  threatening  the  province  ^^^  with  a 
strong  force,  Asia  "^'^  would  have  been  lost  if  Pompey  had  not  provi- 
dentially arrived  in  that  neighborhood  and  checked  the  armies  of 
the  enemy  by  his  mere^  name  and  reputation. 

'^  =  cheapening  of  corn  followed.  "  =  z'/sel/". 

CHAPTER    i6 

65.  We  can  easily  see  how  great  was  the  reputation  of  Pompey 
among  the  enemies  of  Rome^  ""'if  we  only  remember  that  the 
Cretans,  although  there  was^  a  Roman  general  with  his  army  sta- 
tioned'' in  their  island,  sent  an  envoy  almost  to  the  ends  of  the 
earth  to  tell  Pompey  that  they  preferred  to  surrender  themselves 
and  all  their  fortunes  to  him.  But,  '^not  to  speak  "at  greater  length 
of  his  reputation,  it  remains  for  me  '^to  mention  his  good  fortune. 
For  it  is  not  by  valor  alone,  but  also  by  fortune  that  the  great  ex- 
ploits of  generals  are  accomplished.  Now'',  Pompey's  good  for- 
tune was  so  remarkable  that  even  the  elements*  seemed  always  to 
obey  his  will%  ^^''and  Cicero  did  not  hesitate  "^to  assert  that  no 
man  had  ever  ventured  to  pray  the  immortal  gods  for  so  great 
blessings  as  they  had  bestowed  on  Pompey. 

'^^z. Roman  people  (§300).  ''Omit.  '^ Comparative  of  longe. 

^  Autem  (§  270).  ^  =  winds  and  tempests. 

CHAPTER  17 

66.  "Even  "sjf  Pompey  were  not  already  in  that  region,"  said" 
Cicero,  "he  ''would,  nevertheless,  deserve  to  be  appointed  at  once 
to  take  charge  of  a  war  so  important."  There  were,  however,  dis- 
tinguished and  patriotic  men  at  Rome  '*'who  did  not  agree  with 

'To  introduce  a  direct  quotation,  use  inquit,  and  for  its  position,  cf. 
§  291,  note.  ''Use  the  pass,  periphrastic  (§  166),  and  for  mood,  cf. 

§  216. 


I02  EXERCISES    RASED   ON 

.Ins  view  of  Cicero,  "not  because  they  wished  to  deny  that  Pompey 
possessed  in  the  highest  degree  all  the  qualities'"  of  a  commander, 
but  because  they  believed  that  it  was  not  for  the  interest  of  the 
state^^  for  so  much  power  to  be  bestowed  upon  one  man.  But  it 
must  be  granted  that,  ''^if  such  arguments  had  prevailed  the  year 
before*  when  the  bill  was  proposed  concerning  the  appointment  of 
Pompey  as  commander-in-chief  against  the  pirates,  the  Romans 
undoubtedly*^  would  not  have  finished  that  war  ^so  soon. 

■^When  a  cause  is  given    as   not  effective,  the  subjunctive  is  used. 
^ Text  29.         'Prior.         ^Sine  dubio.         ^ Text  34. 


CHAPTER   18 

67.  "'If  the  Roman  people^  had  been  persuaded  by  the  argu- 
ments of  Catulus  and  Hortensius  ^^when  they  talked  against  the 
proposition  of  Gabinius,  it  would  have  been  deprived  of  the  assist- 
ance"" rendered*  by  Pompey's  great  ''military  knowledge  and  ex- 
perience. Had  this  happened,  perhaps  the  pirates  would  have 
remained  unconquered,  and  the  Romans '^  would  have  had  to  admit 
that  they  had  lost  all  the  maritime  power '°'  and  glory  which  their 
ancestors  had  bequeathed''  them.  For  during  many  years  without 
interruption  the  great '^  Roman  people,  whose  ancestors  had  de- 
feated the  most  skilful  and  best  equipped  enemies  "°in  so  many 
naval  battles,  had  ''not  been  able  to  defend  even  the  harbors  and 
coast  of  Italy.  We  can  easily  believe,  therefore,  that  many  patriots* 
during  those  years  were  ashamed  to  mount  the  Rostra  which  had 
been  adorned  by  their  fathers  with  naval  booty. 

-  Praesto  (§  309).  ''  Text  B.G.3.8.1.  =  =5 ^e/i.  «» = Ex.  10.  f. 
'Text  51. 

CHAPTER    19 

68.  Your  fellow-citizens,  Quintus  Hortensius,  do  not  doubt  ^'that 
you  have  spoken  "'with  good  intentions  ^^ against  Pompey  and  Ga- 
binius; "but  if  you^'^take  into  consideration  ^what  Pompey  has 

^Sin  autem. 


CICERO,   MANILIAN    LAW  IO3 

accomplished  in  a  single  year  on  land  and  sea  under  the  law  of 
Gabinius,  you  will  be  ashamed,  '  1  fancy,  to  remember  that  you 
have  tried  "'^to  prevent  his  '''•being  '^put  in  charge  of  the  war  3°' with 
Mithridates.  Moreover,  who  is  more  worthy  than  Gabinius  '*^to  be 
assigned  as  a  partner  of  the  ''exploits  of  "^that  great  general  ?  For 
not  only  *is  he  the  man  who  proposed  "^  the  bill  by  which  Pompey^""* 
was  appointed  to  the  command  of  the  naval  war,  but  Pompey,  too, 
earnestly  requests  '5°  that  Gabinius  3°"  may  be  given  him  as  his  lieu- 
tenant. In  my  opinion,  at  any  rate,  fellow -citizens,  since  many 
other  men  who  have  been  tribunes  of  the  people  have  been  ap- 
pointed lieutenants  in  the  very  next  year,  Gabinius  surely  ought 
not  to  be  deprived^  of  the  same  privilege '*. 

''Opinor,  used  parenthetically  (§  291,  note).        'Text  27.       ^  =  things 
done  by.        '/s  .  .  .  2t/>i^  =  ipse  (§  29).  'Text  52.  <^Useexpers. 


CHAPTER  20 

69.  After  Cicero  had  tried  ''to  overthrow  the  arguments  of  Hor- 
tensius,  he  said  that  it  remained  for  him  ''to  speak  briefly  about  the 
opinion  of  Quintus  Catulus.  '^That  he  might  not  appear  'to  be 
belittling  a  man  "''of  such  wisdom  and  integrity,  he  recalled  the 
flattering  recognition  of  his  worth  and  merit  which  Catulus 3°''  had 
recently  received  from  his  fellow-citizens  at  the  time  *°5when  they 
declared  with  one  accord  that,  if  anything'*  happened'**  to  Pom- 
pey "°,  they  would  put  all  their  hope  in  him  alone.  But  when  Cat- 
ulus had  said  ''in  the  case  of  Pompey  that  he  wished  no  7° new  step 
to  be  taken  contrary  to  the  established  custom  of  their  fathers, 
Cicero  did  not  hesitate  "^to  disagree  with  him.  "  For  'the  greater 
the  dangers  which  threaten  the  state %"  said*^  he,  "the  more  ought 
we  all  to  enjoy  the  advantage  of  the  valor  and  military  skill  of  our 
greatest  men." 

'Text  52.  ''For  mood,  cf.  §  198;  for  sequence,  §  171.  'Text  57. 
*/«  tAe  case  of,  one  word.  *  The  greater  .  .  .  the  more  =  quo  .  .  . 

eo  with  comparatives  (§  116).  'Ex.  66.  a. 


I04  EXERCISES   BASED  ON 

CHAPTER  21 

70.  '"^  When  Catulus  said  that  he  did  not  wish  any  '"new  measures 
"contrary  to  the  precedents  of  their  fathers  to  be  taken  in  the  case 
of  Pompey,  he  "^ seems  to  have  forgotten''  ^how  many  new  prece- 
dents "^had  already  been  established  in  the  case  of  this  man, 
"'with  the  approval"  not  only  of  himself  but  of  many  distinguished 
men  ^of  the  same  rank.  For  when  he  was  a  mere  youth  and  a 
private  citizen,  Pompey''  raised  an  army  and  gained  brilliant  suc- 
cesses "'under  ^^his  own  command.  Afterwards,  although  it  was 
unusual  ''^for  an  army  to  be  given  to  a  man  '**who  had  not  held*  a 
magistracy,  *^the  management  of  the  campaign  in  Africa  was  in- 
trusted to  him,  and  when  he  had  concluded  the  war  an d^'°  ^brought 
home  a  victorious  army,  he  ''was  allowed,  'though  only  a  knight,  to 
celebrate  a  triumph. 

*  Text  60.  ''Obliviscor.  ^■=  good-will.  "*  Use  a  pronoun 

(§  304),  and  put  it  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence  (§  287).  'Habeo. 

'^Use  a  gerundive  construction  (§  251).  ^Brought  home,  one  word. 

•■The  Latin  vb.  is  impersonal.  '  Though  only,  omit.     The  emphasis 

on  knight  should  be  expressed  by  its  position  in  the  clause  (§  287). 

CHAPTER  22 

71.  "'If  Pompey  had  not  conducted  his  campaigns  so  success- 
fully^ in  Italy,  Africa,  Spain,  and  on  the  sea,  we  should  perhaps 
admit,  fellow-citizens,  that  Hortensius  and  Catulus  ''are  doing  right 
in  trying  ''^to  prevent  us  '^from  appointing  him  to  the  command  of 
the  war''  with  the  pirates.  But  ^'^if  we  have  seen  'from  the  outcome 
of  events  that  these  men  have  ''not  taken  sufficient  thought  for  the 
public  welfare^  and  that  their  judgment  on  the  character'  of  Pom- 
pey ^^is  not  to  be  approved,  '^Met  us  not  hesitate  °°^to  defend  our 
opinion,  and  to  select  *^for  this  great  war  in  Asia  the  one  man 
^whom  not  only  the  greater  part  of  our  fellow-citizens  but  all  our 
allies  ^raost  earnestly  desire.    "^If  we  do  this**^,  foreign  states  will 

*Feliciter.  ^  =  rightly  try.  '^■=  front  the  things  themselves. 

^Not  sufficient,  one  word.  *  =  worthiness.  ^Use  ad  (text  27)  with 

a  gerundive  (this  so  great  war  to  be  waged),        ^  Text  57. 


CICERO.   MANILIAN   LAW  IO5 

believe  that  we  have  ''at  last  heard  their  complaints,  ^''and  are  no 
longer' more  eager  ^^o  plunder  than  to  protect  them'^. 

''Ex.  28.  b.  'Ex.  2.  d. 


CHAPTER  23 

72.  I  ask  you,  fellow-citizens,  '^to  consider  ^whether  the  influ- 
ence of  Catulus  and  Hortensius  ought  to  be  so  great  that  it  can 
persuade  us^^  ''"not  to  send  to  the  war  3°' with  the  king  the  only  man 
'^whom  our*'^  allies  would  rejoice  *to  have  come  into  their  cities. 
"7  As  if,  indeed,  the  allies  did  ''not  know  that,  "^ while  most  Roman 
commanders,  *" owing  to  their  lust  and  desire  of  plunder,  would'' 
make  war  upon  them  no  less  than  upon  the  enemy,  Pompey  is  "='of 
such  uprightness  and  self-control  that,  remembering^  he  was  sent 
to  conquer  the  enemy  alone,  he  will  restrain  the  desires  of  his  sol- 
diers '°'from  the  homes,  wives,  and  treasures  of  his  allies  and 
friends.  Since  you  have  a  man  not  only  endowed  with  such  a 
character  but  also  thoroughly  experienced  ''''in  all  kinds  of  warfare, 
'"do  not  disgrace*^  the  Roman  people  *59by  appointing  a  general 
'*'who  will  try  more  to  enrich  himself  than  to  subdue  your  foes. 

•Pf.  inf.  of  indir.  discourse.         "^ Not  know,  one  word.  ^Text  65., 

''Volo.  "■=.  holding  (tenens)  in  memory  (§  108).  ^^  affect  with 

disgrace. 

CHAPTER   24 

73.  When  Cicero  had  shown  that  the  war  with  Mithridates  was 
'so  inevitable  that  it  could  not  be  neglected,  and  of  such  magnitude 
that  it  must  be  managed  with  the  greatest  care,  he  tried  to  per- 
suade his  fellow-countrymen  "'that  they'*  had  but  one  general  suit- 
able''to  be  placed  in  command.  Although  there  were  some  '^''who 
did  not  think  that  the  "^  whole  power  should  be  conferred  upon  one 
man,  nevertheless,  the  majority  believed  that,  *^if  the  war  were  not 
committed  to  Pompey,  it  *** would  be  protracted''  for  many  years. 
Accordingly  they  not  only  gave  their  warmest  approval  to  the  *bill 

'Text  49.       •   ''Text  57.  "^ Text  67.  '^Produco.  « Text  54. 


Io6  EXERCISES  BASED  ON 

of  Manilius,  but  they  also  believed  that  Cicero  had  spoken  truth- 
fully when  he  declared  that  whatever  he  had  undertaken  in  this 
case  he  had  undertaken  not  for  the  sake  '^sof  winning  favor  for 
himself,  but  for  the  public  welfare. 


Cicero,  Archias 

CHAPTER    I 

74.  Aulus  Licinius  Archias  was  a  poet  and  friend  of  Cicero, 
whom  the  latter'^  defended  "when  he  was  accused  "^of  having  ille- 
gally'' obtained  Roman  citizenship.  In  the  first  part  of  his  speech 
Cicero  said  that  he  ought  to  employ  for  Archias  all  the  powers  of 
intellect  and  oratory  he  possessed,  for  the  latter  had  been  his  chief 
guide  ^^Mn  the  pursuit  of  all  the  ■* branches  of  literature.  He  added 
that  ^if  his  oratory  had  ever  aided  any  one  k  ought  surely  to  aid 
him  who  gave  it.  ^^It  made  no  difference  that  ^"poetry  and  oratory 
were  not  the  same,  since  all  the  arts  were  united  by  ^a  sort  of  rela- 
tionship. 

*  IVhen  he  was  accused,  pf.  pass,  participle.  ''Use  an  indicative 

clause  with  quod.  ''Contra  leges.  ^ Branches  of  literature,  s\m- 

plify.  ^ A  sort  of,  quasi,  a  word  with  which  the  Roman  often  quali- 

fied a  metaphor,  apologizing  for  it,  so  to  sfieak,  if  I  may  use  the  term, 
etc. 

CHAPTER   2 

75.  The  trial  of  Archias  was  conducted  before  a  praetor  and 
jurors  whom  Cicero  called  well  versed  in  literature.  And  so  he 
asked  them  "°to  pardon  him  '^^for  using  a  style  of  speech  *not  only 
quite  different  from  his  own  ordinary  custom,  but  also  from  the 
style  ''expected  in  the  law-courts.  For'^*,  '**since  he  was  speaking 
in  behalf  of  a  man  of  the  greatest  learning,  he  discoursed  freely  on 

'Use  a  relative  clause,  see  text.  ''One  adjective  in  Latin. 


CICERO,   ARCH  IAS  IO7 

the  subjects ^^  of  culture  and  liiciature.  He  "^felt  sure  that'"  in  this 
way"'  he  could  easily  convince  the  jurors  that  Archias  ought  not 
to  be  deprived  of  the  citizenship'"',  but  was  '**■' worthy  to  receive  it 
even  ""^oif  he  were  not  a  citizen. 

Note  the  long  period  occupying  nearly  the  whole  of  this  chapter. 
Read  §  296. 

"^  Feel  sure  =  know,  scio. 


CHAPTER   3 

76.  Archias  was  born  at  Antioch  '^'*  and  was  remarkable  from 
boyhood  for  his  ability"*  and  skill  in  vvriting^'^s.  ^°' After  travelling 
throughout'  Asia,  where  he  enjoyed  great  fame  as  a  poet,  he  came 
to  Rome '^^  in  the  year  '^=102  B.C.  Not  long  before '3'  he  ^had  re- 
ceived great  rewards^  for^  his  poetry  in  the  cities  of  ''Southern  Italy. 
He  was  still'  a  young  man,  and  yet^^°  he  was  at  once  received  ^^as 
an  intimate  friend  by  the  Luculli.  i'he  famous^"  Metellus  Numidi- 
cus,  Quintus  Catulus.  Lucius  Crassus,  and^^  many  other  noble  men 
became  his  friends.  In  fact,  he  was  beloved  by  all  who  even  pre- 
tended to  'have  an  interest  in  literature. 

*Per  (§  263).  ^  Had  received  =  had  been  presented  with,  etc.,  cf. 

§  86.  <=  Use  propter.  ^  =  Great  Greece.  "  Etiam  turn. 

'Have  an  interest,  simplify.     For  construction,  see  §  221. 


CHAPTER   4 

77.  The  law  of  Silvanus  and  Carbo  declared  all  to  be  Roman 
citizens  who  had  held  residence  in  Italy  and  who,  '^^ after  obtaining 
the  citizenship  of  an  allied  state,  appeared  before  the  praetor 
"'^within  sixty  days.  Now",  in  the  first''  place,  Archias  had  already 
had  a  residence  at  Rome  "*for  many  years  ""^  before  he  accompanied 
LucuUus  to  Sicily.  Secondly^  he  was  presented  with  the  citizen- 
ship^ of  Heraclea,  an  allied  state,  ''^'not  only  because  of  the  influ- 
ence "^  of  Lucullus,  but  also  because  of  his  own  worth.     And  lastly" 

^Now,  omit.  ''Ex.  21.  e. 


I08  EXERCISES    BASED   ON 

he  appeared  before  the  praetor  within  sixty  days.  Though  the 
records  of  Heraclea  have  been  burned,  here  is''*^  Lucullus,  here 
are^*^  the  Heraclean  envoys  who  swear"  "''that  all  I  have  said  is 
true. 

•=  luro. 


CHAPTERS  4-5 

78.  It  cannot  be  doubted  ^'that  Archias  appeared  before  a  prae- 
tor, for  his  name  stands  on  the  records.  Moreover"^",  the  Greeks 
have  often  given  the  citizenship  to  men  of  no  ability "^  ''Would 
they  have  refused  it  to  Archias,  a  man  of  great  genius?  But,  ''you 
say,  his  name  is  not  on  the  census-list.  All  know  that  when  Archias 
first  came  to  Rome  no  census  was  taken,  and,  during  the  last  two 
censorships,  he  has  been  in  the  provinces  with  our  generals.  "And 
besides  he  who  is  ''rated  in  the  list  is  only  proved  to  have  performed 
the  acts  of  a  citizen.  This^  same  thing  can  be  said  of  Archias,  for 
he  has  both  received  legacies  and  made  his  own  will  in  accordance 
with  Roman  laws. 

''Equivalent  to  an  apodosis  of  a  condition  contrary  to  fact,  cf.  §§  215 
and  178.  ^Omit.    The  force  of  But, you  say,  is  given  by  the  proper 

conjunction,  cf.  §  270.  '^  And  besides,  praeterea.  ^ Rated  in  the 

list,  census.  "  Use  the  relative. 


CHAPTER  6 

79.  Poets  refresh  the  mind  worn  out  with  toil,  *and  "^ unless  the 
mind  were  daily  refreshed  we  should  have  nothing  to  say  worth 
listening  to.  No  one  can  say  that  I  have  not  always  aided  those 
who  needed  my  services.  And  so  no  one  ought  to  blame  me  if  I 
have  employed  my  leisure  time  in  the  study  of  literature,  for  from 
literature  I  draw  all  the  power  of  oratory  I  possess.  Literature 
teaches  that  praise  and  honor  are  the  greatest  things  ''in  the  world, 
for  it  is  full  of  examples^*  of  great  and  good  men  whom  I  have 

^And  unless  the  mind,  avoid  et  by  means  of  a  relative,  cf.  §  310. 
''Omit. 


CICERO.   ARCHIAS  IO9 

striven '  to  imitate.     And  yet  all  these  examples  "^  would  have  per- 
ished had  it  not  been  for  literature. 
Note  the  fine  anaphora  in  Sed  pleni  omnes,  etc.    Cf.  §  287. 

«Ex.s6.  d. 

CHAPTER  7 

80.  Not  all  the  great  men  ^of  the  world  have  been  educated,  ''it 
is  true,  and  ability  without  learning  has  more  often  been  deserving 
of  praise  than  learning  without  ability,  *7°and  yet  when  the  same 
man  possesses  both  ability  and  learning  something  remarkable  ""is 
usually  produced.  I  mighf  ^  mention  as  examples  Africanus,  Lae- 
lius,  the  famous "^  old  man  Cato,  and*^  many  others.  And  so  we 
may  feel  sure  that  literary  studies  are  very  valuable.^  Even  "^if 
they  were  not  we  should  pursue  them  merely  because  of  the  pleas- 
ure ''they  afford.  For  they  surpass "^  all  other  pleasures,  '^^fj-om  the 
fact  that  they  are  ** suited  to  all  occasions,  all  places,  and  every 
period  of  life. 

*  Of  the  world,  omit.  ''//  is  true,  quidem.  ^h  usually  pro- 

duced, 9o\to -\- xnfimxXvG.  ^Omit.  *Supero. 

CHAPTER  8 

81.  Mere  skill  of  body  can  affect  men  ***to  such  a  degree  that 
they  weep  at  the  death  of  actors  just  as  'they  did  recently  in  the 
case  of  Roscius.  "*How  much  more  ought  we  to  be  affected  by 
mental **  skill  and  genius?  Such*"  genius  Archias  possesses,  for 
poets  receive  their  power  by  a  certain  divine  inspiration ;  all  other 
things  may  be  learned  by  study.  Indeed  poets  ought  to  be  consid- 
ered sacred,  as  Ennius  calls  them.  If  stones  and  brute  beasts  are 
moved  by  the  power  of  poetry,  ought  we  educated  men  ''to  think  of 
depriving  a  man  of  citizenship  whose  poetry  is  equal  to  '"that  of  the 
ancients  ? 

*Omit  they  did.  If  represented  at  all,  the  Latin  would  repeat  the 
verb  weep,  using  the  perfect  tense.  *'Many  English  adjectives  are  to 

be  rendered  by  the  genitive  of  a  noun  in  Latin.  "^Talis.    Cf.  §  287. 

^  To  think  of  depriving  =  to  think  about  depriving,  cf.  §  259. 


no  EXERCISES   BASED  ON 

CHAPTER  9 

82.  Archias  has  celebrated  in  verse  the  glory  of  the  Roman  peo- 
ple and  has  been  a  friend  even  of  Gaius  Marius,  who  conquered  the 
Cimbri  and  Teutones.  Famous  men  love  those  who  are  able  to 
celebrate  their  great  deeds.  So  Marius  and  Lucullus  loved  Archias. 
But  the  greaf"  victories  of  Marius  and  Lucullus  have  rendered 
famous  the  name  of  the  Roman  people.  When  the  enemy's  fleet 
was  sunk  near'^^  Tenedos,  when  their  leaders  were  slain,  the  glory 
^'belonged  to  the  "Roman  people.  And  so  those  who  have  cele- 
brated the  great  deeds  of  our  generals  have  ^'a.t  the  same  time  cele- 
brated the  fame  of  the  Roman  people  itself. 

*Note  and  imitate  the  skilful  anaphora  of  Cicero  in  the  position  of 
Populus  Romanus,  cf.  §  287. 

CHAPTER   10 

83.  If  Ennius  received  the  citizenship  '^^for  having  praised  the 
deeds  of  great  men,  ^^'does  not  Archias  deserve  the  same  reward"'? 
Rome  has  conquered  the  world,  and  her  fame  ought  to  reach  the 
limits  of  the  world ;  ''^''and  yet  Latin  is  read  only  in  Italy.  But  the 
Greek*  poetry  of  Archias  has  spread  the  fame  of  Rome  ''far  and 
wide,  because  almost  all  peoples  understand  Greek.  Indeed  ^'^if 
there  were  no  poets,  the  deeds  of  great  men  would  be  forgotten. 
The  famous ""  Alexander  considered  Achilles  fortunate  because 
Homer  sang  his  praises.  '"^If  Archias  had  asked  any  of  our  great 
men  for  the  citizenship,  he  would  certainly  have  received  it.  Sulla. 
who  gave  the  citizenship  to  Gauls  and  Spaniards,  'would  certainly 
have  rewarded  Archias. 

*  Arrange  the  sentence  so  as  to  emphasize  Greek,  cf.  §  287.  •'•Longe 

lateque.  «=  Equivalent  to  an  apodosis  (§  215). 

CHAPTER   ir 

84.  I  have  said  that  all'"  the  best  men  are  attracted  by  love  of 
glory.     Even  the  very  philosophers,  who  pretend*  "'to  despise  glory, 

*Text  6. 


CICERO.   ARCHIAS  III 

wish  their  names  to  be  eternaP  with  their  books.  Ennius,  the  poet, 
fought  against  the  Aetolians  '^*under  the  leadership  of  Fulvius,  who 
actually*"  dedicated  spoils  to  the  Muses.  Even*^  I  myself  admit 
that  I  am  touched  with  the  same  desire  and  wish  the  deeds  of  my 
consulship  to  endure  forever.  Glory  is  the  reward  of  excellence, 
and,  '-5 if  this  is  taken  away,  '^^ there  is  nothing  in  life  worth  striving 
for.     Though  we  ourselves  may  die,  yet  our  names  can  last  forever. 

''Text  30.  ^Ultro. 

CHAPTER    12 

85.  It  is  impossible  for  everything  to  die  with  us,  and  it  is  much 
better  to  leave  behind  as  memorials  the  likeness  of  our  virtues  than, 
as  many  great  men  "have  done,  statues'"^  of  our  persons.  ''It  mat- 
ters not  ^whether  we  shall  ourselves  feel  this  fame  after  death  ""or 
not,  "''provided  that  we  now  take  delight  in  the  hope  and  expecta- 
tion of  it. 

In  view  of  all  this,  judges,  I  trust  that  you  will  pardon  what^^  j  have 
said  not  in  accordance  with  the  ordinary  custom  of  the  law-courts 
on  behalf  of  Archias,  a  sacred  poet  who  will  cause  the  fame  of 
Rome  ■'''to  be  remembered,  and  a  man**  in  every  way  worthy  of  the 
citizenship. 

•Omit,  cf.  Ex.  81.  a.  ''//  matters  not,  nihil  refert  (§83,  second 

note).  "^See  §  220,  note.  ^Use  a  relative. 


College  Entrance  Examinations 

86.  While  Caesar  was  thus  engaged,  he  desired  to  know  what  was 
being  done  elsewhere.  A  message  was  brought  to  him  from  Titurius, 
whom  he  had  placed  in  command^  of  the  troops  at  the  bridge :  "  The 
Belgians  have  changed  their  plan,  and  have  come  down  to  the  river. 

I.  praeficere 


112  SIGHT   EXERCISES 

I  fear  they  will  cross  it  at  ^ford^,  and  thus  attack  us  in  the  rear^.^^ 
Caesar  immediately  despatched  his  horse  and  light  troops''  to  pre- 
vent their  carrying  out  this  design.  These  squadrons,^  crossing  the 
river  by  the  bridge,  reached  the  ford  before  the  Belgians  had  passed 
it,  and  attacked  them  with  their  missiles  while  they  were  still  strug 
gling^  in  the  middle  of  the  stream.  Part  of  them  who  had  already 
gained  the  opposite  side  were  surrounded  and  cut  in  pieces ''  by  the 
cavalry.  The  Belgians  were  forced^  to  retreat  to  their  former  en- 
campment, where  they  heard  that  Divitiacus  had  entered  their  con- 
fines and  was  now  wasting  their  homes  with  sword  and  fire.  They, 
therefore,  determined  to  abandon  their  attempt"^  and  to  return  each 
to  defend  his  own  land. 

2.  vadum  6.  impeditus 

3.  a  tergo  7.  tnicidare 

4.  miles  expeditus  8.  cogere 

5.  turma  g.  inceptum 

Amherst,  June,  1897. 

87.  Under  these  circumstances,  conscript  fathers,  I  have  deter- 
mined to  refer  to  you  the  question  of^  the  punishment  of  the  con- 
spirators. Thws  i2iX  X.'fio  opinions'^  ZXQ. proposed^ :  Silanus  thinks  that 
those  who  have  tried  to  destroy  the  empire  of  the  Roman  people 
should  be  immediately  put  to  death  ;  Caesar,  on  the  other  hand,  holds 
that  death  was  ordained'^  by  the  immortal  gods  not  for  the  sake  of 
punishment,  but  as  a  rest  from  labor.  He,  therefore,  urges  that  the 
property  of  these  wretches  be  confiscated^  and  they  be  imprisoned^ 
for  life  in  our  municipal  towns.  Do  not  doubt,  conscript  fathers, 
that  I  see  clearly  where  my  own  interest^  lies.  If  you  adopt  the 
opinion  of  Caesar,  I  shall  have  less  fear  of  popular  hatred.  But 
if  you  prefer  the  opinion  of  Silanus,  I  shall  easily  be  able  to  acquit 
myself  of  the  charge^  of  cruelty.  Wherefore,  I  urge  you  to  act 
boldly  in  defence  of  the  safety  of  the  Roman  people.     You  have 

1.  Omit  5.  publicare 

2.  sententia  6.  in  vincula  dare 

3.  ferre  7.  interesse 

4.  constituere  8.  crimen 


COLLEGE  ENTRANCE  EXAMINATIONS 


113 


a  consul  mindful  of  you,  forgetful  of  himself,  who  will  not  hesitate 
to  carry  out  your  decrees. 

Amhkrst,  y//w«',  1898. 

88.  Caesar  made  a  speech  in  order  to  encourage  his  men.  He  told 
them  they  ought  not  to  be  disturbed  in  mind  •  that  the  unfavorable 
nature  of  the  ground  (place)  had  brought  this  about.  "Do  not," 
said  he,  "  attribute  it  to  the  enemy's  valor.  I  am  going  to  lead 
the  army  oiit  of  the  camp  and  draw  up  a  line  of  battle  in  a  suit- 
able place.  Then  you  will  see  whether  Vercingetorix  will  come 
down  on  to  level  ground  or  not."  But  Vercingetorix  remained  in 
the  same  place,  and  so  Caesar  fought  only  a  slight  cavalry  engage- 
ment, which,  however,  was  successful.  A  few  days  afterwards  he 
proceeded  to  the  river  Elaver  in  order  to  repair  the  bridges  and  lead 
the  army  across. 

BOWDOIN,  June,  1897 

8g.  When  Hannibal,  after  being  defeated  by  the  Romans,  had 
finally  fled-for-refuge  {confugio)  to  Prusias,  King  of  Bithynia,  the  Ro- 
mans sent  envoys  to  the  king  to  command  him  (relative  of  purpose) 
to  surrender  {dedd)  Hannibal  to  the  Roman  people.  Hannibal,  how- 
ever, perceiving  that  his  end  had  come,  determined  (decerno)  to  die 
by  his  own  hand.  Accordingly,  having  been  informed  by  his  slaves 
that  the  house  was  surrounded  by  soldiers,  he  took  the  poison  which 
he  always  had  with  him  in  a  ring,  saying  that  his  enemies  should 
never  capture  him  alive. 

Thus  perished  miserably  that  famous  man  whom  many  have 
called  the  greatest  general  of  all  ages  and  nations. 

BOWDOIN,  June,  1898. 

90.  I.  Tell  me  why  you  are  ashamed  of  your  work  ;  or  ate  you  only 

tired  of  it  ?     I  went  to  my  uncle's  in  Utica,  but  I  did  not  enjoy  his 

beautiful  pictures,  for  I  was  not  skilled  enough  in  art.     The  general 

left  the  city  with  his  troops  and  hastened  to  the  frontier  to  attack 

the  enemy.     I  cannot  tell  you  how  happy  I  am  at  your  great  vic- 
8 


114  SIGHT    KXPIRCISES 

lory.  The  girl  married  a  man  who  was  fifteen  years  older  than  her- 
self. When  asked  why.  she  replied  :  "  It  is  better  to  be  an  old  man's 
darling  (deliciae)  than  a  young  man's  slave."  Do  you  think  you 
could  trust  a  woman  who  says  such  things  as  that? 

II.  Hannibal,  being  conquered  by  Scipio,  fled  to  Antiochus,  King 
of  Syria.  Ambassadors  were  sent  from  Rome  to  Antiochus.  among 
whom  was  Scipio,  who  asked  Hannibal  whom  he  thought  to  be  the 
greatest  general.  Hannibal  replied  that  Alexander.  King  of  Mace- 
don,  seemed  to  him  to  have  been  the  greatest,  because  with  small 
forces  he  had  routed  innumerable  armies.  Then  Scipio  asked  him 
whom  he  placed  second.  "'Pyrrhus,''  said  he,  "because  he  first 
taught  how  to  measure  out  a  camp."  Again,  when  Scipio  asked 
whom  he  placed  third,  he  replied,  "  Myself.''  Then  Scipio,  smiling, 
said,  "What,  then,  would  you  say  if  you  had  conquered  me?"  "I 
should  have  placed  myself  before  Alexander  and  Pyrrhus  and  all 
others." 

Brvn  Mawk,  June,  1898. 

91,  A  few  days  ago  I  met  in  Rome  Cato  the  censor,  which  day,  I 
remember,  was  the  19th  of  April.  As  soon  as  he  saw  me,  he  began 
to  speak  of  the  growing  power  of  Carthage,  which  has  almost  re- 
covered from  the  former  war.  In  fact,  he  said  he  should  not  cease 
to  fear  that  city  until  he  should  have  learned  of  its  utter  destruc- 
tion. "O  that  our  young  Scipio,"  said  he,  "might  soon  finish  the 
work  begun  by  his  grandfather." 

California,  August,  1896. 

92.  Demetrius  had  taken  the  city  of  Megara.  Upon  his  asking 
Stilpo,  the  philosopher,  if  he  had  lost  anything,  the  other  answered, 
"  I  have  lost  nothing ;  for  all  my  property  is  still  mine."  At  this 
the  monarch  marvelled  much  ;  for  his  patrimony  had  been  plun- 
dered, his  sons  carried  off,  and  his  country  conquered.  No  doubt 
the  philosopher  meant  Demetrius  to  understand  that  he  cared  noth- 
ing for  material  possessions,  and  that  no  enemy  could  deprive  him 
of  the  possessions  which  alone  he  valued,  namely,  those  of  the  mind. 

California,  August,  1898. 


■    COLLEGE   ENTRANCE   EXAMINATIONS  115 

{Mark  all  long  vowels.) 

93.  Cicero,  on  being  informed  of  these  actions  of  Fulvia,  tiiought 
he  must  no  longer  delay.  He  surnmoned  the  senate  to  meet  in  the 
Temple  of  Jupiter  Stator.  Catiline,  with  strange  boldness,  came  in 
and  took  his  seat  among  the  other  senators,  who,  however,  immedi- 
ately left  him  alone.  Cicero  now  delivered  the  famous  speech  that 
is  called  the  First  Oration  against  Catiline.  The  guilty  man  rose 
to  reply,  but  was  prevented  from  speaking  by  the  shouts  of  the  sen- 
ators. He  immediately  left  the  senate  house ;  and,  perceiving  that 
he  was  not  safe  at  Rome,  he  called  his  fellow-conspirators '  together, 
bade  Lentulus,  the  praetor  of  the  city,  and  the  others,  carry  out 
what  had  been  determined  upon,  and  left  Rome  before  daylight  to 
join  Manlius  at  Faesulae. 

I  =  socii. 

Chicago,  December,  1897. 

{Mark  all  long  vowels.) 

94.  "Then  Cicero  arose  and  poured  forth  the  first  of  the  four 
celebrated  Catilinarian  orations,  which  begins  with  the  well-known 
words  :  '  How  long,  Catiline,  will  you  abuse  our  patience  ?'  He 
showed  him  that  he  knew  what  he  had  done,  what  he  intended,  that 
he  was  informed  of  all  his  plans,  and  called  upon  him  to  relieve  the 
city  of  his  hated  presence,  and  to  take  his  companions  in  crime 
with  him.  Catiline,  with  downcast  eyes  and  faltering  voice,  begged 
the  senate  not  to  judge  him  harshly.  But  his  voice  was  drowned  by 
the  cry  '  Traitor  !'  '  Parricide  !'  He  rushed  from  the  senate  cham- 
ber, and,  after  conferring  with  the  leaders  of  the  conspiracy,  he  left 
the  city  at  nightfall,  and  hastened  to  the  camp  of  Manlius." 

Chicago, /««(?,  1898. 

95.  We  have  been  expelled  from  our  own  country,  and  have  come 
hither  against  our  will ;  but  if  you  wish  by  kindness  to  earn  our 
gratitude  we  can  be  most  useful  friends. 

Envoys  had  come  to  him  from  the  town  to  beg  him  to  pardon 
their  offences  and  to  spare  their  lives. 


Il6  SIGHT   EXERCISES 

The  force  on  guard  is  so  small  that  not  even  the  wall  is  manned 
{cingere  murum),  and  no  one  dares  to  come  beyond  the  fortifications. 

Columbia,  June,  1898. 

96.  Such  being  the  case,  conscript  fathers,  see  to  it  that  you  do 
not  fail  in  your  duty  to  those  whose  help  has  never  failed  you.  Our 
common  country  is  beset  by  the  torches  and  weapons  of  an  impious 
conspiracy.  Desperate  men  are  threatening  the  citadel  and  the 
Capitol,  the  temples  of  the  gods,  and  even  our  very  homes  and  fire- 
sides ;  and  upon  you  rests  the  decision  whether  all  that  we  see 
about  us  shall  stand,  or  the  whole  republic  be  destroyed. 

Columbia,  September,  1898. 

97.  I.  All  good  citizens  will  obey  the  laws  of  the  Roman  people. 

2.  These  brave  men  blocked  the  way  of  the  enemy  with  their 
own  bodies. 

3.  Before  I  set  out  from  Rome,  you  returned  to  the  city  from 
Asia. 

4.  Take  care  that  those  who  are  absent  may  not  have  a  place  to 
which  to  return. 

5.  If  he  had  known  that  you  were  to  come  to-day,  he  would  have 
remained  at  Athens. 

6.  He  said  that  he  should  have  done  this  before  setting  out,  but 
that  he  did  not  know  how  important  it  was. 

Cornell,  y««^,  1897. 

98.  I.  When  Caesar  was  in  Gaul,  the  Belgians  began  to  con- 
spire against  the  Romans. 

2.  You  must  resist  old  age,  if  you  wish  to  remain  young. 

3.  Who  is  so  unjust  as  not  to  defend  a  man  whom  he  believes  to 
be  innocent  ? 

4.  Have  no  fear  that  he  will  not  come ;  there  is  no  doubt  that  he 
will  leave  home  to-morrow ;  it  may  be  he  has  left  already. 

5.  The  old  republic  was  not  overthrown  till  more  than  seven 
hundred  years  after  the  founding  of  the  city. 


COLLEGE   ENTRANCE   EXAMINATIONS  117 

6.  If  I  could  believe  that  you  would  be  a  true  friend,  I  should 
no  longer  fear  to  tell  you  what  I  did  before  returning  to  my  home 

in  the  country. 

Cornell,  September,  1898. 

99.  On  the  next  day  Caesar  led  out  his  forces  from  both  {uterque) 
the  camps,  and  advancing  a  short  distance  from  the  larger  camp,  he 
drew  up  his  army  and  offered  battle  to  the  enemy.  As  soon  as  {ubt) 
he  perceived  that  the  enemy  did  not  come  out,  he  withdrew.  Then 
Ariovistus  sent  a  part  of  his  troops  to  attack  {pppugnare)  the  smaller 
camp,  and  a  sharp  battle  was  fought  till  evening  {vesper).  Then 
Caesar,  calling  a  council,  said  that  he  should  send  out  a  detachment 
of  cavalry  {aid)  to  reconnoitre  {explorare),  and  when  they  returned, 
he  should  order  the  soldiers  to  prepare  {corpora  curare)  for  an  en- 
gagement. 

Dartmouth,  y««<f,  1897. 

100.  If  you  wish  to  be  of  service  to  my  glory,  go  forth  with  your 
band  of  conspirators,  betake  yourself  to  Manlius,  separate  yourself 
from  good  men,  make  war  upon  your  country,  so  that  you  may  seem 
not  driven  out  to  strangers,  but  invited  to  friends.  Yet  I  know  that 
some  whom  you  have  sent  before  you  are  waiting  for  you.  Nature 
bore  you  and  fortune  has  saved  you  for  such  folly.  In  the  camp  to 
which  you  go  you  will  have  a  place  to  show  that  renowned  endur- 
ance of  hunger,  cold,  and  want  of  everything,  but  you  will  under- 
take robbery  rather  than  war. 

Dartmouth,  y««if,  1898. 

loi.  Although  only  a  small  part  of  the  summer  was  left,  Caesar 
determined  to  cross  into  Britain,  for  he  had  observed  that  in  nearly 
all  the  wars  with  the  Gauls  aid  had  been  furnished  to  the  enemy  by  the 
inhabitants  of  that  island.  Since,  however,  he  could  learn  nothing 
from  the  Gauls  about  the  nature  of  the  island  and  of  its  people,  and 
was  afraid  that  some  misfortune  might  happen  to  him  if  he  acted 
incautiously,  he  sent  a  lieutenant  to  find  out  all  he  could  about  that 
portion  of  Britain  which  was  nearest  to  Gaul. 


Il8  SIGHT    EXERCISES 

In  ihe  mean  time  Caesar  gathered  together  about  eighty  ships  in 
which  to  carry  across  the  troops  if  a  favorable  report  was  made  by 
his  lieutenant.  When  after  five  days  this  officer  had  returned  and 
reported  all  that  he  had  seen,  Caesar  at  once  set  sail  with  two 
legions  of  infantry  and  ordered  the  cavalry  to  follow  with  all  pos- 
sible speed. 

The  cavalry,  however,  waited  more  than  five  days  before  setting 

out,  and  then  proceeded  so  slowly  that  one  battle  had  already  been 

fought  with  the  enemy  before  they  came  within  sight  of  Caesar  and 

the  infantry. 

Harvard,  Jtme,  1897. 


102.  On  learning  that  the  Germans  were  preparing  to  invade  Gaul, 
Caesar  made  up  his  mind  to  join  his  army  at  once.  Having  reached 
the  winter-quarters,  he  quickly  made  all  necessary  arrangements  for 
marching,  and  as  soon  as  he  could,  started  out  with  his  army  in  the 
direction  in  which  he  had  been  told  the  Germans  were  encamped. 
Whaii  he  was  not  many  miles  away  from  them,  he  met  some  ambas- 
sadors whom  they  had  sent  to  tell  him  that  they  might  be  useful 
friends  to  him,  if  he  would  let  them,  and  to  ask  him  to  assign  them 
land  in  Gaul  where  they  could  live  without  being  molested  by  their 
enemies.  But  Caesar  was  afraid  that  they  were  acting  treacherously 
and  refused  to  grant  their  request.  He  told  them,  however,  that  if 
they  wished,  they  might  settle  on  the  farther  banks  of  the  Rhine  in 
the  country  of  the  Ubii.  So  they  went  back  to  consult  their  coun- 
trymen in  regard  to  this,  but  Caesar  in  the  mean  time  kept  on  advanc- 
ing, for  he  saw  that  it  was  necessary  to  force  the  Germans  out  of 

Gaul  without  delay. 

Harvard, /««<■,  1898. 

103.  Caesar,  because  he  remembered  that  the  consul  L.  Crassus 
had  been  slain  and  his  army  routed  and  sent  under  the  yoke  by  the 
Helvetians,  did  not  think  that  their  request  ought  to  be  granted: 
nor,  moreover,  did  he  believe  that  men  whose  feelings  were  hostile, 
if  given  leave  to  march  through  the  province,  would  refrain  from 


COLLEGE    ENTRANCE   EXAMINATIONS 


119 


injury  and  evil-doing.  However,  that  time  might  be  gained  (inter- 
vene) for  (until)  the  soldiers,  whom  he  had  ordered,fto  assemble,  he 
replied  to  the  ambassadors  that  he  would  take  a  day  for  deliber- 
ation. 

Johns  Hopkins,  September,  1897. 

104.  When  now  the  turrets  had  approached  the  wall,  Caesar 
learned  from  captives  that  Vercingetorix  had  moved  his  camp  nearer; 
to  Avaricum  and,  together  with  his  cavalry,  was  waiting  in  the  place 
where  he  thought  that  our  men  would  come  the  next  day. 

Johns  Hopkins,  Septemhet-  ^698. 

105.  While  war  was  being  waged  in  Numidia  against  JugUT-tha,  the 
Cimbri  and  Teutones  and  other  tribes  of  the  Germans  and  Gauls^^^, 
threatened  Italy,  and  routed  several  Roman  armies.  There  was 
great  fear  in  Rome,  lest  the  city  should  be  taken  a  second  time  by. 
the  Gauls.  Therefore,  Gains  Marius  was  elected  consul,  to  make 
war  on  the  Cimbri  and  Teutones.  He  fought  two  battles  with  the 
Cimbri  and  defeated  them  with  great  slaughter,  capturing  eighty 
thousand  men,  together  with  their  king  Tewtobodus.  Then  the 
Teutones  invaded  Italy,  but  were  routed  by  Marius  and  Catulus 
near  Verona.  Thus  Rome  was  saved  by  the  skill  and  valor  of 
Marius  from  the  greatest  danger  which  had  threatened  the  city 
since  its  capture  by  the  Gauls  in  390  B.C. 

Michigan,  September,  1898. 

106.  When  Caesar  made  these  inquiries  (asked  these  things)  of 
the  envoys,  he  found  that  the  Belgae  long  before  had  driven  out  the 
Gauls  (use  participial  phrase)  and  that  they  were  the  only  ones  who 
had  been  able  to  prevent  the  Cimbri  from  entering  (or  invading) 
iheir  country;  that  the  Nervii,  who  were  considered  the  fiercest 
among  them,  had  promised  fifty  thousand  armed  men  for  this  war. 

While  Caesar  was  waiting  for  reinforcements,  the  Belgae  attacked 
a  waned  town  of  the  Remi,  which  was  eight  miles  from  the  Homan 
caiiip.    Sq  Iccius  sent  a  messenger  to  say  that  unless  aid  were  given 


I20  SIGHT   EXERCISES 

him,  he  would  have  to  surrender  the  town.     Caesar  replied  that  he 
would  send  one  legion  to  help  the  Remi  because  they  had  obeyed 

his  orders. 

Pf.nnsylvania. /««£',  1897. 

107.  I.  Caesar  replied  that  there  were  no  vacant  lands  in  Gaul 
which  so  large  a  multitude  could  settle  in,  but  that  he  would  order  the 
Ubii  to  allow  them  to  settle  in  their  territories.  Caesar  kept  drawing 
nearer  to  the  camp  of  the  Germans,  and  they  kept  sending  ambas- 
sadors to  him,  for  the  purpose,  as  he  thought,  of  causing  delay  until 
their  cavalry,  which  was  away,  should  return. 

2.    To  these  men  I  say,  "  Be  assured  that  the  consuls  are  vigilant, 

that  ihey  have  provided  a  sufficient  guard  for  the  city,  and  that  the 

citizens  have  been  warned  to  defend  their  homes  with  sentinels  and 

guards.     If  you  make  the  slightest  attempt  against  your  country,  I 

shall  immediately  discover  it." 

Princeton,  September,  1897. 

108.  I.  He  says  that  you  made  him  consul. 

You  said  that  you  would  not  ask  him  for  money. 
I  think  that  he  would  have  conquered  the  Germans  if  you  had 
helped  him. 

2.  After  he  had  learned  the  conspirators'  plans,  Cicero  assembled 
the  senate  in  the  temple  of  Jupiter  Stator,  on  the  8th  of  November, 
and  accused  Catiline  of  treason.  That  very  night  Catiline  set  out 
from  Rome  for  Etruria  in  order  to  unite  with  Manlius,  his  lieuten- 
ant, before  he  should  be  apprehended, 

3.  Caesar  sent  thirteen  horsemen  to  see  where  the  enemy  had 
pitched  their  camp.  On  their  return  (when  they  returned)  they 
informed  him  that  the  camp  was  in  a  narrow  valley  where  two 

streams  met. 

Princeton,  June,  1898. 

109.  On  the  8th  of  November,  the  consul  Cicero  asked  Catiline  in 
the  senate  whether  he  did  not  know  that  all  had  learned  that  he 
had  conspired  against  the  state.     "All  your  plans,"  said  he,  "are 


COLLEGE    ENTRANCE    EXAMINATIONS  121 

now  clearer  to  me  than  daylight :  you  met  your  confederates  at 
Laeca's  house  ;  you  chose  men  to  leave  at  Rome  to  burn  the  city  and 
murder  the  opti  mates;  you  yourself,  after  killing  me,  intend  to  go  to 
the  army  which  Manlius  is  now  collecting  for  you  in  Etruria.  You 
ought  to  have  been  killed  long  ago  by  the  command  of  the  consul, 
but  I  will  permit  you  to  go — nay,  1  advise  you  to  do  so." 

Vanderbilt,  September,  1897. 

110.  When  the  ambassadors  of  that  tribe  came  to  the  Roman  gen- 
eral's camp,  he  asked  tliem  what  they  wished.  They  replied  that 
they  wished  to  put  themselves  and  their  people  under  the  protection 
of  the  Roman  people.  "  We  have  been  driven,"  they  said,  "  from  our 
homes  by  the  Chatti,  with  whom  we  could  not  contend,  since  they 
surpassed  us  in  number.  Now  if  we  are  permitted  to  settle  in  your 
territory,  we  will  always  be  faithful  to  you ;  but  if  you  make  war  on 
us,  we  can  expect  no  help  except  from  the  immortal  gods."  Licin- 
ius  replied  that  he  would  ask  the  senate  about  the  matter ;  in  the 
mean  time  he  ordered  them  to  remain  where  they  were  and  not  to 
devastate  the  country.  He  sent  one  of  his  legates  to  Rome  to  re- 
port the  affair  to  the  senate. 

Vanderbilt,  September,  1898.    * 

111.  To  show  you  what  is  to  your  interest,  I  shall  explain  the 

matter  fully.     Caius  Caesar  believes  that  if  the  conspirators  should 

be  put  to  death  now,  the  people  would  blame  the  senate  bitterly. 

Many  senators  agree  with  Caesar.     If  we  follow  their  opinion,  these 

dangers  will  increase,  and  soon  Catiline  and  his  friends  will  do 

what  they  wish  to  do,  get  possession  of  Rome  and  put  the  most 

prominent  men  to  death.     Now  I  ask  you,  what  ought  the  senate  to 

fear  most,  the  blame  of  a  few  men  who  have  no  foresight,  or  the 

utter  destruction  of  this  glorious  republic. 

Vassar,  Junty  1897. 

112.  C.  Caesar,  who  protected  the  state  by  his  zeal,  was  rewarded 
by  the  senate  with  the  greatest  honors.  For  when  we  had  no  pro- 
tection and  were  fearing  the  disastrous  return  of  Antony,  this  youth 


122  SIGHT    EXERClSlLb 

made  ready  an  army,  and  warded  off  the  danger.  Who  is  there 
who  does  not  know  that  if  Caesar  had  not  prepared  an  army,  the 
return  of  Antony  would  have  been  our  ruin  ?  For  he  was  so  stirred 
up  by  his'  hatred  of  you  and  his  slaughter  of  Roman  citizens  at 
Suessa  that  he  thought  of  nothing  but  the  overthrow  of  the  Roman 

people. 

Vassar,  June,  i8g8. 

113.  The  day  following,  Vercingetorix  convoked  the  assembly. 
He  declares  that  he  did  not  undertake  this  war  for  the  sake  of  his 
own  interests,  but  for  the  sake  of  the  common  liberty,  and  that,  since 
one  must  yield  to  fortune,  he  offers  himself  to  them  for  either  pur- 
pose (rem),  whether  they  choose  (velint)  to  satisfy  the  Romans  by 
his  death  or  to  deliver  him  up  alive.  Envoys  are  sent  to  Caesar  on 
this  matter.  He  orders  their  arms  to  be  delivered  up,  their  chiefs 
to  be  brought  before  him.  He  himself  is  seated  within-his-lines  (/// 
munitione)  in  front  of  the  camp.  There  the  leaders  are  brought 
before  him.  Vercingetorix  is  given  up,  their  arms  are  surrendered. 
Reserving  the  Aedui  and  Averni,  that  if  possible  he  may  through 
them  recover  their-  states,  he  distributes  the  rest  of  the  captives, 
6ne  to  each  inan  in  the  army  in  the  name  of  booty. 

Wellesley,  September,  1897. 

114.  At  daybreak  Caesar  ordered  all  those  men  who  had  taken 
stand  on  the  mountain  to  come  down  into  the  plain  from  their  higher 
positions  and  throw  down  their  arms.  This  they  did  without  any  re- 
fusal, and  with  out-stretched  hands  threw  themselves  on  the  ground 
weeping,  and  begged  him  for  safety.  He  comforted  them  and  bade 
them  rise,  speaking  a  few  words  to  them  about  his  clemency,  that 
they  might  feel  less  fear.  Then  he  gave  them  into  the  charge  of 
his  own  soldiers  that  none  of  them  be  harmed. 

Are  you  not  ashamed  of   your  silence  ?     Messengers  informed 

Caesar  that  the  army  would  be  on  the  march  three  days  later.     I 

would  like  to  know  what  you  are  going  to  do.     Labienus  feared  the 

other  legion  would  not  come. 

Wklleslev,  y«M/r,  1898. 


COLLEGE   ENTRANCE   EXAMINATIONS  123 

115.  I  see,  Conscript  Fathers,  that  some  of  the  citizens  are  plot- 
ting against  the  commonwealth.  I  have  not  punished  them  as  yet ; 
but  I,  the  consul,  am  aware  of  their  treachery,  and  all  that  they  plan 
is  straightway  reported  to  me.  I  know  where  they  have  been  and 
what  leaders  they  have  chosen.  If  that  wicked  wretch,  Catiline, 
does  not  depart  from  the  city,  he  and  his  accomplices  (socii)  will  be 
seized  and  put  to  death.  For  the  immortal  gods  have  willed  that 
death  should  be  the  penalty  of  such  crimes. 

Wesleyan,  September,  1897. 

116.  The  king  of  the  Germans  was  Ariovistus.  Caesar  sent  mes- 
sengers to  him  to  demand  tliat  he  should  liberate  the  Gauls.  Ariovis- 
tus insolently  refused,  saying  that  he  wondered  what  business  the 
Romans  had  in  Gaul,  which  he  (Ariovistus)  had  conquered.  Then 
Caesar  marched  against  him  and  defeated  him  in  a  great  battle. 
Thus  the  Gauls  were  liberated  from  the  power  of  the  Germans,  and 

returned  to  their  allegiance  to  the  Roman  people. 

insolently  =  superbe.  return  to  allegiance  =  tnfidem  redire. 

Wesleyan,  Jtiue,  1898. 

117.  In  the  five-hundred-and-fortieth  year  after  the  founding  of  the. 
city  {a  condita  urbe)  Paulus  and  Varro  were  sent  against  Hanniba.1. 
At  a  town  called  Cannae  in  Apulia  a  battle  was  fought,  in  which, 
both  consuls  were  defeated.  The  consul  Paulus  was  killed,  thirtv 
senators  were  either  captured  or  slain,  as  well  as  three  hundred, 
nobles  and  forty  thousand  soldiers.  Yet  no  Roman  dared  to  speak 
of  peace.  Slaves  were  manumitted  [mamimissi  stint),  a  thing  which 
had  never  been  done  before,  ind  in  this  way  the  army  was  increased. 

WUJ.IAMS,  y//;/^,  1897. 

118.  Caesar,  on  seeing  that  very  many  of  his  own  men  were  being 
wounded,  ordered  the  cohorts  to  ascend  the  mountain  and  to  raise 
a  shout.  The  inhabitants  {oppidani),  greatly  terrified  at  this  {quo 
facto),  called  back  their  armed  men,  but  were  finally  forced  {cogere) 
to  surrender.     Drappes,  a  captive,  refused  food  (lit.  kept  himself, 


124  SIGHT   EXERCISES 

abstinere,  from  food),  and  so  died.     At  the  same  time  Lucterius, 
who  had  escaped   {pro/ugere)  from  the  battle   was  brought  back 

bound  to  Caesar. 

Williams, /««<•,  1898. 

119.  When  the  Romans  reached  Britain,  the  barbarians,  occupying 
the  shore,  hurled  javelins  at  them  and  attempted  to  prevent  them  from 
disembarking  (ex  ndvibus  egredi).  The  Romans,  not  accustomed 
to  fight  on  ships,  were  terrified  by  this  until  (dum)  Caesar  ordered 
some  of  his  ships  to  be  stationed  near  the  exposed  flank  of  the 
enemy.  Then  the  barbarians,  disturbed  by  the  arrows  and  javelins, 
retreated  slightly  {paulum  pedem  referre).  While  the  Romans  were 
still  hesitating,  the  eagle-bearer'  of  the  tenth  legion,  jumping  {se 
proicere)  into  the  sea,  cried  out,  "  Leap  down  {desilire),  soldiers,  un- 
less you  wish  to  betray  your  eagle  to  the  enemy  !"  All  immediately 
followed  him,  and  after  a  fierce  conflict  put  the  enemy  to  flight. 

*  Eagle-bearer — "  he  who  carried  the  eagle." 

\ALE,/ufy,  1897. 

120.  In  his  speech  for  the  Manilian  law  Cicero  reminded  his  fel- 
low-citizens of  the  services  rendered  by  Pompey  when  he  held  su- 
preme command  against  the  pirates  who  had  grown  so  bold  that  they 
captured  even  large  towns.  "  Even  the  very  coast  of  Italy,"  said 
Cicero,  "  and  the  Tiber  itself  were  not  safe  from  the  attacks  of 
those  rascals.  Almost  under  your  very  eyes  a  fleet  under  the  com- 
mand of  a  consul  of  the  Roman  people  was  crushed.  And  yet  un- 
der the  leadership  of  Pompey  that  dangerous  war  was  ended  within 
a  few  months.  He  prepared  for  it  at  the  end  of  winter,  began  it  in 
the  early  spring,  and  finished  it  "by  midsummer." 

\KLB.,June,  1898 


Caesar,  Gallic  War' 

BOOK   111 

1.  Cum  in  Italiam  proficisceretur  Caesar,  Ser.  Galbam  cum  le-  i 
gione  duodecima  et  parte  equitatus  in  Nantuatis,  Varagros,  Sedunos- 
que  misit,  qui  a  finibus  Allobrogum  et  lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine 
Rhodano  ad  summas  Alpes  pertinent.     Causa  mittendi  fuit  quod  2 
iter  per  Alpes,  quo  magno  cum  periculo  magnisque  cum  portoriis 
mercatores  ire  consueverant,  patefieri  volebat.     Huic  permisit,  si  3 
opus  esse   arbitraretur,  uti   in   his  locis  legionem  hiemandi  causa 
conlocarei.     Galba  secundis  aliquot  proeliis  factis  castellisque  com-  4 
pluribus  eorum  expugnatis,  missis  ad  eum  undique  legatis  obsidi- 
busque  datis  et  pace  facta,  constituit  cohortes  duas  in  Nantuatibus 
conlocare  et  ipse  cum  reliquis  eius  legionis  cohortibus  in  vico  Vara- 
grorum,  qui  appellatur  Octodurus,  hiemare;  qui  vicus  positus  in  5 
valle,  non  magna  adiecta  planitie,  altissimis  montibus  undique  con- 
tinetur.    Cum  hie  in  duas  partes  flumine  divideretur,  alteram  partem  6 
eius  vici  Gallis  concessit,  alteram  vacuam  ab  his  relictam  cohortibus 
ad  hiemandum  attribuit.     Eum  locum  vallo  fossaque  munivit. 

2.  Cum  dies  hibernorum  complures  transissent,  frumentumque  i 
eo  comportari  iussisset,  subito  per  exploratores  certior  factus  est 
ex  ea  parte  vici  quam  Gallis  concesserat  omnes  noctu  discessisse, 
montesque  qui  impenderent  a  maxima  multitudine  Sedunorum  et 
Varagrorum  teneri.     Id  aliquot  de  causis  acciderat  ut  subito  GalH  2 
belli    renovandi    legionisque    opprimendae    consilium     caperent : 
pr*mum,  quod  legionem,  neque  eam  plenissimam,  detractis  cohorti-  3 
bus  duabus  et  compluribus  singillatim,  qui  commeatus  petendi  causa 
missi  erant,  absentibus,  propter  paucitatem  despiciebant ;  tum  eiiam  4 
quod  propter  iniquitatem  loci,  cum  ipsi  ex  montibus  in  vallem  de- 
currerent  et  tela  coicerent,  ne  primum  quidem  posse  impetum  suum 
sustineri  existimabant.     Accedebat  quod  suos  ab  se  liberos  abs-  5 
tractos  obsidum  nomine  dolebant,  et  Romanes  non  solum  itinerum 


126  LATIN    TEXT 

causa  sed  etiam  perpetuae  possessionis  culmina  Alpium  occupare 
conari  et  ea  loca  finitiinae  provinciae  adiungere  sibi  persuasum 
habebant. 

1  3.  His  nuntiis  acceptis  Galba,  cum  neque  opus  hibernorum  muni- 
tionesque  plene  essent  perfectae  neque  de  frumento  reliquoque 
commeatu  satis  esset  provisum,  quod  deditione  facta  obsidibusque 
acceptis  nihil   de  bello   timendum  existimaverat,  consilio  celeriter 

2  convocato  sententias  exquirere  coepit.  Quo  in  consilio,  cum  tnn- 
tum  repentini.  periculi  praeter  opinionem  accidisset,  ac  iam  omnia 
fere  superiora  loca  multitudine  armatorum  completa  conspicerentur, 
neque  subsidio  veniri  neque  commeatus  supportari  interclusis  itine- 

3  ribus  possent,  prope  iam  desperata  salute  nonnullae  huius  modi  sen- 
tentiae  dicebantur  ut,  impedimentis  relictis  eruptione  facta,  isdem 

4  itineribus  quibus  eo  pervenissent  ad  salutem  contenderent.  Maiori 
tamen  parti  placuit  hoc  reservato  ad  extremum  casum  consilio  in- 
terim rei  eventum  experiri  et  castra  defendere. 

1  4.  Brevi  spatio  interiecto,  vix  ut  iis  rebus  quas  constituissent 
conlocandis  atque  administrandis  tempus  daretur,  hostes  ex  omni- 
bus  partibus   signo   dato   decurrere,    lapides   gaesaque   in   vallum 

2  coicere.  Nostri  primo  integris  viribus  fortiter  propugnare  neque  ul- 
lum  frustra  telum  ex  loco  superiore  mittere,  ut  quaeque  pars  castro- 
runi  nudata  defensoribus  premi  videbatur,  eo  occurrere  et  auxilium 

3  ferre ;  sed  hoc  superari  quod   diuturnitate    pugnae  hostes  defessi 

4  proelio.excedebant,  alii  integris  viribus  succedebant:  quarum  rerum 
ab  nostris  propter  paucitatem  fieri. nihil  poterat,  ac  non  modo  de- 
fesso  ex  pugna  excedendi,  sed  ne  saucio  quidem  eius  loci  ubi  con- 
stiterat  relinquendi  ac  sui  recipiendi  facultas  dabatur. 

1  5.  Cum  iam  amplius  horis  sex  continenter  pugnaretur  ac  non 
solum  vires  sed  etiam  tela  nostros  deficerent,  atque  hostes  acrius 
instarent  languidioribusque   nostris  vallum  scindere  et  fossas  com- 

2  plere  coepissent,  resque  esset  iam  ad  extremum  perducta  casum,  P. 
Sextius  Baculus,  primi  pili  centurio,  quem  Nervico  proelio  compluri- 
bus  confectum  vulneribus  diximus,  et  item  C.  Volusenus,  tribunus 
militum,  vir  et  consili  magni  et  virtutis,  ad  Galbam  adcurrunt  atque 
unam  esse  spem  salutis  docent,  si  eruptione  facta  extremum  auxi- 

3  Hum  experireiitur.    Itaque  convocatis  centurionibus  celeriter  milites 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR.  BOOK    III  \2J 

certiores  facit  paulisper  intermitterent  proelium,  ac  tantummodo 
tela  missa  exciperent  seque  ex  labore  reficerent ;  post  dato  signo  ex 
castris  erumperent  atque  omnem  spem  salutis  in  virtute  ponerent. 

6.  Quod   iussi  sunt  faciunt  ac  subito  omnibus  portis  eruptione   i 
facta  neque  cognoscendi  quid   fieret  neque  sui  colligendi  hostibus 
facultatem   relinquunt.     Ita  commutata  Fortuna  eos  qui  in   spem  2 
potiendorum  castrorum  venerant  undique  circumventos  interficiunt, 
et  ex  hominum  milibus  amplius  xxx,  queni  numerum  barbarorum 
ad  castra  venisse  constabat,  plus  tertia  parte  interfecta  reliquos 
perterritos  in   fugam   coiciunt  ac  ne  in   locis  quidem  superioribus 
consistere  patiuntur.     Sic  omnibus  hostium  copiis  fusis  armisque  3 
exutis  se  intra  munitiones  suas  recipiunt.     Quo  proelio  facto,  quod  4 
saepius  Fortunam  temptare  Galba  nolebat,  atque  alio  se  in  hiberna 
consilio  venisse  meminerat,  aliis  occurrisse  rebus   viderat,  maxime 
frumenti  commeatusque  inopia  permotus,  postero  die  omnibus  eius 
vici  aedificiis  incensis  in  provinciam  reverti  contendit,  ac  nullo  hoste   5 
prohibente   aut  iter  demorante   incolumem  legionem  in   Nantuatis, 
inde  in  Allobroges  perduxit  ibique  hiemavit. 

7.  His  rebus  gestis  cum  omnibus  de  causis  Caesar  pacatam  Gal-  i 
Ham  existimaret,  superatis  Belgis,  expulsis  Germanis,  victis  in  Alpi- 
bus   Sedunis,  atque  ita  inita  hieme  in    Illyricum   profectus  esset, 
quod  eas  quoque  nationes  adire  et  regiones  cognoscere  volebat, 
subitum  bellum  in  Gallia  coortum  est.     Eius  belli  haec  fuit  causa.  2 
P.  Crassus  adulescens  cum  legione  septima  proximus  mare  Ocea- 
num  in  Andibus  liiemabat.     Is,  quod  in   his  locis  inopia  frumenti  3 
erat,  praefectos  iribunosque  militum  complures  in  finitimas  civitates 
frumenti  commeatusque  petendi  causa  dimisit,  quo  in  numero  est  4 
T.  Terrasidius  missus  in  Esubios,  M.  Trebius  Gallus  in  Coriosolitas, 
Q.  Velanius  cum   T.  Silio  in  Venetos. 

8.  Huius  est  civitatis  longe  amplissima  auctoritas  omnis  orae  i 
maritimae  regionum  earum,  quod  et  naves  habent  Veneti  plurimas, 
quibus  iV)  Britanniam  navigare  consuerunt,  et  scientia  atque  usu 
rerum  nauticarum  ceteros  antecedunt,  et  in  magno  impetu  maris 
atque  aperto,  paucis  porlibus  interiectis,  quos  tenent  ipsi,  om- 
nes  fere  qui  eo  mari  uti  consuerunt  habent  vectigales.  Ah  his  fit  2 
initium  rctinendi  Sili  atque  Vclani  et  si  cjuos  intercipere  potuerunt, 


128  LATIN   TEXT 

quod  per  eos  suos  se  obsides  quos  Crasso  dedissent  recuperaturos 

3  existimabant.  Horum  auctoritate  finitimi  adducti,  ut  sunt  Gallorum 
subita  et  repentina  consilia,  eadem  de  causa  Trebium  Terrasidium- 
que  retinent ;  et  celeriter  missis  legatis  per  suos  principes  inter  se 
coniurant  nihil   nisi  communi   consilio  acturos  eundemque  omnes 

4  fortunae  exitum  esse  laturos;  reliquasque  civitates  sollicitant  ut  in 
ea  libertate  quam  a  maioribus  acceperint  permanere,  quam  Roma- 

5  norum  servitutem  perferre  malint.  Omni  era  maritima  celeriter  ad 
suam  sententiam  perducta  communem  legationem  ad  P.  Crassum 
mittunt,  si  velit  suos  recuperare,  obsides  sibi  remittat. 

1  g.  Quibus  de  rebus  Caesar  a  Crasso  certior  factus,  quod  ipse 
aberat  longius,  naves  interim  longas  aedificari  in  flumine  Ligeri, 
quod  influit  in  Oceanum,  remiges  ex  provincia  institui,  naut;is  gu- 

2  bernatoresque  comparari  iubet.  His  rebus  celeriter  administratis 
ipse,  cum  primum  per  anni  tempus  potuit,  ad  exercitum  contendit. 

i  "Veneti  reliquaeque  item  civitates  cognito  Caesaris  adventu,  simul 
quod  quantum  in  se  facinus  admisissent  intellegebant,  legates,  quod 
nomen  ad  omnes  nationes  sanctum  inviolatumque  semper  fuisset, 
retentos  ab  se  et  in  vincula  coniectos,  pro  magnitudine  periculi 
bellum  parare,  et  maxime  ea  quae  ad  usum  navium  pertinent  pro- 
videre  instituunt,  hoc  maiore  spe  quod  multum  natura  loci  confi- 

4  debant.  Pedestria  esse  itinera  concisa  aestuariis,  navigationem 
impeditam    propter   inscientiam    locorum    paucitatemque   portuum 

5  sciebant,  neque  nostros  exercitus  propter  frumenti  inopiam  diutius 

6  apud  se  morari  posse  confidebant ;  ac  iam  ut  omnia  contra  opi- 
nionem  acciderent,  tamen  se  plurimum  navibus  posse,  Romanos 
neque  ullam  facultatem  habere  navium  neque  eorum  locorum  ubi 

7  bellum  gesturi  essent  vada,  portlis,  insulas  novisse  ;  ac  longe  aliani 
esse  navigationem  in  concfuso  mari  atque  in  vastissimo  atque  aper- 

8  tissimo  Oceano  perspiciebant.  His  initis  consiliis  oppida  muniunt. 
frumenta  ex  agris  in  oppida  comportant,  naves  in  Venetiam,  ubi 
Caesarem  primum  bellum  gesturum  constabat,  quam  plurimas  pos- 

9  sunt  cogunt,  Socios  sibi  ad  id  bellum  Osismos,  Lexobios,  Nam- 
netes,  Ambianos,  Morinos,  Diablintes,  Menapios  adsciscunt;  auxilia 
ex  Britannia,  quae  contra  eas  regiones  posita  est,  arcessunt. 

t       10.  Erant  hae  difficultates  belli  gerendi  quas  supra  ostendimus. 


CAESAR.  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK   III  1 29 

sed  multa  Caesarem  tamen  ad  id  bellum  incitabant:  iniuriae  reten    2 
torum  equitum  Romanorum,  rebel) io  facta  post  deditionem,  defectio 
datis  obsidibus,  tot  civitatum  coniuratio,   in   primis  ne  iiac  parte 
neglecta  reliquae  nationes  sibi  idem  licere  arbitrarentur.     Itaque*3 
cum  intellegeret  omnes  fere  Gallos  novis  rebus  studere  et  ad  bellum 
mobiliter  celeriterque  excitnri,  omnes  autem  homines  natura  liber- 
tati  studere  et  condicionem  servitutis  odisse.  priusquam  pliires  civi 
tales  conspirarent.  partiendum  sibi  ac  latius  distribuendiimexercitum 
putavit. 

11.  Itaque  T.  Labienum  legatum  in  Treveros,  qui  proximi  fiumini   i 
Rheno  sunt,  cum  equitatti  mittit.     Huic  mandat  Remosreliquosque  2 
Belgas  adeat  atque  in  officio  contineat ;  Germanosque,  qui  auxilio  a 
Belgis  arcessiti  dicebantur,  si  per  vim  navibus  flumen  transire  co- 
nentur,  prohibeat.     P.  Crassum  cum   cohortibus  legionariis  xii  et  3 
magno  numero  equitatus  in  Aquitaniam  proficisci  iubet,  ne  ex  his 
nationibus  auxilia  in  Galliam  mittantur  ac  tantae  nationes  coniun- 
gantur.     Q.  Titurium   Sabinum  legatum  cum    legionibus   tribus  in  4 
Venellos,  Coriosolitas  Lexobiosque  mittit,  qui  earn   manum  disti- 
nendam  curat.     D.  Brutum  adulescentem  classi  Gallicisque  navibus,  5 
quas  ex  Pictonibus  et  Santonis  reliquisque  pacatis  regionibus  con- 
venire  iusserat,  praeficit  et  cum  primum  posset  in  Venetos  proficisci 
iubet.     Ipse  eo  pedestribus  copiis  contendit. 

12.  Erant  eius  modi  fere  situs  oppidoium  ut  posita  in  extremis  i 
lingulis  promunturiisque  neque  pedibus  aditum  haberent,  cum  ex 
alto  se  aestus  incitavisset,  quod  bis  accidit  cotidie  semper  horarum 
duodenarum  spatio,  neque  navibus,   quod   rursus  minuente  aestu 
naves  in  vadis  adflictarentur,     Ita  utraque  re  oppidorum  oppugnatio  2 
impediebatur ;  ac  si  quando,  magnitudine  operis  forte  superati  ex- 
truso  mari  aggere  ac  niolibus  atque  his  oppidi  moenibus  adaequatis, 
suis  fortunis  desperare  coeperant,  magno  numero  navium  adpulso, 
cuius  rei   summam   facultatem   habebant,   sua  deportabant   omnia 
seque  in  proxima  oppida  recipiebant ;  ibi  se  rursus  isdem  oportuni- 
tatibus  loci  defendebant.     Haec  eo  facilius  magnam  partem  aestatis  3 
faciebant,  quod  nostrae  naves  tempestatibus  detinebantur,  summa- 
que  erat  vasto  atque  aperto  mari,  magnis  aestibus,  raris  ac  prope 
nuUis  portibus,  difficultas  navigandi. 

9 


130  LATIN   TEXT 

1  13.  Nanique  ipsorum  naves  ad  hunc  moduin  factae  arVnataeqiie 
erant :  carinae   aliquanto  planiores   quam    nostrarum   iiavium,   quo 

2  facilius  vada  ac  decessum  aestus  excipere  possent ;  prorae  admodum 
•erectae  atque   item   puppes,  ad   magnitudinem   fluctuum   tempestar- 

*3  tumque  adconimodatae ;  naves  totae  factae  ex  robore  ad  quamvis 
vim  et  contumeliam  perferendam  ;  transtra  ex  pedalibus  in  altitu- 
dinem    trabibus   confixa   clavis  ferreis  digiti   pollicis   crassitudine  ; 

4  ancorae  pro  funibus  ferreis  catenis  rev^inctae  ;  pelles  pro  velis  alu- 
taeque  tenuiter  confectae,  hae  sive  propter  lini  inopiam  atque  eius 
usus  inscientiam  sive  eo,  quod  est  magis  veri  simile,  quod  tantas 
tempestates  Oceani  tantosque  impetus  ventorum  sustineri  ac  tanta 
onera  navium  regi  velis   non  satis  commode  posse   arbitrabantur. 

5  Cum  his  navibus  nostrae  classi  eius  modi  congressus  erat  ut  una 
celeritale  et  pulsu  remorum  praestaret ;  reliqua  pro  loci  natura,  pro 

6  vi  tempestatum,  iilis  essent  aptiora  et  adcommodatiora.  Neque 
enim  his  nostrae  rostro  nocere  poterant  (tanta  in  iis  erat  firmitudo) 
neque   propter  altitudinem   facile   telum   adigebatur,   et   eadem   de 

7  causa  minus  commode  copulis  cdntinebantur.  Accedebat  ut,  cum 
saevire  ventus  coepisset  et  se  vento  dedissent,  et  tempestatem  fer- 
rent  facilius  et  in  vadis  consisterent  tutius  et  ab  aestu  relictae  nihil 
saxa  et  cautes  timerent ;  quarum  rerum  omnium  nostris  navibus 
casus  erant  extimescendi. 

r  14.  Compluribus  expugnatis  oppidis  Caesar,  ubi  intellexit  frustra 
tantum  laborem  sumi  neque  hostium  fugam  captis  oppidis  reprimi 

2  neque  iis  noceri  posse,  statuit  exspectandam  classem.  Quae  ubi 
coavenit  ac  primum  ab  hostibus  visa  est,  circiter  ccxx  naves  eorum 
paratissimae  atque  omni  genere  armorum  ornatissimae  profectae  ex 

3  portu  nostris  adversae  constiterunt ;  neque  satis  Bruto,  qui  classi 
praeerat,  vel  tribunis  militum  centurionibusque,  quibus  singulae 
naves  erant  attributae,  constabat  quid  agerent  aut  quam  rationem 

4  pugnae  insistereiit.  Rostro  enim  noceri  non  posse  cognoverant ; 
turribus  autem  excitatis  tamen  has  altitudo  puppium  ex  barbaris 
navibus  superabat,  ut  neque  ex  inferiore  loco  satis  commode  tela 

5  adigi  possent  et  missa  a  Gallis  gravius  acciderent.  Una  erat  magno 
usui  res  praeparata  ab  nostris,  fakes  praeacutag  insertae  adfixae- 

^  que  longuriis  non  absimili  forma  muralium  falcium.    His  cum  funes 


CAESAR.   GALLIC   WAR,    1K:)0K    HI  I31 

qui  antemnas  ad  tnalos  destinabant  comprehensi  adductique  erant, 
navigio  roniis  iiicitato  piaeriimpebantur.     Quibus  praecisis  antem-   : 
nae  necessario  concidebant,  ui,  cum  oinnis  Gallicis  navibus  spes  in 
velis  armamciitisque  cousisteiet,  his  ereptis  omiiis  usiis  uavium  uno 
tempore  eriperetur.     Reliquum   erat   certamen   positum   in   virtule,   8 
qua  nostri  milites  facile  superabant  atque  eo  magis,  quod  in  con- 
spectu  Caesaris  atque   omnis   exercitus  res  gerebatur,   ut   nullum 
paulo  fortius  factum  latere  posset;  omnes  enim  coUes  ac  loca  supe-  9 
riora,  unde  erat  propinquus  despectus  in  mare,  ab  exercitu  tene- 
bantur. 

15.  Deiectis,  ut  diximus,  antemnis,  cum  singulas  binae  ac  ternae  i 
naves  circumsisterent,  milites  summa  vi  transcendere  in  hostium 
naves  contendebant.     Quod  postquam  barbari  fieri  animadverterunt,  2 
expugnatis   compluribus    navibus,    cum   ei    rei    nullum    reperiretur 
auxilium,  fuga  salutem  petere  contendebant.     Ac  iam  conversis  in  3 
eam   partem   navibus  quo  ventus  ferebat,  tanta  subito  malacia  ac 
tranquillitas  exstitit  ut  se  ex  loco  movere  non  possent.    Quae  quidem  4 
res   ad    negotium    conficiendum    maximae  fuit  oportunitati :    nam 
singulas  nostri   consectati    expugnaverunt,  ut  perpaucae   ex  omni 
numero  noctis  interventu  ad  terram  pervenerint,  cum  ab  hora  fere 
quarta  usque  ad  solis  occasum  pugnaretur. 

16.  Quo  proelio  bellum  Venetorum  totiusque  orae  maritimae  con-  i 
factum   est.     Nam    cum    omnis    inventus,    omnes    etiam   gravioris  2 
aetatis,  in  quibus  aliquid  consili  aut  dignitatis  fuit,  eo  convenerant, 
tum  navium  quod  ubique  fuerat  unum  in  locum  coegerant ;  quibus  3 
amissis  reliqui  neque  quo  se  reciperent  neque  quem  ad  modum  op- 
pida  defenderent  habebant.     Itaque  se  suaque  omnia  Caesari  dedi- 
derunt.     In  quos  eo  gravius  Caesar  vindicandum   statuit,  quo  dili-  4 
gentius  in  reliquum  tempus  a  barbaris  ius  legatorum  conservaretur. 
Itaque  omni  senatu  necato  reliquos  sub  corona  vendidit. 

17.  Dum  haec  in  Venetis  geruntur,  Q.  Titurius  Sabinus  cum  iis   i 
copiis  quas  a  Caesare  acceperat  in  fines  Venellorum  pervenit.     His  2 
praeerat  Viridovix  ac  summam  imperi  tenebat  earum  omnium  civi- 
tatum    quae    defecerant,  ex    quibus   exercitum    hiagnasque    copias 
coegerat;  atque  his  j^aucis  diebus  Aulerci,  Eburovices,  Lexobiique  3 
senatu  suo  interfccto,  quod   auctores   belli   esse    nolebant,  portas 


132  LATIN    TEXT 

clauserunt  sequecum  Viridovice  coniunxerunt;  magnaque  praeterea 
multitudo  undique  ex  Gallia  perditorum  hominum  latronutnque  coii- 
venerat,  quos  spes  praedandi  studiumque  bellandi  ab  agri  culturaet 

5  cotidiano  labore  revocabat.  Sabinus  idoneo  omnibus  rebus  loco 
castris  sese  tenebat,  cum  Viridovix  contra  eum  duorum  milium 
spatio  consedisset  cotidieque  productis  copiis  pugnandi  potestatem 
faceret,  ut  iam  non  solum  hostibus  in  contemptionem  Sabinus  veni- 

6  ret,  sed  etiam  nostrorum  militum  vocibus  nonnihil  carperetur  ;  tan- 
tamque  opinionem   timoris  praebuit  ut  iam  ad  vallum  castrorum 

7  hostes  accedere  audercnt.  Id  ea  de  causa  faciebat  quod  cum  tanta 
multitudine  hostium,  praesertim  eo  absente  qui  summam  imperi 
teneret,  nisi  aequo  loco  aut  oportunitate  aliqua  data,  legato  dimi- 
candum  non  existimabat. 

1  18.  Hac  confirmata  opinione  timoris  idoneum  queiidam  hominem 
et  callidum  delegit,  Galium,  ex  iis  quos  auxili  causa  secum  habebat. 

2  Huic  magnis  praemiis  pollicitationibusque  persuadet  uti  ad  hostes 

3  transeat,  et  quid  fieri  velit  edocet.  Qui  ubi  properfuga  ad  eos  venit, 
timoreni  Romanorum  proponit ;  quibus  angustiis  ipse  Caesar  a  Ve- 

4  netis  prematur  docet;  neque  longius  abesse  quin  proxima  nocte 
Sabinus  clam  ex  castris  exercitum  educat  et  ad  Caesaretn  auxili 

5  ferendi  causa  proficiscatur.  Quod  ubi  auditum  est,  conclaniant 
omnes  occasionem  negoti  bene  gerendi  amittendam  non  esse,  ad 

6  castra  iri  oportere.  Multae  res  ad  hoc  consilium  Gallos  hortaban- 
tur:  superiorum  dierum  Sabini  cunctalio,  perfugae  confirmatio,  iuo- 
pia  cibariorum,  cui  rei  parum  diligenter  ab  iis  erat  provisum,  spes 
Venetici  belli,  et  quod  fere  libenter  homines  id  quod  volunt  credunt. 

7  His  rebus  adducti  non  prius  Viridovicem  reliquosque  duces  ex  con- 
cilio  dimittunt,  quam  ab  his  sit  concessum  arma  uti  capiant  et  ad 
castra  contendant.  Qua  re  concessa  laeti  ut  explorata  v'ctoria, 
sarmentis  virgultisque  collectis  quibus  fossas  Romanorum  com- 
pleant,  ad  castra  pergunt. 

1  19.  Locus  erat  castrorum  editus  et  paulatim  ab  imo  acclivis  cir- 
citer  pas^us  mille.  Hue  magno  cursu  contenderunt,  ut  quam  mini- 
mum spati  ad  se  colligendos  armandosque  Romanis  daretur,  exani- 

2  matique  pervenerunt.  Sabinus  suos  hortatus  cupientibus  signuni 
dat.      Impeditis  hostibus  propter  ea  quae  ferebant  onera,  subuo 


CAESAK,  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK    III  1 33 

duabus  portis  eruptionem  fieri  iubet.     Factum  est  oportunitate  loci,   3 
hostium  inscientia  ac  defatigatione,  virtute  militum  et  superiorum 
pugnarum  exercitatione,  ut  ne  unum  quidem   nostrorum  impetutn 
ferrent  ac  statim  terga  verterent.     Quos  impeditos  integris  viribus  4 
nulites  nostri  consecuti  ningnum  numerum  eorum  occiderunt;   re- 
liquos  equites  consectati  paucos,  qui  ex  fuga  evaserant,  reliquerunt. 
Sic  uno  tempore  et  de  navali  pugna  Sabinus  et  de  Sabini  victoria  5 
Caesar  est  certior   factus ;    civitatesque  omnes   se  statim   Titurio 
dediderunt.     Nam    ut    ad    bella   suscipienda   Gallorum    alacer   ac  6 
promptus  est  animus,  sic  mollis  ac  minime  resistens  ad  calamitates 
perferendas  mens  eorum  est. 

20.  Eodem  fere  tempore  P.  Crassus  cum  in  Aquitaniam  pervenis-  i 
set,  quae  pars,  ut  ante  dictum  est,  et  regionum  latitudine  et  multi- 
tudine  hominum  ex  tertia  parte  Galliae  est  aestimanda,  cum  intel- 
legeret  in  iis  locis  sibi  bellum  gerendum  ubi  paucis  ante  annis  L. 
Valerius  Praeconinus  legatus  exercitu  pulso  interfectus  esset,  atque 
unde  L.  Mallius  proconsul  impedimentis  amissis   profugisset,  non 
mediocrem   sibi   diligentiam   adhibendam    intellegebat.     Itaque  re  2 
frumentaria  provisa,  auxiliis  equitatuque  comparato,  multis  prae- 
terea  viris  fortibus  Tolosa,  Carcasone,  Narbone,  quae  sunt  civitates 
Galliae  provinciae  finitimae  his  regionibus,  nominatim  evocatis,  in 
Sotiatium  fines  exercitum  introduxit.   Cuius  adventu  cognito  Sotiates  3 
magnis  copiis  coactis  equitatuque,  quo  plurimum  valebant,  in  itinere 
agmen  nostrum  adorti  primum  equestre  proelium  commiserunt ;  de-  4 
inde  equitatu  suo  pulso  atque  insequentibus  nostris,  subito  pede- 
stres  copias,  quas  in  convalle  in  insidiis  conlocaverant,  ostenderunt. 
Hi  nostros  disiectos  adorti  proelium  renovarunt. 

21.  Pugnatum  est  diu  atque  acriter,  cum  Sotiates  superioribus   i 
victoriis  freti  in  sua  virtute  totius  Aquitaniae  salutem  positam  puta- 
rent ;  nostri  autem  quid  sine  imperatore  et  sine  reliquis  legionibus 
adulescentulo  duce  efficere  possent  perspici  cuperent ;  tandem  con- 
fecti  vulneribus  hostes  terga  vertere.     Quorum  magno  numero  in-  2 
terfecto  Crassus  ex  itinere  oppidum  Sotiatium  oppugnare  coepit. 
Quibus  fortiter  resistentibus  vineas  turresque  egit.     llli,  alias  erup-  3 
tione  temptata,  alias  cuniculis  ad  aggerem  vineasque  actis,  cuius  rei 
sunt  longe  peritissimi  Aquitani,  propterea  quod  multis  locis  apud 


134  LATIN   TEXT 

eos  aerariiie  secturaeque  sunt,  ubi  diligentia  nostrorum  nihil  his 
rebus  profici  posse  intellexerunt,  legates  ad  Crassum  mittunt,  seque 
in  deditionem  ut  recipiat  petunt.  Qua  re  impetrata,  arma  tradere 
iussi,  faciunt. 

1  22.  Atque  in  ea  re  omnium  nostrorum  intentis  animis,  alia  ex 
parte  oppidi  Adiatunnus,  qui  summam  imperi  tenebat,  cum  dc  de- 

2  votis,  quos  illi'  soldurios  appellant, — quorum  haec  est  condicio  uti 
omnibus  in  vita  commodis  una  cum  iis  fruantur  quorum  se  ami- 
citiae  dediderint;   si  quid  his  per  vim  accidat,  aut  eundem  casum 

3  una  ferant  aut  sibi  mortem  consciscant ;  neque  adhuc  hominum 
memoria  repertus  est  quisquam  qui,  eo  interfecto  cuius  se  amicitiae 

4  devovisset,  mortem  recusaret,— cum  his  Adiatunnus  eruptionem 
facere  conatus,  clamore  ab  ea  parte  munitionis  sublato,  cum  ad 
arma  milites  concurrissent  vehementerque  ibi  pugnatum  esset,  re- 
pulsus  in  oppidum  tamen  uti  eadem  deditionis  condicione  uteretur 
a  Crasso  impetravit. 

1  23.  Armis  obsidibusque  acceptis  Crassus  in   fines  Vocatium  et 

2  Tarusatium  profectus  est.  Tum  vero  barbari  commoti,  quod  op- 
pidum et  natura  loci  et  manu  munitum  paucis  diebus  quibus  eo 
ventum  erat  expugnatum  cognoverant,  legates  quoqueversus  dimit- 
tere,  coniurare,    obsides  inter   se   dare,  copias  parare   coeperunt. 

3  Mittuntur  etiam  ad  eas  civitates  legati  quae  sunt  citerioris  Hispaniae 

4  finitimae  Aquitaniae  ;  inde  auxilia  ducesque  arcessuntur.  Quorum 
adventu  magna  cum  auctoritate  et  magna  cum  hominum  multitudine 

5  bellum  gerere  conantur.  Duces  vero  ii  deliguntur  qui  una  cum  Q. 
Sertorio  omnes  annos  fuerant  summamque  scientiam  rei  militaris 

6  habere  existimabantur.    Hi  consuetudine  populi  Romani  loca  capere, 

7  castra  munire,  commeatibus  nostros  intercludere  instituunt.  Quod 
ubi  Crassus  animadvertit, — suas  copias  propter  exiguitatem  non 
facile  diduci,  hostem  et  vagari  et  vias  obsidere  et  castris  satis  prae- 
sidi  relinquere,  ob  eam  causam  minus  commode  frumentum  com- 
meatumque  sibi  supportari,  in  dies  hostium  numerum  augeri, — non 

8  cunctandum  existimavit  quin  pugna  decertaret.  Hac  re  ad  con- 
silium delata,  ubi  omnes  idem  sentire  intellexit,  posterum  diem 
pugnae  constituit. 

I       24.  Prima  luce  productis  omnibus  copiis,  duplici  acie  instituta, 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK    III  135 

auxiliis  in  inediam  aciem  coniectis,  quid  hostes  cuiisili  capeicnl  ix 
spectabat.     llli,  etsi  propter  mullitudiiiem  at  veterem  belli  gloriam   2 
paucitatemque  nostrorum  se  tuto  dimicaturos  existimabant,  tamen 
tutius  esse  arbitrabantur  obsessis  viis,   commeatu  interclnso,  sine 
ullo  vulnere  victoria  potiri;  et,  si  propter  inopiam  rei  frumentariae  3 
Romani  sese  recipere  coepissent,  impeditos  in  agmine  et  sub  sarcinis 
iam  firmiore  animo  adoriri  cogitabant.     Hoc  consilio  probato,  ab  du-  4 
cibus  productis  Romanorum  copiis,  sese  castris  tenebant.     Hac  re  5 
perspectaCrassus,cum  sua  cunctatione  atque  opinione  timoris  hostes 
nostros  milites  alacriores  ad  pugnandum  efifecissent,  atque  omnium 
voces  audirentur  exspectari  diutius  non  oportere  quin  ad  castra  iretur, 
cohortatus  suos  omnibus  cupientibus  ad  hostium  castra  contendit. 

25.  Ibi  cum  alii  fossas  complerent,  alii  multis  telis  coniectis  de-  i 
fensores  vallo  munitionibusque  depellerent,  auxiliaresque,  quibus  ad 
pugnam  non  multum  Crassus  confidebat,  lapidibus  telisque  sub- 
ministrandis  et  ad  aggerem  caespitibus  comportandis  speciem  atque 
opinionem  pugnantium  praeberent ;  cum  item  ab  hostibus  constanter 
ac  non  timide  pugnaretur  telaque  ex  loco  superiore  missa  non  fru- 
stra  acciderent,  equites  circumitis  hostium  castris  Crasso  renuntia-  2 
verunt  non  eadem  esse  diligentia  ab  decumana  porta  castra  munita 
facilemque  aditum  habere. 

26.  Crassus  equitum  praefectos  cohortatus  ut   magnis  praemiis  i 
poUicitationibusque  suos  excitarent,  quid  fieri  vellet  ostendit.     llli,  2 
ut  erat  imperatum,   eductis  iis  cohortibus  quae  praesidio  castris 
relictae  intritae  ab  labore  erant  et  longiore  itinere  circumductis,  ne 
ex  hostium  castris  conspici  possent,  omnium  oculis  mentibusque  ad 
pugnam  intentis,  celeriter  ad  eas  quas  diximus  munitiones  pervene- 
runt,  atque  his  prorutis  prius  in  hostium  castris  constiterunt  quam  -^ 
plane  ab  his  videri  aut  quid  rei  gereretur  cognosci  posset.     Tum  4 
vero  clamore  ab  ea  parte  audito  nostri  redintegratis  viribus,  quod 
plerumque  in  spe  victoriae  accidere  consuevit,  acrius   impugnare 
coeperunt.     Hostes  undique  circumventi,  desperatis  omnibus  rebus,  5 
se  per  munitiones  deicere  et  fuga  salutem   petere  contenderunt. 
Quos  equitatus  apertissimis  campis  consectatus,  ex  milium  l  numero,  6 
quae  ex  Aquitania  Cantabrisque  convenisse  constabat,  vix  quarta 
parte  relicta,  multa  nocte  se  in  castra  recepit. 


136  LATIN   TEXT 

1  27.  Hac  audita  pugna  maxima  pars  Aquitaniae  sese  Crasso  dedi- 
dit  obsidesque  ultro  misit ;  quo  in  numero  fuerunt  Tarbelli,  Biger- 
riones,  Ptianii,  Vocates,  Tarusates,  Elusates,  Gates,  Ausci,  Garumni, 

2  Sibuzates,  Cocosates ;  paucae  ultimae  nationes  anni  tempore  con- 
fisae,  quod  hiems  suberat,  hoc  facere  neglexerunt. 

1  28.  Eodem  fere  tempore  Caesar,  etsi  prope  exacta  iam  aestas 
erat,  tamen  quod  omni  Gallia  pacata  Morini  Menapiique  supererant 
qui  in  armis  essent  neque  ad  eum  umquam  legates  de  pace  misis- 
sent,  arbitratus  id  bellum  celeriter  confici  posse,  eo  exercitum  duxit; 
qui  longe  alia  ratione   ac  reliqui   Galli  bellum  gerere  coeperunt. 

2  Nam  quod  intellegebant  maximas  nationes  quae  proelio  contendis- 
sent  pulsas   superatasque  esse,   continentesque    silvas  ac  paludes 

3  habebant,  eo  se  suaque  omnia  contulerunt.  Ad  quarum  initium 
silvarum  cum  Caesar  pervenisset  castraque  munire  instituisset, 
neque  hostis  interim  visus  esset,  dispersis  in  opere  nostris  subito  ex 
omnibus  partibus  silvae  evolaverunt  et  in  nostros  impetum  fecerunt. 

4  Nostri  celeriter  arma  ceperunt  eosque  in  silvas  reppulerunt,  et  com- 
pluribus  interfectis  longius  impeditioribus  locis  secuti  paucos  ex 
suis  deperdiderunt. 

1  29.  Reliquis  deinceps  diebus  Caesar  silvas  caedere  instituit  et,  ne 
quis  inermibus  imprudentibusque  militibus  ab  latere  impetus  fieri 
posset,  omnem  earn  materiam  quae  erat  caesa  conversam  ad  hostem 

2  conlocabat  et  pro  vallo  ad  utrumque  latus  exstruebat.  Incredibili 
celeritate  magno  spatio  paucis  diebus  confecto,  cum  iam  pecus 
atque  extrema  impedimenta  ab  nostris  tenerentur,  ipsi  densiores 
silvas  peterent,  eius  modi  sunt  tempestates  consecutae  uti  opus 
necessario  intermitteretur   et   continuatione   imbrium    diutius   sub 

3  pellibus  milites  contineri  non  possent.  Itaque  vastatis  omnibus 
eorum  agris,  vicis  aedificiisque  incensis,  Caesar  exercitum  reduxit  et 
in  Aulercis  Lexobiisque,  reliquis  item  in  civitatibus  quae  proxime 
bellum  fecerant,  in  hibernis  conlocavit. 


CAESAR.  GALLIC  WAR.  BOOK  IV  l^y 

Caesar,  Gallic  War 

BOOK   IV 

1.  Ea  quae  secuta  est  hieme,  qui  fuit  annus   Cn.  Pompeio,  M.   i 
Crasso  consulibus,  Usipetes  Germani  et  item  Tencteri  magna  cum 
multitudine  hominum  flumen  Rhenum  transierunt  non  longe  a  mari, 
quo  Rhenus  influit.     Causa  transeundi  fuit  quod  ab  Suebis  com-  2 
plures  annos  exagitati  bello  premebantur  et  agri  cultura  prohibe- 
bantur.     Sueborum    gens    est    longe    maxima    et    bellicosissima  3 
Germanorum   omnium.     Hi  c   pagos  habere  dicuntur,  ex  quibus  4 
quotannis  singula  milia  armatorum  bellandi  causa  suis  ex  finibus 
educunt.     Reliqui,  qui  domi  remanserunt,  se  atque  illos  alunt;  hi  5 
rursus  invicem  anno  post  in  armis  sunt,  illi  domi  remanent.     Sic  6 
neque  agri  cultura  nee  ratio  atque  usus  belli  intermittitur.     Sed  7 
privati  ac  separati  agri  apud  eos  nihil  est,  neque  longius  anno  re- 
manere  uno  in  loco  colendi  causa  licet.     Neque  multum  frumento,  8 
sed  maximam  partem  lacte  atque  pecore  vivunt,  multumque  sunt  in 
venationibus ;  quae  res  et  cibi  genere  et  cotidiana  exercitatione  et  9 
libertate  vitae,  cum  a  pueris  nullo  officio  aut  disciplina  adsuefacti 
nihil  omnino  contra  voluntatem  faciant,  et  vires  alit  et  immani  cor- 
porum  magnitudine  homines  efficit.     Atque  in  earn  se  consuetudi- 10 
nem  adduxerunt  ut  locis  frigidissimis  neque  vestitus  praeter  pelles 
haberent  quicquam,  quarum  propter  exiguitatem  magna  est  corporis 
pars  aperta,  et  lavarentur  in  fluminibus. 

2.  Mercatoribus  est  aditus  magis  eo  ut  quae  bello  ceperint  quibus  1 
vendant  habeant,  quam  quo  ullam  rem  ad  se  importari  desiderent. 
Quin  etiam  iumentis,  quibus  maxime  Galli  delectantur  quaeque  im-  2 
penso  parant  pretio,  Germani  importatis  non  utuntur,  sed  quae  sunt 
apud  eos  nata,  parva  atque  deformia,  haec  cotidiana  exercitatione 
summi  ut  sint  laborisefficiunt.     Equestribus  proeliis  saepe  ex  equis  3 
desiliunt  ac  pedibus  proeliantur,  equosque  eodem  remanere  vestigio 
adsuefecerunt,  ad  quos  se  celeriter,  cum  usus  est,  recipiunt;  neque  4 
eorum  moribus  turpius  quicquam  aut  inertius  habetur  quam  ephip- 
piis   uti.     Itaque   ad    quemvis    numerum    ephippiatorum   equitum  5 
quamvis  pauci  adire  audent.     Vinum  ad  se  omnino  importari  non  6 


138'  LATIN   TEXT 

patiuntur,  quod  ea  re  ad  laborem  ferendutn  remollescere  homines 
atque  effeminari  arbitrantur. 

1  3.  Publice  maxiinam  putant  esse  laudem  quam  latissime  ab  suis 
finibus  vacare  agros  :  hac  re  significari  magnum  nnmerum  civitatum 

2  suam  vim  suslinere  non  posse.     Itaque  una  ex  parte  ab  Suebis  cir- 

3  citer  milia  passum  c  agri  vacare  dicuntur.  Ad  alteram  partem  suc- 
cedunt  Ubii,  quorum  fuit  civitas  ampla  atque  florens,  ut  est  captus 
Germanorum,  Hi  paulo,  quamquam  sunt  eiusdem  generis,  sutit 
ceteris  humaniores,  propterea  quod  Rheiium  attingunt,  muliumque 
ad  eos  mercatores  ventitant,  et  ipsi  propter  propinquitatem  Gallicis 

4  sunt  moribus  adsuefacti.  Hos  cum  Suebi  multis  saepe  bellis  ex- 
perti  propter  amplitudinem  gravitatemque  civitatis  finibus  expellere 
non  potuissent,  tamen  vectigales  sibi  fecerunt  ac  multo  humiliores 
infirmioresque  redegerunt. 

1  4.  In  eadem  causa  fuerunt  Usipetes  et  Tencteri,  quos  supra  dixi- 
mus,  qui  complures  annos  Sueborum  vim  sustinuerunt ;  ad  extre- 
mum  tamen  agris  expulsi  et  multis  locis  Germaniae  triennium  vagali 

2  ad  Rhenum  pervenerunt.     Quas  regiones  Menapii  incolebant  et  ad 

3  utramque  ripam  fluminis  agros,  aedificia,  vicosque  habebant;  sed 
tantae  multitudinis  adventu  perterriti  ex  iis  aedificiis  quae  trans 
flumen  habuerant  demigraverunt  et  cis  Rhenum  dispositis  praesidiis 

4  Germanos  transire  prohibebant.  Illi  omnia  experti,  cum  neque  vi 
contendere  propter  inopiam  navium   neque  clam   transire  propter 

5  custodias  Menapiorum  possent,  revert!  se  in  suas  sedes  regionesque 
simulaverunt  et  tridui  viam  progress!  rursus  reverterunt,  atque  omni 
hoc  itinere    una    nocte   equitatu   confecto   inscios   inopinantesque 

6  Menapios  oppresserunt;  qui  de  Germanorum  discessu  per  explora- 
tores  certiores  facti  sine  metu  trans  Rhenum   in  suos  vicos  remi- 

7  graverant.  His  interfectis  navibusque  eorum  occupatis,  priusquam 
ea  pars  Menapiorum  quae  citra  Rhenum  erat  certior  fieret,  Humen 
transierunt  atque  omnibus  eorum  aedificiis  occupatis  reliquam  par- 
tem hiemis  se  eorum  copiis  aluerunt. 

I  5.  His  de  rebus  Caesar  certior  factus  et  infirmitatem  Gallorum 
veritus,  quod  sunt  in  consiliis  capiendis  mobiles  et  novis  plerumque 

■J  rebus  student,  nihil  his  committenduin  existimavit.  Est  enim  hoc 
Gallicae   consuetudinis    uti    et   viatores   etiam   invitos   consistere 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK    IV  1 39 

cogant,  et  quid  quisque  eorum  de  quaque  re  audierit  aut  cognoveril 
quaerant;  et  mercatores  in  oppidis  vulgus  circumsistat,  quibusque 
ex  regionibus  veniant  quasque  ibi  res  cognoverint  pronuntiare  cogat. 
His  rumoribus  atque  auditionibus  permoti  de  summis  saepe  rebus  3 
consilia  ineunt,  quorum  eos  in  vestigio  paenitere  necesse  est,  cum 
incertis  rumoribus  serviant  et  plerique  ad  voluntatem  eorum  ficta 
respondeant. 

6.  Qua  consuetudine  cognita  Caesar,  ne  graviori  bello  occurreret,   i 
maturius  quam  consueverat  ad  exercitum  proficiscitur.      Eo   cum  2 
venisset,  ea  quae  fore  suspicatus  erat  facta  cognovit :  missas  lega-  3 
tiones  ab  nonnuUis  civitatibus  ad  Germanos  invitatosque  eos  uti 
ab    Rheno    discederent,  omniaque    quae    postulassent  ab  se  fore 
parata.     Qua  spe  adducti  Geniiani   latius  iam   vagabantur   et  in  4 
fines   Eburonum  et  .Condrusorum,  qui   sunt  Treverorum  clientes, 
pervenerant.     Principibus  Galliae  evocatis  Caesar  ea  quae  cogno-   5 
verat    dissiinulanda   sibi    existimavit,  eorumque    animis    permulsis 
et  confirmatis  equitatuque  imperato  bellum  cum  Germanis  gerere 
constituit. 

7.  Re  frumentaria  comparata   equitibusque   delectis,  iter  in  ea   i 
loca  facere  coepit  quibus  in  locis  esse  Germanos  audiebat.     A  qui-  2 
bus  cum  paucorum  dierum   iter  abesset,   legati  ab   his  venerunt, 
quorum  haec  fuit  oratio  :  Germanos  neque  priores  populo  Romano  3 
bellum  inferre  neque  tamen  recusare,  si  lacessantur,  quin  armis  con- 
tendant,  quod   Germanorum   consuetudo  sit  a  maioribus  tradita, 
quicumque  bellum  inferant,  resistere  neque  deprecari.     Haec  tamen  4 
dicere:  venisse  se  invites,  eiectos  domo ;  si  suam  gratiam  Romani 
velint,  posse  iis  utiles  esse  amicos ;  vel   sibi   agros  attribuant  vel 
patiantur  eos  tenere  quos  armis  possederint;  sese  unis  Suebis  con-  5 
cedere,  quibus  ne  di  quidem  immortales  pares  esse  possint;  reliquum 
quidem  in  terris  esse  neminem  quem  non  superare  possint. 

8.  Ad  haec  quae  visum  est  Caesar  respondit  ;    sed  exitus  fuit   i 
orationis :  Sibi  nullam  cum  his  amicitiam  esse  posse  si  in  Gallia 
remanerent;  neque  verum  esse  qui  suos  fines  tueri  non  potuerint  2 
alienos  occupare,  neque  ullos  in  Gallia  vacare  agros  qui  dari  tantae 
praesertim  multitudini  sine  iniuria  possint;  sed  licere,  si  velint,  in  3 
Ubiorum  finibus  considero,  quoium  sint  legati   apud  se  et  de  Sue- 


I40  LATIN    TEXT 

borum  iniuriis  querantur  et  ab  se  auxilium  petant :  hoc  se  Ubiis  im- 
peraturum. 

1  g.  Legati  haec  se  ad  suos  relaturos  dixerunt  et  re  deliberata  post 
diem  tertium  ad  Caesarem  reversuros;  interea  ne  propius  se  castra 

2  inoveret  petierunt.     Ne   id   quidem  Caesar  ab  se  impetrari  posse 

3  dixit.  Cognoverat  enim  magnam  partem  equitatus  ab  iis  aliquot 
diebus  ante  praedandi  frumentandique  causa  ad  Ambivaritos  trans 
Mosam  missam  ;  hos  exspectari  equites  atque  eius  rei  causa  moram 
interponi  arbitrabatur. 

1  ID.  Mosa  profluit  ex  monte  Vosego,  qui  est  in  finibus  Lingonum, 

2  et  parte  quadam  ex  Rheno  recepta  quae  appellatur  Vacalus,  insulam 
efficit  Batavorum,  neque   longius  ab  eo  milibus  passuum  Lxxx  in 

3  Oceanum  influit.  Rhenus  autem  oritur  ex  Lepontiis,  qui  Alpes  in- 
colunt,  et  longo  spatio  per  fines  Nantuatium,  Helvetiorum,  Sequano- 

4  rum,  Mediomatricorum,  Tribocorum,  Treverorum  citatus  fertur,  et 
ubi  Oceano  adpropinquat,  in  plures  diffluit  partes  multis  ingenti- 
busque  insulis  effectis,    quarum  pars   magna  a   feris   barbarisque 

5  nationibus  incolitur,  ex  quibus  sunt  qui  piscibus  atque  ovis  avium 
vivere  existimantur,  multisque  capitibus  in  Oceanum  influit. 

1  11.  Caesar  cum  ab  hoste  non  amplius  passuum  xii  milibus  abes- 
set,  ut  erat  constitutum,  ad  eum  legati  revertuntur ;  qui  in  itinere 

2  congressi  magnopere  ne  longius  progrederetur  orabant.  Cum  id 
non  impetrassent,  petebant  uti  ad  eos  equites  qui  agmen  antecessis- 
sent  praemitteret,  eosque  pugna  prohiberet,  sibique  ut  potestatem 

3  faceret  in  Ubios  legatos  mittendi ;  quorum  si  principes  ac  senatus 
sibi  iureiurando  fidem  fecisset,  ea  condicione  quae  a  Caesare  ferre 
tur  se  usuros  ostendebant :  ad  has  res  conficiendas  sibi  tridui  spa- 

4  tium  daret.  Haec  omnia  Caesar  eodem  illo  pertinere  arbitrabatur, 
ut  tridui  mora  interposita  equites  eorum  qui  abessent  reverterentur ; 
tamen  sese  non  longius  milibus  passuum  iv  aquationis  causa  pro- 

5  cessurum  eo  die  dixit :  hue  postero  die  quam  frequentissimi  con- 

0  venirent,  ut  de  eorum  postulatis  cognosceret.  Interim  ad  praefectos 
qui  cum  omni  equitatu  antecesserant  mittit  qui  nuntiarent  ne  hostes 
proelio  lacesserent ;  et,  si  ipsi  lacesserentur,  sustinerent  quoad  ipse 
cum  exercitu  propius  accessisset. 

1  12.  At  hostes  ubi  primum  nostros  equues  conspexerunt,  quorum 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK   IV  I4I 

eratv  milium  numeius,  cum  ipsi  non  amplius  dccc  equites  haberent, 
quod  ii  qui  frumentandi  causa  erant  trans  Mosam  profecti  nondum 
redierant,  nihil  timentibus  nostris,  quod  legati  eorum  paulo  ante  a 
Caesare  discesserant  atque  is  dies  indutiis  erat  ab  his  petitus,  im- 
petu  facto  celeriter  nostros  perturbaverunt ;  rursus  iis  resistentibus,  2 
consuetudine  sua  ad  pedes  desiluerunt,  subfossisque  equis  compluri- 
busque  nostris  deiectis,  reliquos  in  fugam  coniecerunt  atque  ita 
perterritos  egerunt  ut  non  prius  fuga  desisterent  quam  in  conspec- 
tum  agminis  nostri  venissent.     In   eo  proelio  ex  equitibus  nostris  3 
interficiuntur  Lxxiv,  in  his  vir  fortissimus,  Piso  Aquitanus,  amplis-  4 
simo  genere  natus,  cuius  avus  in   civitate  sua  regnum  obtinuerat, 
amicus  ab  senatu  nostro  appellatus.     Hie  cum  fratri  intercluso  ab  5 
hostibus  auxilium  ferret,  ilium  ex  periculo  eripuit;  ipse  equo  vul- 
nerato  delectus,  quoad  potuit  fortissime  restitit ;  cum  circumventus  6 
multis  vulneribus  acceptis  cecidisset,  atque  id  frater,  qui  iam  proelio 
excesserat,  procul  animadvertisset,  incitato  equo  se  hostibus  obtulit 
atque  interfectus  est. 

13.  Hoc  facto  proelio  Caesar  neque  iam  sibi  legates  audiendos  i 
neque  condiciones  accipiendas  arbitrabatur  ab  iis  qui  per  dolum 
atque  insidias  petita  pace  ultro  bellum  intulissent;  exspectare  vero,  2 
dum  hostium  copiae  augerentur  equitatusque  reverteretur,  summae 
dementiae  esse  iudicabat ,  et  cognita  Gallorum  infirmitate,  quantum  3 
iam  apud  eos  hostes  uno  proelio  auctoritatis  essent  consecuti  sen- 
tiebat ;  quibus  ad  consilia  capienda  nihil  spati  dandum  existimabat. 
His  constitutis  rebus  et  consilio  cum  legatis  et  quaestore  communi-  4 
cato,  ne  quem  diem  pugnae  praetermitteret,  oportunissima  res  ac- 
cidit,  quod  postridie  eius  diei  mane  eadem  et  perfidia  et  simulatione 
usi  Germani   frequentes,  omnibus  principibus  maioribusque    natu 
adhibitis,  ad  eum  in  castra  venerunt ;  simul,  ut  dicebatur,  sui  pur-  5 
gandi  causa,  quod  contra  atque  esset  dictum  et  ipsi  petissent  proe- 
lium  pridie  commisissent,  simul  ut,  si  quid  possent,   de  indutiis 
fallendo  impetrarent,     Quos  sibi  Caesar  oblatos  gavisus  illos  reti-  * 
neri  iussit;  ipse  omnes  copias  castris  eduxit  equitatumque,  quod 
recenti  proelio  perterritum  esse  existimabat,  agmen  subsequi  iussit, 

14.  Acie  tripiici  instituta  et  celeriter  viii  milium  itinere  confecto,  i 
prius  ad  hostium  castra  pervenit  quam  quid  ageretur  Gennani  sen- 


142  LATIN   TEXT 

2  tire  possent.  Qui  omnibus  rebus  subito  perterriti,  et  celeritate  ad- 
ventus  nostri  et  discessu  suorum,  neque  consili  habendi  neque 
arma  capiendi  spatio  dato  perturbantur,  copiasne  adversus  hosteni 
educere  an  castra   defendere   an  fuga  salutem   petere  praestaret. 

3  Quorum  timor  cum  fremitu  et  concursu  significaretur,  milites  nostri 

4  pristini  diei  perfidia  incitati  in  castra  inruperunt.  Quo  loco  qui 
celeriter  arma  capere  potuerunt  paulisper  nostris  restiterunt  atque 

5  inter  carros  impedimentaque  proelium  commiserunt ;  at  reliqua 
multitudo  puerorum  mulierumque  (nam  cum  omnibus  suis  domo 
excesserant  Rhenumque  transierant)  passim  fugere  coepit ;  ad  quos 
consectandos  Caesar  equitatum  misit. 

1  15.  Germani  post  tergum  clamore  audito  cum  suos  interfici  vide- 
rent,  armis  abiectis  signisque  militaribus  relictis  se  ex  castris  eiece- 

2  runt,  et  cum  ad  confluentem  Mosae  et  Rheni  pervenissent,  reliqua 
fuga  desperata,  magno  numero  interfecto,  reliqui  se  in  flumen  prae- 
cipitaverunt  atque  ibi  timore,  lassitudine,  vi  fluminis  oppressi  perie- 

3  runt.  Nostri  ad  unum  omnes  incolumes,  perpaucis  vulneratis,  ex 
tanti  belli  timore,  cum   hostium  Humerus  capitum  ccccxxx  milium 

4  fuisset,  se  in  castra  receperunt.     Caesar  iis  quos  in  castris  retinuerat 

5  discedendi  potestatem  fecit.  Illi  supplicia  cruciatusque  Gallorum 
veriti,  quorum  agros  vexaverant,  remanere  se  apud  eum  velle  dixe- 
runt.     His  Caesar  libertatem  concessit. 

1  16.  Germanico  bello  confecto  multis  de  causis  Caesar  statuit  sibi 
Rhenum  esse  transeundum ;  quarum  ilia  fuit  iustissima,  quod,  cum 
videret  Germanos  tam  facile  impelli  ut  in  Galliam  venirent,  suis 
quoque    rebus    eos  timere    voluit,   cum  intellegerent  et    posse  et 

2  audere  populi  Romani  exercitum  Rhenum  transire.  Accessit  etiam 
quod  ilia  pars  equitatus  Usipetum  et  Tencterorum  quam  supra  com- 
memoravi  praedandi  frumentandique  causa  Mosam  transisse  neque 
proelio  interfuisse   post  fugam  suorum  se   trans  Rhenum  in  fines 

3  Sugambrorum  receperat  seque  cum  iis  coniunxerat.  Ad  quos  cum 
Caesar  nuntios  misisset  qui  postularent  eos  qui  sibi  Galliaeque  bel- 

4  lum  intulissent  sibi  dederent,  responderunt :  Populi  Romani  impe- 
rium  Rhenum  finire :  si  se  invito  Germanos  in  Galliam  transire  non 
aequuni  existimaret,  cur  sui    quicquam  esse   imperi  aut  potestatis 

5  trans  Rhenum  postularet?     Ubii  autem,  qui  uni  ex  Transrhenanis 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK   IV  143 

ad  Caesarem  legates  miserant,  amicitiam  fecerant,  obsides  dede- 
rant,  magnopere  orabant  ut  sibi  auxilium  ferret,  quod  graviter  ab 
Suebis  premerentur ;  vel,  si  id  facere  occupationibus  rei  publicae  6 
prohiberetur,  exercitum  modo  Rhenum  transportaret:   id  sibi   ad 
auxilium  spemque  reliqui  temporis  satis  futurum.     Tantum  esse  7 
nomen  atque  opinionem  eius  exercitus  Ariovisto  pulso  et  hoc  novis- 
simo  proelio  facto  etiam  ad    ultimas    Germanorum    nationes,   uti 
opinione  et  amicitia  populi   Romani   tuti   esse    possint.     Navium  8 
magnam  copiam  ad  transportandum  exercitum  pollicebantur. 

17.  Caesar  liis  de  causis  quas  commemoravi  Rhenum   transire  i 
decreverat ;  sed  navibus  transire  neque  satis  tutum  esse  arbitraba- 
tur,  neque  suae  neque    populi    Romani  dignitatis  esse  statuebat. 
Itaque  etsi  summa  difficultas  faciendi  pontis  proponebatur  propter  2 
latitudinem,   rapiditatem,    altitudinemque    fluminis,  tamen   id   sibi 
contendendum  aut  aliter  non  traducendum  exercitum  existimabat. 
Rationem  pontis  banc  instituit.     Tigna  bina  sesquipedalia  paulum  3 
ab  imo  praeacuta,  dimensa  ad  altitudinem  fiuminis,  intervallo  pedum 
duorum  inter  se  iungebat.     Haec  cum  machinationibus  immissa  in  4 
fiumen  defixerat  festucisque  adegerat, — non  sublicae  modo  derecte 
ad  perpendiculum,  sed  prone  ac  fastigate,  ut  secundum   naturam 
fluminis  procumberent, — his  item  contraria  duo  ad  eundem  modum  5 
iuncta  intervallo  pedum  quadragenum  ab  inferiore  parte  contra  vim 
atque  impetum  fluminis  conversa  statuebat.     Haec  utraque  insuper  6 
bipedalibus  trabibus  immissis,  quantum  eorum  tignorum  iunctura 
distabat,  binis  utrimque  fibulis  ab  extrema  parte  distinebantur ;  qui- 
bus  disclusis  atque  in  contrariam  partem  revinctis,  tanta  erat  operis  7 
firmitudo  atque  ea  rerum  natura  ut,  quo  maior  vis  aquae  se  incitavis- 
set,  hoc  artius  inligata  tenerentur.     Haec  derecta  materia  iniecta  s 
contexebantur  ac  longuriis  cratibusque  consternebantur ;  ac  nihilo  9 
setius  sublicae  et  ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  oblique  agebantur, 
quae  pro  ariete  subiectae  et  cum  omni  opere  coniunctae  vim  fluminis 
exciperent,  et  aliae  item  supra  pontem  mediocri  spatio,  ut,  si  arborum  lu 
trunci  sive  naves  deiciendi  operis  causa  assent  a  barbaris  missae,  his 
defensoribus  earuin  rerum  vis  minueretur,  neu  ponti  nocerent. 

18.  Diebus  decern  quibus  materia  coepta  erat  comportari  omni   i 
opere  effecto  exercitus  traducitur.      Caesar  ad  utrainquc  partem  2 


144  LATIN  TEXT, 

3  pontis  firmo  praesidio  relicto  in  fines  Sugambrorum  contendit.  In- 
terim a  compluribus  civitatibus  ad  eum  legati  veniunt ;  quibus 
pacem  atque  amicitiam  petentibus  liberaliter  respondet  obsidesque 

4  ad  se  adduci  iubet.  At  Sugambri  ex  eo  tempore  quo  pons  institui 
coeptus  est  fuga  comparata,  hortantibus  lis  quos  ex  Tencteris  atque 
Usipetibus  apnd  se  habebant,  finibus  suis  excesserant  suaque  omnia 
exportaverant  seque  in  solitudinem  ac  silvas  abdiderant. 

1  ig.  Caesar  paucos  dies  in  eorum  finibus  moratus,  omnibus  vicis 
aedificiisque  incensis  frumentisque  succisis,  se  in  fines  Ubiorum 
recepit,  atque  iis  auxilium  suum  pollicitus  si  ab  Suebis  premereniur, 

2  haec  ab  iis  cognovit :  Suebos,  posteaquam  per  exploratores  pontem 
fieri  comperissent,  more  suo  concilio  habito  nuntios  in  omnes  partes 
dimisisse,  uti  de  oppidis  demigrarent,  liberos,  uxores,  suaque  omnia 
in  silvis  deponerent,  atque  omnes  qui  arma  ferre  possent  unum  in 

3  locum  convenirent :  hunc  esse  delectum  medium  fere  regionum 
earum  quas  Suebi  obtinerent ;  hie  Romanorum  adventum  exspectare 

4  atque' ibi  decertare  constituisse.  Quod  ubi  Caesar  comperit,  omni- 
bus rebus  iis  confectis  quarum  rerum  causa  traducere  exercitum 
constituerat,  ut  Germanis  metum  iniceret,  ut  Sugambros  ulcisceretur, 
ut  Ubios  obsidione  liberaret,  diebus  omnino  xviii  trans  Rhenum 
consumptis,  satis  et  ad  laudem  et  ad  utilitatem  profectum  arbitratus 
se  in  Galliam  recepit  pontemque  rescidit. 

1  20.  Exigua  parte  aestatis  reliqua  Caesar,  etsi  in  his  locis,  quod 
omnis  Gallia  ad  septentriones  vergit,  maturae  sunt  hieraes,  tamen 
in  Britanniam  proficisci  contendit,  quod  omnibus  fere  Gallicis  bellis 

2  hostibus  nostris  inde  subministrata  auxilia  intellegebat  et,  si  tempus 
anni  ad  bellum  gerendum  deficeret,  tamen  magno  sibi  usui  fore 
arbitrabatur,  si  modo  insulam  adisset,  genus  hominum  perspexisset, 
loca,  portus,  aditus  cognovisset;  quae  omnia  fere  Gallis  erant  in- 

3  cognita.  Neque  enim  temere  praeter  mercatores  illo  adit  quisquam, 
neque  iis  ipsis  quicquam  praeter  oram  maritimam  atque  eas  regiones 

4  quae  sunt  contra  Gallias  notum  est.  Itaque  evocatis  ad  se  undique 
mercatoribus,  neque  quanta  esset  insulae  magnitudo,  neque  quae 
aut  qiiantae  nationes  incolerent,  neque  qiiem  usum  belli  haberent 
aut  quibus  institutis  uterentur,  neque  qui  essent  ad  maiorem  navium 
multitudinem  idonei  portus  reperire  poterat. 


CAESAR.  GALLIC    WAR,    BOOK    IV  .      145 

21.  Ad  haec  cognoscenda,  priusquam  periculum  faceret,  idoneum  i 
esse   arbitratus   C.  Volusenum   cum   navi  longa  praemittit.     Huic  2 
mandat  ut  exploratis  omnibus  rebus  ad  se  quam  primum  revertatur. 
Ipse  cum  omnibus  copiis  in  Morinos  proficiscitur,  quod  inde  erat  3 
brevissimus  in  Britanniam  traiectus.     Hue  naves  undique  ex  finiti-  4 
mis   regionibus,  et  quam   superiore  aestate  ad   Veneticum  bellum 
effecerat  classem,  iubet  convenire.     Interim  consilio  eius  cognito  et  5 
per  mercatores  perlato  ad   Britannos,  a  compluribus  eius  insulae 
civitatibus   ad  eum   legati  veniunt  qui   polliceantur  obsides    dare 
atque  imperio  populi  Romani  obtemperare.    Quibus  auditis  liberali-  6 
ter  pollicitus  hortatusque  ut  in  ea  sententia  pernianerent,  eos  domum 
remittit,  et  cum  iis  una  Commium,  quem  ipse  Atrebatibus  superatis  7 
regem  ibi  constituerat,  cuius  et  virtutem  et  consilium  probabat  et 
quem    sibi   fidelem   esse   arbitrabatur   cuiusque    auctoritas   in  his 
regionibus   magni   habebatur,   mittit.      Huic  imperat   quas    possit  8 
adeat  civitates,   horteturque    ut  populi   Romani  fidem   sequantur, 
seque  celeriter  eo  venturuni  nuntiet.     Volusenus  perspectis  regioni-  9 
bus  omnibus  quantum  ei  facultatis  dari  potuit,  qui  ex  navi  egredi  ac 
se  barbaris  committere  non  auderet,  quinto  die  ad  Caesarem  rever- 
titur  quaeque  ibi  perspexisset  renuntiat. 

22.  Dum  in  his  locis  Caesar  navium  parandarum  causa  moratur,  i 
ex  magna  parte  Morinorum  ad  eum  legati  venerunt  qui  se  de  supe- 
rioris  temporis  consilio  excusarent,  quod  homines  barbari  et  nostrae 
consuetudinis  imperiti  bellum  populo  Romano  fecissent,  seque  ea 
quae  imperasset  facturos  pollicerentur.     Hoc  sibi  Caesar  satis  opor-  2 
tune  accidisse  arbitratus,  quod  neque  post  tergum  hostem  relinquere 
volebat  neque  belli  gerendi  propter  anni  tempus  facultatem  habebat 
neque  has  tantularum  rerum  occupationes   sibi   Britanniae   antepo- 
nendas  iudicabat,  magnum  iis  numerum  obsidum  imperat.     Quibus 
adductis  eos  in   fidem  recepit.      Navibus  circiter  lxxx  onerariis  3 
coactis  constratisque,  quot  satis  esse  ad  duas  transportandas  legio- 
nes  existimabat,  quidquid    praeterea  navium  longarum  habebat,  id 
quaestori,   legatis,  praefectisque    distribuit.      Hue  accedebant  xviii  4 
onerariae  naves,  quae  ex  eo  loco  a  miiibus  passuum  viii  vento  tene- 
bantur  quo  minus  in  eundem  portum  venire  possent;  has  equitibus 
distribuit.     Reliquum  exercitum  Q.  Titurio  S.ibino  et  L.  Auruncu-  5 

10 


146     .  LATIN   TEXT 

leio  Cottae  legatis  in   Menapios  atque  in  eos  pagos  Morinorum  a 
6  quibus  ad  eum  legati  non  venerant  ducendum  dedit ;  P.  Sulpicium 
Rufum  legatum   cum   eo   praesidio    quod   satis    esse  arbitrabatur 
portum  tenere  iussit. 

1  23.  His  constitutis  rebus  nactus  idoneam  ad  navigandum  tempes- 
tatem  tertia  fere  vigilia  naves  solvit,  equitesque  in  ulteriorem  portum 

2  progredi  et  naves  conscendere  et  se  sequi  iussit.  A  quibus  cum  paulo 
tardius  esset  administratum,  ipse  hora  diei  circiter  quarta  cum  primis 
navibus  Britanniam  attigit  atque  ibi  in  omnibus  collibus  expositas 

3  hostium  copias  armatas  conspexit.  Cuius  loci  haec  erat  natura  at- 
que ita  montibus  angustis  mare  continebatur  uti  ex  locis  superiori- 

4  bus  in  litus  telum  adigi  posset.  Hunc  ad  egrediendurn  nequaquam 
idoneum  locum  arbitratus,  dum  reliquae  naves  eo  convenirent  ad 

5  horam  nonam  in  ancoris  exspectavit.  Interim  legatis  tribunisque 
militum  convocatis,  et  quae  ex  Voluseno  cognovisset  et  quae  fieri 
vellet  ostendit,  monuitque,  ut  rei  militaris  ratio  maximeque  ut  niari- 
timae  res  postularent  (ut  quae  celerem  atque  instabilem  motiim 
haberent),  ad  nutum  et  ad   tempus  omnes  res  ab  iis  administra- 

6  rentur.  His  dimissis  et  ventum  et  aestum  uno  tempore  nactus 
secundum,  dato  signo  et  sublatis  ancoris  circiter  milia  passuum  vii 
ab  eo  loco  progressus,  aperto  ac  piano  litore  naves  constituit. 

1  24.  At  barbari  consilio  Romanorum  cognito,  praemisso  equitatu 
et  essedariis,  quo  plerumque  genere  in  proeliis  uti  consuerunt,  reli- 

2  quis  copiis  subsecuti  nostros  navibus  egredi  prohibebant.  Erat  ob 
has  causas  summa  difficultas  quod  naves  propter  magnitudinem  nisi 
in  alto  constitui  non  poterant,  militibus  autem,  ignotis  locis,  impe- 
ditis  manibus.  magno  et  gravi  onere  armorum  oppressis,  simul  et  de 
navibus  desiliendum  et  in  fluctibus  consistendum  et  cum  hostibus 

3  erat  pugnandum  ;  cum  illi  aut  ex  arido  aut  paulum  in  aquam  pro- 
gressi  omnibus    membris  expeditis,  notissimis   locis,  audacter  tela 

4  coicerent  et  equos  insuefactos  incitarent.  Quibus  rebus  nostri  per- 
territi  atque  huius  omnino  generis  pugnae  imperiti  non  eadem  ala- 
critate  ac  studio  quo  in  pedestribus  uti  proeliis  consuerant  ute- 
bantur. 

I  25.  Qu(.d  ubi  Caesar  animadvertit,  naves  longas,  quarum  et 
species    erat    barbaris    inusitatior    et    motus    ad    usuin    expeditior, 


CAESAR,  GALLIC   WAR,  1?0()K    IV  147 

paulum  removeri  ab  onerariis  navibus  et  remis  incitari  et  ad  latus 
apertum   hostium  constitui,   atque   inde  fundis,  sagittis,  tormentis 
hostes  propelli  ac  submoveri  iussit ;  quae  res  magno  usui  nostris 
fuit.      N;iin  et  naviiim  figura  et  remorum   motu  et  inusitato  genere  2 
tormentorum  pernioti  barbari  constiterunt  ac  paulum  modo  pedem 
lettulerunt.      At  nostris  militibus  cunctantibus  maxime  propter  alti-  3 
tudinem  maris,  qui  decimae  legionis  aquilam  ferebat  oblestatus  deos 
ut  ea  res  legioni  feliciter  eveniret,  "  Desilite,"  inquit,  "  commilitones, 
nisi  vultis  aquilam  hosiibus  prodere :  ego  certe  meum  rei  publicae 
ntque  imperatori  officium  praestitero."    Hoc  cum  voce  magna  dixis-  4 
set,  se  ex  navi  proiecit  atque  in  hostes  aquilam  ferre  coepit.     Turn  5 
nostri  cohortati  inter  se  ne  tantum  dedecus  admitteretur,  universi 
ex  navi  desiluerunt.     Hos  item  ex  proximis  navibus  cum  conspexis-  6 
sent,  subsecuti  hostibus  adpropinquarunt. 

26.  Pugnatum  est  ab  utrisque  acriter.     Nosiri  tamen,  quod  neque   i 
ordines  servare  neque  firmiter  insistere  neque  signa  subsequi  pote- 
rant,  atque  alius  alia  ex  navi  quibuscumque  signis  occurrerat  se 
adgregabat,  magnopere  perturbabantur ;  hostes  vero  notis  omnibus  2 
vadis,  ubi  ex  litore  aliquos  singulares  ex  navi  egredientes  conspexe- 
rant,  incitatis  equis  impeditos  adoriebantur,  plures  paucos  clrcum-  3 
sistebant,  alii  ab  latere  aperto  in  universos  tela  coiciebant.     Quod  4 
cum  animadvertisset  Caesar,  scaphas  longarum  navium,  item  specu- 
latoria  navigia  militibus  compleri  iussit,  et  quos  laborantes  conspexe- 
rat  his  subsidia  submittebat.      Nostri  simul  in  arido  constiterunt,  5 
suis  omnibus  consecutis  in   hostes  impecum  fecerunt  atque  eos  in 
fugam  dederunt;  neque  longius  prosequi   potuerunt,  quod  equites 
cursum  tenere  atque  insulam  capere  non  potuerant.     Hoc  unum  ad 
pristinam  fortunam  Caesari  defuit. 

27.  Hostes  proelio  superati,  simul  atque  se  ex  fuga  receperunt,    1 
statim  ad   Caesarem    legatos   de   pace   miserunt ;  obsides  daturos 
qiiieque   imperasset  sese  facturos  polliciti    sunt.      Una   cum    his  2 
legatis   Commius   Atrebas    venit,   quern    supra    demonstraveram   a 
Caesare  in   Britanniam   praemissum.     Hunc  illi  e  navi  fgressum,   3 
cum  ad  eos  oratoris  modo  Caesaris  mandata  deferret,  comprehen- 
dciant  atque  in  vincula  coniecerant ;  tum  proelio  facto  remiserunt. 
In  petenda  pace  eius   rei  culpam  in  multitudincni  contulerunt,  et  4 


148  LATIN   TEXT 

5  propter  imprudentiam  ut  ignosceretur  petiverunt.  Caesar  questus 
quod,  cum  ultro  in  continentem  legatis  missis  pacem  ab  se  petissent, 
bellum  sine  causa  intulissent,  ignoscere  imprudentiae  dixit  obsides- 

6  que  imperavit;  quorum  illi  partem  statim  dederunt,  partem  ex 
longinquioribus  locis   arcessitam  paucis  post  diebus  sese  daturos 

7  dixerunt.  Interea  suos  remigrare  in  agros  iusserunt,  principesque 
undique  convenire  et  se  civitatesque  suas  Caesari  commendare 
coeperunt. 

1  28.  His  rebus  pace  confirmata,  post  diem  quartum  quam  est  in 
Britanniam  ventum,  naves  xviii  de  quibus  supra  demonstratum  est, 
quae  equites  sustulerant,  ex  superiore  portu  leni*  vento  solverunt. 

2  Quae  cum  adpropinquarent  Britanniae  et  ex  castris  viderentur,  tanta 
tempestas  subito  coorta  est  ut  nulla  earum  cursum  tenere  posset, 
sed  aliae  eodem  unde  erant  profectae  referrentur,  aliae  ad  inferiorem 
partem   insulae,  quae  est  propius  solis  occasum,    magno  suo  cum 

3  periculo  deicerentur;  quae  tamen  ancoris  iactis  cum  fluctibus  com- 
plerentur,  necessario  adversa  nocte  in  altum  provectae  continentem 
petierunt. 

1  29.  Eadem  nocte  accidit  ut  esset  luna  plena,  qui  dies  maritimos 
aestus  maximos  in  Oceano  efficere  consuevit,  nostrisque  id  erat  in- 

2  cognitum.  Ita  uno  tempore  et  longas  naves,  quibus  Caesar  exercitum 
transportandum  curaverat  quasque  in  aridum  subduxerat,  aestus 
complebat,  et  onerarias,  quae  ad  ancoras  erant  deligatae,  tempestas 
adflictabat,  neque  ulla  nostris  facultas  aut  administrandi  aut  auxili- 

3  andi  dabatur.  Compluribus  navibus  fractis  reliquae  cum  essent — 
funibus,  ancoris,  reliquisque  armamentis  amissis — ad  navigandum 
iiiutiles,   magna,   id  quod   necesse  erat   accidere,   totius  exercitus 

4  perturbatio  facta  est.  Neque  enim  naves  erant  aliae  quibus  repor- 
tari  possent;  et  omnia  deerant  quae  ad  reficiendas  eas  usui  sunt; 
et,  quod  omnibus  constabat  hiemari  in  Gallia  oportere,  frumentum 
his  in  locis  in  hiemem  provisum  non  erat. 

I  30.  Quibus  rebus  cognitis  principes  Britanniae,  qui  post  proelium 
factum  ad  ea  quae  iusserat  Caesar  facienda  convenerant,  inter  se 
conlocuti,  cum  et  equites  et  naves  et  frumentum  Romanis  deesse 
intellegerent,  et  paucitatem  militum  ex  castrorum  exiguitate  cogno- 
scerent, — quae  hoc  erant  etiam  angustiora  quod  sine  impedimentis 


CAESAR.  GALLIC   WAR,  BOOK   IV  149 

Caesar   legiones   transportaverat, — optimum   factu    esse   duxerunt,  2 
rebellione  facta,  frumento  commeatuque  nostros  prohibere  et  rem  in 
hiemem  producere,  quod  his  superatis  aut  reditu  interclusis  tiemi- 
nem  postea  belli  inferendi  causa  in  Britanniam  transiturum  confide- 
bant.     Itaque  rursus  coniuratione  facta  paulatim  ex  castris  disce-  3 
dere  et  suos  clam  ex  agris  deducere  coeperunt. 

31.  At  Caesar  etsi  nondum  eorum  consilia  cognoverat,  tamen  et  i 
ex  eventu  navium  suarum  et  ex  eo  quod  obsides  dare  intermiserant, 
fore  id  quod  accidit  suspicabatur.     Itaque  ad  omnes  casus  subsidia  2 
comparabat.     Nam  et  frumentum  ex  agris  cotidie  in  castra  confere- 
bat,  et  quae  gravissime  adflictae  erant  naves,  earum  materia  atque 
aere  ad  reliquas  reficiendas  utebatur,  et  quae  ad  eas  res  erant  usui 
ex  continenti  comparari  iubebat.     Itaque  cum  summo  studio  a  mili-  3 
tibus  administraretur,  xii  navibus  amissis,  reliquis  ut  navigari  satis 
commode  posset  effecit. 

32.  Dum  ea  geruntur,  legione  ex  consuetudine  una  frumentatum   i 
missa,  quae  appellabatur  septima,  neque  ulla  ad  id  tempus  belli  su- 
spicione  interposita,  cum  pars   hominum  in  agris  remaneret,  pars 
etiam  in  castra  ventitaret,  ii  qui  pro  portis  castrorum  in  statione 
erant  Caesari   nuntiaverunt  pulverem  maiorem   quam   consuetudo 
ferret  in  ea  parte  videri  quam  in  partem  legio  iter  fecisset.     Caesar  2 
id  quod  erat  suspicatus,  aliquid  novi  a  barbaris  initum  consili,  co- 
hortes  quae  in  stationibus  erant  secum  in  earn  partem  proficisci,  ex 
reliquis  duas  in  stationem  cohortes  succedere,  reliquas  armari  et 
confestim  sese  subsequi  iussit.     Cum  paulo  longius  a  castris  pro-  3 
cessisset,  suos  ab  hostibus  premi  atque  aegre  sustinere  et  conferta 
legione  ex  omnibus  partibus  tela  coici  animadvertit.     Nam  quod  4 
omni  ex  reliquis  partibus  demesso  frumento  pars  una  erat  reliqua, 
suspicati  hostes  hue  nostros  esse  ventures  noctu  in  silvis  delitue- 
rant ;   tum  disperses  depositis  armis  in  metendo  occupatos  subito  5 
adorti,  paucis  interfectis  reliquos  incertis  ordinibus  perturbaverant, 
simul  equitatu  atque  essedis  circumdederant. 

33.  Genus  hoc  est  ex  essedis  pugnae.     Primo  per  omnes  partes  i 
perequitant  et  tela  coiciunt  atque  ipso  terrore  equorum  et  strepitu 
rotarum  ordines  plerumque  perturbant ;  et  cum  se  inter  equitum 
turmas  insinuaverunt,  ex  essedis  desiliunt  et  pedibus  proeliantur. 


150  LATIN    TEXT 

2  Aurigae  interim  paulatim  ex  proelio  excedunt  alque  ita  currus  con- 
locant  ut,  si  illi  a  multitudine  hostium  premantur,  expeditum  ad 

3  suos  receptum  habeant.     Ita  mobilitatem  equitum,  stabilitatem  pe 
ditum  in  proeliis  praestant ;  ac  tantum  usu  cotidiano  et  exercitatione 
efficiunt  uti  in  declivi  ac  praecipiti  loco  incitatos  equos  sustinere  et 
brevi  moderari  ac  flectere,  et  per  temonem  percurrere  et  in  iugo  in- 
sistere  et  se  inde  in  currus  citissime  recipere  consuerint. 

1  34.  Quibus  rebus  perturbatis  nostris  [novitate  pugnae]  tempore 
oportunissimo  Caesar  auxilium  tulit;  namque  eius  adventu  hostes 

2  constiterunt,  nostri  se  ex  timore  receperunt.  Quo  facto  ad  laces- 
sendum  hostem  et  ad  committendum  proelium  alienum  esse  tempus 
arbitratus,  suo  se  loco  continuit  et  brevi  tempore  intermisso  in  ca- 

3  stra  legiones  reduxit.     Dum  haec  geruntur,  nostris  omnibus  occu- 

4  patis,  hostes  qui  erant  in  agris  reliqui  discesserunt.  Secutae  sunt 
continuos  complures  dies  tempestates,  quae  et  nostros  in  castris 

5  continerent  et  hostem  a  pugna  prohiberent.  Interim  barbari  nun, 
tios  in  omnes  partes  dimiserunt  paucitatemque  nostrorum  militum 
suis  praedicaverunt,  et  quanta  praedae  faciendae  atque  in  perpe- 
tuum  sui  liberandi  facultas  daretur,  si  Romanos  castris  expulissent, 

6  demonstraverunt.  His  rebus  celeriter  magna  multitudine  peditatus 
equitatusque  coacta  ad  castia  venerunt. 

1  35.  Caesar  etsi  idem  quod  superioribus  diebus  acciderat  fore 
videbat, — ut,  si  essent  hostes  pulsi,  celeritate  periculum  effugerent, 
— tamen  nactus  equites  circiter  xxx,  quos  Commius  Atrebas,  de 
quo  ante  dictum  est,  secum  transportaverat,   legiones  in  acie  pro 

2  castris  constituit.     Commisso   proelio  diutius    nostrorum    militum 

3  impetum  hostes  ferre  non  potuerunt  ac  terga  verterunt.  Quos 
tanto  spatio  secuti  quantum  cursu  et  viribus  efficere  potuerunt, 
complures  ex  lis  occiderunt,  deinde  omnibus  longe  lateque  aedificiis 
incensis  se  in  castra  receperunt. 

1  36.  Eodem  die  legati  ab  hostibus  missi  ad  Caesarem  de  pace 

2  venerunt.  His  Caesar  numerum  obsidum  quem  ante  imperaverat 
duplicavit,  eosque  in  continentem  adduci  iussit,  quod  propinqua  die 
aequinocti  infirmis  navibus  hiemi  navigationem  subiciendam  non 

3  existimabat.  Ipse  idoneain  tempestatem  nactus  paulo  post  mediani 
noctem  naves  solvit;  quae  omnes  incolumes  ad  continentem  per 


NEPOS,   ALCIBIADES  151 

venerunt;  sed  ex  iis  onerariae  duae  eosdem  quos  reliqui  portus  4 
capere  non  potuerunt  et  paulo  infra  delatae  sunt. 

37.  Quibus  ex  navibus  cum  assent  expositi  milites  circiter  ccc  i 
atque  in   castra  contenderent,  Morini,  quos  Caesar  in  Britanniam 
proficiscens  pacatos  reliquerat,  spe  praedae  adducti  primo  non  ita 
magno  suorum  numero  circumsteterunt  ac,  si  sese  interfici  nollent, 
arma  ponere  iusserunt.     Cum  illi  orbe  facto  sese  defenderent,  cele-  2 
riter  ad  clamorem  hominum  circiter  milia  vi  convenerunt.     Qua  re 
nuntiata   Caesar  omnem   ex   castris  equitatum  suis   auxilio   misit. 
Interim  nostri  milites  impetum  hostium  sustinuerunt  atque  amplius  3 
horis  quattuor  fortissime  pugnaverunt  et  paucis  vulneribus  acceptis 
complures  ex  his  occiderunt.     Postea  vero  quam  equitatus  noster  4 
in  conspectum  venit,  hostes  abiectis  armis  terga  verterunt  magnus- 
que  eorum  numerus  est  occisus. 

38.  Caesar  postero  die  T.  Labienum  legatum  cum  iis  legionibus  i 
quas  ex  Britannia  reduxerat  in   Morinos,  qui  rebellionem  fecerant, 
misit.     Qui  cum  propter  siccitates  paludum  quo  se  reciperent  non  2 
haberent  (quo  perfugio  superiore  anno  erant  usi),  omnes  fere  in 
potestatem  Labieni  venerunt.     At   P.  Titurius  et  L.  Cotta  legati,  3 
qui  in  Menapiorum  fines  legiones  duxerant,  omnibus  eorum  agris 
vastatis,  frumentis  succisis,  aedificiis  incensis,   quod    Menapii  se 
omnes  in  densissimas  silvas  abdiderant,  se  ad  Caesarem  receperunt. 
Caesar  in  Belgis   omnium   legionum  hiberna  constituit.     Eo  duae  4 
omnino  civitates  ex  Britannia  obsides  miserunt,  reliquae  neglexerunt. 
His  rebus  gestis  ex  litteris  Caesaris  dierum  xx  supplicatio  ab  se-  5 
natu  decreta  est. 


Nepos,  Alcibiades 

I.  Alcibiades,  Cliniae  filius,  Atheniensis,     In   hoc  natura  quid  i 
efficere  possit  videtur  experts.     Constat  enim  inter  omnes  qui  de 
eo  memoriae  prodiderunt,  nihil  illo  fuisse  excellentius  vel  in  vitiis 
vel    in    virtutibus.     Natus   in   amplissima  civitate  summo  genera,  2 
omnium  aetatis  suae   multo  formosissimus,  dives ;    ad  omnes  res 
aptus  consilique  plenus  (namque  imperator  fuit  summus  et  mari  et 


152  LATIN   TEXT 

terra) ;  disertus,  ut  in  primis  dicendo  valeret,  quod  tanta  erat  com- 

3  meiidatio  oris  atque  orationis  ut  nemo  ei  posset  resistere  ;  cum  tem- 
pus  posceret,  laboriosus,  patiens;  liberalis,  splendidus  non  minus  in 
vita  quam  victu;  affabilis,  blandus,  temporibus  callidissime  serviTsns: 

4  idem,  simul  ac  se  remiserat  neque  causa  suberat  quare  animi  labo- 
rem  perferret,  luxuriosus,  dissolutus,  libidinosus,  intemperans  repe- 
riebatur,  ut  omnes  admirarentur  in  uno  homine  tantam  esse  dissi- 
militudinem  tamque  diversam  naturam. 

I  2.  Educatus  est  in  domo  Pericli  (privignus  eiiim  eius  fuisse 
dicitur),  eruditus  a  Socrate.  Socerum  habuit  Hipponicum,  omnium 
Graeca  lingua  loquentium  ditissimum,  ut,  si  ipse  fingere  vellet,  neque 
plura  bona  eminisci  neque  maiora  posset  consequi  quam  vel  natura 
vel  fortuna  tribuerat. 

1  3.  Bello  Peloponnesio  huius  consilio  atque  auctoritate  Atheni- 
enses  bellum  Syracusanis  indixerunt.     Ad  quod  gerendum  ipse  dux 

2  delectus  est,  duo  praeterea  coUegae  dati,  Nicia  et  Lamachus.  Id 
cum  appararetur,  prius  quam  classis  exiret,  accidit  ut  una  nocte 
omnes  Hermae  qui  in  oppido  erant  Athenis  deicerentur  praeter 
unum,  qui  ante  ianuam  erat  Andocidi  (itaque  ille  postea  Mercurius 

3  Andocidi  vocitatus  est).  Hoc  cum  appareret  non  sine  magna  mul- 
torum  consensione  esse  factum,  quae  non  ad  privatam,  sed  ad  pu- 
blicam  rem  pertineret,  magnus  multitudini  timorest  iniectus  ne  qua 
repentina   vis   in    civitate    exsisteret    quae    libertatem    opprimeret 

4  populi.  Hoc  maxime  convenire  in  Alcibiadem  videbatur  quod  et 
potentior  et  maior  quam  privatus  existimabatur :  multos  enim  libe- 

5  ralitate  devinxerat,  plures  etiam  opera  forensi  suos  reddiderat.  Qua 
re  fiebat  ut  omnium  oculos,  quotienscumque  in  publicum  prodisset, 
ad  se  converteret  neque  ei  parquisquam  in  civitate  poneretur.  Ita- 
que non  solum  spem  in  eo  habebant  maximam,  sed  etiam  timorem, 

6  quod  et  obesse  plurimum  et  prodesse  poterat,  Aspergebatur  etiam 
infamia  quod  in  domo  sua  facere  mysteria  dicebatur  (quod  nefas 
erat  more  Atheniensium)  idque  non  ad  religionem,  sed  ad  coniura- 
tionem  pertinere  existimabatur. 

I  4.  Hoc  crimine  in  contione  ab  inimicis  compellabatur.  Sed  in- 
stabat  tempus  ad  bellum  proficiscendi.  Id  ille  intuens  neque 
ignorans  civium  suorum  consuetudinem  postulabat,  si  quid  de  se 


NEPOS,  ALCIBIADES  I  53 

agi  vellent,  potius  de  praesente  quaestio  haberetur  quam  absens 
invidiae  crimine  accusaretur.     Inimici  vero   eius  quiescendum   in  2 
praesenti,  quia  noceri  ei  non  posse  intellegebant,  et  illud  tempus 
exspectandum  decreverunt  quo  classis  exisset,  ut  absentem  aggre- 
dereiUur,  itaque  fecerunt.     Nam   postquam  in   Sicilian!  eum  per-  3 
venisse  crediderunt,  absentem  quod  sacra  violasset  reum  fecerunt. 
Qua  de  re  cum  ei  nuntius  a  magistratu  in  Siciliam  missus  esset,  ut 
domum  ad  causam  dicendam  rediret,  essetque  in  magna  spe  pro- 
vinciae  bene  administrandae,  non    parere  noluit   et   in    triremem 
quae  ad  eum  erat  deportandum  missa  ascendit.     Hac  Thurios  in  4 
Italiam   pervectus,  multa  secum   reputans  de  immoderata  civium 
suorum  licentia  crudelitateque  erga  nobiles,  utilissimum  ratus  im- 
pendentem  evitare  teinpestatem,  clam  se  ab  custodibus  subduxit  et 
inde  primum  Elidem,  dein  Thebas  venit.     Postquam  autem  se  ca-  5 
pitis  damnatum  bonis  publicatis  audivit,  et,  id  quod  numquam  antea 
usu  venerat,  Eumolpidas  sacerdotes  a  populo  coactos  ut  se  devove- 
rent,  eiusque  devotionis  quo  testatior  esset  memoria,  exemplum  in 
pila  lapidea  incisum  esse  positum  in  publico,  Lacedaemonem  demi- 
gravit.     Ibi,  ut  ipse  praedicare  consuerat,  non   adversus  patriam,  6 
sed  inimicos  suos  bellum  gessit,  qui  eidem  hostes  essent  civitati : 
nam  cum  intellegerent  se  plurimum  prodesse  posse  rei  publicae,  ex 
ea  eiecisse  plusque  irae  suae  quam  utilitati  communi  paruisse.     Ita-  7 
que  huius  consiiio  Lacedaemonii  cum  Perse  rege  amicitiam  fece- 
runt, dein  Deceleam  in  Attica  munierunt  praesidioque  ibi  perpetuo 
posito  in  obsidione  Athenas  tenuerunt.     Eiusdem  opera  loniam  a 
societate    averterunt  Atheniensium.     Quo   facto    multo  superiores 
bello  esse  coeperunt. 

5.  Neque  vero  his  rebus  tarn  amici  Alcibiadi  sunt  facti  quam  ti-  i 
inore  ab  eo  alienati.  Nam  cum  acerrimi  viri  praestanter"  prudentiam 
in  omnibus 'rebus  cognosceren*^  oertimuerunt  ne  caritate  patriae 
ductus  aliquando  ab  ipsis  descisceret  et  cum  suis  in  gratiam  lediret. 
Itaque  tempus  eius  interfi'iundi  quaerere  instituerunt.  Id  AIci-  2 
biades  diutius  celari  non  potuit:  erat  enim  ea  sagacitate  ut  decipi 
non  posset,  praesertim  cum  animum  attendisset  ad  cavendum.  Ita- 
que ad  Tissaphernem,  praefectum  regis  Darii,  se  contulit.  (^uius 
cum  in  iniimani  amicitiam  pervenisset,  et  Atheniensium  male  gestis  3 


154  LATIN    TEXT 

in  Sicilia  rebus  opes  senescere,  contra  Lacedaemoniorum  crescere 
videret,  initio  cum  Pisandro  praetore,  qui  apud  Samum  exercituni 
habebat,  per  internuntios  colloquitur  et  de  reditu  suo  facit  meii- 
tionem.    Is  erat  enim  eodeni  quo  Alcibiades  sensu,  populi  potential 

4  non  amicus  et  optimatium  fautor.  Ab  hoc  destitutus  primum  per 
Thrasybulum,  Lyci  filium,  ab  exercitu  recipitur  praetorque  fit  apud 
Samum,  post  suffragante  Theramene  populi  scito  restituitur  parique 
absens  imperio  praeficitur  simul  cum   Thrasybulo  et  Theramene. 

5  Horum  in  imperio  tanta  commutatio  rerum  facta  est  ut  Lacedae- 
monii,  qui  paulo  ante  victores  viguerant,  perterriti  pacem  peterent. 
Victi  enim  erant  quinque  proeliis  terrestribus,  tribus  navalibus,  in 
quibus  ducentas  naves  triremes  amiserant  quae  captae  in  hostium 

6  venerant  potestatem.  Alcibiades  simul  cum  collegis  receperat  lo- 
niam,  Hellespontum,  multas  praeterea  urbes  Graecas  quae  in  ora 
sitae  sunt  Thraeciae,  quarum  expugnarant  complures,  in  eis  Byzan- 
tium, neque  minus  multas  consilio  ad  amicitiam  adiunxerant  quod 

7  in  captos  dementia  foerant  usi.  Ita  praeda  onusti,  locupletato 
exercitu,  maximis  rebus  gestis  Athenas  venerunt. 

1  6.  His  cum  obviam  universa  civitas  in  Piraeum  descendisset, 
tanta  fuit  omnium  exspectatio  visendi  Alcibiadia  ut  ad  eius  trire- 

2  mem  vulgus  conflueret  proinde  ac  si  solus  advenisset.  Sic  enim 
populo  erat  persuasum  et  adversas  superiores  et  praesentes  se- 
cundas  res  accidisse  eius  opera.  Itaque  et  exercitum  in  Sicilia  amis- 
sum  et  Lacedaemoniorum  victorias  culpae  suae  tribuebant,  quod 
talem  virum  e  civitate  expulissent.  Neque  id  sine  causa  arbitrari 
videbantur.     Nam    postquam    exercitui    praeesse   coeperat,    neque 

3  terra  neque  mari  hostes  pares  esse  potuerant.  Hie  ut  e  navi  egres- 
sus  est,  quamquam  Theramenes  et  Thrasybulus  eisdem  rebus  prae- 
fuerant  simulque  venerant  in  Piraeum,  tamen  unum  omnes  ilium 
prosequebantur,  et,  id  quod  numquam  antea  usu  venerat  nisi  Olym- 
piae  victoribus,  coronis  laureis  taeniisque  vulgo  donabatur.  Ille 
lacrimans  talem  benivolentiam  civium  suorum  accipiebat,  remini- 

4  scens  pristini  temporis  acerbitatem.  Postquam  in  astu  venit,  con- 
tione  advocata  sic  verba  fecit  ut  nemo  tarn  ferus  fuerit  quin  eius 
casui  illacrimarit  inimicumque  iis  se  ostenderit  quorum  opera  patria 
pulsus  fuerat,  proinde  ac  si  alius  populus,  non  ille  ipse  qui  turn  fie- 


NEPOS,  ALCIBIADES  155 

bat,   euni  sacrilegi  damnasset.     Restituta  ergo  huic  sunt  publice   5 
bona,  eidemque  illi  Eumolpidae   sacerdotes  rursus  resacrare  sunt 
coacti  qui  eum  devoverant,  pilaeque  illae  in  quibus  devotio  fuerat 
scripta  in  mare  praecipitatae. 

7.  Haec  Alcibiadi  laetitia  non  nimis  fuit  diuturna.     Nam  cum  ei  i 
omnes  essent  honores   decreti    totaque  res  pubiica  domi  bellique 
tradita  ut  unius  arbitrio  gereretur,  et  ipse  postulasset  ut  duo  sibi 
coUegae  darentur,  Thrasybulus  et  Adimantus,   neque  id  negatum 
asset,  classe  in  Asiam  profectus  quod  apud  Cymen  minus  ex  sen- 
tentia  rem  gesserat,  in  invidiam  recidit:  nihil  enim  eum  non  efficere 
posse  ducebant.     Ex  quo  fiebat  ut  omnia  minus  prospere  gesta  2 
culpae  tribuerent,  cum  aut  eum  neglegenter  aut  malitiose  fecisse 
loquerentur,  sicut  tum  accidit:  nam  corruptum  a  rege  capere  Cymen 
noluisse  arguebant.     Itaque  huic  maxime  putamus  malo  fuisse  ni-  3 
miam  opinionem  ingeni  atque  virtutis:  timebatur  enim  non  minus 
quam  diligebatur,   ne    secunda  fortuna  magnisque   opibus    elatus 
tyrannidem  concupisceret.      Quibus   rebus   factum   est  ut  absenti 
magistratum  abrogarent  et  alium  in  eius  locum  substituerent.     Id  4 
ille  ut  audivit,  domum  reverti  noluit  et  se  Pactyen  contulit  ibique 
tria  castella  communiit,   Ornos,   Bizanthen,   Neontichos,   manuque 
collecta  primus  Graecae  civitatis  in  Thraeciam  introiit,  gloriosius 
existimans  barbarorum  praeda  locupletari  quam  Graiorum.    Qua  ex  5 
re  creverat  cum  fama  tum  opibus,  magnamque  amicitiam  sibi  cum 
quibusdam  regibus  Thraeciae  pepererat. 

8.  Neque  tamen  a  caritate  patriae  potuit  recedere.  Nam  cum  i 
apud  Aegos  flumen  Philocles,  praetor  Atheniensium,  classem  con- 
stituisset  suam  neque  longe  abesset  Lysander,  praetor  Lacedaemo- 
niorum,  qui  in  eo  erat  occupatus  ut  bellum  quam  diutissime  duceret, 
quod  ipsis  pecunia  a  rege  suppeditabatur,  contra  Atheniensibus 
«xhaustis  praeter  arma  et  naves  nihil  erat  super,  Alcibiades  ad  2 
exercitum  venit  Atheniensium  ibique  praesente  vulgo  agere  coepit: 

si  vellent,   se  coacturum    Lysandrum  dimicare  aut   pacem    petere 
[spopondit];  Lacedaemonios  eo  nolle  classe  con fligere  quod  pede- 
stribus  copiis  plus  quam  navibus  valerent;  sibi  autem  esse  facile  j 
Seuthem,  regem  Thraecum,  adducere  ut  eum  terra  depelleret :  quo 
facto  necessario  aut  classe  conflicturum  aut  bellum  composituruni. 


156  LATIN   TEXT 

4  Id  etsi  vere  dictum  Philocles  animadvertebat,  tamen  postulata  fa- 
cere  noluit,  quod  sentiebat  se  Alcibiade  recepto  nuUius  momenti 
apud  exercitum  futurum,  et,  si  quid  secundi  evenisset,  nullam  in  ea 
re  suam  partem  fore,  contra  ea,  si  quid  adversi  accidisset,  se  unum 

5  eius  delicti  futurum  reum.  Ab  hoc  discedens  Alcibiades,  "Quo- 
niam,"  inquit,  "victoriae  patriae  repugnas,  illud  moneo,  nc  iuxta 
hostem  castra  habeas  nautica:  periculum  est  enim  ne  immodestia 
militum  vestrorum  occasio  detur  Lysandro  vestri  opprimendi  exer- 

*6  citus."  Neque  ea  res  ilium  fefellit.  Nam  Lysander,  cum  per 
speculatores  comperisset  vulgum  Atheniensium  in  terrani  praedatuni 
exisse  navesque  paene  inanes  relictas,  tempus  rei  gerendae  non 
dimisit  eoque  impetu  bellum  totum  delevit. 

1  9.  At  Alcibiades,  victis  Atheniensibus  non  satis  tuta  eadem  loca 
sibi  arbitrans,  penitus  in  TJiraeciam  se  supra  Propontidem  abdidit, 

2  sperans  ibi  facillime  suam  fortunam  occuli  posse,  f  also.  Nam 
Thraeces,  postquam  eum  cum  magna  pecunia  venisse  senserunt,  in- 
sidias  fecerunt  eaque  quae   apportarat  abstulerunt,  ipsum   capere 

3  non  potuerunt.  llle  cernens  nullum  locum  sibi  tutum  in  Graecia 
propter  potentiam  Lacedaemoniorum  ad  Pharnabazum  in  Asiani 
transiit;  quem  quidem  adeo  sua  cepit  humanitate  ut  eum  nemo  in 
amicitia  antecederet.     Namque  ei  Grynium  dederat,  in  Phrygia  ca- 

4  strum,  ex  quo  quinquagena  talenta  vectigalis  capiebat.  Qua  fortuna 
Alcibiades  non  erat  contentus,  neque  Athenas  victas  Lacedaemoniis 
servire  poterat  pati.     Itaque  ad  patriam  liberandam  omni  ferebatur 

5  cogitatione.  Sed  videbat  id  sine  rege  Perse  non  posse  fieri,  ideoque 
eum  amicum  sibi  cupiebat  adiungi,  neque  dubitabat  facile  se  conse- 
cuturum  si  modo  eius  conveniundi  habuisset  potestatem.  Nam 
Cyrum  fratrem  ei  bellum  clam  parare  Lacedaemoniis  adiuvantibus 
sciebat:  id  si  aperuisset,  magnam  se  initurum  gratiam  videbat. 

!  10.  Hoc  cum  moliretur  peteretque  a  Pharnabazo  ut  ad  regem 
miiteretur,  eodem  tempore  Critias  ceterique  tyranni  Atheniensium 
certos  homines  ad  Lysandrum  in  Asia.n  miserant  qui  eum  certiorem 
facerent,  nisi  Alcibiadem  sustulisset,  nihil  earum  rerum  fore  ratum 
quas  ipse  Athenis  constituisset:  quare,  si  suas  res  gestas  manere  vel- 

2  let,  ilium  persequeretur.  His  Laco  rebus  commotus  statuit  accura- 
tius  sibi  agendum  cum  Pharnabazo.     Huic  ergo  renuntiat  quae  regi 


NEPOS,  ALCIBIADES  157 

cum  Lacedaemoniisconvenissent,  nisi  Alcibiadem  vivum  nut  mor- 
tuum  sibi  tradidisset.     Non  tulit  hoc  satrapes  et  violare  clementiam  3 
quam  regis  opes  minu!  maluit.     Itaque  misit  Susamithren  et  Bagae- 
um  ad  Alcibiadem  interficiendum  cum  ille  esset  in  Phrygia  iterque 
ad  regem  compararet.     Missi  clam  vicinitati  in  qua  turn  Alcibiades  4 
erat  dant  negotium  ut  eum  interficiant.     Illi  cum  ferro  aggredi  non 
auderent,  noctu  ligna  contulerunt  circa  casam  earn  in  qua  quiesce- 
bat,  eaque  succenderunt,  ut  incendio  conficerent  quern  manu  supe- 
rari  posse  diffidebant.     Ille  autem  ut  sonitu  flammae  est  excitatus,  5 
etsi  gladius  ei  erat  subductus,  familiaris  sui  subalare  telum  eripuit. 
Namque  erat  cum  eo  quidam  ex  Arcadia  hospes,  qui  numquam  dis- 
cedere  voluerat.      Hunc  sequi  se  iubet  et  id  quod  in   praesentia 
vestimentorum  fuit  arripit.      His  in  ignem  coniectis   flammae  vim 
transiit.    Quem  ut  barbari  incendium  effugisse  viderunt,  tells  eminus  6 
missis  interfecerunt  caputque  eius  ad  Pharnabazum  rettulerunt.    At 
mulier,  quae  cum  eo  vivere  consuerat,  muliebri  sua  veste  contectum 
aedifici  incendio  mortuum  cremavit  quod  ad  vivum  interimendum 
erat  comparatum.     Sic  Alcibiades  annos  circiter  quadraginta  natus 
diem  obiit  supremum. 

II.  Hunc  infamatum  a  plerisque  tres  gravissimi  historici  summis  i 
laudibus  extulerunt :  Thucydides,  qui  eiusdem  aetatis  fuit,  Theo- 
pompus,  post  aliquanto  natus,  et  Timaeus  :  qui  quidem  duo  male- 
dicentissimi  nescio  quo  modo   in  illo  uno  laudando  consentiunt. 
Namque  ea  quae  supra  scripsimus  de  eo  praedicarunl  atque  hoc  2 
amplius:  cum  Athenis,  splendidissima  civitate,  natus  esset,  omnes 
splendore  ac  dignitate  superasse  vitae ;  postquam   inde  expulsus  3 
Thebas  venerit,  adeo  studiis  eorum  inservisse  ut  nemo  eum  labore 
corporisque  viribus  posset  aequiperare  (omnes  enim  Boeoti  magis 
firmiiati   corporis  quam    ingeni  acumini  serviunt);    eundem   apud 
Lacedaemonios,  quorum  moribus  summa  virtus  in  patientia  pone-  4 
batur,  sic  duritiae  se  dedisse   ut  parsimonia   victus    atque  cultus 
omnes  Lacedaemonios  vinceret;  venisse  ad  Persas,  apud  quos  sum-  5 
ma  laus  esse*^  fortiter  venari,  luxuriose  vivere ;  horum  sic  imitatuni 
consuetudinem  ut  illi  ipsi  eum  in  his  maxime  admirarentur.     Quibus  6 
rebus  effccisse  ut,  apud  quoscumque  esset,  princeps  poneretur  liabe- 
rcturque  carissimus.     Sed  satis  de  hoc:  reliquos  ordamur. 


158  LATIN    TEXT 


Nepos,  Hannibal 

1  I.  Hannibal,  Hamilcaris  filius,  Karthaginiensis.  Si  verum  est. 
quod  nemo  dubitat,  ut  populus  Romanus  omnes  gentes  virtute  supe- 
rarit,  non  est  infitiandum  Hannibalem  tanto  praestitisse  ceteros  im 
peratores  prudentia  quanto  populus  Romanus  antecedat  fortitudine 

2  cunctas  nationes.  Nam  quotienscumque  cum  eo  congressus  est  in 
Italia,  semper  discessit  superior.  Quod  nisi  domi  civium  suorum 
invidi'a  debilitatus  esset,  Romanos  videtur  superare  potuisse.  Sed 
multorum  obtrectatio  devicit  unius  virtutem. 

3  Hie  autem  velut  hereditate  relictum  odium  paternum  erga  Ro- 
manos sic  conservavit  ut  prius  animam  quam  id  deposuerit,  qui 
quidem,  cum  patria  pulsus  esset  et  alienarum  opum  indigeret,  num- 
quam  destiterit  animo  bellare  cum  Romanis. 

1  2.  Nam  ut  omittam  Philippum,  quem  absens  hostem  reddidit  Ro- 
manis, omnium  iis  temporibus  potentissimus  rex  Antiochus  fuit. 
Hunc  tanta  cupiditate  incendit  bellandi  ut  usque  a  rubro  mari  arma 

2  conatus  sit  inferre  Italiae.  Ad  quem  cum  legati  venissent  Romani, 
qui  de  eius  voluntate  explorarent  darentque  operam  consiliis  clan- 
destinis  ut  Hannibalem  in  suspicionem  regi  adducerent,  tamquam 
ab  ipsis  corruptus  alia  atque  antea  sentiret,  neque  id  frustra  fecis- 
sent  idque   Hannibal   comperisset  seque  ab  interioribus  consiliis 

3  segregari  vidisset,  tempore  dato  adiit  ad  regem,  eique  cum  multa  de 
fide  sua  et  odio  in  Romanos  commemorasset,  hoc  adiunxit :  "  Pater 
mens,"  inquit,  "  Hamilcar  puerulo  me,  Aitpote  non  amplius  novem 
annos  nato,  in  Hispaniam  imperator  proficiscens  Karthagine  lovi 

4  Optimo  maximo  hostias  immolavit.  Quae  divina  res  dum  conficie- 
batur,  quaesivit  a  me  vellemne  secum  in  castra  proficisci.  Id  cum 
libenter  accepissem  atque  ab  eo  petere  coepissem  ne  dubitaret 
ducere,  tum  ille,  'Faciam,'  inquit,  'si  mihi  fidem  quam  postulo  de- 
deris.'  Simul  me  ad  aram  adduxit  apud  quam  sacrificare  insti- 
tuerat,  eamque  ceteris  remotis  tenentem  iurare  iussit  numquam  me 

5  in  amicitia  cum  Romanis  fore.  Id  ego  iusiurandum  patri  datum 
usque  ad  banc  aetatem  ita  conservavi  utnemini  dubium  esse  debeat 

6  quin   reliquo  tempore  eadem  mente  sim  futurus.     Quare  si  quid 


NEPOS,  HANNIBAL  159 

amice  de  Romanis  cogitabis,  non  imprudenter  feceris  si  me  celaris ; 
cum  quidem  bellum  parabis,  te  ipsum  frustraberis  si  non  me  in  eo 
principem  posueris." 

3.  Hac  igitur  qua  diximus  aetate  cum  patre  in  Hispaniam  pro-  i 
fectus   est ;    cuius  post  obitum,   Hasdrubale   imperatore   sufifecto, 
equitatui  omni   praefuit.     Hoc   quoque  interfecto   exercitus   sum- 
mam    imperi    ad  eum  detulit.     Id  Karthaginem   delatum   publice 
comprobatum  est.     Sic   Hannibal  minor  quinque  et  viginti   annis  2 
natus  imperator  factus  proximo  triennio  omnes  gentes  Hispaniae 
bello  subegit,  Saguntum,  foederatam  civitatem,  vi  expugnavit,  tres 
exercitus   maximos  comparavit.     Ex  his  unum  in  Africam   misit,  3 
alterum  cum   Hasdrubale  fratre  in   Hispania   reliquit,   tertium  in 
Italiam  secum  duxit.     Ut  saltum  Pyrenaeum  transiit,  quacumque 
iter  fecit,  cum  omnibus  incolis  confiixit;  neminem  nisi  victum  di- 
misit.     Ad   Alpes   posteaquam  venit,  qua    Italiam  ab  Gallia  se-  4 
iungunt,  quas  nemo  umquam  cum  exercitu  ante  eum  praeter  Hercu- 
lem  Graium  transierat  (quo  facto  is  hodie  saltus  Grains  appellatur), 
Alpicos  conantes  prohibere  transitu  concidit,  loca  patefecit,  itinera 
muniit,  effecit  ut  ea  elephantus  ornatus  ire  posset  qua  antea  unus 
homo  inermis  vix  poterat  repere.     Hac  copias  traduxit  in  Italiam- 
que  pervenit. 

4.  Conflixerat  apud  Rhodanum  cum  P.  Cornelio  Scipione  con-  i 
sule  eumque  pepulerat.     Cum   hoc  eodem  Clastidi  apud  Padum 
decernit  sauciumque  inde  ac  fugatum  dimittit.    Tertio  idem  Scipio  2 
cum  coUega  Ti,  Longo  apud  Trebiam  adversus  eum  venit.     Cum 
iis  manum  conseruit,  utrosque  profligavit.     Inde  per  Ligures  Ap- 
penninum  transiit,  petens  Etruriam.      Hoc  in   itinere   adeo  gravi  3 
morbo  afficitur  oculorum  ut  postea  numquam  dextro  aeque  bene 
usus  sit.      Qua  valetudine   cum    etiamnum  premeretur  lecticaque 
ferretur,  C.  Flaminium  consulem  apud  Trasumennum  cum  exercitu 
insidiii   circumventum   occidit,    neque    multo   post  C.  Centenium 
praetorem  cum  delecta  manu  saltus  occupantem.     Hinc  in  Apuliam  4 
pervenit.     Ibi  obviam  ei  venerunt  duo  consules,  C.  Terentius  et  L. 
Aemilius,     Utriusque  exercitus  uno  proelio  fugavit,   Paulum    con- 
sulem occidit  et  aliquot  praeterea  consulares,  in  eis  Cn.  Servihum 
Geminum,  qui  superiore  anno  fuerat  consul. 


l6o  LATIN   TEXT 

1  5.  Hac  pugna  pugnata  Roniain  profectus,  nullo  resistente,  in 
propinquis  inhi  moniibus  moratus  est.  Cum  aliquot  ibi  dies  castra 
habuisset  el  Capuam    reverteretur,   Q.  Fabius   Maximus,  dictator 

2  Romanus,  in  agro  Falerno  ei  se  obiecit.  Hie  clausus  locorum 
angustiis  noctu  sine  uUo  detrimento  exercitiis  se  expedivit  Fabioque, 
callidissimo  imperatorj,  dedit  verba.  Namque  obducta  nocte  sar- 
menta  in  cornibus  iuvenconim  deligata  incendit  eiusque  generis 
multitudinem  magnam  dispalatam  iminisit.  Quo  repentino  visu 
obiecto  tantum    terrorem    iniecit  exercitui  Romanorum   ut   egredi 

3  extra  vallum  nemo  sit  ausus.  Hanc  post  rem  gestam  non  ita  multis 
diebus  M.  Minucium  Rufum,  magistrum  equitum  pari  ac  dictatorem 
imperio,  dole  productum  in  proelium  fugavit.  Ti.  Sempronium 
Gracchum,  iterum  consulem,  in  Lucanis  absens  in  insidias  inductum 
sustulit.      M.    Claudiuni    Marcellum,   quinquiens    consulem,    apud 

4  Venusiam  pari  modo  interfecit.  '  Longum  est  omnia  enumerare 
proelia.  Quare  hoc  unum  satis  erit  dictum,  ex  quo  intellegi  possit 
quantus  ille  fuerit;  quamdiu  in  Italia  fuit,  nemo  ei  in  acie  restitit, 
nemo  adversus  eum  post  Cannensem  pugnam  in  campo  castra 
posuit. 

1  6.  Hinc  invictus  patriam  defensum  revocatus  bcllum  gessit  ad- 
versus P.  Scipionem,  filium  eius  Scipionis,  quem  ipse  primo  apud 
Rhodanum,   iterum    apud    Padum,   tertio    apud   Trebiam   fugarat. 

2  Cum  hoc  exhaustis  iam  patriae  facultatibus  cupivit  impraesen- 
tiarum    helium    componere,    quo    valentior   postea   congrederetur. 

3  Inde  colloquium  convenit,  condiciones  non  convenerunt.  Post  id 
factum  paucis  diebus  apud  Zamam  cum  eodem  conflixit ;  pulsus 
(incredibile  dictu)  biduo  et  duabus  noctibus  Hadrumetum  pervenit, 

4  quod  abest  ab  Zama  circiter  milia  passuum  trecenta.  In  hac  fuga 
Numidae,  qui  simul  cum  eo  ex  acie  excesserant,  insidiati  sunt  ei ; 
quos  non  solum  effugit,  sed  etiam  ipsos  oppressit.  Hadrumeti 
reliquos  e  fuga  collegit,  novis  dilectibus  paucis  diebus  multos  con- 
traxit. 

1  7.  Cum  in  apparando  acerrime  esset  occupatus,  Karthaginienses 
bellum  cum  Romanis  composuerunt.  Ille  nihilo  setius  exercitui 
postea  praefuit  resque  in  Africa  gessit  [itemque  Mago  frater  eius] 

2  usque  ad  P.  Sulpicium  C.  Aurelium  consules.     His  enim  magistra- 


NEPOS,  HANNIBAL    •  f6l 

tibus  legati   Karthaginienses   Romain  venerunt  qui  senatui  populo- 
que   Romano  gratias  agerent   quod   cum    iis  pacem  fecissent,   ob 
eamque  rem  corona  aurea  eos  doiiarent  simulque  peterent  ut  obsides 
eorum    Fregellis   essent   captivique  redderentur.      His   ex   senatus  3 
consulto  responsum  est :  munus  eorum  gratum  acceptumque  esse ; 
obsides,  quo  loco  rogarent,  futuros  ;  captivos  non  reiriissuros,  quod 
Hannibalem,   cuius  opera  susceptum  bellum    foret,   inimicissimum 
nomini  Romano,  etiamnum  cum  imperio  apud  exercitum  haberent 
itemque  fratrem   eius   Magonem.      Hoc  responso  Karthaginienses  4 
cognito    Hannibalem    domum    et    Magonem  revocarunt.      Hue  ut 
rediit,  rex  factus  est,  postquam  imperator  fuerat  anno  secundo  et 
vicesimo :    ut    enim    Romae    consules,    sic    Karthagine   quotannis 
annul  bini  reges  creabantur.     In  eo  magistratu  pari  diligentia  se  5 
Hannibal  praebuit  ac  fuerat  in   bello,     Namque   effecit  ex  novis 
vectigalibus  non  solum  ut  esset  pecunia  quae  Romanis  ex  foedere 
penderetur,    sed    etiam    superesset    quae    in    aerario    reponeretur. 
Delude   [anno    post   praeturam]    M.    Claudio  L,    Furio   consulibus  6 
Roma  legati  Karthaginem  venerunt.     Hos  Hannibal  ratus  sui  ex- 
poscendi    gratia    missos,    priusquam    iis    senatus   daretur,    navem 
ascendit  clam  atque    in  Syriam  ad  Antiochum  perfugit.     Hac   re  7 
palam  facta  Poeni  naves  duas  quae  eum  comprehenderent,  si  pos- 
sent  consequi,  miserunt,  bona  eius  publicarunt,  domum  a  funda- 
mentis  disiecerunt,  ipsum  exulem  iudicarunt. 

8.  At  Hannibal  anno  quarto  postquam  domo  profugerat,  L.  Cor-  1 
nelio  Q.  Minucio  consulibus,  cum  quinque  navibas  Africam  accessit 
in  finibus  Cyrenaeorum,  si  forte  Karthaginienses  ad  bellum  inducere 
posset  Antiochi  spe  fiduciaque,  cui  iam  persuaserat  ut  cum  exerciti- 
bus  in  Italiam  proficisceretur.     Hue  Magonem  fratrem  excivit.     Id  2 
ubi  Poeni  resciverunt,  Magonem  eadem,  qua  fratrem,  absentem  affe- 
cerunt  poena.     Illi  desperatis  rebus  cum  solvissent  naves  ac  vela 
ventis  dedissent,  Hannibal  ad  Antiochum  pervenit.     De  Magonis 
interitu  duplex  memoria  prodita  est:  namque  alii  naufragio,  alii  a 
servulis  ipsius   interfectum   eum  scriptum  reliquerunl.     Antiochus  3 
autem  si  tarn  in  gerendo  bello  consiliis  eius  parere  voluisset  quam 
in  suscipiendo  instituerat,  propius  Tiberi  quam  in  Thermopylis  de 
summa  imperi  dimicasset.     Quern  etsi  muUa  stulte  conari  videbat, 


1 62  LATIN  TEXT 

^  tatnen  nulla  deseruil  in  re.  Praefuit  paucis  navibus  quas  ex  Syri.i 
iussus  erat  in  Asiam  ducere,  iisque  adversus  Rhodiorum  classem  in 
Pamphylio  marl  conflixit.  In  quo  cum  multitudine  adversarioruni 
sui  superarentur,  ipse  quo  cornu  rem  gessit  fuit  superior. 

1  g.  Antiocho  fugato  verens  ne  dederetur,  quod  sine  dubio  acci- 
disset  si  sui  fecisset  potestatem,  Cretam  ad  Gortynios  venit,  ut  ibi, 

2  quo  se  conferret,  consideraret.  Vidit  autem  vii  omnium  callidissi- 
mus  in  magno  se  fore  periculo,  nisi  quid  providisset,  propter  ava- 
ritiam   Cretensium  :   magnam   enim  secum    pecuniam  portabat,  de 

3  qua  sciebat  exisse  famam.  Itaque  capit  tale  consilium.  Amphoras 
complures  complet  plumbo,  summas  operit  auro  et  argento.  Has 
praesentibus  principibus  deponit  in  templo  Dianae,  simulans  se 
suas  fortunas  illorum  fidei  credere.  His  in  errorem  inductis  statuas 
aeneas  quas  secum  portabat  omni  sua  pecunia  complet  easque  in 

4  propatulo  domi  abicit.  Gortynii  templum  magna  cura  custodiunt, 
non  tam  a  ceteris  quam  ab  Hannibale,  ne  ille  inscientibus  iis  tolleret 
sjia  secum  que  duceret. 

1  10.  Sic  conservatis  suis  rebus  omnibus  Poenus  illusis  Cretensibus 
ad  Prusiam  in  Pontum  pervenit,  Apud  quem  eodem  animo  fuit 
erga  Italiam,  neque  aliud  quicquam  egit  quam  regem  armavit  et 

2  exacuit  adversus  Romanos.  Quem  cum  videret  domesticis  opibus 
minus  esse  robustum,  conciliabat  ceteros  reges,  adiungebat  bellico- 
sas  nationes.     Dissidebat  ab  eo  Pergamenus  rex  Eumenes,  Romanis 

3  amicissimus,  bellumque  inter  eos  gerebatur  et  mari  et  terra ;  sed 
utrobique  Eumenes  plus  valebat  propter  Romanorum  societatem. 
Quo  magis  cupiebat  eum  Hannibal  opprimi,  quem  si  removisset, 
faciliora   sibi    cetera   fore  arbitrabatur.     Ad    liunc   interficiundum 

4  talem  iniit  rationem.  Classe  paucis  diebus  erant  decreturi.  Su- 
perabatur  navium  multitudine ;  dolo  erat  pugnandum,  cum  par 
non  esset  armis.     Imperavit  quam    plurimas  venenatas  serpentes 

5  vivas  coUigi  easque  in  vasa  fictilia  conici.  Harum  cum  effecis- 
set  magnam  multitudinem,  die  ipso  quo  facturus  erat  navale 
proelium  classiarios  convocat  iisque  praecipit  omnes  ut  in  unam 
Eumenis  regis  concurrant  navem,  a  ceteris  tantum  satis  habeant  se 
defendere.     Id   illos   facile  serpentium   multitudine   consecuturos 

6  Rex   autem    in   qua  nave  veheretur  ut  scirent  se  facturum:  quem 


NEPOS,  HANNIBAL  163 

si  aut  cepissent  aut  interfecissent,  magno  iis  pollicetur  pruciuio 
fore. 

11.  Tali  cohortatione  militum  facta  classis  ab  utrisque  in  proe-  1 
Hum  deducitur.     Quarum  acie  constiluta,  priusquam  signum  pugnae 
daretur,  Hannibal,  ut  palam  faceret  suis  quo  loco  Eumenes  esset, 
tabellarium  in  scapha  cum  caduceo  mittit.     Qui  ubi  ad  naves  ad-  2 
versariorum  pervenit  episiulamque  ostendens  se  regem   professus 
est  quaerere,  statim  ad  Eumenem  deductus  est,  quod  nemo  dubita- 
bat  quin  aliquid  de  pace  esset  scriptum.     Tabellarius,  ducis  nave 
declarata  suis,  eodem  unde  erat  egressus  se  recepit.     At  Eumenes  3 
soluta  epistula  nihil  in  ea  repperit  nisi  quae  ad  irridendum  eum 
pertinerent.     Cuius  rei  etsi   causam  mirabatur   neque  reperiebat, 
tamen  proelium  statim  committere  non  dubitavit.     Horum  in  con-  4 
cursu  Bithyni  Hannibalis  praecepto  universi  navem  Eumenis  ado- 
riuntur.     Quorum  vim  rex  cum  sustinere  non  posset,  fuga  salutem 
petiit,  quam  consecutus  non  esset  nisi  intra  sua  praesidia  se  recepis- 
set,  quae  in  proximo  litore  erant  collocata.     Reliquae  Pergamenae  5 
naves  cum  adversarios  premerent  acrius,  repente  in  eas  vasa  fictilia, 
de  quibus  supra   mentionem   fecimus,  conici  coepta  sunt.     Quae 
iacta  initio  risum   pugnantibus  concitarunt,  neque  quare  id  fieret 
poterat  intellegi.     Postquam  autem  naves  suas  oppletas  conspexe-  6 
runt  serpentibus,  nova  re  perterriti,  cum  quid  potissimum  vitarent 
non  viderent,  puppes  verterunt  seque  ad  sua  castra  nautica  rettule- 
runt.     Sic  Hannibal  consilio  arma  Pergamenorum  superavit,  neque  7 
turn  solum,  sed  saepe  alias  pedestribus  copiis  pari  prudentia  pepulit 
adversarios. 

12.  Quae  dum  in  Asia  geruntur,  accidit  casu  ut  legati  Prusiae   i 
Romae  apud  T.  Quintium  Flamininum  consularem  cenarent,  atquc 
ibi  de  Hannibale  mentione  facta  ex  iis  unus  diceret  eum  in  Prusiae 
regno  esse.     Id  postero  die  Flamininus  senatui  detulit.     Patres  con-  2 
scripti,  qui  Hannibale  vivo  numquam  se  sine  insidiis  futuros  existi- 
marent,  legatos  in  Bithyniam  miserunt,  in  eis  Flamininum,  qui  ab 
rege  peterent  ne  inimicissimum  suum  secum  haberet  sibique  dederet. 
His  Prusia  negare  ausus  non  est ;  illud  recusavit,  ne  id  a  se  fieri  3 
postularent,  quod  adversus  ius  hospiti  esset:  ipsi,  si  possent,  com- 
prehenderent ;  logii'T)  \^\  ?§5et  facile  inventuros.     Hannibal  enim 


1 64  LATIN   TEXT 

uno  loco  se  tenebat,  in  caste) lo  quod  ei  a  rege  datum  erat  muneri, 
idque  sic  aedificarat  ut  in  omnibus  partibus  aedifici  exitus  haberet, 

1-  scilicet  verens  ne  usu  veniret  quod  accidit.  Hue  cum  legati  Ro- 
manorum  venissent  ac  inultitudine  domum  eius  circumdedissent, 
puer  ab  ianua  prospiciens  Haiinibali  dixit  plures  praeter  consuetu 
dinem  armatos  apparere.  Qui  imperavit  ei  ut  omnes  fores  aedifici 
circumiret  ac  propere  sibi  nuntiaret  num  eodem  mode  undique  ob- 

5  sideretur.  Puer  cum  celeriter  quid  vidisset  renuntiasset,  omnesque 
exitus  occupatos  ostendisset,  sens  it  id  non  fortuito  factum,  sed  se 

,  peti  neque  sibi  diutius  vitam  esse  retinendam.  Quam  ne  alieno 
arbitrio  dimitteret,  memor  pristinarum  virtutum  venenum,  quod 
semper  secum  habere  consuerat,  sumpsit. 

1  13.  Sic  vir  fortissimus,  multis  variisque  perfunctus  laboribus, 
anno  acquievit  septuagesimo.  .Quibus  consulibus  iiiterierit,  non 
convenit.  Namque  Atticus  M.  Claudio  Marcello  Q.  Fabio  Labeone 
consulibus  mortuum  in  annali  suo  scriptum  reliquit,  at  Polybius  L. 
Aemilio   Paulo   Cn.   liaebio    Tamphilo,    Sulpicius   autem   Blitho   P. 

2  Cornelio  Cethego  M.  Baebio  Tamphilo.  Atque  hie  tantus  vir  tan- 
tisque  bellis  districtus  nonnihil  temporis  tribuit  litteris.  Namque 
aliquot  eius  libri  sunt,  Graeco  sermone  confecti,  in  eis  ad  Rhodios 

3  de  Cn.  Manli  Volsonis  in  Asia  rebus  gestis.  Huius  belli  gesta 
multi  memoriae  prodiderunt,  sed  ex  eis  duo,  qui  cum  eo  in  castris 
fuerunt  simulque  vixerunt,  quamdiu  fortuna  passa  est,  Silenus  et 
Sosylus  Lacedaemonius.  Atque  hoc  Sosylo  Hannibal  litterarum 
Graecarum  usus  est  doctore. 

Sed  nos  tempus  est  huius  libri  facere  finem  et  Romanorum  ex- 
plicare  imperatores,  quo  facilius,  coUatis  utrorumque  factis,  qui  vii  i 
praeferendi  sint  possit  iudicari. 


Cicero,  Manilian  Law 

I.  Quamquam  mihi  semper  frequens  conspectus  vester  multo 
iucundissimus,  hie  autem  locus  ad  agendum  amplissimus,  ad  diceii- 
dum  ornatissimus  est  visus,  Quirites,  tamen  hoc  aditu  laudis,  qui 
semper  optimo  cuique  maxiuK-  patuit,  non  mca  me  voluntas  adhuc, 


CICERO.  MANILIAN    LAW  1 65 

sed  vitae  meae  rationes  ab  ineunte  aetate  susceptae  prohibuerunt. 
Nam  cum  antea  per  aetaterri  nondum  huius  auctoritatem  loci  attin- 
gere  auderem,  statueremqiie  nihil  hue  nisi  perfectum  ingenio,  elabo- 
jiatum  industria  afferri  oportere,  omne  meum  tempus  amicorum 
ttmporibus  transmittendum  putavi.  Ita  neque  hie  locus  vacuus 
umquam  fuit  ab  iis  qui  vestram  causam  defenderent,  et  meus  labor, 
in  privatorum  periculis  caste  integreque  versatus,  ex  vestro  iudicio 
fructum  est  amplissimum  consecutus.  Nam  cum  propter  dilationem 
comitiorum  ter  praetor  primus  centuriis  cunctis  renuntiatus  sum, 
facile  iniellexi,  Quirites,  et  quid  de  me  iudicaretis  et  quid  aliis 
praescriberetis.  Nunc  cum  et  auctoritatis  in  me  tantum  sit  quan- 
tum vos  honoribus  mandandis  esse  voluistis,  et  ad  agendum  facul- 
tatis  tantum  quantum  homini  vigilanti  ex  forensi  usu  prope  cotidiana 
dicendi  exercitatio  potuit  afferre,  certe  et,  si  quid  auctoritatis  in  me 
est,  apud  eos  utar  qui  earn  mihi  dederunt,  et,  si  quid  in  dicendo 
consequi  possum,  iis  ostendam  potissinium  qui  ei  quoque  rei  fruc- 
tum suo  iudicio  tribuendum  esse  duxerunt,  Atque  illud  in  primis  3 
mihi  laetandum  iure  esse  video,  quod  in  hac  insolita  mihi  ex  hoc 
loco  ratione  dicendi  causa  talis  oblata  est  in  qua  oratio  deesse 
nemini  possit.  Dicendum  est  enim  de  Cn.  Pompei  singular!  eximia- 
que  virtute ;  huius  autem  orationis  diflficilius  est  exitum  quam 
principium  invenire.  Ita  mihi  non  tam  copia  quam  modus  in 
dicendo  quaerendus  est.  • 

2.  Atque,  ut  inde  oratio  mea  proficiscatur  unde  haec  omnis  causa  4 
ducitur,  bellum  grave  et  periculosum  vestris  vectigalibus  ac  sociis  a 
duobus  potentissimis  regibus  infertur,  Mithridate  et  Tigrane,  quorum 
alter  relictus,  alter  lacessitus,  occasionem  sibi  ad  occupandam  Asiam 
oblatam  esse  arbitratur.  Equitibus  Romanis,  honestissimis  viris, 
afferuntur  ex  Asia  cotidie  litterae,  quorum  magnae  res  aguntur  in 
vestris  vectigalibus  exercendis  occupatae;  qui  ad  me,  pro  necessi- 
tudine  quae  mihi  est  cum  illo  ordine,  causam  rei  publicae  pericula- 
quererumsuarum  detulerunt:  Bithyniae,  quae  nunc  vestra  provincia  5 
est,  vicos  exustos  esse  complures;  regnum  Ariobarzanis,  quod  fini- 
timum  est  vestris  vectigalibus,  totum  esse  in  hostium  potestate;  Z. 
Lucullum  magnis  rebus  gestis  ab  eo  bello  discedere;  huic  qui  suc- 
cesserit  non  satis  esse  paratum  ad  tantum  bellum  administrandum ; 


1 66  LATIN    TEXT 

uiuiiu  .lb  umnibus  sociis  et  civibus  ad  id  bellum  imperatorem 
deposci  atque  expeti,  eundem  hunc  unum  ab  hostibus  metui,  prae- 
terea  neminem. 
I)  Causa  quae  sit  videtis;  nunc  quid  agendum  sit  considerate., 
Primum  mihi  videtur  de  genere  belli,  deinde  de  magnitudine,  turn 
de  imperatore  deligendo  esse  dicendum.  Genus  est  enim  belli  eius 
modi  quod  maxime  vestros  animos  excitare  atque  inflammare  ad 
persequendi  studium  debeat:  in  quo  agitur  populi  Romani  gloria, 
quae  vobis  a  maioribus  cum  magna  in  omnibus  rebus  tum  summa 
in  re  militari  tradita  est;  agitur  salus  sociorum  atque  amicorum, 
pro  qua  multa  maiores  vestri  magna  et  gravia  bella  gesserunt; 
aguntur  certissima  populi  Romani  vectigalia  et  maxima,  quibus 
amissis  et  pacis  ornamenta  et  subsidia  belli  requiretis;  aguntur 
bona  multorum  civium,  quibus  est  a  vobis  et  ipsorum  et  rei  publicae 
causa  consulendum. 

7  3.  Et  quoniam  semper  appetentes  gloriae  praeter  ceteras  gentes 
atque  avidi  laudis  fuistis,  delenda  est  vobis  ilia  macula  Mithridatico 
bello  superiore  concepta,  quae  penitus  iam  insedit  ac  nimis  inve- 
teravit  in  populi  Romani  nomine, — quod  is,  qui  uno  die,  tota  in 
Asia,  tot  in  civitatibus,  uno  nuntio  atque  una  significatione  littera^ 
rum  cives  Romanes  omnes  necandos  trucidandosque  denotavit,  non 
modo  adliuc  poenam  nullam  suo  dignam  scelere  suscepit,  sed  ab 
\\\o  tempore  annum  iam  tertium  et  vicesimum  regnat,  et  ita  regnat 
ut  se  non  Ponti  neque  Cappadociae  latebris  occultare  velit,  sed 
emergere  ex  patrio  regno  atque  in  vestris  vectigalibus,  hoc  est,  in 

8  Asiae  luce  versari,  Etenim  adhuc  ita  nostri  cum  illo  rege  conten- 
derunt  imperatores,  ut  ab  illo  insignia  victoriae,  non  victoriam 
reportarent.  Triumphavit  L.  Sulla,  triumphavit  L.  Murena  de 
Mithridate,  duo  fortissimi  viri  et  summi  imperatores;  sed  ita  trium- 
pharunt  ut  ille  pulsus  superatusque  regnaret.  Verum  tamen  illis 
imperatoribus  laus  est  tribuenda  quod  egerunt,  venia  danda  quod 
reliquerunt,  propterea  quod  ab  eo  bello  Sullam  in  Italiam  res  publica, 
Murenam  Sulla  revocavit. 

9  4.  Mithridates  autem  omne  reliquum  tempus  non  ad  oblivionenj 
veteris  belli,  sed  ad  comparationem  novi  contulit;  qui  postea,  cum 
maximas  aedificasset  ornassetque  classes  exercitusque  permagnos 


CICERO.  MANILIAN   LAW  1 67 

quibuscumque  ex  gentibus  potuisset  comparasset,  et  se  Bosphoranis, 
fmitumis  suis,  bellum  inferre  simularet,  usque  in  Hispaniam  legates 
ac  litteras  misit  ad  eos  duces  quibuscum  turn  bellum  gerebamus,  ut, 
cum  duobus  in  locis  disiunctissimis  maximeque  diversis  uno  consilio 
a  binis  hostium  copiis  bellum  terra  marique  gereretur,  vos  ancipiti 
contentione  districti  de  imperio  dimicaretis.  Sed  tamen  alterius  10 
partis  periculum,  Sertorianae  atque  Hispaniensis,  quae  multo  plus 
firmamenti  ac  roboris  habebat,  Cn.  Pompei  divino  consilio  ac  singu- 
lar! virtute  depulsum  est-;  in  altera  parte  ita  res  a  L.  LucuUo,  sum- 
mo  viro,  est  administrata  ut  initia  ilia  refum  gestarum  magna  atque 
praeclara  non  felicitati  eius,  sed  virtuti,  haec  autem  extrema,  quae 
nuper  acciderunt,  non  culpae,  sed  fortunae  tribuenda  esse  videantur. 
Sed  de  Lucullo  dicam  alio  loco,  et  ita  dicam,  Quirites,  ut  neque 
vera  laus  ei  detracta  oratione  mea  neque  falsa  adficta  esse  videatur; 
de  vestri  imperi  dignitate  atque  gloria — quoniam  is  est  exorsus  ora-  n 
tionis  meae — videte  quern  vobis  animum  suscipiendum  putetis. 

5.  Maiores  nostri  saepe  mercatoribus  aut  naviculariis  nostris 
iniuriosius  tractatis  bella  gesserunt;  vos  tot  milibus  civium  Roma- 
norum  uno  nuntio  atque  uno  tempore  necatis,  quo  tandem  animo 
esse  debetis?  Legati  quod  erant  appellati  superbius,  Corinthum 
patres  vestri,  totius  Graeciae  lumen,  extinctum  esse  voluerunt;  vos 
eum  regem  inultum  esse  patiemini,  qui  legatum  populi  Romani 
consularem  vinculis  ac  verberibus  atque  omni  supplicio  excruciatum 
necavit?  lUi  libertatem  inminutam  civium  Romanorum  non  tule- 
runt;  vos  ereptam  vitam  neglegetis?  I  us  legationis  verbo  violatum 
illi  persecuti  sunt;  vos  legatum  omni  supplicio  interfectum  relin- 
quetis?  Videte  ne,  ut  illis  pulcherrimum  fuit  tantam  vobis  imperi  12 
gloriam  tradere,  sic  vobis  turpissimum  sit,  id  quod  accepistis  tueri 
et  conservare  non  posse. 

Quid?  quod  salus  sociorum  summum  in  periculum  ac  discriraen 
vocatur,  quo  tandem  animo  ferre  debetis?  Regno  est  expulsus 
Ariobarzanes  rex,  socius  populi  Romani  atque  amicus;  imminent 
duo  reges  toti  Asiae  non  solum  vobis  inimicissimi,  sed  etiam  vestris 
sociis  atque  amicis;  civitates  autem  omnes  cuncta  Asia  atque 
Graecia  vestrum  auxilium  exspectare  propter  periculi  magnitudinem 
coguntur;  imperatorem  a  vobis  certum  deposcere,  cum  praesertim 


1 68  LATIN    TEXT 

vos  aliuin  miseritis,  neque  audent  neque  se  id  facere  sine  summo 

13  periculo  posse  arbitrantur.  Vident  et  sentiunt  hoc  idem  quod  vos, 
— unuin  virum  esse  in  quo  summa  sint  omnia,  et  eum  propter  esse, 
quo  eliam  carent  aegrius;  cuius  adventu  ipso  atque  nomine,  tametsi 
ille  ad  maritimum  bellum  venerit,  tamen  impetus  hostium  repressos 
esse  intellegunt  ac  retardatos.  Hi  vos,  quoniam  libere  loqui  non 
licet,  tacite  rogant;  vjt^se  quoque,  s'tdat  ceterarum  provinciarum 
socios.  dignos  existimetis»quorum  salutem  tali  viro  commendetis  : 
atque  hoc  etiam  magis,  quod  ceteros  in  provinciam  eius  modi 
homines  cum.  imperia  jnittimus,  ut,  etiam  si  ab  hoste  defendant, 
tamen  ipsorifm  adventus  in  urbes  sociorum  non  multum  ab  hostili 
expugnatione  differant,  hunc  audiebant  antea,  nunc  praesentem 
vident,  tanta  temperantia,  tanta  mansuetudine,  tanta  humanitate, 
ut  ii  beatissimi  esse  videantur  apud  quos  ille  diutissime  commora- 
tur. 

14  6.  Qtiare,  si  propter  socios,  nulla  ipsi  iniuria  lacessiti,  maiores 
nostri  cum  Antiocho,  cum  Philippo,  cum  Aetolis,  cum  Poenis  bella 
gesserunt,  quanto  vos  studio  convenit  iniuriis  provocatos  sociorum 
salutem  una  cum  imperi  vestri  dignitate  defendere,  praesertim  cum 
de  maximis  vestris  vectigalibus  agatur?  Nam  ceterarum  provincia- 
rum vectigalia,  Quirites,  tanta  sunt  ut  iis  ad  ipsas  provincias  tutan- 
das  vix  contenti  esse  possimus;  Asia  vero  tarn  opima  est  ac  fertilis 
ut  et  ubertate  agrorum  et  varietate  fructuum  et  magnitudine  pas- 
tionis  et  multitudine  earum  rerum  quae  exportentur  facile  omnibus 
terris  antecellat.  Itaque  haec  vobis  provincia,  Quirites,  si  et  belli 
utilitatem  et  pacis  dignitatem  retinere  vultis,  non  modo  a  calamitate, 

15  sed  etiam  a  metu  calamitatis  est  defendenda.  Nam  in  ceteris  rebus 
cum  venit  calamitas,  turn  detrimentum  accipitur;  at  in  vectigalibus 
non  solum  adventus  mali,  sed  etiam  metus  ipse  affert  calamitatem. 
Nam  cum  hostium  copiae  non  longe  absunt,  etiam  si  irruptio  nulla 
facta  est,  tamen  pecuaria  relinquitur,  agri  cultura  deseritur,  merca- 
torum  navigatio  conquiescit.  Ita  neque  ex  portu  neque  ex  decumis 
neque  ex  scriptura  vectigal  conservari  potest;  quare  saepe  totius  anni 

16  fructus  uno  rumore  periculi  atque  uno  belli  terrore  amittitur.  Quo 
tandem  [igitur]  animo  esse  existimatis  aut  eos  qui  vectigalia  nobis 
pensitant,  aut  eos  qui  exercent  atque  exigunt,  cum  duo  reges  cum 


CICERO,   MANILIAN    LAW  1 69 

maximis  copiis  propter  adsint?  cum  una  excursio  equitatus  perbrevi 
tempore  totius  anni  vectigal  auferre  possit?  cum  publicani  familias 
maximas,  quas  in  saltibus  habent,  quas  in  agris,  quas  in  portubus 
atque  custodiis,  magno  periculo  se  habere  arbitrentur?  Putaiisne 
vos  illis  rebus  frui  posse,  nisi  eos  qui  vobis  fructui  sunt  conserve  itis 
non  solum,  ut  ante  dixi,  calamitate,  sed  etiam  calamitatis  formidme 
liberatos? 

7.  Ac  ne  illud  quidem  vobis  neglegendum  est,  quod  mihi  ego  17 
extremum  proposueram  cum  essem  de  belli  genere  dicturus,  quod 
ad  multorum  bona  civium  Romanorum  pertinet ;  quorum  vobis  pro 
vestra  sapientia,  Quirites,  habenda  est  ratio  diligenter.  Nam  et 
publicani,  homines  honestissimi  atque  ornatissimi,  suas  rationes  et 
copias  in  illam  provinciam  contulerunt,  quorum  ipsorum  per  se  res 
et  fortunae  vobis  curae  esse  debent.  Etenim,  si  vectigalia  nervos 
esse  rei  publicae  semper  duximus,  eum  certe  ordinem,  qui  exercet 
ilia,  firmamentum  ceterorum  ordinum  recte  esse  dicemus.  Deinde  18 
ex  ceteris  ordinibus  homines  gnavi  atque  industrii  partim  ipsi  in 
Asia  negotiantur,  quibus  vos  absentibus  consulere  debetis,  partim 
eorum  in  ea  provincia  pecunias  magnas  collocatas  habent.  Est 
igitur  humanitatis  vestrae  magnum  numerum  eorum  civium  calami- 
tate prohibere,  sapientiae  videre  multorum  civium  calamitatem  a  re 
publica  seiunctam  esse  non  posse.  Etenim  primum  illud  parvi 
refert,  nos  publicanis  omissis  vectigalia  postea  victoria  recuperare; 
neque  enim  isdem  redimendi  facultas  erit  propter  calamitatem, 
neque  aliis  voluntas  propter  timorem.  Deinde,  quod  nos  eadem  19 
Asia  atque  idem  iste  Mithridates  initio  belli  Asiatici  docuit,  id 
quidem  certe  calamitate  docti  memoria  retinere  debemus.  Nam 
tum,  cum  in  Asia  res  magnas  permulti  amiserant,  scimus  Romae 
solutione  impedita  fidem  concidisse.  Non  enim  possunt  una  in 
civitate  multi  rem  ac  fortunas  amittere,  ut  non  plures  secum  in 
eandem  trahant  calamitatem.  A  quo  periculo  prohibete  rem  publi- 
cam,  et  mihi  credite  id  quod  ipsi  videtis:  haec  fides  atque  haec 
ratio  pecuniarum,  quae  Romae,  quae  in  foro  versatur,  inplicata 
est  cum  illis  pecuniis  Asiaticis  et  cohaeret ;  ruere  ilia  non  possunt, 
ut  haec  non  eodeni  laWefncta  niotu  concidant.  Quare  videte  nc  non 
dubitandum  vobis  sit  omni  studio  ad  id  bellum  incumbere,  in  quo 


lyo  LATIN   TEXT 

gloria  nominis  vestri,  salus  sociorum,  vectigalia  maxima,  fortunae 
plurimorum  civium  coniunctae  cum  re  publica  defendantur. 

20  8.  Quoniam  de  genere  belli  dixi,  nunc  de  magnitudine  pauca  di- 
cam.  Potest  enim  hoc  dici,  belli  genus  esse  ita  necessarium  ut  sit 
gerendum,  non  esse  ita  magnum  ut  sit  pertimescendum.  In  quo 
maxima  laborandufn  est  ne  forte  ea  vobis  quae  diligentissime  pro- 
videnda  sunt,  contemnenda  esse  videantur.  Atque  ut  omnes  intelle- 
gant  me  L.  Lucullo  tantum  impertire  laudis  quantum  forti  viro  et 
sapienti  homini  et  mngno  imperatori  debeatur,  dico  eius  adventu 
maximas  Mithiidati  copias  omnibus  rebus  ornatas  atque  instructas 
fuisse;  urbemque,  Asiae  clarissimam  nobisque  amicissimam,  Cyzice- 
norum  obsessam  esse  ab  ipso  rege  maxima  multitudine  et  oppugna- 
tam  vehementissime,  quam  L.  Lucullus  virtute,  assiduitate.  consilio 

21  summis  obsidionis  periculis  liberavit;  ab  eodem  imperatore  ciassem 
magnam  et  ornatam,  quae  ducibus  Sertorianis  ad  Italiam  studio 
[atque  odio]  inflammata  raperetur,  superatam  esse  atque  depressam  ; 
magnas  hostium  praeterea  copias  multis  proeliis  esse  deletas  pate- 
factumque  nostris  legionibus  esse  Pontum,  qui  antea  populo  Ro- 
mano ex  omni  aditu  clausus  fuisset ;  Sinopen  atque  Amisum,  qui- 
bus  in  oppidis  erant  domicilia  regis,  omnibus  rebus  ornatas  ac 
refertas,  ceterasque  urbes  Ponti  et  Cappadociae  permultas,  uno 
aditu  adventuque  esse  captas;  regem,  spoliatum  regno  patrio  atque 
avito,  ad  alios  se  reges  atque  ad  alias  gentes  supplicem  contulisse; 
atque  haec  omnia  salvis  populi  Romani  sociis  atque  integris  vecti- 
galibus  esse  gesta.  Satis  opinor  haec  esse  laudis,  atque  ita,  Qui- 
rites,  qt  hoc  vos  intellegatis,  a  nullo  istorum,  qui  huic  obtrectant 
legi  atque  causae,  L.  Lucullum  similiter  ex  hoc  loco  esse  laudatum. 

22  9.  Requiretur  fortasse  nunc  quem  ad  modum,  cum  haec  ita  sint, 
reliquum.  possit  magnum  esse  bellum.  Cognoscite,  Quirites;  non 
enim  hoc  sine  causa  quaeri  videtur.  Primum  ex  suo  regno  sic 
Mithridates  profugit  ut  ex  eodem  Ponto  Medea  ilia  quondam  pro- 
fugisse  dicitur,  quam  praedicant  in  fuga  fratris  sui  membra  in  iis 
locis  qua  se  parens  persequeretur  dissipavisse,  ut  eorum  collectio 
dispersa  maerorque  patrius  celeritatem  persequendi  retardaret.  Sic 
Mithridates  fugiens  maximam  vim  auri  atque  argenti  pulcherrima- 
rumque  icrum  omnium,  quas  et  a  maioribus  acceperat  et  ipse  bello 


CICERO,   MANILIAN    LAW  171 

superiore  ex  tola  Asia  clireplas  in  siuim  regniini  congcsserat,  in 
Ponto  omnem  reliquit.  Haec  dum  nostri  colligunt  omnia  diligen- 
tius,  rex  ipse  e  manibus  effugit.  Ita  ilium  in  persequendi  studio 
niaeror,  hos  laetitia  tardavit.  Hunc  in  illo  timore  et  fuga  Tigranes,  23 
rex  Armenius,  excepit,  diffidentemque  rebus  suis  confirmavit,  et 
adflictum  erexit,  perditumque  recreavit.  Cuius  in  regnuni  postea- 
quam  L.  Lucullus  cuni  exercitu  venit,  plures  etiam  gentes  contra 
imperatorem  nostrum  concitatae  sunt.  Erat  enim  metus  iniectus 
iis  nationibus,  quas  numquam  populus  Romanus  neque  lacessendas 
bfllo  neque  temptandas  putavit;  erat  etiam  alia  gravis  atque  vehe- 
mens  opinio,  quae  animos  gentium  barbararum  pervaserat,  fani 
locupletissimi  et  religiosissimi  diripiendi  causa  in  eas  oras  nostrum 
fsse  exercitum  adductum.  Ita  nationes  multae  atque  magnae  novo 
quodam  terrore  ac  metu  concitabantur.  Noster  autem  exercitus, 
tametsi  urbem  ex  Tigranis  regno  ceperat  et  proeliis  usus  erat  se- 
cundis,  tamen  nimia  longinquitate  locorum  ac  desiderio  suorum 
commovebatur.  Hie  iam  plura  non  dicam  ;  fuit  enim  illud  extre-  24 
mum,  ut  ex  iis  locis  a  militibus  nostris  reditus  magis  maturus  quam 
processio  longior  quaereretur.  Mithridates  autem  et  suam  manum 
iam  confirmarat  et  eorum  qui  se  ex  if>sius  regno  collegerant,  et  mag-  . 
nis  adventiciis  auxiliis  multorum  regum  et  nationum  iuvabatur.  Nam 
hoc  fere  sic  fieri  solere  accepimus,  ut  regum  adflictae  fortunae  facile 
multorum  opes  adliciant  ad  misericordiam,  maximeque  eorum,  qui 
aut  reges  sunt  aut  vivunt  in  regno,  ut  iis  nomen  regale  magnum  et 
sanctum  esse  videatur.  Itaque  tantum  victus  efficere  potuit  quan-  25 
tum  incolumis  numquam  est  ausus  optare.  Nam,  cum  se  in  regnum 
suum  recepisset,  non  fuit  eo  contentus  quod  ei  praeter  spem  accide- 
rat,— ut  illam,  posteaquam  pulsus  erat,  terram  umquam  attingeret, 
— sed  in  exercitum  nostrum  clarum  aique  victorem  impetuin  fecit. 
Sinite  hoc  loco,  Quirites,  sicut  poetae  solent,  qui  res  Romanas 
scribunt,  praeterire  me  nostram  calamitatem,  quae  tanta  fuit  ut  eam 
ad  aures  [L.  Luculli]  imperatoris  non  ex  proelio  nuntius,  sed  ex 
sermone  rumor  adferret.  Hie  in  illo  ipso  malo  gravissimaque  belli  2C 
oflfensione  L.  Lucullus,  qui  tamen  aliqua  ex  parte  iis  incommodis 
mederi  fortasse  potuisset,  vestro  iussu  coactus, — quod  imperi  diu- 
turnitati  modum  statuendum   vetere   exemplo  putavistis,  —  partem 


172  LATIN   TEXT 

militutn,  qui  iam  stipeiidiis  confecti  erant,  dimisit,  partem  M\ 
Glabrioiii  tradidit.  Multa  praetereo  consulto  ;  sed  ea  vos  coniec- 
turn  perspicite,  quantum  illud  bellum  factum  putetis  quod  coniuii- 
gant  reges  potentissimi,  renovent  agitatae  nationes,  suscipiant  in- 
tegrae  gentes,  novus  imperator  noster  accipiat  vetere  exercitu  pulso. 

27  10.  Satis  mihi  multa  verba  fecisse  videor,  quare  esset  hoc  bellum 
genere  ipso  necessarium,  magnitudine  periculosum ;  restat,  ut  de 
imperatore  ad  id  bellum  deligendo  ac  tantis  rebus  praeficiendo 
dicendum  esse  videatur.  Utinam,  Quirites,  virorum  fortiutn  atque 
innocentium  copiam  tantam  haberetis  ut  haec  vobis  deliberatio 
difficilis  esset.  quemnam  potissimum  tantis  rebus  ac  tanto  bello 
praeficiendum  putaretis!  Nunc  vero  cum  sit  unus  Cn.  Pompeius, 
qui  non  modo  eorum  hominum  qui  nunc  sunt  gloriam,  sed  etiam 
antiquitatis  memoriam  virtute  superarit,  quae  res  est  quae  cuius- 

28  quam  animum  in  hac  causa  dubium  facere  possit  ?  Ego  enim  sic 
existimo,  in  summo  imperatore  quattuor  has  res  inesse  oportere. — 
scientiam  rei  militaris,  virtutem,  auctoritatem,  felicitatem.  Quis 
igitur  hoc  homine  scientior  umquam  aut  fuit  aut  esse  debuit  ?  qui  e 
ludo  atque  pueritiae  disciplinis  bello  maximo  atque  acerrimis  hosti- 
bus  ad  patris  exercitum  atque  in  militiae  disciplinam  profectus  est ; 
qui  extrema  pueritia  miles  in  exercitu  fuit  summi  imperatoris,  ine- 
unte  adulescentia  maximi  ipse  exercitus  imperator;  qui  saepius  cum 
hoste  conflixit,  quam  quisquain  cum  inimico  concertavit,  plura 
bella  gessit  quam  ceteri  legerunt,  plures  provincias  confecit  quam 
alii  concupiverunt ;  cuius  adulescentia  ad  scientiam  , rei  militaris 
non  alienis  praeceptis  sed  suis  imperils,  non  offensionibus  belli  sed 
victoriis,  non  stipendiis  sed  triumphis  est  erudita.  Quod  denique 
genus  esse  belli  potest,  in  quo  ilium  non  exercuerit  fortuna  rei 
publicae  ?  Civile,  Africanum,  Transalpinum,  Hispaniense  mixtum 
ex  civitatibus  atque  ex  bellicosissimis  n?tionibus,  servile,  navale 
bellum,  varia  et  diversa  genera  et  bellorum  et  hostium,  non  solum 
gesta  ab  hoc  uno  sed  etiam  confecta,  nullam  rem  esse  declarant  in 
usu  positam  militari,  quae  huius  viri  scientiam  fugere  possit. 

29  II.  Iam  vero  virtuti  Cn.  Pompei  quae  potest  oratio  par  inveniri  .' 
Quid  est  quod  quisquam  aut  illo  dignum  aut  vobis  novum  aut  cui- 
quam  inauditum  possit  adferre?     Neque  enim  illae  sunt  solae  vir- 


CICERO,    MANILIAN   LAW  .  173 

tutes  imperatoriae,  quae  vulgo  existimantur,  —  labor  in  negotiis, 
fortitude  in  periculis,  industria  in  agendo,  celeritas  in  conficiendo, 
consilium  in  providendo;  quae  tanta  sunt  in  hoc  uno  quanta  in 
omnibus  reliquis  imperatoribus  quos  aut  vidimus  aut  audivimus  non 
fuerunt.  Testis  est  Italia,  quam  ille  ipse  victor  L.  Sulla  huius  vir-  30 
tute  et  subsidio  confessus  est  liberatam ;  testis  est  Sicilia,  quam 
multis  undique  cinctam  periculis  non  terrore  belli,  sed  consi'i  cele- 
ritate  explicavit;  testis  est  Africa,  quae,  magnis  oppressa  hostium 
copiis,  eorum  ipsorum  sanguine  redundavit;  testis  est  Gallia,  per 
quam  legionibus  nostris  iter  in  Hispaniam  Gallorum  internicione 
patefactum  est;  testis  est  Hispania,  quae  saepissime  plurimos  ho- 
stes  ab  hoc  superatos  prostratosque  conspexit;  testis  est  iterunv  et 
saepius  Italia,  quae  cum  servili  bello  taetro  periculosoque  premere- 
tur,  ab  hoc  auxilium  absente  expetivit;  quod  bellum  exspectatione 
eius  attenuatum  atque  imminutum  est,  adventu  sublatum  ac  sepul- 
tum;  testes  nunc  vero  iam  omnes  sunt  orae  atque  omnes  eKterae  31 
gentes  ac  nationes,  denique  maria  omnia  cum  universa,  turn  i*i  sin- 
gulis oris  omnes  sinus  atque  portus.  Quis  enim  toto  mari  locus  per 
hos  annos  aut  tarn  firmum  habuit  praesidium  ut  tutus  esset  aut  tam 
fuit  abditus  ut  lateret?  Quis  navigavit  qui  non  se  aut  mortis  aut 
servitutis  periculo  committeret,  cum  aut  hieme  aut  referto  prae- 
donum  mari  navigaret  ?  Hoc  tantum  bellum,  tarn  turpe,  tam  \etus, 
tam  late  divisum  atque  dispersum,  quis  umquani  arbitraretur  aut  ab 
omnibus  imperatoribus  uno  anno  aut  omnibus  annis  ab  uno  impera- 
tore  confici  posse?  Quam  provinciam  tenuistis  a  praedonibus  libe-  32 
ram  per  hosce  annos  ?  quod  vectigal  vobis  tutum  fuit  ?  quern  socium 
defendistis?  cui  praesidio  classibus  vestris  fuistis?  quam  multas 
existimatis  insulas  esse  desertas?  quam  multas  aut  metu  relictas 
aut  a  praedonibus  captas  urbes  esse  sociorum? 

12.  Sed  quid  ego  longinqua  commemoro?  Fuit  hoc  quondam, 
fuit  proprium  populi  Romani  longe  a  domo  bellare  et  propugnaculis 
imperi  sociorum  fortunas,  non  sua  tecta  defendere.  Sociis  ego 
nostris  mare  per  hos  annos  clausum  fuisse  dicam,  cum  exercitus 
vestri  numquam  a  Brundisio  nisi  hieme  summa  transmiserint?  Qui 
ad  vos  ab  exteris  nationibus  venirent  captos  querar,  cum  legati 
populi  Romani  redempti  sint?    Mercatoribus  tutum  mare  non  fuisse 


174  LATIN  TEXT 

dicam,  cum  duodecim  secures  in  praedonum  potestatem  pervene- 

33  rint?  Cnidum  aut  Colophonem  aut  Samum,  nobilissimas  urbes, 
innumerabilesque  alias  captas  esse  commemorem,  cum  vestros  por- 
tus,  atque  eos  portus  quibus  vitam  ac  spiritum  ducitis,  in  prae- 
donum fuisse  potestate  sciatis?  An  vero  ignoratis  portum  Caietae 
celeberrimum  ac  plenissimum  navium  inspectante  praetore  a  prae- 
donibus  esse  direptum,  ex  Miseno  aiitem  eius  ipsius  liberos,  qui 
cum  praedonibus  antea  ibi  bellum  gesserat,  a  praedonibus  esse 
sublatos?  Nam  quid  ego  Ostiense  incommodum  atque  illam  labem 
atque  ignominiam  rei  publicae  querar,  cum,  prope  inspectantibus 
vobis,  classis  ea,  cui  consul  populi  Romani  praepositus  esset,  a 
praedonibus  capta  atque  oppressa  est?  Pro  di  immortales!  tan- 
tamne  unius  hominis  incredibilis  ac  divina  virtus  tarn  brevi  tempore 
luc'em  adferre  rei  publicae  potuit,  ut  vos,  qui  modo  ante  ostium 
Tiberinum  classem  hostium  videbatis,  ii  nunc  nullam  intra  Oceani 

34  ostium  praedonum  navem  esse  audiatis?  Atque  haec  qua  celeritate 
gesta  sint  quamquam  videtis,  tamen  a  me  in  dicendo  praetereunda 
non  sunt.  Quis  enim  umquam  aut  obeundi  negoti  aut  consequendi 
quaestus  studio  tarn  brevi. tempore  totloca  adire,  tantos  cursus  con- 
ficere  potuit,  quam  celeriter  Cn.  Pompeio  duce  tanti  belli  impetus 
navigavit?  qui  nondum  tempestivo  ad  navigandum  mari  Siciliam 
adiit,  Africam  exploravit,  in  Sardiniam  cum  classe  venit,  atque  haec 
tria  frumentaria  subsidia  rei  publicae  firmissimis  praesidiis  classic 

35  busque  munivit.  Inde  cum  se  in  Italiam  recepisset,  duabus  His- 
paniis  et  Gallia  Transalpina  praesidiis  ac  navibus  confirmata,  missis 
item  in  oram  Illyrici  maris  et  in  Achaiam  omnemque  Graeciam 
navibus,  Italiae  duo  maria  maximis  classibus  firmissimisque  prae- 
sidiis adornavit;  ipse  autem  ut  Brundisio  profectus  est,  undequin- 
quagesimo  die  totam  ad  imperium  populi  Romani  Ciliciam  adiunxit ; 
omnes,quiubique  praedones  fuerunt,  partim  capti  interfectique  sunt, 
partim  unius  huius  se  imperio  ac  potestati  dediderunt.  Idem  Cre- 
tensibus,  cum  ad  eum  usque  in  Pamphyliam  legatos  deprecatoresque 
misissent,  spem  deditionis  non  ademit,  obsidesque  imperavit.  Ita 
tantum  bellum,  tam  diuturnum,  tam  longe  lateque  dispersum,  quo 
bello  omnes  gentes  ac  nationes  premebantur,  Cn.  Pompeius  extrema 
hieme  apparavit,  ineunte  vere  suscepit,  media  aestate  coufecit. 


CICERO,    MANILIAN    LAW  I  75 

13.  Est  haec  divina  atque  incredibilis  virtus  imperatoris.  Quid?  3t 
ceterae,  quas  pauIo  ante  commemorare  coeperam,  quantae  atque 
quam  multae  sunt !  Non  enim  bellandi  virtus  solum  in  summo  ac 
perfecto  imperatore  quaerenda  est,  sed  multae  sunt  artes  eximiae 
liuius  administrae  comitesque  virtutis.  Ac  primum,  quanta  inno- 
centia  debent  esse  imperatores,  quanta  deinde  in  omnibus  rebus 
temperantia,  quanta  fide,  quanta  facilitate,  quanto  ingenio,  quanta 
humanitate  !  quae  breviter  qualia  sint  in  Cn.  Pompeio  consideremus. 
Summa  enim  omnia  sunt,  Quirites,  sed  ea  magis  ex  aliorum  conten- 
tione  quam  ipsa  per  sese  cognosci  atque  intellegi  possunt.  Quem  37 
enim  imperatorem  possumus  uUo  in  numero  putare,  cuius  in  exer- 
citu  centuriatus  veneant  atque  venierint  ?  Quid  hunc  hominem 
magnum  aut  amplurn  de  re  publica  cogitare,  qui  pecuniam,  ex  aera- 
rio  depromptam  ad  bellum  administrandum,  aut  propter  cupidita- 
tem  provinciae  magistratibus  diviserit  aut  propter  avaritiam  Romae 

in  quaestu  reliquerit  ?  Vestra  admurmuratio  facit,  Quirites,  ut  ag- 
noscere  videamini  qui  haec  fecerint:  ego  autem  nomino  neminem  , 
quare  irasci  mihi  nemo  poterit,  nisi  qui  ante  de  se  voluerit  confiteri. 
Itaque  propter  banc  avaritiam  imperatorum  quantas  calamitates, 
quocumque  ventum  sit,  nostri  exercitus  ferant  quis  ignorat  ?  Itinera  38 
quae  per  hosce  annos  in  Italia  per  agros  atque  oppida  civium  Ro- 
manorum  nostri  imperatores  fecerint  recordamini;  tum  facilius  sta- 
tuetis  quid  apud  exteras  nationes  fieri  existimetis.  Utrum  plures 
arbitramini  per  hosce  annos  militum  vestrorum  armis  hostium  urbes 
an  hibernis  sociorum  civitates  esse  deletas  ?  Neque  enim  potest 
exercitum  is  continere  imperator  qui  se  ipse  non  continet,  neque  se- 
verus  esse  in  iudicandoqui  alios  in  se  severos  esse  iudices  non  vult. 
Hie  miramur  hunc  hominem  tantum  excellere  ceteris,  cuius  legiones  30 
sic  in  Asiam  pervenerint  ut  non  modo  manus  tanti  exercitus,  sed  ne 
vestigium  quidem  cuiquam  pacato  nocuisse  dicatur?,  lam  vero 
quem  ad  modum  milites  hibernent  cotidie  sermones  ac  litterae  per- 
feruntur;  non  rnodo  ut  sumptum  facial  in  militem  nemini  vis  adfer- 
tur,  sed  ne  cupienti  quidem  cuiquam  permittitur.  Hiemis  enim, 
non  avaritiae  perfugium  maiores  nostri  in  sociorum  atque  amicorum 
tectis  esse  voluerunt. 

14.  Age  vero,  ceteris  in  rebus  qua  sit  temperantia  ronsicierate.  40 


176  LATIN   TEXT 

Unde  illani  tantam  celeritatem  et  tam  incredibilem  cursum  inventum 
putatis?  Non  enim  ilium  eximia  vis  reniigum  aut  ars  inaudita 
quaedam  gubernandi  aut  venti  aliqui  novi  tam  celeriter  in  ultimas 
terras  pertulerunt,  sed  eae  res,  quae  ceteros  remorari  solent,  non 
retardarunt ;  non  avaritia  ab  instituto  cursu  ad  praedam  aliquain 
devocavit,  non  libido  ad  voluptatem,  non  amoenitas  ad  delecta- 
tionem,  non  nobilitas  urbis  ad  cognitionem,  non  denique  labor  ipse 
ad  quietem;  postremo  signa  et  tabulas  ceteraque  ornamenta  Grae- 
corum  oppidorum,  quae  ceteri  toUenda  esse  arbitrantur,  ea  sibi  ille 

41  ne  visenda  quidem  existimavit.  Itaque  omnes  nunc  in  iis  locis  Cn. 
Pompeium  sicut  aliquem  non  ex  hac  urbe  missum,  sed  de  caelo 
delapsum  intuentur;  nunc  denique  incipiunt  credere  fuisse  homines 
Romanos  hac  quondam  continentia,  quod  iam  nationibus  exteris 
incredibile  ac  falso  memoriae  proditum  videbatur;  nunc  imperi  ves- 
tri  splendor  illis  gentibus  lucem  adferre  coepit;  nunc  intellegunt 
non  sine  causa  maiores  suos,  turn  cum  ea  temperantia  magistratus 
habebamus,  servire  populo  Romano  quam  imperare  aliis  maluisse. 
Iam  vero  ita  faciles  aditus  ad  eum  privatorum,  ita  liberae  querimo- 
niae  de  aliorum  iniuriis  esse  dicuntur,  ut  is,  qui  dignitate  principi- 

42  bus  excellit,  facilitate  infimis  par  esse  videatur.  Iam  quantum 
consilio,  quantum  dicendi  gravitate  et  copia  valeat, — in  quo  ipso 
inest  quaedam  dignitas  imperatoria, — vos,  Quirites,  hoc  ipso  ex 
loco  saepe  cognovistis.  Fidem  vero  eius  quantam  inter  socios  ex- 
istimari  putatis,  quam  hostes  omnes  omnium  generum  sanctissimam 
iudicarint?  Humanitate  iam  tanta  est  ut  difficile  dictu  sit  utrum 
hostes  magis  virtutem  eius  pugnantes  timuerint,  an  mansuetudinem 
victi  dilexerint.  Et  quisquam  dubitabit  quin  huic  hoc  tantum  hel- 
ium transmittendum  sit,  qui  ad  omnia  nostrae  memoriae  bella  con- 
ficienda  divino  quodam  consilio  natus  esse  videatur? 

43  15.  Et  quoniam  auctoritas  quoque  in  bellis  administrandis  multum 
atque  in  imperio  militari  valet,  certe  nemini  dubium  est  quin  ea  re 
idem  ille  imperator  plurimum  possit.  Vehementer  autem  pertinere 
ad  bella  administranda,  quid  hostes,  quid  socii  de  imperatoribus 
nostris  existiment  quis  ignorat,  cum  sciamus  homines,  in  tantis 
rebus  ut  aut  contemnant  ^ut  metuant  aut  oderint  aut  ament,  opi- 
nione  non   minus  et  fama  quam  aliqua  ratione  certa  commoverif 


CICERO,    MANILIAN   LAW  I  77 

Quod  igitur  nomen  umquam  in  orbe  terrarum  clarius  fuit,  cuius  res 
gestae  pares?  de  quo  homine  vos, — id  quod  maxime  facit  auctorita- 
tem, — tanta  et  tain  praeclara  iudicia  fecistis?  An  vero  ullam  usquam  44 
esse  oram  tarn  desertam  putatis,  quo  non  illius  die!  fania  pervaserit, 
cum  universus  populus  Romanus,  referto  foro  completisque  om- 
nibus templis  ex  quibus  hie  locus  conspici  potest,  unum  sibi  ad 
commune  omnium  gentium  bellum  Cn.  Pompeium  imperatorem  de- 
poposcit?  Itaque  —  ut  plura  non  dicam,  neque  aliorum  exemplis 
confirmem  quantum  [huius]  auctoritas  valeat  in  bello — ab  eodem  Cn, 
Pompeio  omnium  rerum  egregiarum  exempla  sumantur ;  qui  quo  die 
a  vobis  maritimo  bello  praepositus  est  imperator,  tanta  repente  vili- 
tas  annonae  ex  summa  inopia  et  caritate  rei  frumentariae  consecuta 
est  unius  hominis  spe  ac  nomine,  quantam  vix  ex  summa  ubertate 
agrorum  diiiturna  pax  efficere  potuisset.  lam  accepta  in  Ponto  ca-  45 
lamitate  ex  eo  proelio  de  quo  vos  paulo  ante  invitus  admonui, — cum 
socii  pertimuissent,  hostium  opes  animique  crevissent,  satis  firmum 
praesidium  provincia  non  haberet, — amisissetis  Asiam,  Quirites,  nisi 
ad  ipsum  discrimen  eius  temporis  divinitus  Cn.  Pompeium  ad  eas 
regiones  fortuna  populi  Romani  attulisset.  Huius  adventus  et 
Mithridatem  insolita  inflammatum  victoria  coiitinuit,  et  Tigranem 
magnis  copiis  minitantem  Asiae  retardavit.  Et  quisquam  dubitabit 
quid  virtute  perfecturus  sit,  qui  tantum  auctoritate  perfecerit,  aut 
quam  facile  imperio  atque  exercitu  socios  et  vectigalia  conserva- 
turus  sit,  qui  ipso  nomine  ac  rumore  defenderit? 

16.  Age  vero  ilia  res  quantam  declarat  eiusdem  hominis  apud  46 
hostes  populi  Romani  auctoritatem,  quod  ex  locis  tam  longinquis 
tamque  diversis  tam  brevi  tempore  omnes  huic  se  uni  dediderunt ! 
quod  Cretensium  legati,  cum  in  eorum  insula  noster  imperator  exer- 
citusque  asset,  ad  Cn.  Pompeium  in  ultimas  prope  terras  venerunt, 
eique  se  omnes  Cretensium  civitates  dedere  velle  dixerunt !  Quid? 
idem  iste  Mithridates  nonne  ad  eundem  Cn.  Pompeium  legatum 
usque  in  Hispaniam  misit  ?  eum  quern  Pompeius  legatum  semper 
iudicavit,  ii  quibus  erat  [semper]  molestum  ad  eum  potissimum  esse 
missum,  speculatorem  quam  legatum  iudicari  maluerunt.  Potestis 
igitur  iam  constituere,  Quirites,  banc  auctoritatem,  multis  postea 
rebus  gestis  magnisque  vestris  iudiciis  amplificatam,  quantum  apud 


178  LATIN   TEXT 

illos  icycs,  quiiiilum  apud  cxleras  naliones  valiiuram  esse  existu- 
metis. 

47  Reliquum  est  ut  de  felicitate  (quam  praestare  de  se  ipso  nemo 
potest,  nieminisse  et  commemorare  de  altero  possumus,  sicut  aequum 
est  homines  de  potestate  deorum)  timide  et  pauca  dicamus.  Ego 
enim  sic  existimo :  Maximo,  Marcello,  Scipioni,  Mario,  et  ceteris 
mn^iiis  imperatoribus  non  solum  propter  virtutem,  sed  etiam  propter 
fortuit;im  saepius  imperia  mandata  atque  exercitus  esse  commissos. 
Fuit  enim  profecto  quibusdam  summis  viris  quaedam  ad  ampli- 
tudiiK-m  et  ad  gloriam  et  ad  res  magnas  bene  gerendas  divinitus 
adiuiicta  fortuna.  De  huius  autem  hominis  felicitate,  de  quo  nunc 
agimus,  hac  utar  moderatione  dicendi,  non  ut  in  illius  potestate  for- 
tunam  positam  esse  dicam,  sed  ut  praeterita  meminisse,  reliqua 
sperare  videamur,  ne  aut  invisa  dis  immortalibus  oraiio  nostra  aut 

48  ingrata  esse  videatur.  Itaque  non  sum  praedicaturus  quantas  ille 
res  domi  militiae,  terra  marique,  quantaque  felicitate  gesserit;  ut 
eius  semper  voluntatibus  non  modo  cives  adsenserint,  socii  obtem- 
pernrint,  hostes  oboedierint,  sed  etiam  venti  tempestatesque  obse- 
cundaiint:  hoc  brevissime  dicam,  neminem  umquam  tam  impuden- 
ten)  fuisse  qui  ab  dis  immortalibus  tot  et  tantas  res  tacitus  auderet 
optare,  quot  et  quantas  di  immortales  ad  Cn.  Pompeium  detulerunt. 
Quod  ut  illi  proprium  ac  perpetuum  sit,  Quirites,  cum  communis  sa- 
lutis  atque  imperi  turn  ipsius  hominis  causa,  sicuti  facitis,  velle  et 
op:  are  debetis. 

49  Q.iare,  cum  et  bellum  sit  ita  necessarium  ut  neglegi  non  possit, 
it.i  magnum  ut  accuratissime  sit  administrandum  ;  et  cum  ei  impe- 
r  rorem  praeficere  possitis,  in  quo  sit  eximia  belli  scientia,  singularis 
virtus,  clarissima  auctoritas,  egregia  fortuna,  dubitatis,  Quirites, 
quill  hoc  tantum  boni,  quod  vobis  ab  dis  immortalibus  oblatum  et 
datum  est,  in  rem  publicam  conservandam  atque  amplificandam 
conferatis  ? 

50  17.  Quod  si  Romae  Cn.  Pompeius  privatus  esset  hoc  tempore, 
tamen  ad  tantum  bellum  is  erat  deligendus  atque  mittendus;  nunc 
cum  ad  ceteras  summas  utilitates  haec  quoque  oportunitas  adiunga- 
tur,  ut  in  iis  ipsis  locis  adsit,  ut  habeat  exercitum,  ut  ab  lis  qui 
habent  accipere  statim  possit,  quid  expectamus  ?  aut  cur  non  duci- 


CICERO,  MANILIAN    LAW  [79 

bus  dis  immortalibus  eidem,  cui  cetera  summa  cum  salute  rei  publi- 
cae  commissa  sunt,  hoc  quoque  bellum  regium  committanius  ? 

At  enim  vir  clarissimus,  amantissimus  rei  publicae,  vestris  bene-  5 
ficiis  amplissimis  adfectus,  Q.  Catulus,  itemque  sumtnis  ornamentis 
honoris,  fortunae,  vinutis,  iiigeni  praeditus,  Q.  Hortensius,  ab  hac 
ratione  dissentiunt.  Quorum  ego  auctoritatem  apud  vos  multis 
locis  plurimum  valuisse  et  valere  oportere  confiteor;  sed  in  hac 
causa,  tametsi  cognoscetis  auctoritates  contrarias  virorum  fortissi- 
morum  et  clarissimorum,  tamen  omissis  auctoritatibus  ipsa  re  ac  ra- 
tione exquirere  possumus  veritaiem,  atque  hoc  facilius,  quod  ea 
omnia  quae  a  me  adhuc  dicta  sunt  idem  isti  vera  esse  concedunt, — 
et  necessarium  bellum  esse  et  magnum,  et  in  uno  Cn.  Pompeio  sum- 
ma esse  omnia.  Quid  igitur  ait  Hortensius  ?  Si  uni  omnia  tribuen-  52 
da  sint,  dignissimum  esse  Pompeium,  sed  ad  unum  tamen  omnia 
deferri  non  oportere.  Obsolevit  iam  ista  oratio,  re  multo  magis 
quam  verbis  refutata.  Nam  tu  idem,  Q.  Hortensi,  multa  pro  tua 
summa  copia  ac  singulari  facultate  diceridi  et  in  senatu  contra  virum 
fortem,  A.  Gabinium,  graviter  ornateque  dixisti,  cum  is  de  uno  im- 
peratore  contra  praedones  constituendo  legem  promulgasset,  et  ex 
hoc  ipso  loco  permulta  item  contra  earn  legem  verba  fecisti.  Quid  ?  53 
turn,  per  deos  immortales  !  si  plus  apud  populum  Romanum  auctori- 
tas  tua  quam  ipsius  populi  Romani  salus  et  vera  causa  valuisset, 
hodie  banc  gloriam  atque  hocorbis  terrae  imperium  teneremus?  An 
tibi  turn  imperium  hoc  esse  videbatur  cum  populi  Romani  legati, 
quaestores,  praetoresque  capiebantur,  cum  ex  omnibus  provinciis 
commeatu  et  privato  et  publico  prohibebamur,  cum  ita  clausa  nobis 
erant  maria  omnia  ut  neque  privatam  rem  transmarinam  neque  pu- 
blicam  iam  obire  possemus  ? 

18.  Qifae  civitas  antea  umquam  fuit, — non  dico  Atheniensium,  54 
quae  satis  late  quondam  mare  tenuisse  dicitur ;  non  Carthaginien-  • 
sium,  qui  permultum  classe  ac  maritimis  rebus  valuerunt;  non 
Rhodiorum,  quorum  usque  ad  nostram  memoriam  disciplina  navalis 
et  gloria  remansit, — quae  civitas,  inquam,  antea  tam  tenuis,  ^//tz.? tam 
parva  insula  fuit,  quae  non  portus  suos  et  agros  et  aliquam  partem 
regionis  atque  orae  maritimae  per  se  ipsa  defenderet  ?  At.  hi  rruie, 
•aliquot  annos  continuos  ante  legem  Gabiniam  ille  populus  Romanus, 


l8o  LATIN   TEXT 

cuius  usque   ad  nostram  memoriam  nomen   invictum  in  navalibus 
pugnis  permanserit,  magna  ac  multo  maxima  parte  non  modo  utili 

55  tatis,  sed  dignitatis  atque  imperi  caruit;  nos,  quorum  maiores  An- 
tiociium  regem  classe  Persemque  superarunt,  omnibusque  navalibus 
pugnis  Carthaginiensis,  iiomines  in  maritimis  rebus  exercitatissumos 
paratissumosque,  vicerunt,  ii  nuUo  in  loco  iam  praedonibus  pares  esse 
poteramus ;  nos,  qui  antea  non  modo  Italiam  tutam  habebamus,  sed 
omnessocios  inultimis  oris  auctoritate  nostri  imperi  salvos  praestare 
poteramus, — tum  cum  insula  Delos,  tarn  procul  a  nobis  in  Aegaeo 
mari  posita,  quo  omnes  undique  cum  mercibus  atque  oneribus  com- 
meabant,  referta  divitiis,  parva,  sine  muro,  nihil  timebat, — idem  non 
modo  provinciis  atque  oris  Italiae  maritimis  ac  portubus  nostris,  sed 
etiam  Appia  iam  via  carebamus;  et  iis  temporibus  non  pudebat 
magistratus  populi  Romani  in  hunc  ipsum  locum  escendere,  cum 
eum  nobis  maiores  nostri  exuviis  nauticis  et  classium  spoliis  orna- 
tum  reliquissent! 

56  19.  Bono  te  animo  tum,  Q.  Hortensi,  populus  Romanus  et  cete- 
ros  qui  erant  in  eadem  sententia  dicere  existimavit  ea  quae  sentie- 
batis;  sed  tamen  in  salute  communi  idem  populus  Romanus  dolori 
suo  maluit  quam  auctoritati  vestrae  optemperare.  Itaque  una  lex, 
unus  vir,  unus  annus  non  modo  nos  ilia  raiseria  ac  turpitudine  libe- 
ravit,  sed  etiam  effecit  ut  aliquando  vere  videremur  omnibus  genti- 

57  bus  ac  nationibus  terra  inarique  imperare.  Quo  mihi  etiam  indig- 
nius  videtur  obtrectatum  esse  adhuc, — Gabinio  dicam  anne  Pompeio 
an  utrique,  id  quod  est  verius  ? — ne  legaretur  A.  Gabinius  Cn.  Pom- 
peio expetenti  ac  postulanti.  Utrum  ille,  qui  postulat  ad  tantum 
bellum  legatum  quem  velit,  idoneus  non  est  qui  impetret,  cum  ceteri 
ad  expilandos  socios  diripiendasque  provincias  quos  voluerunt  lega- 
tes eduxerint ;  an  ipse,  cuius  lege  salus  ac  dignitas  populo  Romano 

•  atque  omnibus  gentibus  constituta  est,  expers  esse  debet  gloriae 
eius  imperatoris  atque  eius  exercitus  qui  consilio  ipsius  ac  periculo 

58  est  constitutus  ?  An  C.  Falcidius,  Q.  Metellus,  Q.  Caelius  Latinien- 
sis,  Cn.  Lentulus,  quos  omnes  honoris  causa  nomino,  cum  tribuni 
plebi  fuissent,  anno  proximo  legati  esse  potuerunt;  in  uno  Gabinio 
sunt  tam  diligentes,  qui  in  hoc  bello,  quod  lege  Gabinia  geritur,  in 
hoc  imperatore  atque  exercitu,  quem  per  vos  ipse  constituit,  etiam 


CICERO.  MANILIAN    LAW  l8l 

praecipuo  iure  esse  deberet  ?  De  quo  legando  consules  spero  ad 
senatum  relatuios.  Qui  si  dubitabuiit  aut  gravabuntur,  ego  me 
profiteor  relaturum;  neque  me  impediet  cuiusquam  inimicum  edic- 
tum  quo  minus  vobis  fretus  vestrum  ius  beneficiumque  defendam  ; 
neque  praeter  intercessionem  quicquam  audiani,  de  qua,  ut  arbidor, 
isti  ipsi  qui  minantur  etiam  atque  etiam  quid  liceat  considerabunt. 
Mea  quidem  sententia,  Quirites,  unus  A.  Gabinius  belli  niaritimi 
rerumque  gestarum  Cn.  Pompeio  socius  ascribitur,  propterea  quod 
alter  uni  illud  bellum  suscipiendum  vestris  suffrages  detulii,  alter 
delatum  susceptumque  confecit. 

20.  Reliquum  est  ut  de  Q.  Catuli  auctoritate  et  sententia  dicen-  59 
dum  esse  videatur.  Qui  cum  ex  vobis  quaereret,  si  in  uno  Cn. 
Pompeio  omnia  poneretis,  si  quid  eo  factum  esset,  in  quo  spem 
essetis  habituri,  cepit  magnum  suae  virtutis  fructum  ac  dignitatis, 
cum  omnes  una  prope  voce  in  eo  ipso  vos  spem  habituros  esse 
dixistis.  Etenim  talis  est  vir  ut  nulla  res  tanta  sit  ac  tarn  difficilis 
quam  ille  non  et  consilio  regere  et  integritate  tueri  et  virtute  confi- 
cere  possit.  Sed  in  hoc  ipso  ab  eo  vehementissime  dissentio,  quod, 
quo  minus  certa  est  hominum  ac  minus  diuturna  vita,  hoc  magis 
res  publica,  dum  per  deos  immortales  licet,  frui  debet  summi  viri 
vita  atque  virtute.  "  At  enim  ne  quid  novi  fiat  contra  exempla  atque  60 
instituta  maiorum."'  Non  dicam  hoc  loco  maiores  nostros  semper  in 
pace  consuetudini,  in  bello  utilitati  paruisse;  semper  ad  novos  casus 
temporum  novorum  consiliorum  rationes  accommodasse  :  non  dicam 
duo  bella  maxima,  Punicum  atque  Hispaniense,  ab  uno  imperatore 
esse  confecta,  duasque  urbes  potentissimas,  quae  huic  imperio 
maxime  minitabantur,  Karlhaginem  atque  Numantiam,  ab  eodem 
Scipione  esse  deletas  :  non  commemorabo  nuper  ita  vobis  patribus- 
que  vestris  esse  visum,  ut  in  uno  C.  Mario  spes  imperi  poneretur, 
ut  idem  cum  lugurtha,  idem  cum  Cimbris,  idem  cum  Teutonis  bel- 
lum administraret.  In  ipso  Cn,  Pompeio,  in  quo  novi  constitui  (>i 
nihil  vult  Q.  Catulus,  quam  multa  sint  nova  summa  Q.  Catuli  vo- 
luntate  constituta  recordamini. 

21.  Quid  tam  novum  quam  adulescentulum  privatum  exercitum 
difficili  rei  publicae  tempore  conficere?  Confecit.  Huic  praeesse? 
Praefuit.    Rem  optime  ductu  suo  gerere?    Gessit.    Quid  tam  praeter 


l82  LATIN   TfeXT 

consuetudinem  quain  homini  peradulescenti,  cuius  aetas  a  senatorio 
gradu  longe  abesset,  imperium  atque  exercitum  dari,  Sicilian!  per- 
mitti,  atque  Africam  bellumque  in  ea  provincia  administrandum  ? 
Fuitin  his  provinciis  singular!  innocentia,  gravitate,  virtute ;  helium 
in  Africa  maximum  confecit,  victorem  exercitum  deportavit.  Quid 
vero  tarn  inauditum  quam  equitem  Romanum  triumphare?  At  eam 
quoque  rem  populus  Romanus  non  modo  vidit,  sed  omnium  etiam 

32  studio  visendam  et  concelebrandam  putavit.  Quid  tam  inusitatum 
quam  ?//,  cum  duo  consules  clarissimi  fortissimique  essent,  eques 
Romanus  ad  bellum  maximum  formidolosissimumque  pro  consule 
mitteretur?  Missus  est.  Quo  quidem  tempore  cum  esset  non 
nemo  in  senatu  qui  diceret  "  non  oportere  mitti  hominem  privatum 
pro  consule,"  L.  Philippus  dixisse  dicitur  "  non  se  ilium  sua  senten- 
tia  pro  consule,  sed  pro  consulibus  mittere."  Tanta  in  eo  rei 
publicae  bene  gerendae  spes  constituebatur,  ut  duorum  consulum 
munus  unius  adulescentis  virtuti  committeretur.  Quid  tam  singu- 
lare  quam  ut  ex  senatus  consulto  legibus  solutus  consul  ante  fieret 
quam  uUum  alium  magistratum  per  leges  capere  licuisset  ?  quid 
tam  incredibile  quam  ut  iterum  eques  Romanus  ex  senatus  consulto 
triumpharet  ?  Quae  in  omnibus  hominibus  nova  post  hominum 
memoriam  constituta  sunt,  ea  tam  multa  non  sunt  quam  haec  quae 

63  in  hoc  uno  homine  videmus.  Atque  haec  tot  exempla,  tanta  ac 
tam  nova,  profecta  sunt  in  eundem  hominem  a  Q.  Catuli  atque  a 
ceterorum  eiusdem  dignitatis  amplissimorum  hominum  auctoritate. 
22.  Quare  videant  ne  sit  periniquum  et  non  ferundum  illorum 
auctoritatem  de  Cn.  Pompei  dignitate  a  vobis  comprobatam  sem- 
per esse,  vestrum  ab  illis  de  eodem  homine  iudicium  populique 
Romani  auctoritatem  improbari;  praesertim  cum  iam  suo  iure  popu- 
lus Romanus  in  hoc  homine  suam  auctoritatem  vel  contra  omnes 
qui  dissentiunt  possit  defendere,  propterea  quod,  isdem  istis  recla- 
mantibus,  vos  unum  ilium  ex  omnibus  delegistis  quem  bello  prae- 

54  donum  praeponeretis.  Hoc  si  vos  temere  fecistis,  et  rei  publicae 
parum  consuluistis,  recte  isti  studia  vestra  suis  consiliis  regere  co- 
nantur;  sin  autem  vos  plus  tum  in  re  publica  vidistis,  vos  iis  repug- 
nantibus  per  vosmet  ipsos  dignitatem  huic  imperio,  salutem  orbi 
terrarum  attulistis,  aliquando  isti  principes  et  sibi  et  ceteris  populi 


CICERO.  MANILIAN    LAW  183 

Roiuani  uiiiversi  auctoritati  parendum  esse  fateantur.  Atque  in 
hoc  bello  Asiatico  et  regio  non  solum  militaris  ilia  virtus,  quae  est 
in  Cn.  Pompeio  singularis,  sed  aliae  quoque  virtutes  animi  magnae 
et  multae  requiruntur.  Difficile  est  in  Asia,  Cilicia,  Syria,  regnis- 
que  interiorum  nationum  ita  versari  nostrum  imperatorem  ut  nihil 
aliud  nisi  de  hoste  ac  de  laude  cogitet.  Deinde,  etiam  si  qui  sunt 
pudore  ac  temperantia  moderatiores,  tanien  eos  esse  tales  propter 
multitudinem  cupidorum  hominum  nemo  aibitratur.  Difficile  est  ^5 
dictu,  Quirites,  quanto  in  odio  simus  apud  exteras  nationes  propter 
eorum  quos  ad  eas  per  hos  annos  cum  imperio  misimus  libidines  et 
iniurias.  Quod  enim  fanum  putatis  in  illis  terris  nostris  magistrati- 
bus  religiosum,  quam  civitatem  sanctam,  quam  domum  satis  clausam 
ac  munitam  fuisse?  Urbes  iam  iocupletes  et  copiosae  requiruntur 
quibus  causa  belli  propter  diripiendi  cupiditatem  inferatur.  Liben-  66 
ter  haec  coram  cum  Q.  Catulo  et  Q.  Hortensio,  summis  et  claris- 
siniis  viris,  disputarem;  noverunt  enim  sociorum  vulnera,  vident 
eorum  calamitates,  querimonias  audiunt.  Pro  sociis  vos  contra 
hostes  exercitum  mittere  putatis,  an  hostium  simulatione  contra 
socios  atque  amicos  ?  Quae  civitas  est  in  Asia  quae  non  modo  irii- 
peratoris  aut  legati,  sed  unius  tribuni  militum  animos  ac  spiritus 
capere  possit? 

23.  Quare,  etiam  si  quem  habetis  qui  collatis  signis  exercitus  re- 
gies superare  posse  videatur,  tamen,  nisi  erit  idem  qui  se  a  pecuniis 
sociorum,  qui  ab  eorum  coniugibus  ac  liberis  [qui  ab  ornamentis 
fanorum  atque  oppidorum],  qui  ab  auro  gazaque  regia  manus,  ocu- 
los,  animum  cohibere  possit,  non  erit  idoneus  qui  ad  bellum  Asiati- 
cum  regiumque  mittatur.  Ecquam  putatis  civitatem  pacatam  fuisse  67 
quae  locuples  sit,  ecquam  esse  locupletem  quae  istis  pacata  esse 
videatur?  Ora  maritima,  Quirites,  Cn.  Pompeium  non  solum  prop- 
ter rei  militaris  gloriam,  sed  etiam  propter  animi  contincntiam  re- 
quisivit.  Videbat  enim  imperatores  locupletari  quotannis  pecunia 
publica  praeter  paucos,  neque  eos  quicquam  aliud  adsequi  classium 
nomine,  nisi  ut  detrimentis  accipiendis  maiore  adfici  turpitudine 
Videremur.  Nunc  qua  cupiditate  homines  in  provincias  et  quibus 
iacturis,  quibus  condicionibus  proficiscantur,  ignorant  videlicet  isti 
qui  ad   unum  deferenda  omnia  esse  non  arbitrantur.     Quasi  vero 


1S4  LATIN    TEXT 

Cn.  Pompeium   non   cum   siiis   virtutibus  tuin   etiam  alienis   vitiis 

68  magnum  esse  videamus.  Quare  nolite  dubitare  quin  huic  uni  cre- 
datis  omnia,  qui  inter  tot  annos  unus  inventus  sit  quern  socii  in 
urbes  suas  cum  exercitu  venisse  gaudeant. 

Quod  si  auctoritatibus  banc  causam,  Quirites,  confirmandam 
putatis,  est  vobis  auctor  vir  bellorum  omnium  maximarumque  rerum 
peritissimus,  P.  Servilius,  cuius  tantae  res  gestae  terra  marique  ex- 
titerunt,  ut,  cum  de  bello  deliberetis,  auctor  vobis  gravior  esse  nemo 
debeat ;  est  C.  Curio,  summis  vestris  beneficiis  maximisque  rebus 
gestis,  summo  ingenio  et  prudentia  praeditus ;  est  Cn.  Lentulus,  in 
quo  omnes  pro  amplissimis  vestris  honoribus  summum  consilium, 
summam  gravitatem  esse  cognovistis ;  est  C.  Cassius,  integritate, 
virtute,  constantia  singulari.  Quare  videte  horum  auctoritatibus 
illorum  orationi,  qui  dissentiunt,  respondere//^  posse  videamur. 

69  24.  Quae  cum  ita  sint,  C.  Manili,  primum  istam  tuam  et  legem  et 
voluntatem  et  sententiam  laudo  vehementissimeque  comprobo ;  de- 
inde  te  hortor  ut  auctore  populo  Romano  maneas  in  sententia,  neve 
cuiusquam  vim  aut  minas  pertimescas.  Primum,  in  te  satis  esse 
animi  perseverantiaeque  arbitror;  deinde,  cum  tantam  multitudinem 
cum  tanto  studio  adesse  videamus,  quantam  iterum  nunc  in  eodem 
homine  praeficiendo  videmus,  quid  est  quod  aut  de  re  aut  de  per- 
ficiendi  facultate  dubitemus  ?  Ego  autem,  quicquid  est  in  me  studi, 
consili,  laboris,  ingeni,  quicquid  hoc  beneficio  populi  Romani  atque 
hac  potestate  praetoria,  quicquid  auctoritate,  fide,  constantia  pos- 
sum, id  omne  ad  banc  rem  conficiendam   tibi  et  populo  Romano 

70  polliceor  ac  defero ;  testorque  omnes  deos,  et  eos  maxima  qui  huic 
loco  temploque  praesident,  qui  omnium  mentes  eorum  qui  ad  rem 
publicam  adeunt  maxime  perspiciunt,  me  hoc  neque  rogatu  facere 
cuiusquam,  neque  quo  Cn.  Pompei  gratiam  mihi  per  banc  causam 
conciliari  putem,  neque  quo  mihi  ex  cuiusquam  amplitudine  aut 
praesidia  periculis  aut  adiuraenta  honoribus  quaeram  ;  propterea 
quod  pericula  facile,  ut  hominem  praestare  oportet,  innocentia  tecti 
repellemus,  honorem  autem  neque  ab  uno  neque  ex  hoc  loco,  sed 
eadem  ilia  nostra  laboriosissima  ratione  vitae,  si  vestra  voluntas 

71  feret,  consequemur.  Quam  ob  rem,  quicquid  in  hac  causa  mihi  sus- 
ceptum  est,  Quirites,  id  ego  omne  me  rei  publicae  causa  suscepisse 


CICERO.  ARCH  IAS  1 85 

confirmo ;  tantumque  abest  ut  aliquam  iiiihi  boiiam  gratiam  quae- 
sisse  videar,  ut  multas  me  etiam  simiiltales  partim  obscuras,  partim 
apertas  intellegam  mihi  non  necessarias,  vobis  non  inutiles  sus- 
cepisse.  Sed  ego  me  hoc  honore  praeditum,  tantis  vestris  beneficiis 
adfectum  statui,  Quirites,  vest  ram  voluntatem  et  rei  pubiicae  digni- 
tatem et  salutem  provinciarum  atque  sociorum  meis  omnibus  com- 
modis  et  rationibus  praeferre  oportere. 


Cicero,  Archias 

1.  Si  quid  est  in  me  ingeni,  iudices,  quod  sentio  quam  sit  exi-  i 
guum,  aut  si  qua  exercitatio  dicendi,  in  qua  me  non  infitior  medio- 
criter  esse  versatum,  aut  si  huiusce  rei  ratio  aliqua  ab  optimarum 
artium  studiis  ac  disciplina  profecta,  a  qua  ego  nullum  confiteor 
aetatis  meae  tempus  abhorruisse,  earum  rerum  omnium  vel  in 
primis  hie  A.  Licinius  fructum  a  me  repetere  prope  suo  iure  debet. 
Nam  quoad  longissime  potest  mens  inea  respicere  spatium  praete- 
riti  temporis,  et  pueritiae  memoriam  recordari  ultimam,  inde  usque 
repetens  hunc  video  mihi  principem  et  ad  suscipiendam  et  ad  in- 
grediendam  rationem  horum  studiorum  extitisse.  Quod  si  haec 
vox,  huius  hortatu  praeceptisque  conformata,  non  nullis  aliquando 
saluti  fuit,  a  quo  id  accepimus  quo  ceteris  opitulari  et  alios  servare 
possemus,  huic  profecto  ipsi,  quantum  est  situm  in  nobis,  et  opem 
et  salutem  ferre  debemus.  Ac  ne  quis  a  nobis  hoc  ita  dici  forte  2 
miretur,  quod  alia  quaedam  in  hoc  facultas  sit  ingeni,  neque  haec 
dicendi  ratio  aut  disciplina,  ne  nos  quidem  huic  uni  studio  penitus 
umquam  dediti  fuimus.  Etenim  omnes  artes,  quae  ad  humanitatem 
pertinent,  habent  quoddam  commune  vinclum,  et  quasi  cognatione 
quadam  inter  se  continentur. 

2.  Sed  ne  cui  vestrum  mirum  esse  videatur  me  in  quaestione  legi-  3 
tima  et  in  iudicio  publico, — cum  res  agatur  apud  praetorem  populi 
Romani,  lectissimum  virum,  et  apud  severissimos  iudices,  tanto  con- 
ventu  hominum  ac  frequentia, — hoc  uti  genere  dicendi,  quod  non 
modo  a  consuetudine  iudiciorum,  verum  etiam  a  forensi  sermone 
abhorreat  ;  quaeso  a  vobis  ut  in  hac  causa  mihi  delis  hanc  veniam, 


1 86  '  LATIN    TEXT 

actuinmodatam  huic  reo,  vobis,  quern  ad  modum  spero,  non  molt 
stam,  ut  me  pro  sumrao  poeta  atque  eruditissimo  huiniiie  dicentem. 
hoc  concursu  hominum  litteratissimorum,  hac  vestra  humanitate, 
hoc  denique  praetore  exercente  iudicium,  patiamini  de  studiis  hu- 
manitatis  ac  litterarum  pauIo  loqui  liberius,  et  in  eius  modi  person n. 
quae  propter  otium  ac  studium  minime  in  iudiciis  periculisque  trnc- 

4  tata  est,  uti  prope  novo  quodam  et  inusitato  genere  dicendi.  Quod 
si  mihi  a  vobis  tribui  concedique  sentiam,  perficiam  profecto  ut 
hunc  A.  Licinium  non  modo  non  segregandum,  cum  sit  civis,  a  nu 
mero  civium,  verum  etiam,  si  non  esset,  putetis  asciscendum  fuisse. 

3.  Nam,  ut  primum  ex  pueris  excessit  Archias  atque  ab  iis  arti- 
bus  quibus  aetas  puerilis  ad  hunianitatem  informari  solet  se  ad 
scribendi  studium  contulit,  primum  Antiochiae  (nam  ibi  natus  est 
loco  nobili),  celebri  quondam  urbe  et  copiosa  atque  eruditissimis 
hominibus  liberalissimisque  studiis  affluenti,  celeriter  antecellere 
omnibus  ingeni  gloria  coepit.  Post  in  ceteris  Asiae  partibus  cunc- 
taque  Graecia  sic  eius  adventus  celebrabrantur  ut  famam  ingeni 
expectatio  hominis,expectationem  ipsius  adventus  admiratioque  su- 

5  peraret.  Erat  Italia  tum  plena  Graecarum  artium  ac  disciplinarum, 
studiaque  haec  et  in  Latio  vehementius  tum  colebantur  quam  nunc 
isdem  in  oppidis,  et  hie  Romae  propter  tranquillitatem  rei  publicae 
non  neglegebantur.  Itaque  hunc  et  Tarentini  et  Locrenses  tt  Regini 
et  Neapolitani  civitate  ceterisque  praemiis  donarunt ;  et  omnes,  qui 
aliquid  de  ingeniis  poterant  iudicare,  cognitione  atque  hospitio  dig- 
num  existimarunt.  Hac  tanta  celebritate  famae  cum  esset  iam 
absentibus  notus,  Romam  venit  Mario  consule  et  Catulo.  Nactus 
est  primum  consules  eos,  quorum  alter  res  ad  scribendum  maxumas, 
alter  cum  res  gestas  tum  etiam  studium  atque  aures  adhibere  posset. 
Statim  LucuUi,  cum  praetextatus  etiam  tum  Archias  esset,  eum  do- 
mum  suam  receperunt.  Et  erat  hoc  non  solum  ingeni  ac  litterarum, 
verum  etiam  naturae  atque  virtutis,  ut  domus,  quae  huius  adulescen- 

6  tiae  prima  favit,  eadem  esset  familiarissima  senectuti.  Erat  tem- 
poribus  illis  iucundus  Q.  Metello  illi  Numidico  et  eius  Pio  filio ; 
audiebatur  a  M.  Aemilio;  vivebat  cum  Q.  Catulo  et  patre  et  filio; 
a  L.  Crasso  colebatur;  LucuUos  vero  et  Drusum  et  Octavios  et 
Catonem  et  totam  Hortensiorum  domum  devinctam  consuetudine 


CICERO,  ARCHIAS  1 87 

cum  teneret,  afficiebatur  summo  honore,  quod  eum  non  solum  cole- 
bant  qui  aliquid  percipere  atque  audire  studebant,  verum  etiam  si 
qui  forte  simulabant. 

4.  Interim  satis  longo  intervallo,  cum  esset  cum  M.  Lucullo  in 
Siciliam  profectus,  et  cum  ex  ea  provincia  cum  eodem  Lucullo  de- 
cederet,  venit  Heracleam.  Quae  cum  esset  civitas  aequissimo  iure 
ac  foedere,  adscribi  se  in  eam  civitatem  voluit;  idque,  cum  ipse  per 
se  dignus  putaretur,  tum  auctoritate  et  gratia  Luculli  ab  Heracli- 
ensibus  impetravit.     Data  est  civitas  Silvani  lege  et  Carbonis  :  Si  7 

QUI  FOEDERATIS  CIVITATIBUS  ADSCRIPTI  FUISSENT  ;  SI  TUM,  CUM  LEX 
FEREBATUR,    IN    ItaLIA    DOMICILIUM    HABUISSENT;   ET   SI    SEXAGINTA      ' 

DiEBUS  APUD  PRAETOREM  ESSENT  PROFESsi.  Cum  hic  domiciUum 
Romae  multos  iam  annos  haberet,  professus  est  apud  praetorem  Q. 
Metellum,  familiarissimum  suum.  Si  nihil  aliud  nisi  de  civitate  ac  8 
lege  dicimus,  nihil  dico  amplius  ;  causa  dicta  est.  Quid  enim  horuni 
infirmari,  Gratti,  potest?  Heracleaene  esse  eum  adscriptum  ne- 
gabis  ?  Adest  vir  summa  auctoritate  et  religione  et  fide,  M.  Lucul- 
lus ;  qui  se  non  opinari  sed  scire,  non  audivisse  sed  vidisse,  non 
interfuisse  sed  egisse  dicit.  Adsunt  Heraclienses  legati,  nobilis- 
simi  homines  ;  huius  iudici  causa  cum  mandatis  et  cum  publico 
testimonio  venerunt;  qui  hunc  adscriptum  Heracliensem  dicunt. 
Hic  tu  tabulas  desideras  Heracliensium  publicas,  quas  Italico  bello 
incenso  tabulario  interisse  scimus  omnes  ?  Est  ridiculum  ad  ea 
quae  habemus  nihil  dicere,  quaerere  quae  habere  non  possumus ;  et 
de  hominum  memoria  tacere,  litterarum  memoriam  flagitare;  et, 
cum  habeas  amplissimi  viri  religionem,  integerrimi  municipi  ius 
iurandum  fidemque,  ea  quae  depravari  nullo  modo  possunt  re- 
pudiare,  tabulas,  quas  idem  dicis  solere  corrumpi,  desiderare.  An  y 
clomicilium  Romae  non  habuit  is,  qui  tot  annis  ante  civitatem  datam 
sedem  omnium  rerum  ac  fortunarum  suarum  Romae  collocavit?  An 
non  est  professus  ?  Immo  vero  lis  tabulis  professus,  quae  solae  ex  ilia 
professione  collegioque  praetorum  optinent  publicarum  tabularum 
auctoritatem.  5.  Nam — cum  Appi  tabulae  neglegentius  adservatae 
dicerentur;  Gabini,  ([uamdiu  incolumis  fuit,  levitas,  post  damnatio- 
nem  calamitas  omnem  tabularum  fidem  resignasset — Metellus,  iiomo 
sanctissimus  modestissimusque  omnium,  tanta  diligentia  fiiit  ut  ad 


1 88  .  LATIN   TEXT 

L.  Lentulum  praetorem  et  ad  iudices  venerit,  et  unius  nominis  litura 
se  commotum  esse  dixerit.     His  igitur  in  tabulis  nuUam  lituram  in 

n  nomine  A.  Licini  videtis.  Quae  cum  ita  sint,  quid  est  quod  de  eius 
civitate  dubitetis,  praesertim  cum  aliis  quoque  in  civitatibus  fuerit 
adscriptus?  Etenim,  cum  mediocribus  multis  et  aut  nulla  aut  humili 
aliqua  arte  praeditis  gratuito  civitatem  in  Graecia  homines  inpertie- 
bant,  Reginos  credo  aut  Locrenses  aut  Neapolitanos  aut  'i'arentinos, 
quod  scaenicis  artificibus  largiri  solebant,  id  huic  summa  ingeni 
praedito  gloria  noluisse!  Quid?  [cum]  ceteri  non  modo  post  civi- 
tatem datam,  sed  etiam  post  legem  Papiam  aliquo  modo  in  eorum 
municipiorum  tabulas  inrepserunt;  hie,  qui  ne  utitur  quidem  illis  in 
quibus   est   scriptus,   quod  semper  se    Heracliensem    esse   voluit, 

».  reicietur?  Census  nostros  requiris.  Scilicet;  est  enim  obscurum 
proximis  censoribus  hunc  cum  clarissimo  imperatore,  L.  Lucullo, 
apud  exercitum  fuisse ;  superioribus  cum  eodem  quaestore  fuisse 
in  Asia;  primis,  lulio  et  Crasso,  ntillam  populi  partem  esse  censam. 
Sed — quoniam  census  non  ius  civitatis  confirmat,  ac  tantum  modo 
indicat  eum  qui  sit  census  ita  se  iam  tum  gessisse  pro  cive — iis 
temporibus,  quem  tu  criminaris  ne  ipsius  quidem  iudicio  in  civium 
Romanorum  iure  esse  versatum,  et  testamentum  saepe  fecit  nostris 
legibus,  et  adiit  hereditates  civium  Romanorum,  et  in  beneficiis  ad 
aerarium  delatus  est  a  L.  Lucullo  pro  consule.  6.  Quaere  argu- 
menta,  si  quae  potes;  numquam  enim  hie  neque  suo  neque  amico- 
rum  iudicio  revinceiur. 

12  Quaeres  a  nobis,  Gratti,  cur  tanto  opere  hoc  homine  delectemur. 
Quia  suppeditat  nobis  ubi  et  animus  ex  hoc  forensi  strepitu  reficia- 
tur  et  aures  convicio  defessae  conquiescant.  An  tu  existimas  aut 
suppetere  nobis  posse  quod  cotidie  dicamus  in  tanta  varietate  rerum, 
nisi  animos  nostros  doctrina  excolamus ;  aut  ferre  animos  tantam 
posse  contentionem,  nisi  eos  doctrina  eadem  relaxemus  ?  Ego  vero 
fateor  me  his  studiis  esse  deditum,  Ceteros  pudeat,  si  qui  ita  se 
litteris  abdiderunt  ut  nihil  possint  ex  iis  neque  ad  communem  ad- 
ferre  fructum  neque  in  aspectum  lucemque  proferre  ;  me  autem  quid 
pudeat,  qui  tot  annos  ita  vivo,  iudices,  ut  a  nuUius  umquam  me 
tempore  aut  commodo  aut  otium  meum  abstraxerit,  aut  voluptas 

13  avocarit,  aut  denique  somnus  retardarit  ?     Quare  quis  tandem  me 


CICERO,  ARCHIAS  189 

reprehendat,  aut  quis  mihi  iure  suscenseat,  si,  quantum  ceteris  ad 
suas  res  obeundas,  quanium  ad  festos  dies  ludorum  celebrandos, 
quantum  ad  alias  voluptates  et  ad  ipsam  requiem  animi  et  corporis 
conceditur  temporum,  quantum  alii  tribuunt  tempestivis  conviviis, 
quantum  denique  alveolo,  quantum  pilae,  tantum  mihi  egomet  ad 
haec  studia  recolenda  sumpsero  ?  Atque  hoc  eo  mihi  concedendum 
est  magis,  quod  ex  his  studiis  haec  quoque  crescit  oratio  et  facultas; 
quae  quantacumque  in  me  est,  numquam  amicorum  periculis  defuit. 
Quae  si  cui  levior  videtur,  ilia  quidem  certe,  quae  summa  sunt,  ex 
quo  fonte  hauriam  sentio.  Nam,  nisi  multorum  praeceptis  multis-  14 
que  litteris  mihi  ab  adulescentia  suasissem  nihil  esse  in  vita  magno. 
opere  expetendum  nisi  laudem  atque  honestatem,  in  ea  autem  per- 
sequenda  omnes  cruciatus  corporis,  omnia  pericula  mortis  atque  exili 
parvi  esse  ducenda,  numquam  me  pro  salute  vestra  in  tot  ac  tantas 
dimicationes  atque  in  hos  profligatorum  hominum  cotidianos  im- 
petus obiecissem.  Sed  pleni  omnes  sunt  libri,  plenae  sapientium 
voces,  plena  exemplorum  vetustas;  quae  iacerent  in  tenebris  omnia, 
nisi  litterarum  lumen  accederet.  Quam  multas  nobis  imagines — 
non  solum  ad  intuendum,  verum  etiam  ad  imitandum — fortissimorum 
virorum  expressas  scriptores  et  Graeci  et  Latini  reliquerunt !  quas 
ego  mihi  semper  in  administranda  re  publica  proponens,  animum  et 
nientem  meam  ipsa  cogitatione  hominum  excellentium  conformabam. 

7.  Quaeret  quispiam :  "  Quid  ?  illi  ipsi  summi  viri,  quorum  vir-  15 
tutes  litteris  proditae  sunt,  istane  doctrina,  quam  tu  effers  laudibus, 
eruditi  fuerunt  ?"  Difficile  est  hoc  de  omnibus  confirmare,  sed 
tamen  est  certum  quid  respondeam.  Ego  multos  homines  excellenti 
animo  ac  virtute  fuisse  sine  doctrina,  et  naturae  ipsius  habitu  prope 
divino  per  se  ipsos  et  moderatos  et  graves  extitisse  fateor;  etiam 
illud  adiungo,  saepius  ad  laudem  atque  virtutem  naturam  sine  doc- 
trina quam  sine  natura  valuisse  doctrinam.  Atque  idem  ego  hoc 
contendo,  cum  ad  naturam  eximiam  et  inlustrem  accesserit  ratio 
quaedam  conformatioque  doctrinae,  turn  illud  nescio  quid  prae- 
clarum  ac  singulare  solere  existere.  Ex  hoc  esse  hunc  numero,  16 
quern  patres  nostri  viderunt,  divinum  hominem  Africanum  ;  ex  hoc 
C.  Laelium,  L.  Furium,  moderatissimos  homines  et  continentissimos  ; 
ex   hoc   fortissimum    virum   et    illis    temporibus   doctissimum,   Af. 


I90  LATIN   TEXT 

Catonem  ilium  senem  :  qui  profecto  si  nihil  ad  percipiendam  colen- 
d?ixx\gue  virtutem  litteris  adiuvarentur,  numquam  se  ad  earum  studium 
contulissent.  Quod  si  non  hie  tantus  fructus  ostenderetur,  et  si  ex 
his  studiis  delectatio  sola  peteretur,  tamen,  ut  opinor,  hanc  animi 
remissionem  humanissiniam  ac  liberalissimam  iudicaretis.  NaiTi 
ceterae  neque  temporum  sunt  neque  aetatum  omnium  neque  lo- 
corum  ;  at  haec  studia  adulescentiam  alunt,  senectutem  oblectant, 
secundas  res  ornant,  adv^ersis  perfugium  ac  solacium  praebent,  de- 
lectant  domi,  non  impediunt  foris,  pernoctant  nobiscum,  peregri- 
nantur,  rusticantur. 

•7  Quod  si  ipsi  haec  neque  attingere  neque  sensu  nostro  gustare 
possemus,  tamen  ea  mirari  deberemus,  etiam  cum  in  aliis  videremus. 
8.  Quis  nostrum  tarn  animo  agresti  ac  duro  fuit,  ut  Rosci  morte 
nuper  non  commoveretur?  qui  cum  esset  senex  mortuus,  tamen 
propter  excellentem  artem  ac  venustatem  videbatur  omnino  mori 
non  debuisse.  Ergo  ille  corporis  motu  tantum  amorem  sibi  con- 
ciliarat  a  nobis  omnibus;  nos  animorum  incredibiles  motus  celeri- 

i8  tatemque  ingeniorum  neglegemus?  Quotiens  ego  hunc  Archiam 
vidi,  indices  (utar  enim  vestra  benignitate,  quoniam  me  in  hoc  novo 
genere  dicendi  tam  diligenter  attenditis),  quotiens  ego  hunc  vidi, 
cum  litteram  scripsisset  nullam,  magnum  numerum  optimorum  ver- 
suuni  de  iis  ipsis  rebus  quae  turn  agerentur  dicere  ex  tempore,  quo- 
tiens revocatum  eandem  rem  dicere,  commutatis  verbis  atque  sen- 
tentiisl  Quae  vero  accurate  cogitateque  scripsisset,  ea  sic  vidi 
probari  ut  ad  veterum  scriptorum  laudem  perveniret.  Hunc  ego 
non  diligam,  non  admirer,  non  omni  ratione  defendendum  putem? 
Atque  sic  a  summis  hominibus  eruditissimisque  accepimus,  cetera- 
rum  rerum  studia  ex  doctrina  et  praeceptis  et  arte  constare ;  poe- 
tam  natura  ipsa  valere,  et  mentis  viribus  excitari,  et  quasi  divine 
quodam  spiritu  inflari.  Quare  suo  iure  noster  ille  Ennius  "sanctos" 
appellat  poetas,  quod  quasi  deorum  aliquo  dono  atque  munere  com- 

9  mendati  nobis  esse  videantur.  Sit  igitur,  iudices,  sanctum  apud  vos, 
humanissimos  homines,  hoc  poetae  nomen,  quod  nulla  umquam  bar- 
baria  violavit.  Saxa  et  solitudines  voci  respondent,  bestiae  saepe 
immanes  cantu  flectuntur  atque  consistunt ;  nos  instituti  rebus  opti- 
mis  non  poetarum  voce  moveamur?     Homerum  Colophonii  civem 


CICERO,  ARCHIAS  I91 

esse  dicunt  suum,  Chii  suum  vindicant.  Salaminii  repetunt,  Smyrnaei 
vero  suum  esse  confirmant,  itaque  etiam  delubrum  eius  in  oppido 
dedicaverunt ;  permulti  alii  praeterea  pugnant  inter  se  atque  con- 
tendunt.  g.  Ergo  ilii  alienum,  quia  poeta  fuit,  post  mortem  etiam 
expetunt;  nos  hunc  vivum,  qui  et  voluntate  et  legibus  noster  est, 
repudiabimus  praesertim  cum  omne  olim  stadium  atque  omne  in- 
genium  contulerit  Archias  ad  populi  Romani  gloriam  laudemque 
celebrandam?  Nam  et  Cimbricas  res  adulescens  attigit,  et  ipsi  illi 
C.  Mario,  qui  durior  ad  haec  studia  videbatur,  iucundus  fuit.  Neque  s« 
enim  quisquam  est  tam  aversus  a  Musis  qui  non  mandari  versibus  ■ 
aeternum  suorum  laborum  facile  praeconium  patiatur.  Themisto- 
clem  ilium,  summum  Athenis  virum,  dixisse  aiunt,  cum  ex  eo  quae- 
reretur,  quod  acroama  aut  cuius  vocem  iibentissime  audiret:  "Eius 
a  quo  sua  virtus  optime  praedicaretur."  Itaque  ille  Marius  item 
eximie  L.  Plotium  dilexit,  cuius  ingenio  putabat  ea  quae  gesserat 
posse  celebrari.  Mithridaticum  vero  bellum,  magnum  atque  diffi-  21 
cile  et  in  multa  varietate  terra  marique  versatum,  totum  ab  hoc  ex- 
pressum  est;  qui  libri  non  modo  L.  Lucullum,  fortissimum  et  claris- 
simum  virum,  verum  etiam  populi  Romani  nomen  illustrant.  Popu- 
lus  enim  Romanus  aperuit  Lucullo  imperante  Pontum,  et  regiis 
quondam  opibus  et  ipsa  natura  et  regione  vallatum  ;  populi  Ro- 
mani exercitus  eodem  duce  non  maxima  manr.  innumerabilis  Arme- 
niorum  copias  fudit;  populi  Romani  laus  es*^  urbem  amicissimam 
Cyzicenorum  eiusdem  consilio  ex  omni  impetu  regio  atque  totius 
belli  ore  ac  faucibus  ereptam  esse  atque  servatam  ;  nostra  semper 
feretur  et  praedicabitur,  L.  Lucullo  diinicante,  cum  interfectis  duci- 
bus  depressa  hostium  classis  est,  incredibilis  apud  Tenedum  pugna 
ilia  navalis;  nostra  sunt  tropaea,  nostra  monumenta,  nostri  tri- 
umph!. Quae  quorum  ingeniis  ecferuntur,  ab  iis  populi  Romani 
fama  celebratur.  Carus  fuit  Africano  superior!  noster  Ennius^ita-  22 
que  etiam  in  sepulcro  Scipionum  putatur  is  esse  constitutus  ex  mar- 
more  ;  cuius  laudibus  certe  non  solum  ipse  qui  laudatur,  sed  etiam 
populi  Romani  nomen  ornatur.  In  caelum  huius  proavus  Cato 
tollitur;  magnus  honos  populi  Romani  rebus  adiungitur.  Omnes 
(lenique  illi  Maximi.  Marcelli,  Fulvii,  non  sine  communi  omnium 
nostrum  laude  decorantur.     10,  Ergo  ilium  qui  haec  fecerat,  Rudi- 


192  LATIN    TEXT 

num  hominem,  maiores  nostri  in  civitatem  receperunt ;  nos  hunc 
Heracliensem,  multis  tivitatibus  expetitum,  in  hac  autem  legibus 
constitutum,  de  nostra  civitate  eiciemus  ? 

23  Nam,  si  quis  minorem  gloriae  fructum  putat  ex  Graecis  versibus 
percipi  quam  ex  Latinis,  vehementer  errat;  propterea  quod  Graeca 
leguntur  in  omnibus  fere  gentibus,  Latina  suis  finibus,  exiguis  sane, 
continentur.  Quare,  si  res  eae  quas  gessimus  orbis  terrae  regi- 
onibus  definiuntur,  cupere  debemus,  quo  manuum  nostrarum  tela 
pervenerint,  eodem  gloriam  famamque  penetrare;  quod  cum  ipsis 
populis  de  quorum  rebus  scribitur  haec  ampla  sunt,  turn  iis  certe 
qui  de  vita  gloriae  causa  dimicant  hoc  maximum  et  periculorum  in- 

24  citamentum  est  et  laborum.  Quam  multos  scriptores  rerum  suarum 
magnus  ille  Alexander  secum  habuisse  dicitur!  Atque  is  tamen, 
cum  in  Sigeo  ad  Achillis  tumulum  adstitisset:  "  O  fortunate,"  inquit, 
"adulescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  Homerum  praeconem  inveneris  !"  Et 
vere.  Nam,  nisi  Ilias  ilia  extitisset,  idem  tumulus  qui  corpus  eius 
contexerat  nomen  etiam  obruisset.  Quid?  noster  hie  Magnus,  qui 
cum  virtute  fortunam  adaequavit,  nonne  Theophanem  Mytilenaeum, 
scriptorem  rerum  suarum,  in  contione  militum  civitate  donavit;  et 
nostri  illi  fortes  viri,  sed  rustici  ac  milites,  dulcedine  quadam 
gloriae  commoti,  quasi  participes  eiusdem  laudis,  magno  illud  cla- 

25  more  approbaverunt?  Itaque,  credo,  si  civis  Romanus  Archias 
legibus  non  esset,  ut  ab  aliquo  imperatore  civitate  donaretur  per- 
ficere  non  potuit.  Sulla  cum  Hispanos  et  Gallos  donaret,  credo, 
hunc  petentem  repudiasset;  quem  nos  in  contione  vidimus,  cum  ei 
libellum  malus  poeta  de  populo  subiecisset,  quod  epigramma  in 
eum  fecisset  tantum  modo  alternis  versibus  longiusculis,  statim  ex 
iis  rebus  quas  tum  vendebat  iubere  ei  praemium  tribui,  sed  ea  con- 
dicione,  ne  quid  postea  scriberet.  Qui  sedulitatem  mali  poetae 
dux^rit  aliquo  tamen  praemio  dignam,  huius  ingenium  et  virtutem 

26  in  scribendo  et  copiam  non  expetisset?  Quid?  a  Q.  Metello  Pio, 
familiarissimo  suo,  qui  civitate  multos  donavit,  neque  per  se  neque 
per  Lucullos  impetravisset?  qui  praesertim  usque  eo  de  suis  rebus 
scribi  cuperet  ut  etiam  Cordubae  natis  poetis,  pingue  quiddam  so- 
nantibus  atque  peregrinum,  tamen  aures  suas  dederet.  11.  Neque 
enim  est  hoc  dissimulandum, — quod  obscurari  non  potest,   -sed  prae 


CICERO,  ARCIIIAS  I93 

nobis  ferendum:  traliimur  omnes  studio  laudis,  et  optimus  quisque 
maxime  gloria  ducitur.  Ipsi  illi  philosophi,  etiam  in  iis  libellis 
quos  de  contemnenda  gloria  scribunt,  nomen  suum  inscribunt;  in 
eo  ipso,  in  quo  praedicationem  nobilitatemque  despiciunt,  praedicari 
de  se  ac  nominari  voliuit.  Decinius  quidem  Brutus,  sumnius  vir  et  27 
imperator,  Acci,  amicissimi  sui,  carminibus  templorum  ac  moni- 
mentorum  aditus  exornavit  suoruni.  lam  vero  ille,  qui  cum  Aetolis 
Ennio  comite  bellavit,  Fulvius,  non  dubitavit  Martis  manubias 
Musis  consecrare.  Quare,  in  qua  urbe  imperatores  prope  armati 
poetarum  nomen  et  Musarum  delubra  coluerunt,  in  ea  non  debent 
togati  iudices  a  Musarum  honore  et  a  poetarum  salute  abhorrere. 

Atque  ut  id  libentius  faciatis,  iam  me  vobis,  iudices,  indicabo,  et  28 
de  meo  quodam  amore  gloriae,  nimis  acri  fortasse  verum  tamen 
honesto,  vobis  confitebor.  Nam,  quas  res  nos  in  consulatu  nostro 
vobiscum  simul  pro  salute  huius  urbis  atque  imperi  et  pro  vi-ta 
civium  proque  universa  re  publica  gessimus,  attigit  hie  versibus 
atque  inchoavit.  Quibus  auditis,  quod  mihi  magna  res  et  iucunda 
visa  est,  hunc  ad  perficiendum  adhortatus  sum.  Nullam  enim  vir- 
tus aliam  mercedem  laborum  periculorumque  desiderat  praeter  banc 
laudis  et  gloriae;  qua  quidem  detracta,  iudices,  quid  est  quod  in 
hoc  tam  exiguo  vitae  curriculo  et  tarn  brevi  tantis  nos  in  laboribus 
exerceamus?  Certe,  si  nihil  animus  praesentiret  in  posteruni,  et  si,  29 
quibus  regionibus  vitae  spatium  circumscriptum  est,  eisdem  omnes 
cogitationes  terminaret  suas,  nee  tantis  se  laboribus  frangeret, 
neque  tot  curis  vigiliisque  angeretur,  nee  totiens  de  ipsa  vita  dimi- 
caiet.  Nunc  insidet  quaedam  in  optimo  quoque  virtus,  quae 
noctes  ac  dies  animum  gloriae  stimulis  concitat,  atque  admnnet 
non  cum  vitae  tempore  esse  dimittendam  commemorationem  no- 
minis  nostri,  sed  cum  omni  posteritate  adaequandam.  12.  An  vero  30 
tam  parvi  animi  videamur  esse  omnes,  qui  in  re  publica  atque  in 
his  vitae  periculis  laboribusque  versamur,  ut,  cum  usque  ad  extre- 
mum  spatium  nullum  tranquillum  atque  otiosum  spiritum  duxeri- 
mus,  nobiscum  simul  moritura  omnia  arbitremur?  An  statuas  et 
imagines,  non  animorum  simulacra  sed  corporum,  studiose  multi 
summi  homines  reliquerunt ;  consiliorum  relinquere  ac  virtutum 
nostrarum  effigiem  nonne  mullo  malle  dcbemus,  summis  ingeniis 
13 


194  LATIN    TEXT 

expressam  et  politam  ?  Ego  vero  omnia  quae  gerebam,  iam  turn  in 
gerendo,  spargere  nie  ac  disseminare  arbitrabar  in  orbis  terrae 
memoriam  sempiternam.  Haec  vero  sive  a  meo  sensu  post  mortem 
afutura  est  sive,  ut  sapientissimi  homines  putaverunt,  ad  aliquam 
animi  mei  partem  pertinebit,  nunc  quidem  certe  cogitatione  quadam 
speque  delector. 

Quare  conservate,  iudices,  hominem  pudore  eo,  queni  amicorum 
videtis  comprobari  cum  dignitate  tum  etiam  vetustate;  ingenio 
autem  tanto  quantum  id  convenit  existimari,  quod  summorum  homi- 
num  ingeniis  expetitum  esse  videatis,  causa  vero  eius  modi,  quae 
beneficio  legis,  auctoritate  municipi,  testimonio  Luculli,  tabulis 
Metelli  comprobetur.  Quae  cum  ita  sint,  petimus  a  vobia  iudices, 
si  qua  non  modo  humana,  verum  etiam  divina  in  tantis  ingeniis 
commendatio  debet  esse,  ut  eum  qui  vos,  qui  vestros  imperatores, 
qui  populi  Romani  res  gestas  semper  ornavit,  qui  etiam  his  re- 
centibus  nostris  vestrisque  domesticis  periculis  aeterhum  se  testi- 
monium laudis  daturum  esse  profitetur,  estque  ex  eo  numero  qui 
semper  apud  omnes  sancti  sunt  habiti  itaque  dicti,  sic  in  vestram 
accipiatis  fidem,  ut  humanitate  vestra  levatus  potius  quam  acerbitate 
vfolatus  esse  videatur. 

Quae  de  causa  pro  mea  consuetudine  breviter  simpliciterque  dixi, 
iudices,  ea  confido  probata  esse  omnibus;  quae  a  forensi  aliena 
iudicialique  consuetudine,  et  de  hominis  ingenio  et  communiter  dc 
ipso  studio  locutus  sum,  ea,  iudices,  a  vobis  spero  esse  in  bonam 
partem  accepta;  ab  eo  qui  iudicium  exercet,  certo  scio. 


INDEX  OF  WORDS  AND  CONSTRUCTIONS 


Note. — The  numerical  references  are  to  sections  and  subsections  of  the  Notes 
on  Idiom,  letters  referring  to  subsections.  Abbreviations  :  al)l.  —  ablative  ;  ace. 
=  accusative  ;  adj.  =  adjective  ;  adv.  ^adverb;  constr.  =  construction  ;  dat.  = 
tlative  ;  gen.  =  genitive  ;  ind.  disc.  =:  indirect  discourse  ;  intin.  =  infinitive  ;  prep. 
=:  preposition.     Other  abbreviations  are  easily  understood. 


a  distinguished  in  use  from  ab  and  abs, 
264. 

abhinc=fl^<',  constr.,  129. 

Ablative,  syntax  of.  101-127;  abl.  of 
accompaniment,  107;  of  cause,  123- 
124;  of  degree  of  difference,  116;  of 
indefinite  value,  120  ;  of  manner,  121- 
122;  of  material,  103;  of  means, 
108,  no  ;  of  origin  or  source,  102  ;  of 
place  from  ivliich,  137 ;  of  place  /// 
idhich  (where),  137  ;  of  price,  119;  of 
quality,  117-I1S;  of  quality  with  a 
proper  noun,  118;  of  separation,  loi ; 
of  specification,  106;  of  time,  128; 
to  express  distance  from,  136 ;  with 
adjectives  (fretus,  etc.),  iii;  with  a 
comparative,  104 ;  with  deponents, 
(utor,  fruor,  etc.),  115;  with  ex  or 
de  for  partitive  gen.,  71;  with  opus 
est,  114;  with  verbs  of  plenty,  etc., 
112; with  verbs  of  reminding,  etc., 
78;  ablative  absolute,  125-127;  abla- 
tive absolute,  relation  to  subject  of 
main  clause,  127;  ablative  absolute 
without  a  participle,  126;  ablative 
absolute  representing  perf.  active  par- 
ticiple, 244;  ablative  absolute  repre- 
senting English  coordination,  310. 

ac  (atque)  with  idem,  32. 

Accompaniment,  expressed  by  cum  and 
abl.,  107. 

Accusative,  syntax  of,  53-58;  ace.  or 
(Ut.  with  some  verbs  (ccnsulo,  etc.). 


90;  double  ace,  54-55;  of  duration 
of  time,  128;  with  abhinc,  129;  to 
express  distance  from,  136;  of  ex- 
clamation, 58 ;  of  extent  of  space, 
I35i  66  ;•  ace.  of  neuter  pronouns  and 
adjectives  with  verbs,  53  ;  ace.  of 
person  and  abl.  of  thing  with  done, 
etc.,  86;  of  place  to  which,  137  ;  with 
per  ^  agent  through  whom,  109 ;  with 
verjjs  of  aiding,  pleasing,  etc.,  88; 
with  verbs  oi  pitying,  repenting,  etc., 
80-81;  with  verbs  of  remembering, 
etc.,  ib-Tj. 

Accusing,  etc. ,  verbs  of,  with  gen. ,  82. 

ac  si,  217. 

Action,  nouns  of,  60-61. 

Adjectives,  in  general,  i-io;  as  sub- 
stantives, 3-4  ;  agreement  of  attribu- 
tive adjectives,  i  ;  agreement  of  predi- 
cate adj.,  2;  agreement  witli  natural 
gender,  2  N.  ;  comparative  of,  5-7 ; 
denoting  a  part  (medius,  totus,  etc.), 
10;  adjectives"  of  y)vV;/r//////',r.f,  with 
gen.,  93;  of  friendliness  with  dat., 
92;  adj.  use  of  jiarticiples,  245-248; 
with  abl..  Ill,  113;  with  gen.,  74; 
fjtylistic  notes,  305-306;  Latin  adj.= 
Fnglish  noun,  301;  =t  English  gen., 
63-64;  omitted  in  Latin,  306;  order, 
292. 

adiuvo,  88. 

Adverbs,  negative,  275-279;  order,  294; 
pronominal,  21. 


19^ 


INDEX   OF 


After,  witli  jilirases  of  time,  131. 

Agent,  expresse<l  by  dat. ,  95 ;  !>y  a,  ab, 
with  abl.,  y6. 

Agreement,  of  adjectives,  1-2;  of  ap- 
[lositives,  46-48;  of  predicate  nouns, 
51  ;  of  collective  noun  and  a  verl), 
149;  of  subject  and  predicate,  145- 
149;  of  verb,  145-149. 

aliquis,  36-38. 

alius,  45  ;  distinction  from  alter,  45. 

alter,  45. 

Although,  218. 

an  in  indirect  questions,  220  footnote  ; 
indirect  questions,  2S1  N. 

Anaphora,  287  (b). 

Answers,  283. 

antequam,  209-210. 

Apposition,  46-50;  to  a  locative,  etc., 
140;  to  a  possessive  i)ionoun,  48;  to 
two  or  more  nouns,  47 ;  with  gen.  of 
quality,  67  ;  clauses  of,  introduced  by 
ut,  ne,  ut  non,  192,  199;  appositive 
=  English  clause  of  time,  etc.,  49; 
=  English  gen.,  62;  order,  290. 

As  if,  217.        ■  , 

As  long  as,  206. 

As  soon  as,  203. 

Attraction,  subjunctive  by,  232. 

Auxiliary  verbs,  English,  omitted  in 
Latin,  308. 

Before,  with  phrases  of  time,  131 ;  with 
clauses,  209-210. 

-ble,  English  adjectives  in,  how  ren- 
dered, 305. 

Caesar,  reform  of  calendar,  133  foot- 
note. . 

Calendar,  133. 

causa  with  gen.  of  gerund,  etc  ,  253. 

Causal  clauses,  185-187;  with  cum, 
186 ;  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam, 
185;  expressed  by  attributive  parti- 
ciple, 246. 

Causal  relatives,  187. 

Cause,  abl.  of.  123-124. 

('haracter,  gen.  of,  65-68. 

Characteristic,  clauses  of,  182-1&4. 


Chiasmus,  chy  (r). 

circumdo,  constr.  with,  86. 

Clause,  English  subordinate,  expressed 
by  abl.  absolute,  125;  by  participles, 
246  ;  arrangement  of,  296-297. 

coepi,  constr.  of,  in  passive,  152. 

Collective  noun  with  singular  verb,  I49. 

Comparative  of '  adjectives,  5-7;  two 
comparatives  witli  one  noun,  6;  ways 
of  strengthening,  7;  governing  abl., 
104. 

Comparison,  conditional  clauses  of,  217. 

t^onative  imperfect,  158. 

Concession,  expressed  by  attributive 
participle,  246. 

C!oncessive  clauses,  218. 

Conditional  clauses  of  comparison,  217. 

Cimditions,  211 -216;  contrar:  to  fact, 
215-216;  contrary  to  fact  in  ind. 
disc,  230;  apodosis  in  indicative, 
216;  future  ("  less  vivid"),  214;  fu- 
ture ("more  vivid"),  213;  future  in 
ind.  disc,  229;  simple  (where  apo- 
dosis states  a  fact),  211  ;  simple  in 
ind.  disc,  229;  with  apodosis  in  im- 
perative, hortatory  subjunctive,  etc., 
212  ;  expressed  by  attributive  par- 
ticiple, 246. 

Conjunctions,  list  of  and  uses,  266-274; 
adversative,  270  ;  causal,  274  ;  copu- 
lative, 266-269  •  correlative,  272  ;  dis- 
junctive. 271 ;  disjunctive  correlative, 
272 ;  inferential,  273  ;  illative,  273 ; 
illative  and  copulative,  273 ;  replaced 
by  phrases,  273. 

Connection  indicated  by  order,  288. 

Copulative  verbs,  51. 

cum,  causal,  186-187;  concessive,  218; 
temporal,  203-205  ;  clauses  with.  = 
English  perf.  active  participle,  244; 
=  English  present  passive  participle, 
244  ;  witli  idem,  32. 

cum  primum  =  as  soon  as.  203. 

cupio,  constr.  w^th,  236  N. 

Dates,  132-133. 

Dative,  syntax  of,  85-IOO;  or  ace.  with 
consulo,  etc.,  90;  of  advantage,  98; 


WORDS   AND   CONSTRUCTIONS. 


197 


of  agent,  95  ;  of  indirect  object,  85- 
86;  of  interest,  97-98  ;  of  person  and 
ace.  of  thing  with  dono,  etc.,  86  ;  of 
possessor,  94  ;  of  purpose  or  end,  99  ; 
with  verbs  compounded  with  preposi- 
tions (ad,  ante,  etc.),  91  ;  with  in- 
transitives  {favor,  kelp,  etc.),  87; 
w  ith  adjectives,  92  ;  of  purpose,  repre- 
sented by  predicate  nominative,  100; 
retained  with  passive  of  intransitives, 

89- 
Days  of  the  month,  133;  division  into 

hours,  134. 
Declaratory  .sentences  in  ind.  disc,  221, 

224. 
Degree  of  difference,  abl.  of,  116. 
Deliberative  subjunctive,  177. 
Demonstrative    pronouns,    15-24;    of 

first  person,    15;    of  second   person, 

17;    of  third  person,    19;    order  of, 

293- 

Deponents,  with  abl.,  115  ;  passive 
missing,  how  represented,  307. 

Descriptive  genitive,  65-68. 

desino,  constr.  of,  in  passive,  152. 

Direct  reflexive,  25-26. 

Discourse,  indirect  (see  Indirect  Dis- 
course). 

Disjunctive  questions  (see  Double  Ques- 
tions). 

Distance  from,  how  expressed,  136. 

domus,  constr.,  138. 

dono,  constr.,  86. 

Double  dative,  99  and  N. 

Double  negative,  276-277. 

D<")ul>le  questions,  direct,  282  ;  indirect, 
220  N. 

Doubting,  verbs  of,  constr.,  201. 

dum  =  as  long  as,  206;  in  provi-so,  219  ; 
representing  present  passive  partici- 
ple, 244;  ^^ until,  207-208;  :=7vhile, 
204. 

dum  modo,  in  proviso,  219. 

dum  ne,  in  proviso,. 2 19. 

Duration  of  time,  ace.  of,  128. 

e,  distinguished  in  u.se  from  ex,  264. 
Epistolary  tenses,  167. 


erga,  with  ace.  =  objective  gen.,  61. 

esse,  position,  2gi  (b). 

et,  how  avoided  in  Latin,  310. 

etsi  =  although,  218. 

Euphony,  289. 

Exclamation,  in  the  ace,  58. 

Extent  of  space,  ace.  of,  135. 

Fearing,  verbs  of  constr.,  195. 
Feeling,  nouns  of,  60-61. 
For,  with  temporal  expressions,  131. 
Forgetting,  verbs  of  constr.  with,  75-76. 
Future  time,  in  the  subjunctive,  172. 

Genitive,  syntax  of,  59-84;  with  ad- 
jectives, 74  ;  with  nouns  of  action  or 
feeling,  60;  of  charge  or  penalty,  82; 
of  indefinite  value,  84  ;  objective.  60- 
61;  partitive,  70-73;  predicate,  69; 
of  quality,  65-68;  with  verbs,  75-84; 
with  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  82  ;  with 
impersonal  verbs,  80  ;  with  interest, 
83;  with  verbs  oi  pity,  etc.,  79-80; 
with  verbs  of  reminding,  78 ;  with 
potior,  115  N.  ;  of  personal  pro- 
nouns, 12-13. 

Gerund  and  gerundive,  syntax  of,  251- 
260;  gerund  and  gerundive  distin- 
guished, 251  ;  genitive,  253  ;  dative, 
255-256 ;  dative  after  words  oi  fitness, 
256;  accusative,  257-258;  gerund 
with  ace.  represented  by  gerundive, 
252;  ace.  of  gerundive  with  euro, 
loco,  etc.,  258;  ablative,  259;  ge- 
rundive denoting  necessity  or  obliga- 
tion, 260;  gerundive  =  English  adj. 
in  -ble,  305  ;  gerundive  of  intransi- 
tive verbs  used  impersonally,  260;  ge- 
rundive of  utor,  fruor,  etc.,  260  N. ; 
gerundive  with  mei,  tui,  sui,  etc., 
254 ;  nominative  of  gerund  repre- 
sented by  infin.,  253  footnote;  phrase 
with  gerund  —  English   adj.   in  -ble, 

305. 
gratia,  with  gen.  of  gerund,  etc.,  253. 

baud,  275  X. 

baud  scio  an,  220  footnote. 


198 


INDEX   OF 


lii:,  15-16;  —  the  follL>win>^,\b-;  =t/u- 
/utter,  15  ;  =:  the  preceding,  16. 

Hindering,  \tTbi  oi,  constr.,  194;  fol- 
lowed by  quin  when  negative,  etc  , 
200. 

Historical  present,  154. 

Historical  tenses,  168. 

Hortatory  subjunctive,  174  ;  in  ind. 
disc,  222. 

Hours,  Roman  reckoning  of,  134. 

idem,  31-32. 

ille,  19-20;  ille  .  .  .  h.{c  =  the  former 
.  .  .  the  latter,  i^;  ^^  the  luell- known, 
20  (cf.  68). 

Imperative,  233-234;  present,  234;  fu- 
ture, 234;  in  ind.  disc,  222. 

Impersonal  expressions  with  infin.  as 
sul)ject,  235. 

Impersonal  verbs  with  gen.,  80. 

in  with  ace.  =  objective  gen.,  61. 

Indefinite  pronouns,    36-45 ;    order  of, 

293- 

Indicative  mode,  173;  in  apodosis  of 
conditions  contrary  to  fact,  216;  in 
rhetorical  questions,  178 

Indirect  discourse,  221-232 ;  tense  of  in- 
fin. in,  224-227;  tenses  of  subjunc- 
tive in,  225-226;  after  verbs  of 
promising,  etc.,  227;  witli  passive 
verb  of  saying,  ilZ  ;  simple  and  fu- 
ture conditions  in,  229;  conditions 
contrary  to  fact  in,  230;  hortatory 
subjunctive  in,  222;  imperative  in, 
222;  questions  in,  223;  wishes  in, 
222;  imjjlied,  231. 

Indirect  questions,  220. 

Indirect  reflexive,  27. 

Infinitive,  syntax  of,  235-241 ;  as  object, 
236;  as  object  of  vole,  etc.,  193;  as 
subject,  235;  with  video,  etc. ,  distin- 
guished from  participle,  248 ;  future 
infin.  with  verbs  of  promising,  etc., 
227;  in  uid.  disc,  224;  sequence 
after.  226;  tenses  of,  240;  with  sub- 
ject ace  as  object  of  volo,  etc.,  238; 
with  subject  ace.  as  subject  of  par 
est,  etc,  237. 


inquam,  onkr,  291  N. 

Instrument  (see  .Means). 

"  Integral    part,"  subjunctive    of   (see 

Attraction). 
inter  nos,  se,  etc.,  28. 
Interest,  expressed  by  dat.,  97. 
interest,  constr.  with,  83. 
Interrogative  pronouns,  order  of,  293. 
Interrogative  sentences,  280-283. 
Intransitive  verljs,  with  dative,  87;  used 

impersonally  in  the  passive,  89,  150. 
ipse, 29-30. 
is,  22-24. 
Islands,   names  of  small,  in   constr.  of 

place,  138-140. 
iste,  17-18. 
iubeo,  with  ace,  88;    with   infinitive. 

193- 

■less,   English   adjectives    in,  rendered 

by  a  phrase,  305  N. 
licet  =  although,  218. 
longe,  with  superlative,  7. 

malim,  with  subjunctive,  239. 
Manner,  abl.  of,  i*2T-i22;  expressed  by 

attributive  participle,  246. 
Material,  abl.  of,  with  ex,  103. 
Means,  abl.  of,    108;  means  and  agent 

distinguished,   108;  expressed   by  at- 
tributive participle,  246. 
Measure,  gen.  of,  65-66;  gen.  of,  and 

ace.  of  extent,  66. 
Measure  of  difference  (see  Degree), 
medius,  and  other  adjectives  denoting 

a  part,  10. 
Middle  sense  of  the  passive  voice,  151. 
mille,  and  millia  with  the  gen.,  73. 
miseror,  constr.  with,  81. 
Modes,    in    independent   clauses,   173- 

179;  in  dependent  clauses,  180  ff. 
modo,  in  proviso,  219. 
Months,  133. 
Motion  to  ov  from  which  with  several 

nouns,  141. 
multo  with  comparative,  7. 

natus,  with  abl.  of  origin  or  source,  102. 


WORDS   AND   COMSTRUCTIONS 


199 


ne,'  uses,  279;  in  subject  clauses,  igr; 
in  object  clauses,  190;  with  verbs  of 
hindering,  194;  in  clauses  of  pro- 
viso, 219. 

-ne,  in  direct  questions,  280  (b),  28 1 ; 
in  indirect  questions,  220. 

-ne  .  .  .  an,  in  double  questions,  2S2, 
220  N. 

Xecessity,  expressed  by  the  gerundive, 
260, 

Negative  command  (see  Prohibition). 

Negatives,  275-279;  ne,  279;  neque, 
278 ;  two  negatives  =  affirmative,  276. 

Neighborhood,  idea  of,  how  expressed, 

139- 

neque,  278. 

iV(\  283  and  Note. 

nomen  est,  constr.  with,  50. 

non,  275 ;  position  of,  causes  difference 
in  meaning,  277;  represented  by  ne- 
que, 278. 

non  &\3hito^=:  not  to  hesitate,  202.  ' 

nDnne,  in  questions,  280(b),  281. 

Nouns,  46-144. 

num,  in  direct  questions,  280  (b),  281  ; 
in  indirect  questions,  220.  ^ 

Numerals,  order  of,  292  (c). 

O,  interjection,  with  vocative,  52. 

Object  clauses,  withutorne,  190;  with 
ut  or  ut  non,  197 ;  of  the  infin.,  236, 
193;  of  the  infin.  with  subject  ace, 
238. 

Objective  genitive,  60-61. 

Obligation,  expressed  by  gerundive,  260. 

omnis,  contrasted  with  quisque,  41. 

opto,  constr.  with,  236  N. 

opus  est,  with  dat.  of  person  and  abl. 
of  thing,  114. 

Onfer  of  words,  284-297;  ffexible  in 
Latin,  284;  two  types  of,  284  ;  gram- 
matical, 284-285;  rhetorical,  284, 
2S6 ;  influenced  by  emphasis,  287 ; 
influenced  by  desire  to  indicate  con- 
nection, 288;  influenced  by  desire  for 
euphony  or  rhythm,  289;  of  adjec- 
tives, 292;  of  adverbs,  294;  of  nu- 
merals, 292  (c) ;  of  prepositions,  295 ; 


of  pronouns,  14,  293  ;  of  substaiuives, 

290:  of  verbs,   291;  of  vocative,  52; 

of  clauses  in  a  period,  296-297. 
Ordinals,  in  dates,  132   footnote;  with 

quisque,  43. 
Origin  or  source,  abl.  of,  102. 

Part,  adjectives  denoting,  10 ;  nouns 
denoting  (see  Partitive). 

Participles,  syntax  of,  242-250;  defini- 
tion and  temporal  force  of,  242 ;  Eng- 
lish present  =  I^atin  perf .  of  some  de- 
ponent verbs,  243 ;  perfect,  of  some 
deponents,  243;  attributive,  245-250; 
attributive,  carries  main  idea,  247 ; 
attributive,  expresses  time,  cause, 
manner,  etc.,  246;  present  and  per- 
fect, as  substantives,  249 ;  future,  with 
substantives,  250;  perf.  passives  Eng- 
lish adj.  in  -ble,  305  ;  perf.  active, 
how  represented  in  Latin,  244; 
present  passive,  how  represented  in 
Latin,  244;  with  video,  etc.,  distin- 
guished from  inlin.,  24S. 

Partitive  genitive,  70-73;  substitutes 
for,  71. 

Passive,  of  intransitive  verbs,  89,  150; 
Latin  and  English  compared  in  use, 

309-  _ 

per,  with  ace.  to  express  agent  through 
-ivhom,  109. 

Perfect  definite,  sequence  with,  169. 

Perfect  infinitive,  sequence  with,  171, 
226. 

Period,  definition  of  and  prevalence  of 
in  Latin,  296;  analysis  of,  into  types, 
296  N. 

Periphrastic  conjugation,  165-166. 

Personal  pronouns,  11-14;  use  of  geni- 
tive of,  12-13;  order  of,  14. 

Pity,  verbs  of,  constr.,  79-80 

Place,  constr.  of,  135-144;  from  which, 
137;  to  which,  137;  in  which,  137; 
in  which  without  in,  144;  with  towns, 
etc.,  138;  several  nouns  of,  with  a 
verb  of  motion,  141 ;  with  verbs  of 
calling  together,  etc.,  1 42;  with  verbs 
oi placing,  etc.,  143. 


200 


INDEX    OF 


/'Lilly,  verbs  uf,  coijstr.  with,  112. 

I'olite  subjunctive,  179. 

Possessive  pronouns,  33-35;  for  gen. 
of  personal  pronouns,  13;  instead  of 
subjective  gen. ,  34;  order  of ,  293. 

Possessor,  dat.  of,  94. 

possum,  etc.,  order,  291  (a). 

postquam,  posteaquatn,  constr.  with, 
203;  clauses  with,  to  represent  perf. 
active  participle,  244. 

"Potential"  subjunctive,  179. 

Predicate  genitive,  6g. 

Predicate  nominative,  representing  dat. 
of  purpose,  ioo\  expressions  made 
up  of  est  with,  237. 

Predicate  nouns,  51. 

Prepositions,  263-265 ;  in  composition 
with  verbs,  gi ;  with  ace.  or  abl.,  or 
both,  263 ;  wlieri  repeated,  265 ; 
order,  295. 

Present,  historical,  154;  sequence  with, 
170. 

Present  passive  participle,  how  repre- 
sented, 244. 

Price,  abl.  of,  iig. 

Primary  tenses  (see  Principal  Tenses). 

Principal  tenses,  168. 

priusquam,  209-210. 

Prohibition,  175. 

Pronominal  adverbs,  21. 

Pronouns,  syntax,  etc.,  11—45;  demon- 
stratives, 15-24;  indefinites,  36-45; 
personal,  11-14;  possessives,  33-35; 
reflexives,  25-27;  representing  Eng- 
lish nouns,  303-304;  order,  293. 

Proper  nouns,  not  repeated  often  in 
Latin,  304. 

Provided  that  (proviso),  219. 

Proviso,  2ig. 

Purpose,  clauses  of,  188-189;  contain- 
ing a  comparative,  i8g;  expressed  by 
ad  and  a  gerundive,  257,  expressed 
by  supine,  261 ;  purpose  or  end,  dat. 
of,  99. 

Quality,  gen.  of,  65-68  ;  abl.  of,  117- 
118;  gen.  and  abl.  of,  compared,  65 

N. 


quam,  with  superlative,  8;  mi  compari- 
sons, 104;  omitted  with  expressions 
of  number  or  measure,  105. 

quam  diu  =  as  long  as,  206. 

quamquam,  218. 

quamvis,  218. 

quasi,  217. 

Questions,  280-283;  direct,  281;  direct, 
double  or  disjunctive,  282 ;  emphatic, 
281  N. ;  indirect,  220;  of  doubt,  in- 
dignation, etc.,  177;  rhetorical,  178; 
sentence,  280  (b) ;  word,  280  (a). 

qui,  preceded  by  is,  22-23;  with 
idem,  32;  in  result  clauses,  196;  in 
purpose  clauses,  188. 

quia,  185. 

quidam,  36,  40;  quidam  ex  instead  of 
partitive  gen.,  71. 

quilibet,  36. 

quin  with  verbs  of  hindering,  200;  with 

verbs  of  doubting,  20I. 
■quis  (indefinite),  36-38. 

quispiam,  36. 

quisquam,  36,  39. 

quisque,  36,  41-44;  distinguished  from 
uterque,  41  N.  ;  follows  suus,  42; 
with  a  superlative,  44. 

quivis,  36. 

quo,  in  purpose  clauses,  i8g. 

quoad  =  as  long  as,  206 ;  =  until,  207- 
208. 

quod  (causal),  185. 

quominus,  with  verbs  of  hindering,  194. 

quoniam,  185. 

Reciprocals,  28,  45. 

recordor,  constr.  with,  77. 

r&i&r\.=:it  concerns,  83  N. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  25-27;  direct,  25- 
26;  indirect,  27;  with  ipse,  29;  with 
quisque,  42. 

Reflexive  sense  of  passive  voice.  151. 

Relative  clauses,  in  general,  i8c;  sX.&t- 
\n^  definite  facts,  181  ;  characteristic, 
182-184;  of  cause,  187;  of  conces- 
sion, 218  ;  of  purpose,  188 ;  of  result, 
ig6 ;  =  English  adjectives  in  -bit 
305- 


WORDS   AND   CONSTRUCTIONS 


20I 


Relatives,  order  of,  293  (a). 
Remembering,    verbs    of,   constr.   with, 

75-76- 
Reminding,  verbs  of,  constr.  with,  78. 
res,  use  of,  299  N. 
Result,  clauses  of,  196. 
kiiythni,  289. 
rus,  constr.,  138. 

se,  26-27. 

Secondary  tenses  (see  Historical  Tenses). 

Sentences,  interrogative,  280-283. 

Separation,  abl.  of,  loi. 

Sequence  of  tenses,  168-171. 

siniul  =  ff.f  spon  as,  203. 

simul  atque  {a.c)  —  as  soon  as,  203. 

Specification,  abl.  of,  106. 

.Style,  remarks  on,  298-310. 

Subject  clauses  with  ut  or  ne,  191 ;  with 
ut  or  ut  non,  198 ;  of  the  infin.,  235. 

Subjunctive,  deliberative,  177;  horta- 
tory, 174;  of  polite  or  modest  asser- 
tion, 179  (a);  "potential,"  179;  in 
prohibitions,  175  N. ;  in  wishes  (opta- 
tive), 176;  after  volo,  velim,  etc., 
239;  of  characteristic,  182,  184;  in 
causal  clauses,  185—187;  in  purpose 
clauses,  188-189;  in  result  clauses, 
196;  in  object  clauses,  190,  197;  in  sub- 
ject clauses,  191,  198;  in  appositive 
clauses,  192,  199 ;  in  temporal  clauses, 
203-204,  208,  210;  in  conditions,  214 
-215;  in  conditional  clauses  of  com- 
parison, 217;  in  concessive  clauses, 
218;  in  clauses  of  proviso,  219;  tenses 
of,  in  ind.  disc,  225;  by  attraction, 
232;  future  time  in,  172. 

Sul)stantive  use  of  adjectives,  3-4;  of 
participles,  249 ;  stylistic  remarks  on 
substantives,  298-304. 

sui  with  gerundive,  254 

Superlative,  of  adjectives,  7  -  10; 
strengthened,  7-9;  with  quam,  8: 
denoting  a  part,  10;  with  quisque, 

44- 
Supine,  syntax  of,   261-262;    in  -um, 

261 ;  in  -u,  262. 
suus,  35. 


talis,  u.se  of  is  like,  23. 

taim%ts{=: although,  218. 

(:amquam,  217. 

tamquam  si,  217. 

Temporal  clauses,  203-210;  with  dtim, 
etc.,  206-208;  with  antequam  and 
priusquam,  209-210;  of  a  definite 
time  in  tlie  past,  205  ;  of  present  or 
future  time,  205 ;  contemporaneous 
with  main  clause,  204;  preceding 
time  of  main  clause,  203. 

Temporal  expressions  .seemingly  loca- 
tive, 130. 

Tenses,  153-172;  table  of  uses,  153; 
future  and  future  perf.,  153,  161 ;  fu- 
ture, how  expressed  in  subjunctive, 
172;  historical,  defined,  168;  imper- 
fect, 153,  157-160;  imperfect,  in 
descriptive  passages,  160;  imperfect, 
of  attempted  action  (conative),  158; 
imperfect,  of  customary  past  action, 
157;  imperfect,  with  iam,  etc.,  159; 
of  infin.,  240;  of  infin.  in  ind.  disc, 
224,226;  of  subjunctive  in  ind.  disc, 
225;  perfect,  153,  162-163;  perfect, 
historical,  153,  162;  perfect,  definite, 
153;  perfect,  indefinite,  153;  perfect 
of  verbs  of  inceptive  meaning,  163; 
periphrastic,  165-166;  present,  153- 
156;  present,  historical,  154;  pres- 
ent, not  used  for  future  in  Latin, 
155;  present,  with  iam,  etc.,  156; 
pluperfect,  153,  164;  principal,  de- 
fined, 168;  sequence  of,  168-171; 
compound  tenses  of  verbs  of  saying, 
etc.,  228;  tenses  in  letters,  167. 

That,  221  footnote. 

Time,  constructions  of,  128-134;  ho7ti 
long,  128;  ivhen  or  within  what  pe- 
riod, 128;  how  reckoned  by  Romans, 
T32-134;  clauses  of,  expressed  by  at 
tributive  ]~)articiple,  246. 

Towards,  with  words  of  time,  131. 

Towns,  in  constructions  of  place,  138- 
139- 

ubi,  in  clauses  of  purpose,  188;  of  re- 
sult, 196;  of  time,  203. 


202 


INDEX   OF   WORDS   AND   CONbTRUCTlONS 


ullus,  39- 

Unlil,  207-208. 

usus  est,  114  N. 

ut,  in  clauses  of  result,  196;  of  purpose, 
188  ;  rrrtJ,  -allien^  in  temporal  clauses, 
203 ;  with  idem,  32 ;  with  verbs  of 
fearing,  195;  witii  volo,  239;  in 
object  clauses,  190 ;  in  subject 
clauses,  191;  in  appositional  clauses, 
192. 

ut  primum=rt'j  soon  as,  203. 

ut  si,  217. 

utor,  etc.,  constr.  with,  115. 

utrum  .  .  .  an,  in  double  questions, 
282,  220  N. 

Value,  indefinite,  gen.  of,  84. 

vel,  with  superlative,  9;  as  a  conjunc- 
tion, 271. 

7elim,  constr.  with,  239. 

yelut,  217. 

7elut  si,  217. 

Verbs,  in  general,  145-262 ;  agreement 
with  subject,  145-149;  with  two  ace. 


list,  54-55;  •^th  gen.,  list,  75-83; 
with  dat.,  list,  87,  91 ;  with  abl.,  list, 
IOI-102,  112,  115,  143;  with  infin. 
as  object,  list,  193  ;  taking  infin.  as 
object,  list,  236;  taking  infin.  and 
subject  ace.  as  object,  list,  23S  ;  tak- 
ing infinitive  as  subject,  235;  imper- 
sonal, taking  infin.  and  subject  ace. 
as  subject,  list,  237 ;  taking  object 
clauses,  list,  190,  197;  order  of ,  285- 
286,  291 ;  of  promising,  hoping,  etc. , 
with  ind.  disc,  227  ;  of  saying,  think- 
ing, etc.,  personal  in  passive,  228. 

videor,  228  N. 

Vocative,  52. 

Voice,  150-152. 

volo,  constr.  with,  193,  238-239. 

IVnnt,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  112. 
Watches,  Roman  reckoning  by,  134. 
Wishes,  176;  in  ind.  disc,  222. 

Year,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  132. 
Yes,  283  and  Note. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  WORDS  AND  PHRASES 


References  are  to  sections  of  the  Notes  on  Idiom.  Words  enclosed  in  paren- 
theses are  merely  illustrative ;  any  other  words  in  the  same  construction  might  be 
substituted  for  them. 


About  to  (go),  165. 

Accuse  of  (treason),  82. 

Accustomed,  am  accustomed,  163;  was 

accustomed  to  (get),   157;  to  (duty), 

1 10. 
Acquit  of,  82. 
After  (five  years),  131;  (he  had),  203; 

(learning  tiiese  things),  125. 
Afterwards,  not  long  afterwards,  131. 
Age,  (twenty  years)  old,  128. 
Ago,  (ten  years)  ago,  129. 
All  men,  3;  (good  men,  the  best  men), 

44 ;  of  (these  men),  72  ;  things,  4. 
Alone  of  all,  71. 
Also,  31. 

Although  (I  see),  218;  125,  246. 
Am  going  (to-morrow),  155. 
And,  266-269;  he  left  his  horse  and 

hastened,  etc.,  310;  cf.  296. 
Any  one,  36-39, 
Appoint,  54. 
As  (a  youth),  48,  49 ;  as  (expensive)  as, 

84 ;  as  (great,  greatly)  as  possible,  8, 

154;  as  follows,  16;  as=since,  186, 

187;  as  if  (they  had),  217  ;  as  long  as, 

206;  as  soon  as  (he  could),  203. 
Ashamed  of,  80. 
Ask  about,  57  ;  (you)  for  (a  book),  55  ; 

(aid)  from,  56;  (them)   to    go,   190; 

what  (you  are  reading),  168  ;  why  (he 

came),  171  ;  whether  ^I  wish),  220. 
At  home,  (Rome),    138;    the  (Roman) 

games,  130;  the  same  time,  31. 
Attempt  t.)  (hold),  158. 
Aware,  74. 


Battle  of  (Marathon),  63,  130. 
Because  (they  believed),  185;  of  (anger), 

123,  124. 
Before  (they  reached),  209 ;  (they  should 

recover),  210;  (five  years)  before,  131 ; 

two  days  before,  133  ;  before  the  eyes 

of,  97. 
Begin  to  be  (hurled),  152. 
Being  (the  case),  186. 
Believe,  87;  am  believed,  89,  228. 
Born  of  (an  influential  family),  io2. 
Both  .  .   .   and,  272. 
Bring  under  (Roman)  rule,  69. 
By  (chance,  design),    122,  (led  on)  by 

(hope),i23;  (learning),  259;  (a  sword, 

a  soldier),  108;  far  (the  noblest),  7; 

land  and  sea,  144. 

Call,  54. 

Can,  if  I  can,  i6r ;  can  it  be  that,  etc.? 

281  N. 
Care  a  straw,  84 ;  care  for,  have  a  bridge 

built   (i.  e.,    care  for   its   building), 

258. 
Cease  to  be  (hurled),  152. 
Commissioner  for  (repairing),  255 
Conceal,  55. 
Concerns  (the  public  welfare,   nie),  83 

and  N.,  167. 
Condemn  to  death,  82. 
Consider  (it  praiseworthy),  99  N. 
Consult  (some  one),  90  ;  for  (someone), 

87,  90. 
Contented  with,  iii. 
Convict  of  (inconstancy),  82. 


204 


INDEX   OF 


Dates,  132,  133. 
Dear  me,  58. 
Depart  for  (Cilioia),  167. 
Desirous  of,  74. 
Disgusted  with,  80. 
Distant,  (yoojiaces)  distant,  136. 
Do  not  (think),  175,  179  b. 
Doubt,  not  doubt  tliat  (he  will),  201  ; 
what  (he  will),  172. 

Each  one,  41-44;  other,  28,  45. 

Eager  for,  74. 

Either  ...  or,  272. 

Elect  (him  consul),  54. 

Enjoy,  115,  260  N. 

Enough  (defence),  70. 

Equidistant  from,  136. 

Every  (five  years),  43;  (good  man),  44; 

body,  3  ;  thing,  4. 
Exist,  there  did  exist,  291  h. 

Fear  that,  that  not,  195. 

Feet,  twenty  feet  wide,  65,  66,  135. 

Fellow,  18  ;  your  fellows,  234. 

Few  of,  71. 

Following,  16. 

For,  eager  for,  74 ;  love  for  (you),  34, 
60,  61 ;  for  (a  definite  day),  131 ; 
(6000  sesterces),  119;  (no  large 
sum),  more,  less,  120;  these  reasons, 
124  ;  (transporting  an  army),  257  ;  for 
the  sake  of  (plundering),  252-254. 

Forget  (Epicurus),  75  ;  (the  affront),  76, 

Forgetful,  74. 

Former,  15. 

From,  descended  from,  102  ;  prevent 
from,  loi,  194,  200;  refrain  from, 
lOi,  287(a);  from  (Italy),  137; 
(Rome),  138,  cf.  140  ;  each  side,  217  ; 
the  founding  of  the  city,  247. 

Full  of,  74,  287  (b). 

Grateful,  feel  grateful  to,  87. 

Happen  that,  198. 

Hate,  163. 

Have,  I  have  (a  friendship),  94. 

Hesitate,  not  hesitate  to,  202. 


Hinder  from  (crossing),  loi,  194;  not 

hinder  from,  200. 
Hope  to  (be  present),  227. 
However,  31,  270. 

If  I  can,  may,  161;  (you  succeed),  211 

■  -213;  (you  should  succeed),  214; 
(you  were  succeeding  or  had  suc- 
ceeded), 215,  216;  if  only  (it  maybe), 
219. 

Ignorant,  74. 

Important  for  (preserving),  83. 

In,  abound  in,  in  need  of,  112;  expert 
in,  sharing  in,  74  ;  in  (reputation), 
106;  (order,  silence),  122;  (the  read- 
ing), 251,  259;  the  battle  of  (Mara- 
thon), 130;  the  (consulship)  of,  126; 
(Italy),  137,  141;  (Rome),  138,  140, 
141 ;  an  (unfavorable)  place,  the 
whole  (camp),  144. 

Inexperienced,  74. 

Interest  of,  83. 

Is  he  here?  isn't  he  here?  281. 

Know,  r=  be  acquainted  with,  163;  that 
(he  gives),  221,  224;  not  know  but, 
p.  47,  footnote  I ;  know  thou,  234 ; 
known,  =  famous,  20. 

Lament,  81. 

Latin,  teach  you  Latin,  55. 

Latter,  15. 

Less  (hesitation),  70. 

Let  (him  come),  174. 

Like,  74,  92,  93. 

Make  (the  camp  safe),  54,  footnote  , 
(the  departure  seem),  197. 

May  (ask),  179;  (he  come),  176;  (who- 
ever he)  may  (be),  181 ;  if  I  may,  161. 

Midst  of,  10. 

Might  (say),  173;  iiave  (done),  241. 

More  (brave)  than  (prudent),  6. 

Much  (danger),- 10,  70;  (nobler),  7,  II6. 

Must  (run),  166,  26<j. 

Name,  (his)  name  (was  Marcus),  50; 
=  a  verb,  54. 


ENGLISH    WORDS    AND   PHRASES 


205 


Near  (Rome),  139. 

Neither  .   .   .  nor,  272. 

No,  283. 

Not  only  .  .  .  hut  also,  272. 

Now  for  a  long  time,  156,  159. 

O'clock,  (he  came  at  nine)  o'clock,  128, 

134- 

Of,  be  full  of,  be  in  need  of,  112-114  ; 
be  of  the  same  state,  69 ;  become 
master  of,  115  ;  desirous  of,  full  of, 
74 ;  midst  of,  top  of,  10 ;  worthy 
of.  III;  all  of,  72  ;  only  one  of,  some 
of,  71 ;  that  of,  24  ;  battle  of  (Mara- 
thon), 63,  130;  (Cato)  of  (Rome), 
64  ;  city  of  (Rome),  62  ;  (man)  of  (dis- 
cretion, great  discretion),  65,  cf.  67 
and  68  ;  (inarch)  of  (three  days),  65  ; 
(trench)  of  (twenty  feet),  65,  cf.  66; 
(great  extent),  117  ;  one's  own  accord, 
30;  (silver),  103  ;  because  of,  123, 124. 

On,  put  on  board.  143 ;  on  land  and 
sea,  the  (right,  left),  144. 

One  another,  28,  45 ;  one  .  .  .  the 
other,  another,  45 ;  one  in  (ten),  43, 

Only  (case),  which,  184. 

Or  not,  220  N.,  282. 

Order  (him),  87,  88;  to  (throw),  193, 
23S  (with  infinitive);  190,  154,  170 
(with  subjunctive). 

Ought,  235,  i6g;  to  be  (loved),  166, 
260;  to  have  (done),  241. 

Pardon,  87,  97. 

Perform  (a  task),  115,  260  N. 

Permit,  190,  193,  238 ;   it  is  permitted 

to  (remain),  235,  193. 
Person,  in  person,  30. 
Persuade,    87;    am  persuaded,  89;    to 

(set  out),  190. 
Pity,  79,  80. 
Please,  87,  88. 
Possession,    gain    possession    of,    115, 

260  N. 
Possible,  as  (great,  greatly)  as  possible, 

8,  cf.  154. 
Preceding,  16. 
Present  (in  person),  30;  (times),  15. 


Present  (soldiers)  with,  (l)ooty)  to,  86. 
Prevent  from  (crossing),  194 ;  not  pre- 
vent from,  200. 
Promise  to  (come),  227. 
Provided  (it  could  be),  219. 
Punishment,  inflict  punishment  on,  201. 
I'lit  on  board,  143. 

Rain  (stones),  no. 

Rather  too  (talkative),  5. 

Reason  for,  no  reason  for,  182. 

Recollect,  75-77. 

Refuse,  etc.,  194;  not  refuse,  etc.,  200. 

Regard,  out  of  regard  for,  97. 

Relying  on,  in. 

Remember,  163,  234;  (the  living),  75; 

(that   fact),    76;     remembering,  =  an 

adjective,  74. 
Remind  of,  78. 
Repent  of,  80. 

Represent  (him  saying),  248. 
River  (Rhine),  62. 
Ruling,  74. 

Sacrifice  (victims),  no. 

Same,  at  the  same  time,  31 ;  same  as,  32. 

Say  that  (he  is  giving),  221,  224 ;  (he 

gives  what  they  ask),  171,  225 ;  (he 

gave  what  they  asked),  171,  226  ;  say 

that   if,  etc.,  229,  230;   is   said   (to 

have),  171,  228. 
Seems  (to  me),  228. 
Self,  25-27,  29;  I  enjoy  myself,  151. 
Sharing  in,  74. 
Should   (like),    179;     (not    venture    to 

say),  291;    (I  invite  you?),  178;  (be 

avoided),  260. 
Show  himself  (brave),  54. 
Shut  the  door,  170. 
Since  (it  is  night),  185-187. 
Skilled  in,  74. 
So    (foolish)    as    to,  196;   so   large   (a 

crowd),   149;  so  much  (danger),  70; 

so  mucli  the  (more),  116. 
Some  one,    36  -  38  ;    some    who,    1 82  ; 

something,  36-38,  70. 
Source,  be  a  source  of  (glory)   to,  99, 

100. 


206       INDEX   OF    ENGLISH    WORDS    AND    PHRASES 


Such,  23. 

Suitable  for,  92  and  N. ;  (disembarking), 
256;  suitable  to  (be  sent),  184. 

Tell  to  (send),  222. 

Than,  104,  105;  more  (brave)  than 
(prudent),  6. 

Thank,  87. 

That  (conspiracy)  of  yours,  17,  18;  of 
his,  18,  ig;  that  of  Crassus,  24 ;  that 
notorious  eagle,  20 ;  say  that  (he  is), 
221;  that  (he  could,  =  result).  196- 
199 ;  that  (he  might,  =  purpose),  188- 
192  ;  that  the  (more  easily),  189. 

The  (prudent  Volusenus),  68 ;  the  well- 
known  (Romulus),  20. 

Themselves,  of  preserving  themselves, 
254. 

There  are  (some)  who,  182 ;  there  is 
(running),  150. 

Think  that  (he  gives),  221,  224. 

Thousand,  73 

Through  the  agency  of,  109. 

Tired  of,  80, 

To,  belong  to  (the  same  state),  69 ;  grant 
to  (them),  85  ;  be  (an  honor)  to  (him), 
99,  100;  go  to  (Caesar),  137;  (Delos), 
138,  cf.  140;  (Italy),  137;  to  the  vi- 
cinity of  (Rome),  139. 

Together,  come  together  in  one  place, 
142. 

Too  (severe),  5. 


Towards  (Rome),    139;  (evening,   win- 
ter), 131. 
Try  to  (hold),  158. 

Until    (tliey    drove),    207 ;    (he  should 

come),  208. 
Use  (horses),  115,  260  N. 

Value,  of  (great,  small)  value,  84. 
Very,  9,  30. 

War,  (Punic)  war,  63,  130. 

Warn  of,  78 ;   warn  to,  190. 

What,  tell  what  he  has  done,  220;  what 

am  I  (to  do?),  177. 
When  (he  had),  203;  (he  was),  204;  (he 

has  had),  205. 
While  (he  was),  204,  242,  246. 
Whoever  he  may  be,  181. 
Wish,  I  should  like  (you  to  go),  179  a, 

239- 
Wish  to  (forget),  193,  236,  238,  239. 
With,  contented  with,  11 1  ;  filled  with, 

112,    113;   (fight)  with  (spirit).    121  , 

with  (all  the  cavalry),  107. 
Worthy  of,  11 1;  to  (obtain),  184. 
Would  be  fair,  173  ;  would  have  (said), 

179;    would    that    (he    were    here). 

176. 

Yes  or  no,  283. 
You  and  I,  14,  147. 


THE  END 


LATIN     GRAMMARS 

By  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Professor 
Emeritus  in  Brown  University 


Complete  Latin  Grammar,  $1.25 


Short  Latin  Grammar  .      .  $0.80 


THESE  text-books  represent  the  latest  advances  in  philo- 
logical science,  and  embody  the  results  of  the  author's 
large  experience  in  teaching,  and  of  his  own  linguistic 
studies,  together  with    the  suggestions  and  advice  of  eminent 
German  specialists  in  the  field  of  historical  and  comparative 
grammar. 

^  Throughout  each  volume  the  instruction  has  been  adapted 
to  present  methods  and  present  needs.  A  special  effort  has 
been  made  to  develop  the  practical  side  of  grammar,  to  make 
it  as  helpful  as  possible  to  the  teacher  in  explaining  the  force 
of  involved  constructions  in  Latin  authors,  and  to  the  learner 
in  understanding  and  appreciating  the  thought  in  a  compli- 
cated Latin  sentence. 

^  The  COMPLETE  LATIN  GRAMMAR  is  designed  to 
meet  the  needs  of  Latin  students  in  both  schools  and  colleges. 
Simplicity  and  clearness  of  presentation,  as  well  as  of  language, 
form  leading  characteristics  of  the  work.  Attention  is  directed 
particularly  to  the  arrangement  of  material,  and  to  the  treat- 
ment of  etymology,  syntax,  moods  and  tenses,  subjunctive, 
indirect  discourse,  and  hidden  quantity. 
^  The  SHORT  LATIN  GRAMMAR  is  intended  for 
those  who  prefer  to  begin  with  a  more  elementary  manual, 
or  for  those  who  do  not  contemplate  a  collegiate  course.  In 
its  preparation  the  convenience  and  interest  of  the  student  have 
been  carefully  consulted.  The  paradigms,  rules,  and  dis- 
cussions have  in  general  been  introduced  in  the  exact  form 
and  language  of  the  Complete  Latin  Grammar,  by  which  it 
may  at  any  time  be  supplemented.  The  numbering  of  the 
sections  in  the  two  books  is  also  alike. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 


ESSENTIALS  OF  LATIN  FOR 
BEGINNERS 

By  HENRY  C.  PEARSON,  Horace  Mann  School, 
Teachers  College,  New  York.  Author  of  Latin  Prose 
Composition,   Greek  Prose  Composition 

$0.90 


THIS  book  is  designed  to  prepare  pupils  in  a  thorough 
fashion  to  read  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  It  contains 
seventy  lessons,  including  ten  that  are  devoted  exclu- 
sively to  reading,  and  six  supplementary  lessons.  The  first 
seventy  lessons  contain  the  miniinum  of  what  a  pupil  should 
know  before  he  is  ready  to  read  Latin  with  any  degree  oi 
intelligence  and  satisfaction.  The  supplementary  lessons  deal 
largely  with  certain  principles  of  syntax  that  may  be  taken  up 
or  omitted,  according  to  the  desire  of  the  teacher. 
^  The  vocabularies  have  been  carefully  selected,  and  contain, 
with  very  few  exceptions,  only  those  words  that  occur  with 
the  greatest  frequency  in  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  About  five 
hundred  words  are  presented  in  the  first  seventy  lessons. 
There  is  a  constant  comparison  of  English  and  Latin  usage, 
but  not  much  knowledge  of  English  grammar  on  the  part  of 
the  pupil  is  taken  for  granted.  The  more  difficult  construc- 
tions are  first  considered  from  the  English  point  of  view. 
^  The  topics,  such  as  nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  verbs, 
are  not  treated  in  a  piecemeal  fashion,  but  four  or  five  con- 
secutive lessons  are  devoted  to  one  topic  before  passing  on  to 
another.  Sufficient  change,  however,  is  introduced  to  avoid 
monotony.  The  work  is  provided  with  ample  reviews ;  the 
regular  exercises  review  the  vocabulary  and  constructions  of 
the  preceding  lessons,  and  these  are  supplemented  by  review 
exercises.  The  last  twenty  pages  are  devoted  to  carefully 
graded  material  for  reading,  composed  of  selections  from  Viri 
Romae  and  the  first  twenty  chapters  of  Caesar's  Gallic  War, 
Book  II.,  in  simplified  form. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

(24S) 


EPlSODliS    FROM    CAESAR'S 
GALLIC    AND    CIVIL    WARS 

Edited  by  MAURICE  W.   MATHER,  Ph.D.,  formerly 
Instructor  in  Latin,  Harvard  University 


THIS  volume  presents  interesting  and  important  parts 
of  both  the  Gallic  and  Civil  Wars,  and  for  this 
reason  differs  from  all  other  editions  of  Caesar.  The 
selections  from  the  Gallic  War  are  equivalent  in  amount  to 
the  first  four  books,  and  include  the  account  of  the  Helvetian 
War  in  the  first  book,  the  conflict  with  the  Nervii  in  the 
second,  the  entire  third  and  fourth  books,  the  description 
of  Britain  and  the  Britons  in  the  fifth  book,  the  comparison 
of  the  Gauls  and  the  Germans  in  the  sixth,  the  failure  at 
Gergo/ia  and  the  grand  success  at  Alesia  in  the  seventh. 
From  the  Civil  War  about  two-thirds  as  much  is  taken, 
including  Curio's  disastrous  African  campaign  in  the 
second  book,  and  the  struggle  between  Caesar  and  Pompey, 
ending  with  the  latter's  overthrow  and  death,  in  the  third 
book. 

^[  The  notes  on  the  first  and  second  books  of  the  Gallic  War 
are  adapted  to  the  needs  of  classes  which  begin  their  study  of 
Caesar  with  either  book.  Long  vowels  are  marked,  and  sum- 
maries and  frequent  topical  headings  supply  the  thread  of  the 
narrative.  The  introduction  contains  the  lives  of  Caesar  and 
Pompey,  a  brief  description  of  Caesar's  army,  and  a  list 
of  books  useful  in  the  study  of  Caesar. 

^  An  innovation  which  will  meet  with  general  approval  is 
the  printing  in  full  in  the  vocabulary  of  the  principal  parts  of 
verbs  andof  the  genitive  of  nouns,  except  in  the  first  conjuga- 
tion of  verbs,  and  in  such  nouns  of  the  first,  second,  and 
fourth  declensions  as  offer  no  possibility  of  mistake.  Deriva- 
tions are  adequately  explained.  The  book  is  abundantly 
supplied  with  illustrations,  maps,  and  plans. 


(2?0 


VIRGIL'S    AENEID 

Edited  by  HENRY  S.  FRIEZE,  late  Professor  of  Latin,  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan.  Revised  by  WALTER  H.  DEN- 
NISON,  Professor  of  Latin,  University  of  Michigan 


First  Six  Books    ....  ^1.30  Complete Jfi-So 

Complete  Text  Edition  .     .  $0.50 


IN  its  present  form  this  w^ell-known  work  has  been  thor- 
oughly revised  and  modernized.  It  is  published  in  two 
volumes :  one  containing  the  first  six  books,  the  other  the 
entire  twelve  books — an  arrangement  especially  convenient  for 
students  who  read  more  than  the  minimum  College  Entrance 
Requirements  in  Latin.  Both  volumes  are  printed  on  very 
thin  opaque  paper,  thus  making  each  an  extraordinarily 
compact  and  usable  book. 

^  The  introduction  has  been  enlarged  by  the  addition  of 
sections  on  the  life  and  writings  of  Virgil,  the  plan  of  the 
Aeneid,  the  meter,  manuscripts,  editions,  and  helpful  books 
of  reference. 

^  The  text  has  been  corrected  to  conform  to  the  readings  that 
have  become  established,  and  the  spellings  are  in  accord  with 
the  evidence  of  inscriptions  of  the  first  century  A.D.  To  meet 
the  need  of  early  assistance  in  reading  the  verse  metrically, 
the  long  vowels  in  the  first  two  books  are  fully  indicated. 
^1  The  notes  have  been  thoroughly  revised,  and  largely  added 
to.  The  old  grammar  .  eferences  are  corrected,  and  new  oneo 
added.  The  literary  appreciation  of  the  poet  is  increased  by 
parallel  quotations  from  English  literature.  The  irregularities 
of  scansion  in  each  book  are  given  with  sufficient  explanations. 
^  The  vocabulary  has  been  made  as  simple  as  possible,  and 
includes  only  those  words  occurring  in  the  Aeneid.  The 
illustrations  and  maps,  for  the  most  part,  are  new  and  fresh, 
and  have  been  selected  with  great  care,  with  a  view  to  assist- 
ing directly  in  the  interpretation  of  the  text. 


AMERICAN    BOOK     COMPANY 

(256) 


A     NEW     CICERO 

Edited  by  ALBERT  HARKNESS,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  Pro- 
fessor Emeritus  in  Brown  University  ;  assisted  by  J.  C. 
KIRTLAND,  Jr.,  Professor  in  Phillips  Exeter  Academy; 
and  G.  H.  WILLIAMS,  Professor  in  Kalamazoo  Col- 
lege, late  Instructor  in  Phillips  Exeter  Academy 


Nine  Oration  Edition  .      .  $i.i( 


Six  Oration  Edition      .     .  $i.oo 


FOR  convenience  this  edition  of  Cicero  has  been  pub- 
lished in  two  forms.  The  larger  edition  includes  the 
four  orations  against  Catiline,  the  Manilian  Law,  Archias, 
Marcellus,  Ligarius,  and  the  Fourteenth  Philippic.  The 
smaller  edition  contains  the  first  six  of  these  orations,  which 
are  those  required  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board,  and  by  the  New  York  State  Education  Department. 
^  Before  the  text  ot  each  oration  is  a  special  introduction, 
which  is  intended  to  awaken  the  interest  of  the  student  by 
furnishing  him  with  information  in  regard  to  the  oration. 
^  The  general  introduction  presents  an  outline  of  the  life  of 
Cicero,  a  brief  history  of  Roman  oratory,  a  chronological  table 
of  contemporaneous  Roman  history,  a  short  account  of  the 
main  divisions  of  the  Roman  people,  the  powers  and  the 
duties  of  magistrates,  of  the  senate,  of  the  popular  assemblies, 
and  of  the  courts  of  justice. 

^  The  notes  give  the  student  the  key  to  all  really  difficult  pas- 
sages, and  at  the  same  time  furnish  him  with  such  collateral 
information  upon  Roman  manners  and  customs,  upon  Roman 
history  and  life,  as  will  enable  him  to  understand,  appreciate, 
and  enjoy  these  masterpieces  of  Roman  oratory.  The  gram- 
matical references  are  to  all  the  standard  Latin  grammars. 
^  The  vocabulary  gives  the  primary  meanings  of  words,  with 
such  other  meanings  as  the  student  will  need  in  translating 
the  orations.  Special  attention  is  devoted  to  the  important 
subject  of  etymology.     There  are  many  maps  and  illustrations. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 


A    TERM     OF     OVID 

$0.75 

Kdited    by    CLARENCE    W.    Gl>EASON,  A.M. 
(Harvard),  of  the  Volkniann  School,  Boston 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 

Greek  Primer ^jSi.oo 

Greek  Prose  Composition  for  Schools 80 

Story  of  Cyrus 75 

Xenophon's  Cyropaedia 1.25 


THE  ten  stories  from  the  Metamorphoses  included  in 
this  book  are:  Atalanta's  Last  Race  ;  Pyramus  and 
Thisbe  ;  Apollo's  Unrequited  Love  for  Daphne ; 
How  Phaeton  Drove  his  Father's  Chariot  ;  The  Death  of 
Orpheus  ;  The  Touch  of  Gold  ;  Philemon  and  Baucis  ; 
The  Impiety  and  Punishment  of  Niobe  ;  The  Flood  ; 
Perseus  and  Andromeda. 

^]  There  is  a  distinct  advantage  in  using  these  selections 
from  Ovid  as  a  stepping-stone  from  Caesar  to  Virgil. 
Written  in  an  entertaining  manner,  they  not  only  make  the 
student  acquainted  with  the  legends  of  the  gods  and  heroes, 
but  also  lessen  the  greatest  gap  in  a  continuous  Latin  course  by 
familiarizing  him  with  the  vocabulary  of  Virgil  in  easier  verse. 
In  the  present  volume  are  all  but  300  of  the  words  found  in 
the  first  book  of  the  Aeneid. 

^  The  work  contains  about  1,420  lines  of  text,  with  full 
notes  on  the  text  and  on  scansion,  and  a  vocabulary.  The 
first  hundred  lines  are  divided  into  feet  for  scansion,  with  the 
accents  and  caesuras  marked.  The  first  three  stories  are 
accompanied  by  a  parallel  version  in  the  order  of  ordinary 
Latin  prose,  with  the  quantities  indicated.  There  are  also 
synonyms  of  words  not  usual  in  prose,  and  of  common 
words  in  extraordinary  uses. 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 


LATIN     D  I  C  T I  O  N  A  R  1 1 :  S 


HARPER'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

Founded    on    the    translation    of   Freund's    Latin-German 
Lexicon.      Edited  by    E.    A.    Andrews,  LL.  D.      Revised, 
Enlarged,   and  in   great   part   Rewritten   by   Charlton  T. 
Lewis,    Ph.D.,  and  Charles  Short,  LL.I). 
Royal  Octavo,  2030  pages.      Sheep,   $b.^o  ;    Full  Russia,  $10.00 

^  The  translation  of  Dr,  Freund's  great  Latin-German 
Lexicon,  edited  by  the  late  Dr.  E.  A.  Andrews,  and  pub- 
lished in  1850,  has  been  from  that  time  in  extensive  and 
satisfactory  use  throughout  England  and  America.  Mean- 
while great  advances  have  been  made  in  the  science  on  which 
lexicography  depends.  The  present  work  embodies  the  latest 
advances  in  philological  study  and  research,  and  is  in  every 
respect  the  most  complete  and  satisfactory  Latin  Dictionary 
published. 

LEWIS'S  LATIN  DICTIONARY  FOR  SCHOOLS 

By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 

Large  Octavo,  1200  pages.     Cloth,  $4.50;  Half  Leather,    $5.00 

^  This  dictionary  is  not  an  abridgment,  but  an  entirely  new 
and  independent  work,  designed  to  include  all  of  the  student's 
needs,  after  acquiring  the  elements  of  grammar,  for  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  Latin  authors  commonly  read  in  school. 

LEWIS'S  ELEMENTARY  LATIN  DICTIONARY 

By  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  Ph.D. 

Crown  Octavo,  952  pages.      Half  Leather $2.00 

^  This  work  is  sufficiently  full  to  meet  the  needs  of  students 
in  secondary  or  preparatory  schools,  and  also  in  the  first  and 
3econd  years'  work  in  colleges. 

SMITH'S  ENGLISH-LATIN  DICTIONARY 

A  Complete  and  Critical    English-Latin    Dictionary.      By 
William    Smith,    LL.D.,    and    'Fheophilus    D.   Hall, 
M.A.,    Fellow  of   University  College,   London.      With  a 
Dictionary  of  Proper  Names. 
Royal  Octavo,  765  pages.      Sheep $4.00 


AMERICAN     BOOK    COMPANY 

C278/ 


DESCRIPTIVE 

CATALOGUE    OF     HIGH 

SCHOOL   AND    COLLEGE 

TEXTBOOKS 

Published  Complete  and  in  Sections 


WE  issue  a  Catalogue  of  High  School  and  College  Text- 
books, which  we  have  tried  to  make  as  valuable  and 
as  useful  to  teachers  as  possible.  In  this  catalogue 
are  set  forth  briefly  and  clearly  the  scope  and  leading  charac- 
teristics of  each  of  our  best  textbooks.  In  n\ost  cases  there 
are  also  given  testimonials  from  well-known  teachers,  which 
have  been  selected  quite  as  much  for  their  descriptive  qualities 
as  for  their  value  as  commendations. 

^[  For  the  convenience  of  teachers  this  Catalogue  is  also 
published  in  separate  sections  treating  of  the  various 
branches  of  study.  These  pamphlets  are  entitled :  Eng- 
lish, Mathematics,  History  and  Political  Science,  Science, 
Modern  Foreign  Languages,  Ancient  Languages,  Com- 
mercial Subjects,  and  Philosophy  and  Education.  A 
single  pamphlet  is  devoted  to  the  Newest  Books  in  all 
subjects. 

^  Teachers  seeking  the  newest  and  best  books  foi  their 
classes  are  invited  to  send  for  our  Complete  High  School  and 
College  Catalogue,  or  for  such  sections  as  may  be  of  greatest 
interest. 

^[  Copies  of  our  price  lists,  or  of  special  circulars,  in  which 
these  books  are  described  at  greater  length  than  the  space 
limitations  of  the  catalogue  permit,  will  be  mailed  to  any 
address  on  request. 

^  All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  newest 
of  the  following  offices  of  the  company:  New  York,  Cincin- 
nati, Chicago,  Boston,  Atlanta,  San  Francisco. 


AMERICAN     BOOK     COMPANY 

1 


^9  o  :^/f 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A    000  729  654 


Ui 


